FOREIGN

SERVICE

INSTITUTE

P A N 1 S D

BASle eOURSE

UNITS 1-15

PAR

SPANISD

BASte eOURSE

UNITS 1-15

ROBERT P. STOCKWELL -- ~. OONALD BOWEN

ISMAEL SILVA-FUENZALIDA

FOREIGN SERVICE INSTITUTE

WASHINGTON,

o.c.

1961
o E PAR T M E N T

T A T

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C. - Price per set of 2 Volumes, $7.50

PREFACE

SPOKEN SPANISH

Forei n Service Instttute - S anish Basic Course was first printed in 1957. The Foreign Service
Institute Schoo of anpua~es wo d have preferred to revise the text for this second printinr, but the
requirements of day to day training have forced a postponement of the task. The revisions contemplated
~~~d have affected primarily the pedapogical design rather than the analysis of Spanish structure.
In
any case the book remains thoroughly useful and useable.
This book was prepared specifically to train officers of the Forei?n Service and of other United
States Government agencies who are involved in foreign affairs and who need to learn to speak Spanish.
The course is designed to be taught by a native speaker of Spanish who has received training
specifically in the use of such materials and who teaches under the supervision of a scientific linguist.
Spanish classes at the Foreign Service Institute normally contain six students who receive six hours of
class drill daily and are expected to do at least two hours a day of preparation, mostly practice with
tapes. With this schedule average ~tudents at the Institute require approximately two to two and a half
days to assimilate one Unit thoroughly. The Institute believes that the text can be useful in other
teaching contexts, with the important provisos that the instruction be carefully supervised by an experienced professional person, preferably with training in linpuistics, and that full use be required of
the tapes.

The tape recordings which accompany this text are not available
from either the Government Printinr Gffice or the Foreirn Service
Institute.

Inquiries reEarding tapes should be addressed to:

Canter for Applied Linguistics
1346 Connecticut Avenue, N. \..
Washington 6, D. C.

0.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

PRrFACE

The text and accompanying tape recordings are also used in part-time training pr0Rrams in Washington
and overseas. Although they are not designed for this purpose, they are also used occasionally for individual self-study.
This manual has been prepared and reviewed by members of fifteen different Spanish-speaking countries
representinp- every major dialect area of the Hispanic world. W'lile it is broadly representative of general
Latin-American Spanish, it is readily adaptable to any particular area.
Foreign Service Institute - Spanish Basic Course was originally prepared by the Spanish starf of the
Foreign- Service Institute und~r the supervision of the linguists whose names appear on the title page. In
addition the followinp members of the Spanish sta!f have made special contributions to the book:
Linguistic sta!f:
Jack L. Ulsh
Richard Beym
Dorothy Rauscher
Instructional star!:
Guillermo Segreda
Hugo Montero U.

0.2

SPOKEN SPANISH

INTRODUCTION

The materials in this book have been developed to present Spanish as a spoken Ianguage, and the skills of
understanding and speaking are accordingly emphasized. The method of presentation will likely be new to students acquainted with more traditional methods of language teaching. In order to understand the materials, one
must first understand the method upon which they are buiIt.

Method of Teaching
The method is known as GUIIED IMITATION. It may appear to be new, but actually it has been used by a considerable number of teachers for many years, though its greatest popularity has come since the second World War.
Its goal 1s to teach one to speak easily, fluently, with very little accent, and to do this without c'Onscious
effort, just as one speaks his own language without conscious effort.
There are two very important aspects of this method. First, learning a relatively small body of material
so well that it requires very Iittle effort to produce it. This is OVERLEARNING. If a student overleans every
dialog and drill as he goes through this book, he will almost certainly experience rapid progress in learning
the language.
The second aspect is learning to authentically manipulate the sounds, sequences, and patterns of the language. The important implication here is the reaIity of both the model and the imitation. The model (teacher,
recording, etc.) must provide Spanish as people reaIIy speak it in actual conversations, and the student must be
helped to an accurate imitation. Above all, the normal tempo of pronunciation must be the classroom standard;
slowing down is, in this context, distortion.
The complete course consists of sixty units, each requiring sorne ten
side study to master. The course 1s a six-hundred-hours course which may
of about six months, or may be spread at the rate of a unit a week over a
semesters). Either a native speaker or a teacher with very little accent
model for imitation.

cIass and Iaboratory hours plus outbe studied intensively over a period
period of sixty weeks (four college
in his Spanish is necessary as the

Pronunciation
The first two units are focused pr1marily on pronunciation problems. Drills on other aspects of the language are deliberately postponed because of the importance of developing good pronunciation habits from the very
beginning of the course. Pronunciation is extremely importante It is the basis of all real fluency. A person
is readily able to understand anyth1ng he can meaningfully say himself, if the correlation between the way he
heara it and the way he says it is reasonably similar. Probably the more similar, the greater the ease of comprehension.
0.3

INTRODUCTION

SPOKEN SPANISH

The basis of the student's imitation is of course the teacher, whose pronunciation, if he is a native
speaker of an acceptable dialect of his own country, is the ultimate source of authority. The fundamental
classroom procedure for learning new material throughout this book (except the reading materials) is repetition
by the student in direct immediate imitation after the teacher. The imitative repetition may at first be done
in chorus after the teacher, and subsequently by each individual, or it may be individualized from the start.
In either case the student should wait for the teacher's modelo Imitating after another student too frequently
results in compounding the errors of both. If a person is fortunate enough to begin studying a second language
before the age of eight or ten, the powers of imitation are normally sufficient to insure excellent results in
pronunciation without resorting to technical explanations of what happens to various parts of the vocal apparatus. If occasionally an individual has managed to retain this gift that all of us had in childhood, so much
the better, but most adults need more specific guidance based on an awareness of the particular problems of
producing particular sounds. The drills and explanations in the first two units are devoted to the specific
problems an English speaker with his English habits of pronunciation will have in accurately imitating the
sounds and sequences of sounds of Spanish.

Aids to Listening
If speakers of English were not so highly literate, it might be possible to teach effectively without reference to any written symbolization, but most students are much more comfortable if some kind of representation
of what they are imitating is also available for visual reference. There is, of course, a traditional writing
system for Spanish which is used in all parts of the Spanish speaking world. It is a very adequate system for
its purpose, which might be stated as providing visual cues for persons who already speak the language. For
pedagogical purposes, a respelling, or phonetic representation of Spanish is also provided as a means of reminding the student of important features of the pronunciation which the traditional spelling system does not
provide, such as significant sound distinctions, word groupings, intonation patterns, etc. The phonetic symbolization may at first look unfamiliar and somewhat foreboding, but this very unfamiliarity is a healthy reminder that none of the English sounds (which are so easily associated with the familiar letters of the alphabet) are exact duplications of the Spanish sounds to be mastered. This is also, of course, true in the respelling when familiar symbols are used: the appearance of the letter t does not mean the familiar English tsound is indicated.
The intonations are marked in the respelling by a system of dots and accents placed at relative heights
over the vowels. The patterns recorded in this way are not necessarily the only possibilities in spoken Spanish,
but they are all normal patterns which have been thoroughly and widely tested.

0.4

INTRODUCTION

SPOKEN SPANISH

The symbolization in the respel11ng will allow for a consistent interpretation of the pronunciation of
any dialect area of the Spanish speaking world. For example, the Iftl symbol is to be interpreted as a sound
similar to the 's' of 'sink' in Spanish America, but as the 'th' of 'think' in Central Spain. other regional
pronunciat10n features are similarly marked.
The acquisition of a good pronunciation 1s first of all the result of careful listening and imitation plus
whatever help can be obtained from initial pronunciation drills and description, and from the cues provided for
continuing reference by the aids to listening. It is well to remember that a sizeable investment in pronunciation
practice early in the course will pay handsome dividends later; correct pronunciation safely relegated to habit
leaves one's full attention available for other problems of learning the language.
Every unit (after the first two) is organized in the same way: part one is the basic dialog with a few
pertinent notes; part two is grammar drills and discussion; part three is a set of recombination narratives and
dialogues; part four, beginning in Unit 16, is readings.

Basic Dialogs
Tne basic dialogs are the core of each unit. These dialogs are recreations of the real situations a student is most likely to encounter, and the vocabulary and sentences are those he is most likely to need. The
dialogs are set in a mythical country called Surlandia, which is descr1bed as a typical Latin American republic,
insofar as it is possible to extract common features from so diverse an area. To further provide information
in context, many of the notes suggest regional differences in both the language and the culture that will be
encountered in various areas of Latin America and in Spain.
In the first part of the book new vocabularly is introduced mainly in the basic dialogs. Occasionally, in
the illustrations of grammar points, new words are introduced in order to fill out patterns needed to do the
exercises. New words are always clearly indicated by placing them on a line themselves, indented between the
lines that are complete sentences. Since each new word is introduced in this fashion only once, the student
should take pains to be sure he learns each word as it is presented. Careful pains have been taken to see that
each word introduced will reappear many times later in the course, to help the student assimilate each word in
a variety of contexts.
The student should very carefully learn both the literal meanings of each individual word or phrase that is
given on an indented line and the meaning that appears in the full sentences. It should not be cause for concern if the meaning in context is strikingly different from the literal meaning. In the construction of each
dialog, the Spanish was written first, and the corresponding English is its closest equivalent and not a literal
translation. It is therefore not at all surprising if the Spanish does not seem to 'follow' the English.
0.5

SPOKEN SPANISH

INTRODUCTION

The student should learn the basic dialogs by heart. If they are committed perfectly to rote memory, the
drills will go easily and rapidly. Roughly half of the estimated ten hours that are spent in class on each
unit should normally be devoted to the basic dialogs.

Drills and Grammar

Each unit can in some ways be likened to a musical theme with variations. The basic dialogs are the theme,
and the drills provide the variations. Patterns of the structure of the language which have been learned in the
basic sentences are expanded and manipulated in the drills.
There are four kinds of drills in each unit (three befare Ubit 6). Of these, two are designed to systematically vary selected basic sentences within the structure and vocabulary the student has already learned. And
two are oriented toward the structure of the language to provide a systematic coverage of all important patterns.
All of these drills are planned to be easily and rapidly answered. They can be done orally and w1 th only
the teacher's book open. The method of conducting the drill is clearly shown by the format of the text, and all
answers are available for the teacher's convenience and for the student to refer to when studying outside of
class. If a drill is found to be hard, the difficulty probably reflects inadequacy in the mastery of the dialoga and earlier drills. The drills are not problems to be worked out like mathematics, and the ability to do
them, not to figure them, is indicated by the nature of the course. There are no tricks in them, and they are
not intended as tests.
Pattern drills are presented in a format which provides both practice and explanation. First appears a
presentation of the pattern to be drilled, then various kinds of drills, and finally a more detailed discussion
of the pattern.
The presentation consists of a listing of basic sentences (and a few new sentences when necessary) which
illustrate the grammar point to be drilled. Then there is an extrapolation which shows the relationships involved in the pattern in a two-dimensional chart, which is further explained by a short note or two. This presentation should provide sufficient clues to enable the student to understand and use the pattern correctly in
the drills that follow.
These drills are mainly exercises making substitutions, responses, and translations, highlighting the
grammar points covered. They are devised for oral answers to oral stimuli.
After the drills there is a more detailed discussion of the pattern drilled. These descriptions are
written in a condensed and somewhat technical fashion. While an effort was made to keep these discussions
0.6

INTRODUCTION

SPOKEN SPANISH

clear and readable, it has to be recognized that a description of a language is a technical subject, and simplification can only be attained by sacrificing accuracy or at a cost of a great many more words than space
allows. The student who works through these discussions by a careful reading will find that he is acquiring a
set of analytical tools that will be useful throughout the remainder of his career of interest in language.
The student may notice slight differences in the respelling used in the aids to listening and in the grammar charts and discussions. The respelling useful as a guide to pronunciation for an English speaking student,
records more details than a respelling to be used in grammar discussions where comparisons are made bet~een
Spanish forros, not between English and Spanish pronunciation.

Conversation
The conversation section of each unit is designed to help bridge the gap between the more or less mechanical
stimulus-response activity of the drills and the skill of free conversation which is the ultimate aim of the
course. These recombination monologues and dialogs extend the abilities of the student into ever more natural
situations. The narrative is sn anecdote type description of an event or situation which isthen'recast as a
directed dialog in which the teacher acts as a prompter for students who take the parts as the actcrs. The prompter gradually withdraws his help so that in the end the conversation is carried on freely.

Readings
Beginning with unit 16 reading materials are introduced for outside pr~paration with perhaps some classroom
discussion of the questions provided. These readings can also be used to provide content information for oral
surmnaries.
Up through unit 30 the readings tell s continued story about an American family living in Surlandia, expanding on matters of interest hinted at in the basic dialogs. These require no new vocabularly except for easy
and obvious cognate loan words that can readily be guessed. From unit 31 through 60 the readings are much longer
and do introduce a considerable number of new words. This vocabulary is introduced through basic sentences which
summarize the content of the following reading.

The readings are designed to provide information of interest and value about the culture which the Spanish
language reflects and to provide insight into the practical problems an American is likely to encounter in adjusting to life in a Hispanic area.

0.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

CONTENTS

Table of Contents
1.1
1.2
1.21
1.22
1.23

Basie Sentenees - Useful phrases ................................................

Dr"i11s in pronuneiation .............................................................
Vowe1 eontrast in weak-stressed syl1ab1es ........................................
The stress system in Spanish .....................................................
The intonation system in Spanish .................................................

2.1
2.2
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.3
2.31
2.31.1

Basie sentenees - Usefu1 phrases ...................................................

Dr"i11s on pronuneiation ...........................................................
Typiea1 errors from Eng1ish vowe
influenee in similar-sounding words ..............................................
Voieed stop eonsonants ............................................................
Vibrants /r/ and /rr/ in Spanish ..................................................
Vowel nuclei in Spanish .............................................
I..a.tera1 /1/ in Spanish ...........................................................
Voiceless stops ..........................................................
Voieeless spirants ...............................................................
Nasals and palatals ......................................................
Conclusion ...........................................
Dr"il1s and gr8.IIlIIlB.r ................................................................
Pa t tern dri lIs .................................................................
Some demonstratives ................................................................

2.8
2.10
2.15
2.18
2.20
2.21
2.23
2.27
2.31
2.32
2.32
2.32

2.1
3.2
3.21
3.21.1
3.22
3.23
3.3

Basie sentenees - White's arrival in Surlandia ......................................

Ilrills and gr8.IIlIIlB.r ................................................................
Pattern drills ....................................................................
Gender of singular nouns and adjeetives ............................................
Replaeement drills ................................................................
Variation drills ............................................................
Conversation stimu1us ............................. ~ ..............................

3.1
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.19
3.26
3.31

4.1
4.2
4.21
4.21.1
4.21.2
4.22

Basie sentenees - White meets Mo1ina at the Embassy ...............................

Dr"i11s and grammar .................................................................
Pattern dr111s ............................................................
Number in nouns and adjeetives ...................................................
The irregular verb / e str/ ......................................................
Rep1aeement dri11s
.

4.1
4.8

1.1

1.6
1.6
1-16
1-23
2.1
2.8

4.8
4.8

4.16
4.28

0.9

CONTENTS

SPOKEN SPANISH

4.23
4.3

Variation

5.1
5.2
5.21
5.21.1
5.22

Basie sentenees - White' s first day at work ...........................

Dr-ills and granunar ............................................................

5.23
5.3

Variation

6.1
6.2
6.21
6.21.1
6.22

Basie sentenees - White and Malina have luneh together ...........................

Dr-ills and gr8JIlIIlar ...........................................................

6.23
6.24
6.3

Variation

Review ~ill - Use of definite artie1es with tit1es ......................

Conversation stimulus .....................................................

6.30

7.1
7.2
7.21
7.21.1
7.21.2
7.22
7.23

Basie sentenees - White and Molina look for an apartment ............................

Dr-i 118 and granunar ..................................................................
Pattern ~ills ...............................................................
Present tense forros of regular /-r/ verbs ........................................
The demonstratives / ste, se, akl/ .............................................
Rep1aeement ~ills .........................................................

7.1
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.14
7.28

7.24
7.3
8.1
8.2
8.21
8.21.1
8.21.2
8.22

8.23
8.24
8.3
0.10

~ills ...................................................

Conversation stimulus ......................................................

Pattern

~ills ...................................

The irregular verb / sr/ .......................................................

Replaeement ~i lIs ...............................................................
~ills .............................

Conversation stimulus ...............................

Pattern

~111s .............................................

Present tense forms of regular / -r/ verbs ......................................

Replaeement ~ills ........................................................

Variation

~ills .................................................

~ills .........................................................

Review ~ill - The distribution of /sr/ - estr/ ..................................

Conversation stimulus ........................................................
Basie sentenees - Molina tel1s White about his neighbors' apartment ...............

5.1
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.15
5.21
5.26
6.1
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.19
6.25
6.29

7.34
7.39

7.40

Dr-ills and graIIJIllar .......................................................

8.1
8.6

Pattern drills

8.6

Present tense forros of regular /r/ verbs .........................................

Tb.e obligatory eontraetions ..................................................
Replaeement drills .................................................................
Variation ~ills ..............................................................
Review drill - Noun-adjeetive agreement ...........................................
Conversation stimu1us ..............................................................

8.6
8.15

8.22
8.28
8.34
8.36

CONTENTS

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.1
9.2
921
9.21.1
9.21.2
9.22
9.23
9.24
9.3
10.1
10.2
10.21
10.21.1
10.21.2
10.21.3
10.22
10.23
10.24
10.3
11.1
11.2
11.21
11.21.1
11.21.2
11.22
11.23
11.24
11.3
12.1
12.2
12.21
12.21.1
12.21.2
12.21.3
12.21.4

Basie sentenees - White goes to Molina's apartment ...........................

D:rills and grammar ..........................................................
Pattern drills .................................
The irregular verb labrl and regular I-dol forms:
in the present perfeet eonstruetion .................................
Possessives - ful1 forms ........................................................
Replaeement drills .............................................................. "
Variation drill
.
Review drill - Adjeetive position..........................................
Conversation stimulus .....................................................

9.1
9.6
9.6

Basie sentenees - Molina explains where he sends his laundry ...................

D:rills and gra.IIlIIlB.r ...........................................................
Pattern dril1s ................................................................
Personal Ial

.. .

Variation drills
.
Review drill - Theme elass in present tense forms ........................
Conversation stimulus ........................................................

10.1
10.6
10.6
10.6
10.15
10.27
10.32
10.38
10.42
10.43

Basie sentenees - White interviews a maid................................

D:rills and graIImlar ....
Pattern drills ................................................................
Possessives - shortened forms ...................................................
The negative partiele wi th verbs ............................... , ..........
Replacement dril1s .............................................................
Variation dril1s ............................................................
Review drill - Unemphatie 'sorne, any' from English............................
Conversation stimulus ..................................

11.1
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.15
11.20
11.26
11.32
11.33

Basie sentences - No water in Whitets apartment ................................

D:ril1s and grarnmar .............................................................
Pattern drills .....................................................
Subjeet pronouns ..............................................................
Pronouns after phrase relators ..............................................
Components of l)hrases ..........................................................
Statement intonation patterns - Normal and eontrastive statements ............

12.1
12.6
12.6
12.6
12.11
12.17
12.21

Di.rect elitic pronouns ..........................................

I -dol

forms funetioning as modifiers ...........................

Replacement drills ..............................................

9.6
9.19
9.33
9.39
9.45
9.47

0.11

SPOKEN SPANISH

CONTENTS

12.22
12.23
12.24
12.3
13.1
13.2
1321
13.21.1
13.21.2
13.21.3
13.21.4
13.22
13.23
13.24
13.3
14.1
14.2
14.21
14.21.1
14.21.2
14.21.3
14.23
14.24
14.3
15.1
15.2
15.21
15.21.1
15.21.2
15.21.3
15.22
15.23
15.24
15.3
Al
Al.1
Al.2
0.12

Replaeement drills .........................................................

Variati on dri11s .................................................................
Review dril1 - Adjeetive agreement in remote position .............................
Conversation stimu1us ..............................................................
Basie sentenees - White and Mo1ina go to a party .....................................
Drills and granlIDar ..............................................................
Pattern drills ...................................................................
/-- ndo/ forms and the present progressive eontruetion ............................
Possessive eonstruetions wi th /de/ ................................................
Nomina1ized possessive eonstruetions ...............................................
Question intonation patterns - lnformation questions ..............................
Rep1aeement dri1ls .................................................................
Variation drills ...........................................................
Review dri11 - P1aeement of negative partie1e ........................................
Conversation stiJnulus

Basie sentenees - Co1one1 Harris talks about his fami1y's arrival ..................
Dri11s and grarnrnar ..................................................................
Pattern dri11s ....................................................................
Present tense forms of the irregular verbs /ir, dar, ber/ ........................
The periphrastie future eonstruetion ...........................................
Question intonation patterns - Yes-no questions ....................................
Variation drills ..................................................................
Review dri11 - Theme e1ass in /-do/ forros of verbs ..................................
Conversation stimulus ..............................................................
Basie sentenees - Mrs. Harris goes through eustoms ..................................
Drills and grarnrnar ...................................................................
Pattern dri11s ......................................................................
lndireet e1itic pronouns - one objeet ................................................
lndireet elitic pronouns - two objeets ..............................................
Question intonation patterns - Yes questions .......................................
Replaeement drills ................................................................
Variation drills ..................................................................
Review dri11 - Possessive eonstructions ...........................................
Conversation stimu1us
.
Appendix l ..........................................................................
Vocabulary ...........................................................
Index .............................................................................

12.33
12.39
12.45
12.45
13.1
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.15
13.21
13.27
13.33
13.39
13.45
13.46
14.1
14.7
14.7
14.7
14.18
14.26
14.37
14.43
14.44
15.1
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.11
15.23
15.27
15.33
15.38
15.39
Al.l
Al.l
AI.39

UNITl

SPOKEN SPANISH

BASIC SENTENCES.

1.1

Useful phraaes.
AID TO LISTENING

ENGLISH SPELLING

SPANISH SPELLING

Good morning.

, ,
bwenozd"1s.l.

Buenos das.

Good morning, sir.

,
,
bwenozd1aslseQy6rt

Buenos das, seor.

Good afternoon, ma-am..

,
,

bwenastardslseQy6rat

Buenes tardes, seora.

Good evening, miss.

bwenaznocheslseQybrta~

,
how
are (to be)
you

~ow

are you?

komo

well

cmo

,
" .(.
esta +estar

est (estar)

,
stet1' ..

usted

, ,
kom2estal,!std ...
,

(1) am (lo he)

~stoy''

,
byeh''

C6mo est usted?

,
Astar''

estoy (esta-)
bien

thanu
and

grayas.J
,
1''
,

I'm fine. thanb. How are you?

UNO

Buenas noches, seorita.

gracias
y

est6ybyeQlgryasl*ustedt

Estoy bien, gracias. y l1Sted?

1.1

UNIT 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
very

muy~

muy

Very well, thanks.

mybyelJlgriys~

Muy bien, gracias

,
01~

helIo, hi

hola

,
ke-tl~

what such

,
HU How goes it? (1)

01'' ketl+

Hola! Qu tal?

(it) goes (to gol

va (ir)

to ron (it) goes

le va

How are ron getting along?

Fine, thanks.

..

komoleb''
,
byelJlgrys''

with

Excuse me.

Bien, gracias.
con

~1-perm1.s6''

(2)

el permiso

,
kampirm1s6.1.
,

no, not

Con permis o.

nd.l.

no

komon6''

Certainly.

Cmo no.

,
(3)

dispens'~ dlsp'nsar~

excuse (to excuse)

Excuse me.

Cmo le va?

the permission

1.2

qu tal

dispense (dispensar)

,
dispenseme.l-

Dispnseme

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT i

,
it (1) regret (to regret, to feel)

lo-syent~ sentir~

lo siento (sentir)

much, lots, too much

mucho ~

mucho

,
I'm very sorry.

Lo siento mucho.

losyentom6cho .J.

That's okay.

Est bien.

many (f.pI.)

muchas ~

(4)

Thanks a loto

muchas

, .
muchaZ9Xys''

Muchas gracias.

de

of, from

,
nothing

nada

nad.J.

,
You're welcome.

De nada.

dena4a~

hay (haber)

there is, there are (there to be)

,
Don't give it a thought. (5)

n~ay4ek~

No hay de qu~

..

kyero.J. kreor.J.

quiero (querer>

to present

presntar.J.

presentar

to present to you

presentarle ~

presentarle

(1) want (to want)

1.3

UNIT 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
to

a~

e1. ~

el

a1. ~

al

the (m. sg.)

to the

l'd like to present Mr. Molina

to you.

, .,

kyerolprAsentarl,lals~Qy6rm611n.~

Quiero presentarle al seor

Molina.

the <E.sg.)

la

, . ,

l' d like to present Mrs. Molina

to you.

kyerolpr~sentarl~lalasQy6ra~mo11na~

Quiero presentarle a la seora

de Molina.

,
~l-gust.J.

tbe pleasure

el gusto

,
Glad to meet you.

mch6gust ~

Mucho gusto.

igwalment6~

equally (equal)

,
Same here, thanks.

19wal~

igualmente (igual)

19walment6

Igryas~

Igualmente, gracias.

enchanted (to enchant)

eIJkntatt ~ eI)kantar~

encantado (enoantar)

to meet, get acquainted, to know

knoer~

conocer

k6n6erlA ~

conocerla

to meet you (L)

1.4

CUATRO

SBOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

eijkanta~oI4ek6n~erla~

Delighted to meet you. (6)

Encantado de conocerla.

to meet you (m.)

conocerlo

m6chogustoI4kono~erlo~

Glad to meet you. (6)

Mucho gusto de conocerlo.

Adi6s~

Goodbye.

asta~

until

hasta

tomorrow

maana

Has ta maana.

See you tomorrow.

,
lwego~

then, later

luego

,
astlweg6 ~

So long.

1.10

Hasta luego.

Notes on the basic sentences

(1)

/la ~ k~tl ~ /

Hola! Qu tal? is a greeting generally used with a person whom you already know more than casually,

and who occupies a status approximately equivalent to yours.

(2)

/kompermso ~ /

Con permiso is used to excuse yourself when, for example, you are on an elevator and need to squeeze

between other people who are in front of you in order to get out; or, when you want to excuse yourself from a group you are talking
with. It is not ordinarily interchangeable with /d~sp~nseme ~

CINCO

dispnseme.

1.5

UNIT 1
(3)

SPOKEN SPANISH

Id1Spnseme ~ /

dispnseme is used as apology for a minor breach of etiquette, to interrupt a conversation to ask about some-

thing, etc.
(4) Note that

/mchas~/

in the phrase

mucha:; 'many' is simply the feminine plural of a word

/mchogs to~ /

mucho gusto. The

/-S/

/mcho /

mucho 'Illuch' that you also met

is the plural part, while the

I-al

before the

/-5/

is the feminine marker.

/nQydek~ / No hay de qu

(5)

the same as /denda~

(6) /

is used when the other person thanlcs you for some smaU favor

YOB

have done for him; it is about

De nada.

enkant do I d ekono ~r1 aV Encantado de

conocerla is regularly used only when you are introduced to a woman (if you

are aman). If you are a woman, a different form is used and you should not learn this sentence to use yourself.

Imchogsto

d ekono ir lo / Mucho gusto de conocerlo is what you say (if you are aman) to another man, or else just the short form

/muchogsto'' /

Mucho gusto.

In Spain, instead of

1.2

DRILLS ON PRONUNCIATION

1.21

V'owel contrasts in weak-etressed syllables

/-10/

you say /-1 e/.

In learning the basic 'sentences in the first section of this unit, you should have been repeatedly corrected for your pronunciation of the
underlined vowels in snch phrases as these:

--

2. sbQyor ,

-~

3. bwen,-stardes~

-A-

-~

-e--

-A

,
4. seQyorA

1.6

-A-

1. bwen2zd'~as~

SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

5.

,
.
bwenaznoch~s''

-1-

6.

gra~yAs''

-A-

7.

dispensem!''
,

-1-

--e

mchlizg;ra~yAs''

-li-

-e--

-A--e

--6-

--A

,
,

8.

10.

,
pri,sentarl! +
,
m61J.nA .,

11.

" +
stAmQyanA

-A-

12.

stAlwegQ +

-A-

l-

9.

..

--

-A
-6

It is perfectly normal for you to have trouhle with these vowels, because, as the dots over them indicate, theyare all under weak stress
in positions where such vowels do n,ot occur unJer weak stress in, English.
While it is normal to Make these mistakes at first, teey eonstitute a ve" serious error which must be corrected early in your efforts to
form Spanish habits of pronunciation. The following lists are for the purpose o helping you to master these vowels uruler weak stress. They
are arranged in pairs of words such that the on,l., difference bet\\een the members of each pair is in the pronunciation of one \\eak-stressed
vowel: such a pair of words is caBed a min,imally contrasting pairo
Practice repeating these after your instructor until you can make the contrast easily, just as he does, and inaist that he continue
practicing them with you until they do come easily.

SIETE

1.7

UNIT 1

:SPUK~N ~y Al'U:'

1.21.1 Exerc~ses

lal

and

on

lel

vowel contrasts under weak stress

m~n~mal

~n

contrast under weak stress

,
,

sap ..

,
lot

sap! ..
,
lot! +
,

..

mes!s
,

mes!s

boch!.J.
,
t~nt!

t~nt

.,

chJ.ncha

kortA ..

,
sobras ..

,
boch!+
,
,

fetal. ..

tA~y~Or

.t.

teQY1I ~

p!p~t6 ~

p!pJ. t6

skupa ..
,

.J.

.t.
,
lumbr! .t.

kort ..
,

dcdJ. t.J.

skup~''

~6ket!

,
okete .t.

alumbrf, ~

sobr~s+

,
mnaor ..
,
mf,choh

1.8

p!loh''
,
fatal.''

dd'~t

besa-r ..

,
tchoh ..
,
p~nai. ..

,
pldn ..

,
t!chdn .,
,
p~naJ. ..
,

,
birretA ..
,
pastoras .,
,

markadq

,
birret! ..
,
pastores +
,
mrkad ..
,
prtg.es!s ..

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

/a/ and /1/ 1n contrast under weak stress

,
,
,
p!Qyal ~
libar ~
libar '"
,
,
,
pAtoh ~
piton ~
mls~tA~
nA~ar ~

matad'

ni.d'ar ~
,
mita-d' +
,
chirlar ~
,

lAtera ~

,.

sAlero ~

piQyaJ. ~

mis~tA ~

,
literA ~
,
silero ~

pln~d'n+

pin~o-n ~

fAharon ~

piket ~
,
fiharon +

pasando +

pisandO ~

m(l)~.!d:or+

m(l)~idor~

chArlar
,

pAket

/a/ and /0/ 1n contrast under weak stress

ara l
,
tl. ~
~

~er!l

,
pesa ~

pasa +
,
malA ...
,

kubl+

kubo.J..

tl.~ +

koka +
,

kok~''

~er6 ~

kara~

kar''

pes6'"
,
pasQ. ...

para+

par6+

ch:Ln! ...

ch:Ln6 ...

mal.Q. ~

kanto ...
manto +
~orro

aro
,

,
,

mes!~

meso ...

kanta ...
,
mant!+

ma~!+

ma~.Q.

~orr!~

bola +

NUEVE

..
,
bolo ...

,
,

..

1.9

UNIT1

SPOKEN SPANISH

sant6 ..
,
swegro ..

santi. ..

swegr ..

negri

negro ..
,
palmo ..

palma ..
,
pasta ..
,
trompa +

past ..
,
trompo +

rrema ..

rremo

kobra +

kobr.Q. ..

nyet ..

nyet +
,
1ndyo ...
,
kldr +
,
sposo ..

1ndya+

kalo'i:.J.
,
espos

lal

and

pahar ..

tardn

sab1<! .,
,
p,ip1t +

lul

derech ..
,
~igarr.i ..

,
drech.Q. ..

ig.arr ..

,
~apata

..

,
rmani +

,
mimosa ..
,
parehil ..
,
marei ..
,
t~rnera ..
,
~eres!

~pato

..

,
erman.Q. +

mimoso ..
,
pareho +
,

mreQ. ..

ternero ..

,
lakoniki .,

,
lakoniko ..

1n contrast under weak stress

,
phr

turdn ..
,
Sb1<!O +

pyP1ta +

,
lanero ..
,
kar.kas .,

bX'rJ.ta .,

pargJ.ta +

,
lUnero''

k.9.r akas ..

brr1ta +
,
prg.J.t +

1.10

DIEZ

UNIT 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

mla~b

...

mula~o

kln1t

kaQya<t6

k!Qyad" ..

kn1t ..

mar~yan '"..

mr~yano

lan1ti ..

ln1ta ...

palit!e~

...

plid'ee, ..

ma11tiA ...

m011ta ...

matad'or'"

mYtd'o-z. ...

,
,
,

...

/e/ and /1/ 1n contrast under weak stress

,
,
,

pna-r +

pinaer

pton ..
,
ploh''
,
taloh +

piton ...
,
piloh ...
tilo-n ...

psarn ..

rr,ima-r ...
,
msera ...

rrima-r'"
,
misera'"

me(l)!lr ...

/e/

,
pase
,

and

tom ...

fume ...

b1ne ...

pesad'6 ..
,
perJ.t ...

psad ..
,

pADY1ta ..

/0/ 1n contrast under weak stress

,
,
paso
,
tomo
,
fumo
,
b1no

,
pisa<1o ...

pir1t ..
,
pisad ..
,
pisar6n ..
,
ml(l)~ar ...
,
piQY1ta'"

...

pepe ..

...

t1re ..

,
pepo .J.
,
t1ro ...

..

kab! +
,
b1b! .J.

,
b1b6.J.

.J.

,
,

,
kab6 ..

ONCE

1.11

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

leche ..

lecho ..

lesyoh ..

lsyoh ..

trahA ..

traho ..

mesJ.ta ..

m2lJ.t ..

dehe ..

deho ..

blJ.t ..

bl1t ..

teh ..

teha ..

btado ..

botado ..

kyeri ..

kyero ..

psada ..

posada ..

peyne ..

peyno ..

rmJ.t ..

rmJ. t ..

kobre ..

kobro ..

grrJ.t ..

gorrl.ta ...

kante ..

kanto ..

konteste ..

kntest ..

(l)yebe ..

(l)!lebo ..

tornero ..

mand ..

mand ..

ternero ..
,
~~rrJ. t ..

kambyo ..

kbmforme ..

,
komform ..

kompre ..

kompro ..

klJ.pse ..

klJ.ps ..

plar''

polar ..
,
m.Qntoh ..

trabaha ..

trabah.Q., ..

,
,

mntoh ..

lel

and

lul

,
,

prjpsi,yoh ..

1n contrast under weak st+ess

,
t!mor ..
,
le'lar ..

,
lg.ar ..

lechar ..

lchar ..

1.12

,
lechoh ..
,
festl.h ..

,
lchoh ..

fstJ.h ..
DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

,
s~kyoh

,
..

suk~yoh

..

,
mesJ.t ..

lelJ.to ..
,
~erkad~ ..
,
terkJ.to ..

,
srkac1'o ..

/J./

and

pnsad" ..
,
tnder ..
,
pcher ..
,
perJ.t ..

,
tYrkJ.to ..

timo ..

tmd ..
,
fog.oh ..

mirad"
,
pik1.to''

fig.oh ..
,
lisa-r ..

iml.to ..
,
tint l.simo ..

,
lig.a-r ..

TRECE

..

tunder
,
pcher ..

,
rrtJ.n ..

pisada ..

,
misyoh ..

and

ptin~a'd

/0/ J.n contrast under weak stress

/J./

/u/

posad -1,
trJ. t .
,
6hJ.t ..
,

omJ.t6 ..
,
tntJ.sim ..

J.n contrast under weak stress

miro-n ..

mron ..
1.13

UNIr 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,

pint'r +
,
fisyon +

fi;rJh1r

+
millo t +
imJ. t

pnoh

punta-r

+
,
f;rJhJ.r +
,
ms1ta +
,
mJ. t6 +
fsydh

,
lnos

,
tiner +
,
filera

tianer6
,
fuler

~irkJ. te

,
chinchero ..

,
chnchero ..

ni40s +
,
pid'yendo +

nJd"os .,

murahes .,

pntada

pnta4''

rrikJ.t

+
brlado~ +

b6kaOl

olate

rrukJ.ta

linars +

+
,
bkaJ.. +
,
late +

omJ. t

pyr~ta ~
,
lnars''

umJ. t

plmero .,

plmer .,

rr6kJ.ta
1.14

tyPe

pydyend +
,
rrumJ.t ~

mirahas

/0/ and /u/ J.n contrast under weak stress

,
,
,

t2P +

rrk1t .,

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

stana''
,

~tana''

prJ.to~

m.Qtila-r''

,
purJ.to,,

Aksax4.

,
auitila-r''

,
Ikusax''

1.21.2 Discussion of minimal vowel contrasts under weak stress

English s peakers of c ourse aIso distinguish words in this same JIlinimal way - pit, pet, pat, pot, pUlt~ pUl, f<r example-but.only rarely

under weak stress. That is, English has similar differen ces only in syllables that are noticeably louder than any of the Spanish syllables
you have been practicing. The underlined vowels in the following English words are a11 the same vowel sound in actual speech, no matter
how they are s pelled.

presl.dent

precedent

bottQ.ffi

plot'~m

ward~n

pard2.n

They would not be the same in Spanish.

By careful repetition of these Spanish words after a native speaker, and by observing closely the point of difference between each pair,
y ou can be~in to hear and, having heard, to imitate differences of a type and frequency that are quite strange to an English speaker's way of
talkin~.

In learning the basic sentences you were probably also corrected fOl' placing too much stress on sorne syllables, too Httle stress on
others. There are only two levels of stress in Spanish (English has four, as we will discover). These two levels are indicated in the 'Aids
to Listening' by an acule accent / ' / over the vowels that: have louder stress and a dot /. / over the vowels that have, softer stress. We will
call these STRONG STRESS and WEAK STRESS.

QUINCE

1.15

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1
1.22

The stress system in Spanish

There are two things that are important about stress. One is to get the two stresses placed on the right syllables. The other is to make

each o them the right strength. Let us examine these two aspects one at a time.
The followmg pairs of word:s differ only in the placement o stress, and, as you can see, the difference in meaning that results is considerable.
1.22.1 Exercises on minimal stress contrasts

,
1 . estA

l!Jgl~s

'thlS'
II

grelos

~sta

,
iI)glEis

'15'
'Engllsh'
'he weJ.ghedO

,
40 pern

'balto

peso
,
perno.t,

50 p~k6

'peak'

piko

'he stung D

Vbucket'

bAlde,J.

, 1 cr1ppled'

'book'

librooi

'he freed 9

'altar'

arao

'he w:tll deO

topen'

~braO

'there

3. peso

bald~

llbroi
,
8. arA
,

9.

abr~

'monet.ary un1t'

,
,

,a

k~nd

of wJ.ne

w~ll

be'

1.22.2 Discussion of minimal stress contrasts

In short, you can be rather drastically misundel(stood if you Iail to place the stresses correctly when you speak. This, of course,is aIse uue in
EngHsh, but not so obviously true in view of the greater complexity oI the English stress system. We have in English also a fair number of items
which can have the stresses arranged in more than one way:

,
,
addressi or Addressi
1.16

,
,
Caribben+ or CrJ.bbean~
DIECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIr 1

,
Chl.ln ~

,
or Chile'n ~

New Orl'ns~ or

N~w

,
6rlelns''

(like / 'sta - /est4/>,

Since we do not have as many nice neat minimal pairs in English as there are in Spanisb

we may at

first he deceived into thinking that Spanish uses stress in a way that English does nol, but this is not lrue.
The other important thing to learn in drilling on stress is to stress syllables with the right amount of force or strength. It is at this point
tbat the four s-tresses of English interfere with tbe two atresses of Spanisb. Let us first learn what tbe four stresses of Englisb are. Listen to
yourse lf ~ay this pbrase:

elevator - operator.
Which syllable is loudest?

el-

in

elevator.

Let us indicate this by writing an acute accent over the.!J

levator

Which syllable is next loudest? .QE.- in

aperatar.

We'll write it with a circumf1ex accent

~levator

Then we can heer that -

vat -

and -

rat-

eperator.

are about equally loud~ but softer tban

levator

DIECISIETE

aperator.

.Q.Q.-, so we will write a grave accent:

8perator

1.17

UNIr 1

The syllables that

SPOKEN SPANlSH

left over are the weakest, so we write:

In doing this we have marked four levels of 'stress, which we can IabeI:

prl.mary

secondary

~-

tert1ary

weak

~-

Or-

e-

"o r

This represests a great many djfferent levem of stress, but ever)!' Ea&llh speaker (native) uses all four quitf.. regularly and uncoDSciouely
every time he makes an utterance.
Now, how do these four English stresses affect your Spanish? If we remember that Spanish only has TWO stresses, then it seems likely that
you will get your FOUR mixed up with these two, with the resultthat you will put too much stress on some syllables, not enoogh on others. The
c orrespondence between the English suesses and those of Spanish is roughly this:

Spanl.sh

Engll.sh
Prl.mary
Secondary

1.18

/'1
I~I

Tertl.ary

1'1

Weak

Ivl

}
}

Strong

1'1

Weak

I ./

OIECIOCHO

SPOKEN

UNIT 1

SPANISH

Let us look back now at the basic sentences and see if any of the difficulties you had with them can be traced to this difference
between the two languages.

yam

RIGHT

1.

,
kemprm1S0

2.

dispensem

3.

presentarle
, . .

PROBABLE ERROR

k~mprml.so

dispensm~

,
presntarl

4.

lseQyora~emoln

5.

i9walmnte~

6.

Dkntado~

e~kntado

7.

astmQyan~

~stmQyana~

laseQyorademoll.n
,
igwlmente
,

Now because we consider this a very impcrtant point indeed, and because it is a point which is rarely drilled elsewhere, we have put
together the fol1owing long list, arranged according to the number of syllables and placement of stress. Until you can say these using only
the two stresses that are marked instead of the four of English you cannot expect to go on and learn complex utterances successfully. Time
spent practicing these, therefore, will be very well spent.
1.22.3

Exercises on contrasting stress patterns

,
rroh.l.
,
much~

,
tanto
,
ast.!.
,
donde.!.

DIECINUEVE

--=-4.

.:..-..
,
komo
,

gust~

,
bweno
,
lweg.!.
,
frass

,
fumr
1.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 1

fumo l

abrA

,
taksi

,
.1-

~el .1-

tarde

.1-

erka

,
--

-.. -

biste
,
tAmbyen

~erraar

---

TI

.1-

trabahA +

.1-

saludos +

.....

,
rayo-n

~ntnder

spAQyol+

~wtobu-s

..

uniko +

molestA

sta~yoh

barbAr6 .1,
medik6 .1,
tnyerk61s

skuch

kbraoh
,
saldaer

.1-

fosfor .1,
syentse .1,
deheme +

bentan

.1-

minutos

saba<t6

tiketes

entim6

~~ntabos .1-

1.20

,
srb1-r +

perdon

~yd'a-d .1-

,
rrapid6
,
lastima

- -- - +I

fAbor

d~J.r .1-

.1-

aQYO

+
,
lbr1r +
,

pAsaer

.1-

.1-

.1-

k6noeer

+
+

para9-wa"y {

VEINTE

UNIr 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
saIJ::!che +

,
rqway .,

b6lets
,
sabems ~

,
ultim

sAlbAdor .,
.,
kontestar .,

proksim .,

_
_
_
_
'_ T
I

dJ.g.ame16 +
,
prestese16 +

tlefn .,

t~leQ..ramA

simpatik6 .,

inmd'yata .,

tomsl

TI

.,

_
__
_

- -
--

de~J.d'as

,
trAbAhAr .,

.,

dsped'~<!as

.,

kAswAlid: id .,
,
liberaiyn .,

trayg.aml .,

maqn1fik .,

absOlut l
,

bilid'ad ..

beAsl .,

mchJ.sim .,

sfi~yente ~

k6mnikr~

kwentml0 .,

prposit6 .,

dandm16 .,

kamby~m16 .,

fAnatik ~
,
prdonme +
,
Al t 1ffietr6 .,

s~ksl .,

fi~urs .,

byendsel +

,
presentarle .,

seQy6rJ. ta ~

,
ferrkarrfl+

kon6yend .,

mentalid'd' ..
,
ag.rikl tr .1-

ad'elante .,

nt6nA~yOn

IJk6n trari .,

demAsyad' .,
,
panrama .,

kAminare .,

subAmlAs .,

,
AmerikA .,
,
milesim6 .,

mon6qramA .,

AmAri~ar

komAsl6 .,

tAnt1sim6 +

entend1d' .,

amane~er

buskAm16 +

bw~n1:S.imO

kmfndJ.d6 .,

failitr .,

mw~bAs16 .,
,

VEINTIUNO

- - - +
'I

,
,

.,

",
",

1.21

UNITl

SPOKEN SPANISH

----- ..

1
---+

- - --+I
,

,
presentand61.J.

,
presentayones.J.
,
mrikano.J.
,
lbrtory.J.
,
kmbersa.iyons.J.

primr~simo.J.

konsrbtory.J.

kon~yendose-l-

erkandos-l,

priyos~simo.J.

,
ntryrid:a-d-l,
psteryoridad.J.
,
kristali~iyoh.l-

,
k6mnikyoh.J.
,
nynlidad.J.

rgmnt~yoh.l-

eI)kontrandl.J.

-------.

I
- - - -- +
,

henrali~iyon.J.

espiylii ~yoh.J.

institynlidad.l-

idntifik~yoh.J.

dekontmina~yn+

impresy6nbilidad.J.

natr 1ii a ~ yoh.J.

rresponsbilidad+
,
rrespetbilidd.J.

konstityonalidad.J.
sperntrlidad.J.

amerikni~yon+

irrglridad.l-

deskpitliayon.J.

sprlimentyn.J.

rrkapitl~yon.J.

,
kapi tliiaiyoh.l-

, ,
igwalment.J.
, ,
swalment.J.

1.22

,
impersnaliiiyn.J.
,
agrikltriiaiyon.J.
,

, ,

, ,
-

dzntrli~~yoh+

-----.

+'

ktwalment.J.
, ,
kordyalment.J.

, ,
hnralment.l-

, ,
mteryalment.J.

literalment.J.

lsQyorkarter+

VEINTIDOS

UNIT 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

, ,
seQyorkarter
,

dktorkamp~s

, ,
kolorberd"e

, ,
seQyorkastr6
, ,
As J.ch!le
, ,
AO)abyen

,
AlsQyorkastr6
, ,
nmoralmente
, ,
imfrmalment

espe~yalment

,
lklornegro
, ,
,

elsQyorharg.As~

1.22.4 Discussion of contrasting stress patterns

y ou probably noticed, in listemng to and imltating these iterns, that they seem to be pronounced {aster than English words of similar
length. Actually they are not, but there is a big difference in rhytlun which makes it seem that they are. This difference in rhythm can be
indicated something like this, using longer lines to indicate longer syllables and shorter lines to indicate shorter syllables:

English Speaker

Spanis h Speaker

Thus the Spanish way is to make every syllable almost equally long, giving a rnachine~nn effect, whereas the English way is to make
the louder sy Hables longer. The two languages divide up their time differently.
1.23

The intonation system of Spanish

Up to this point we have discussed two errors you were corrected for in learning the basic sentences: UNSTRESSED VOWELS and

SYLLABLE STRESS. The third problem which occurs from the very beginning and will be with yon to mar your Spanish for a very long time
is INTONATION: the rise and faH of the pitch of the voice. We have indicated this by placing our accent marks at three different heights
over the vowe h
Low pitch: directly over the vowel

VEINTITRES

/l3. 6/
1.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIr 1

la 01
,

Middle pitch: one s pace aboye the vowel

la 01

High pitch: two spaces aboye the vowel

lA

All three in sequence look like this:

r hese

are analogous to steps io a musical scale:

al

14

In addition to these various levels 01 piteh, there may be a slight rise

level

,
a

al

Jj

It

l o r a slight fall

I .. I

after the last piteh,

(JI'

it may remain

I ,I .
Now let us retum to the basie sentenees and see what you were eorrected on.

RIGHT

YOUR PROBABLE ERROR

.
bwenOz~1sJseQy6r ~

.
. ,
bwenozd18S
Isel)yor t
, . , .., .
bwenastardeslseQyorat
, . , ..., .
bwenazn~chesJseQyor1ta t
, .

1.
2.

. ,
bwenastar~eslsAQy6r4~
, . ,
,

a. bwenaznochesJsQy6ritl
,

4. komgesta~st~4 ~

5. mybyeij]gr,yAs
,

..

6.

komoleb

,
7. komon6

1.24

,.

komQesta~st4 ~

muybyeIJlgr!iyAs t
,
,

..

komoleba ~

,
'
komon ~

vmmCUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
8.

muchazgr'yAs

UNITl

,
muchazgrayAs ~

,
10.

denMA t

n~ay4ek

noayc!ek ~

" , ,
11. iqwalmente 19,ryAs ...

;,

i<,wAlment6IqryAs t

ac!Yos t

,
13. astamaQyana

,
14.

as tAlweg.6

astamaQyana t

astalweg.o t

It will be evident to you that aH of the rnistaken patterns of the right-hand colurnn aboye -are attributable to sorne very cornrnon pattern
that such utterances have in English. A few of the cornrnon non-Spanish interference patterns that English sets up are these:

2.

,
Good morn~ng IB~ll t
,
,

F~ne I thanks t

3.

How are you

1.

4.

V'EINTICINCO

How are

+
,
ydu +

,
~

5. GoOd bye
1\

6.

Good bye t
,
A

7 Many thnks

1.25

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNll' 1

The only way to get these (and other) Engliah patterus out af-your'way in talking Spanish is by the correet repetition of Spanish patterns
s o often that they automatically replace the English

OBes

when they are supposed too The following exercise is directed toward that ende

1.23.1 &ercises on eontrasting intonation patterns

1. bengak ,J.

..

.
sonlastr's,J.

2. klarokes1,J.

Group 1
All o a 'fall1ng ' pattern

3.
4.

5.

..

.
nolokr'6 ,J.

~e9R-en.abyon''

..

nomeimp6rtA,J.
,
7. byenemaQynA,J.
,
8. O}Jegomar1,J.
6.

.
, .
kom.2est ,J.
, .
dondest
, . .
komoleb ,J.
,

9. Ak:1.sebyll ,J.

10..
11.
12.

13. kyene(s) s6n ,J.

14. kelepsA ,J.

15. kwand~g''

1.26

VEINTISEIS

UNIT 1

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
16. kwantokwsta ~
,

17. kekommos ..

18. d~dondes6n ..
19.
20.
21.
22.

,
parActondebn J.
,
porkesefw''
,
p6rkwantotymp6''
,
akwantoestmos .1-

.
.

"

,
,
1. y,aseba t
,
,
2. kyerekafe t
,
,

..

Group 2
All of a 'r1s1ng' pattern

. ..

3. bJ.llOkon.ustecrt

,.

4. komyeron~a t

. ,.
tyen~uniap1~ t
,

5.

...---------/

,. ,.
sebakonm1g,o t
,
,.
7. le~stomar1a t
,
,.
8. le~o~ldyaryo t
, .,
9. tyenenptro t
, .,
10. lpsolaleche t
6.

VEINT!SIETE

1.27

UNIT 1

..

11.
12.

,
,
trahosukarro t
,
,
legustasutrabaho t

SPOKEN SPANISH

. .

,
1.

gra~yas IseQy6r

2.

mybye~lgr~yas''

3.

4.

..

,
sJ.lseQy6ra ~
,
nolseQyorita''
,

5.

n~ayl6mbr ~

6.

be~glmaria ~

7.

,
nolmchazgryas ..
,

8.

nobyen~lent6nes ~

10.

11.
12.

1.28

Group 3
All endJ.ng J.n a low level pattern

_ _fil~)

,
sJ.lpap ~
,
nolmam ~
,
adyoslseQy6res ..
,
astamaQyanalseQy6rs ..

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.1

UNIT 2

BASIC SENTENCES. Useful phrases.

ENGLISH SPELLING

AID TO USTENING

SPANISH SPELLING

ahcad, forward

"
ad:lante+

adelante

,
Come on in.

Adelante!

adelant+

seat (to seat)

syente~

seat yourself (to seat oneself)

syentse+

sentr +

sentarse~

tyene+ tener+

(you) have (to have)

un (uno)
el lpiz

the pencil
l'

yes

UNO

tyen~unlapl.

No, 1 don't.

tiene (tener)

un+ un+

a, an (one)

(I) have (to have)

sintese (sentarse)

Si~ntese.

Sit down.

Do you have a pencil?

siente (sentar)

Tiene un lpiz?

teI)go+ tener ~
No, no tengo.

2.1

UNIT2

SPOKEN SPANISH
S, s tengo.

Yes, 1 do.

,
rrp1ta~

repeat (to repeat)

,
rrepetir+

repita (repetir)

Repita.

Say it again.

tradu~k~ trad~ir~

translate (to translate)

traduzca (traducir)

Traduzca.

Translate.

another

,
otra+

the time

la-be~+

la vez

again

6 tr a-b e~ +

otra vez

otra

,
pdr+

for
the favor

por

,
por-fabdr+

please

el favor
por favor

Again, please.

.,
otrabei/pbrfab6r+

Otra vez, por favor.

,
el-perdn+
,
,
d1ie+ de~J.r+

the pardon
(you) say (to say)

,
Excuse me, what did you say? (1)

2.2

el perdn
dice (decir)

,.,.,

per~dn~ komodJ.i~ustedt

Perdn. Cmo dice usted?

give (to give)

d (dar)

to me

me

DOS

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
the pen
Give me the pene

..

la-plumA.l.

,
demelaplma+

D~me

,
,
pasm+

pass me

,
el-lJ.oro+

the hook

la pluma.

pas+ pas ar+

pass (to pass, to hand)

Pass me the hook.

la pluma

pase (pasar)
pseme
ellihro

..

pasemeQ)lbr+

Peme el libro.

is (to he)

es (ser)

that

eso

,
What's that?

kes.so.t.

Qu es eso?

this

esto

,
l-ieniiero+

the ashtray

,
This is an ashtray"

wants (to want)

to say
(it) means

TRES

el cenicero

est~lespniniier+

,
,
kyer+ kre"r.l.
,
di J.r
,
kyr-dJ.r+

Esto es un cenicero"

quiere (querer)
decir
quiere decir

2.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2
What does cenicero mean?

It means ashtray.

..

, ,.."
kekyerectelr/enliro+
,
, .
,
kyereaeilrlreshtryi

di lr~

eh~

in

How do you say table in Spanish?

en

,
.
komosedlielteyb~1Ien~spaQy61~
,

..

se dice (decir)

el--espQyol+

the Spanish

Quiere decir ashtray.

s--dl~~

says itself, is said (to say)

Qu'; quiere decir cenicero?

el espaol

Cmo se dice table en espaol?

,
la--mes~

the table

,
y ou say mesa. (2)

la mesa

sd:lelmesai

the English

Se dice mesa.

el ingls

,
l-slQ:Y~

the chair

..

la silla

How do you say silla in English?

komosealielsla~~l~~gls~

y ou say chair.

,
sec11ielchehri

Cmo se dice silla en ingls?

Se dice chair.

where
the embassy

dnde

l~--embahacl~

la embajada

merikani

americana

American

2.4

CUATRO

UNIT2

SPOKEN SPANISH

Where's the American Embaasy?

-,

- - -

dondestall~mbahadamer1kn~

the bathroom

el bao

Where's the bathroom?

-,

dondestal~lbaQyb~

Dnde est el bao?

there

ah

at, to

,
l~-ikyer<!a~

the leEt

,
There to the leEt.

D6nde estA la Embajada Americana?

la izquierda

a1IalRikyerda~

Ahi a la izquierda.

,
la-drecha~

the right

,
There to the right.

a1Jalactrecha~

Ah a la derecha_

,
There straight ahead.

la derecha

1laetlant~

Ah ade lante.

,
take, carry (to take)

O~ebe~ O~bar~

lleve (llevar)

take us

O~ebnbs~

llvenos

the center (of town)

el centro

Take us downtown.

-. .

royebenoslalntrb~

,
are (to be)

CINCO

stah~

,
sta-r.t.

Llvenos al centro_

estn (estar)

2.5

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

the (m_ pie)

los

dondestanlloz11brs+

Where 're the books?

D6nde estn los libros?

,
take me

Q~ebm+

llveme

the hotel

l-te-l+

el hotel

,.

--

~ebem~lalotl+

Take me to the hotel_

LIveme al hotel_

(it ) goes down (to go down)

sube (subir)

or

,
bah+ baha-r+

(it) goes down (to go down)

baja (bajar)

subeobha+
"

Going up or down? (3)

Sube o baja?

kwanto

how much

cunto

,
kwantos+
,.

How much is it?

Cunto es?

,
one

un.i.

uno

six

,
seVs+

seis

two

dos.i.

dos

seven

syet+

siete

och6+

ocho

nwebe+

nueve

dye-i+

diez

2.6

three

tres.i.

tres

eight

four

kwatro
,

cuatro

nine

five

~I)ko.i.

cinco

ten

SEIS

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
on~e~

once

fifteen

kln~e~

twelve

do~e~

doce

sixteeo

dye!iiseys''

diecis~is

thirteeo

tre~e~

trece

twenty

beynte~

veinte

fourteen

kator~e+

catorce

twenty-one

eleveo

2.10

,
bynti.uno+

quince

veintiuno

Notes on the hasic sentences

(1) Iostead of using the entire phrase 'What did you say?', The Spanish speaker frequently uses only the first word,i.e.

/k6mot / '

just as we may say ooly 'What?'

(2)

Note that here, aod io the other phrases ahoye and helow which also have the form /se\iiie~ /

io them, that the idea of

'someone' actually sayng the word is not given: rather, the word says itself, which makes this coostruction impersonal, and
which is translated ioto English as 'is said' or 'you say'. The Spaoish construction used is the reflexve constructioo, which
will he e xamined in detail in Unit 24.

(3)

SIETE

More literally, 'Does it (the elevator) go up or does it go down?'

2.7

UNIT 2
2.2

SPOKEN SPANISH
DRILLS ON PRONUNCIATION
In the first unit we exarnined the vowels under weak stress, the stress system, the intonation systern, and the resulting rhythmic effect.
Before going on to an exarnination of consonants, and vowels under strong stress, notice in the lists below how in wards which sound familiar,
you are Hable to rnake sorne rather serious mistakes because of the very fami liarity of the words.

2.21

Typical errars frorn English vowel influence in sirnilar-sounding wards.

CORRECT

YOUR PROBABLE ERROR

,
afi~J.n.J.

dktor.J.

ENGlJSH SPELLJNG
office
doctor

oportnidd.J.

.ID> rtunid a-a''

,
~partuwn~tiy''

kOI)greso.J.

kIJgreso''

ka1)gr!:s.J.

congress

kmfren~y''

kamferen~y''

kanfar~ns''

conference

tropikl.J.

tr!pikl''

trap~kal''

tropical

tomika''

t'mik''

tamik-l-

atomic

andurAs.!.

,
,

6ndurs-l-

opportunity

handur~s-l-

Honduras

kombers aiyoh''

kambersa~yoh.J.

kanvrseyS'in.J.

conversation

spi ta-l.J.

aspita-l''

haspitil.J.

hospital

kontrat.J.

kantrato.J.

kantralkt.J.
,
pasibil.J.

contract

,
,

pOsJ.bl''

2.8

~fis''

afis.J. -

doktor''

FAMILIAR ENGLISH
PRONUNCIATION
,
,

,
,

possible

OCHO

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

bmbar~e~

bambarc!e6~

b~mba rdmint ~

pront~

prnt~

prantaw~

pronto

prokslma~

praksima~

~praksim~t~

approximate

fosfr6~

fsfr6~

fasf~r~s''

phosphorous

kost''

kast~

kast~

- k~st~

cost

b ombardme nt

blaI)ka~

bl;eI)ki''

bla!~k~

blank

kansas~

k~ns!s''

ka!nziz~

Kansas

pas~

p~s~~

pa!S~

pass

klase~

kla!s~~

klals''

class

grayas
,

gr~iyis~

gr;es''

grass

lastim~

l;estimi~

l~st~

last

~spaQydl+

~SP~QYoi.

sp~ni''

Spanish

bslut~

~bs~lut~~

~bs~luwt~

absolute

,
,

From these examples it is no doubt clear that many words which look easy, because they seem very much like English w<rds, are in
fact the most misleading because of their similarity. H you are alert to the possibility of this error, however, it is a relatively easy one to
correcto

NUEVE

2.9

UNIT 2
2.22
2.22.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

Voiced stop consonants

Idl

in Spanish

Idl

The problero that arises froro

is that it has two varieties of pronunciation which are, froro the point of view of English

speakers, actually different sounds; but froro the point of view of Spanish speakers, they are one and the same sound.
How can there be such a difference in point of view? A sound is, one would think, either the saroe as another or it isnte But
this is an instance where the ~comroon sense' viewpoint does not hold. Froro infancy speakers of Spanish are taught to ignore the difference between
comes after the

[d J and [d J. English speakers are taught to respect that difference hut ignore others (such as the puff of air that

Ip/of pill hut does not come after the Ipl

The symhol

[d]

of spill).

represents the initial sound of English den, do, die, dare, etc., but the tip of the tongue actually touches

the hack side of the upper teeth when this sound is produced in Spanish, whereas in English it tanches somewhat fW'ther back.
The symbol

[d]

represents the initial sound of English then, thee, the, those, that, there, etc., or the middle sound of

either, mother, other, father, etc., or the final sonnd of lathe, bathe.

However, it must he distinguished carefully from the other sound

which English writes with th, the initial sound of thin, thiek, thistle, or the middle sound of ether, Ethel, or the final sound oC bath.
This other sonnd is written

[i]

Examples of the two

in this hook, and it has no connection with

Idl

sounds are helow.

,
~4ond.t.

dad:6+

de<to+

,
solda<to+

,
ddos+

tildad:o+

gwardado+

d~zdeQyado.t.

kardad"o.t.

d~zctichado''

2.10

I dt

,
,

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPA1'lISH

UNIT 2

y ou will of comse notice that both kinds of / d / appear here, and wonder how you can tell which variety to expect. The rule is
reasonably clear and consistent, though in sorne dialect areas, slight variations may occur:

/n/ /1/ /J,/ /t/ vowels

pause
[d] appears after

x
x

[a] appears after

The real importance o producing the .right variety of /
helow, where the use of

[d]

/y/ /w/ other consonants

instead of

[a]

d/

at the rght time hecomes evident upon examinar.ion o the contrasts

in the left-hand column will cause the word to he misinterpreted as heing the one in the

right-hand column.

2.22.11

Exercise on / d /

and

/ r / between vowels

acta''

orl.J.

p1ctA.J.

p1rAJ,

t046.a.

tor6~

1046.1-

lor~.I-

ka4A~

karA.I-

ko46''

kor6.l-

sera''

mu46.l-

mur&''

mo46''

mor6'"

a4AJ,

ara'"

Rl14l~

m1rl.l-

,
se4A''

,
,

,
,

2.11

UNIT 2

2.22.2

SPOKEN SPANISH

Ibl

in Spanish

Ibl

The problem of
is similar to that of
noticeably different from the English point of vew.

Id/.

There are two varieties which are the same from the Spanish point of view but

The symbol [b] represents the initial sound of English words like be e, bUl, buy, bo"ow, the middle sound in baby, tabby, tubby,
the final sound in tub, hub, rub, {lub.
The symbol [b ] represents a sound which does not exist in English. It is produced by bringing the lips close to each other, but
not allowing them to touch, so that the air passes through them with a slight friction noise. The result sounds like a cross between a b, v,
and w. The easiest way to learn to produce it is to start out as though to make a [b ] in a word like about, but not allow the lips to touch
so that the resulting sound is v.like in character (but remember that it is not a v).
Examples of

[b ]

and

[b ]

follow:

,
silbab

,
nrbaba~

,
~mbaba

ezbo~aba~

kmbyab

zbobb''

2.12

DOCE

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

pause

/m/

Ji/
~t

/.~/

/t/

vowels

,iN..

other

consonan'~s

I
lb] appoars 0.fter

[b] appears after

To make a mistake in the production of

/b/

is not as serious as with the /

d/,

but errors can lead to misunderstanding. More

important, there is no v sound in Spanish, even though it is in the writing system. The Spanish sound which Americans mar hear as v in a
word like Havana is actually the

2.22.3

[bJ sound.

g/ io Spaoish

The problem of

/9/

is similar to that of

/d/ and Ib/.

There are two varieties which are the same from the Spanish point of

view but noticeably different from the English poiot of view.

The symbol
sound in

t~,

[9] represents the initial sound of English words like go, get, got, guess, the middle sound in ago, again., the final

tag, tog.

The symbol

[g.J

represents a sound which is heard only rarely in English, in a word like sugar. lt is produced by raising the back

part of the tongue up towards the roof of the mouth as though to make a

[g ]but without allowing the tongue to touch, so that the air is free to

pass through with a slight friction noise.

TRECE

2.13

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH
Examples ol

[g ]

and

[g]

lollow:

galgo-l.

stgalg6-1.

,
gag-l.
,
gregoryo-l.
,
gager-l.
,
griI)gad'o-l.
,

elgago-l.

lagr9ant~

lgorgA.J.

ezgregoryo

agI)grenars~-I.

As with /

d/

and

/b/,

zgger-l.

the distrihution ol the two varieties of /

[9] appears after

pause

[ 1)]

/1/

[9J appears after

/~/

g/

is lairly clear and consistent:

/t/ vowels y

other consonants

x
x

To make a mistale in the proouction of /

g/ is not serious, hut unless you learn to produce the

[9]

variety you ~ill find that it is

difficult to identy \\hen you are listening to a Spanish speaker. So for the purpose of con prehension it is worth the trouble to master it.

2.14

CATORCE

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.23

Vibrants

I r/

I rr /

and

in Spanish

Even though we write these sounds with the letter

/r/-sounds do not even vaguely resemble the /
English

T"

the student should take special nole of the very important fact that these

r /-sounds that occur in most varieties of English. Any attempt to transfer one's

r lover into Spamsh will result in utter failure to produce a satisfactory imitation of the Spanish sound.

You hay<,

a}r~ady (2.22.10 gOIle through a session of drill-wcrk on the difference between / r / and the variety of

that appears between vowel-eontrasts like

which is so much like English

Now it is necessary to distinguish this SAl.1&gle /

2.23.1

The

Exercise on

IrI

and

r /

d/

(the one

or d or dd in words like Betty, cottage, lettuee, better, wader, waiteT, shutter, shudder) from the

I rrl is a rapid trill of the tongue-t:p, and it can usually be learned only by careful imitation.
js to help you hear and learn to reproduce the difference between the two kinds o / r l.

double / rr

l.

tt

[tet!] .. [tr!].

Irrl

The following drili

between vowels

per6.1.

perr6''

kar6J.

karr6.1.

,
par~
,
barA.!.
,
kor6.s.
,

,
,

parrA'"

barrA'"

korr6''

~er6.J.

~err6''

y.ero.J.

y.err6''

foro.J.
,
fyero.!.
,
amar.!.

forr6.!.

fyerr6.a.

lmarr.J.
2.15

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

Not only is the Spanish I r quite different from the English r when it occurs between vowels, as in the preceding drill; it is also quite
different in association with consonants. Take the Spanish word [trde~ ] for example. Your first attempt wiH probably sound something
like the English words tar day. If you will try to make it sound more like totter-they (spoken rapidly), you will come pretty close to the Spanish
pronunc iation.
The following drill will allow you to practice I r / i n aH combinations with other consonants.
2.23.2

Excercise on

Irl

before and after consonants

pront~

kwerp~

grand~

marg~

prl.m6~

torpe~

frl.~

mrfl.l~

tres~

kart~

fra5~

perfl.l~

trat~

pwert~

farsa~

krud~

ierka~

J.r5~

,
,

,
,
,

kre~

brsl.l~

broma~

drama~

,
drog

,
graiys

2.16

,
park
,

arbl
,
- kurb
,
tard~

arhntl.n~

srhyo~

,
drmi
,
arm~

gward~

,
byernes

gr9ant~

orn~

DIECISEIS

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

Whenever / r / occurs at the very end of an utteranee (not the end of a word, hut the end just hefore pause), and especially
when that final syllable is a stressed syllable, it has a different pronunciation from what is heard elsewhereo lt is more like
hut the vocal cords do not vibrate during ito The effeet is almost like combining

/rr/,

/r/ with /s/ except that the tongue -tip remains

up at the end. This sound can he practiced by imitation o the following words.

2.23.3

Exercise on Spanish

IrI

at the end o an utterance

,
s~Qyor~

Ablar~

nakar~

et~r~

,
rreb61ber+

kan!lr~

,
rrebolber+

martir+

In the preceding pages the gross differences in the pronunciation of sounds that are similar in Spanish and English have heen
illustrated aBd discussed. These are the differenees' which if unmastered will cause great diffieulty and misunderstanding in an attempt
to communicate in Spanish, and their mastery is therefore of the utmost importanee to a student. However, there are other pronunciation
features that should be understood and learned, to reduce the 'gringo accent' that will inevitably distraet the listener's attention and
thus impair the eommunication efficiencyo The following lists of similar sounding words pronounced by a Spanish speaker and an English
speaker respeetively will illustrate important differeBces in the pronunciation of what might be considered the same vowels. Note especially that the English vowels seem to he more prolonged, more drawn out, and especially note that they do not ,seem to maintain the same
quality from the beginning to the end of the vowel, whereas the Spanish vowel does.
DIECISIETE

2.17

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.24

Vowel nuclei in Spanish

2.24.1

English

/ey/ and Spanish/e/

day
Kay
say
bay
Fay

May
lay

2.24.2

E.1isIa

/owl

ud Spush

/0/
DO

low

yoe
SO

2.18

,
501

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.24;3

EaglisL

UNIT 2

/1Y/

and Spaniah / ~/
me

tea
see

,
51...

Lee
Dee

kaee

2.24;4

Euglish

/uw/

.DeI Spaa.1t

ul
,
too

tU...

sue

SU...

peell

,
ptf.l-

eoo

ku...

DIECINUEVE

Loo

,
bu.l.
,

moo

mu''

2.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

Generally if you are imitating a native or near-native pronunciation at full normal colloquial speed, errors of the type illustrated aboye
are not likely to be obtrusive. Probably the most important detail to lemember is to say words which rontain these vowels without allowing the
quality to change in the course of producing them. For

/u/

and

/0/,

this means rounding the lips during the production of the preceding

consonant so that the lips are properly rounded in anticipation of the rounding required for the vowel.

2.25

Lateral

-/1/ in Spanish

/1/ in English is a sound that is produced by raising the tip of the tongue up to touch the roof ol the mouth in such a way
that the air column is forced to pass around either side of it: tms way o producing a sound is called lateral (Le. 'side') articulation.
In Spanish, the

/1/

is actually a laterally-released

[d],

and it has a very different sound from the English

to follow by manipulating yotr oV/n tongue, a technical description wHI be helpful: produce a

[d],

/1/.

If you will try

[d ] as in the word did. Notice that to make the

you release the whole tip of the tongue so that the air can flo'W suddenly out Beross the top of jt. Now instead of releasing the entire tongue

downward, keep the tip locked in its

[d ]

position at the end of the word did but release the air through one side as though you were going lo- say

the word diddle, but without lowering the back part of the tongue as you would in diddle. If you have followed these instructions, you are producing
a Spanish

/1/.
Compare the following pairs which are approximately alike except for the

2.25.1

Exercise on Spanish

and try to imitate the difference.

/1/
,

2.20

/1/ -sounds

feel

fl.-l
,

hotel

otel~

el

e1

,
dell

del~

coal

tall

tal~

tool

ko'1
,
tul

VEINTE

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.26

Voiceless stops

2.26.1

I pI

in Spanish

It was mentioned earlier that in English there are at least two conspicuously different Idnds of p-sounds: the p of pin, pUl, which
has the puf of air called aspiration, and the p of spin, spill, which has no aspiration.
The Spanish

Ipl

is always produced without aspiration. One way for an American to get at the mastery of it is by thinking of

an s before Spanish words that begin with

Ipl

in order to transfer the English pattern of producing unaspirated p after s.

The fol1owing list will give yon a hasis for comparing the p-sound in the two languages and learning to reproduce the difference.

2.26.11

Exercise on Spanish

/pl
pace
Peru

VEINTIUNO

pawn

pan~

par

par~

pore

por~

pone

pon

pooh

pu~

plan

plah~

2.21

UNIT 2

2.26.2

SPOKEN SPANISH

/t/
The

in Spanish

/t/

problem is Hite the

Ip/

problem: in English it is aspirated, in Spanish it is not. In addition, the tongue touches a point

tbat is more forward in the mouth to p-oduce a Spanish

2.26.21

Exercise on Spanish

/t/:

it literally touches the back side of the upper teeth, which it does not do in English.

/t/
,
tea

t1.-~

ten

te-n-l.
,
ta-s-l.
,
tabu-.!.

toss
taboo

2.26.3

/k/

in Spanish

H yon have mastered

2.26.31

Exercise on Spanish

/pl

and

/t/, /k/

will he a breeze since it involves again the aspiration probler.l.

/k/
,
Kay

kJ.lo-l.
,
ke--l.

call

ka-l.!.

can

ka-o.!.
,

cafe

kAfe- J.

kilo

,
,

2.22

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.27

Voiceless spirants

2.27.1

/ s/ in Spanish

Spanish has an [S] and a [Z ] ,but unlike English they are considered as variants of a single sound, / S/ . That is to say, two
Spanish words are never distinguished solely by the difference [S-Z ] as are the English words 'seal and 'zeal'. Note the following pairs
of words in Spanish which have partIy similar sequences of sounds.
2.27.11

Exercise on the distrihution of the variants of / S /

,
rrazgar~

,
espelta~

,
azn~

m~zmo+

h~gaer~

,
dzttQyaer.J.
,
dizgusto+
,
dezd:e~

,
,
ezd.J. (ez d)

2.27.12

esposo~

,
ask+
,
mJ.sto+

,
desteQyir.J.
,

diskurs.J.
,
,
dest~ (de
est)
,.

Discussion of the distrihution of the variants of / S /

You will notice that the [z ] occurs in Spanish only in a syllahle-final position hefore a voiced consonant, namely [b, d, g,
Anywhere else, [s] occurs, except hefore semi-vowels
and
where both [s] and [z ] occur, depending on

m, n, 1, rJ.

VElNTrrRES

/y/

/w/

2.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

whether the syllable begins with the

/5/ or with the semivowel.

Since there is no choice on the part o the speaker-only one or the other

occurs in aoy given situation, but not both-they are not in contrast and belong to only one basic sound unit,
But in sorne dialects and styles of speaking Spani~hf another variety of

[S]

/5/.

occurs. Note these pronunciations of some Caribbean

and South American dlalects.

,
bwena noche h .,
'h

eh' h

komoe
,.. tau,. t''
,
h
keora
,.
,..
,.

The / S / is not dropped entirely in these dialects. Actually there are sorne rather complex differences in distribution rom one
dialect to another, so that Argentineans may say that Chileans 'eat their s's't, and Colombians will say the Argentineans eat their s's,
and so on, without any of these stereotypes reflecting the facts. Thus, for example, sinee the Chileans use the
aH syllable-final occurrences, they are accused of eating their s's by Argentineans who use the

[h] variety of

/51

in

[h] variety only in those syllable - final

ocurrences that are foHowed by a syllable which begins with a consonant. Such details are not pertinent to the development of your pronun..
ciation, since in any case you should imitate your instructor's pronunciation. But you may hear other varieties sorne day, and it is well to
understand the patterns they follow. Remember that in no dialect does the syllable-initial /

S/ appear as

[h] .

VEIN'FICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

There are certain groups of words in which the / S / will bother you more than elsewhere, because the words sound familiar and lead
-channels. Such are the words listed below.
you back nto English /

z/

2.27.13

Typical errors from English / Z / -influence on Spanish / S /

CORRECT

YOUR PROBABLE ERROR

,
kansas-!.
,

,
kanzas''
,
imflwenza.t.

imflwen~''

bn~iwela''
~ksamen~s-!.

,
rrad'n.t.
,
dihisyon.t.
,
prposito.t.
,
prsic!ent-!.
,
prsent''

,
bisita-r-!.
,
sntarros.t.

VEINTICINCO

!nflwenz~-!.

influenza

ven~zwela''

Venezuela
exams

rrzoo.t.
,

r1yzi n .t.

dibi~yd'n-!.

reason
division

prapaz1~in''

prpo~it6-!.

pr!ittent~''

pr.!ent~.t.

,
prsnt~yons''

Kansas

,
gza!inz -!.

g~amenes-!.

,
pr~~entyonl!s''

bizita-r.t.
,
sntrrozA.t.
,
rr6zll.ndA.t.

ENGLISH SPELLING

,
ka!nzis .,
,

FAMILIAR ENGLISH
PRONUNCIATION

,
prezidint-!.

,
priyzent-!.
,
prezint-!.
,

pr~zintey~in''

,
v1zit-!.

proposition
president
present
present
presentation
visit

s~nt~ rowz~-!.

Santa Rosa

rowza11nd~-!.

Rosalinda

2.25

UNIT 2
2.27.14

SPOKEN SPANISH
American Spanish / S

and Castilian

/'i/

In Castilian Spanish, a dialect used in some areas of Spain, but having a prestige status that far outweighs ita geographical distribution,
the sounds / S /

and

/ ~ / are dUferent. The / S / is pronounced with the tongue tip raised toward the top of the mouth, so that an effect

likE" a very slight lisp s noticeable. The / ~ / is pronounced something like the tA of the English word tlain. Thus words like the fol1owing,
which are alike in other dialects, are distinguished in Castilian Spanish.

,
kasa~

,
as~

,
peses''
,
kser''
,
pOS''

,
las~

ka*la
,
ai'"
,

la~~

pe~As''

,
k~er''

,
POfi~

masa~

ma~a''

,
losa''
,
pas''
,

,
lOfia''

asa~

,
pa~6''

,
a~a~

This distinction can be ignored by anyone who expects lo use Spanish amoag speakers of American Spanish dialects.
2.27.2

/h/

in Spanish

Another consonant that

maro an American accent is the /h/.

The followiag lists of similar soundiag words pronoUDced by an

English speaker and a Spanish speaker will illustrate the difference between English A and Spanisb
2.27.21

Exercise on Spanish

/h/

,
heater
hurrah
holly
hotter

2.26

/h/ .

h008egow

h1ra~

,
hrar''
,
hal.J.
,

hara.J.
,

h~gaet''

VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

,
hl.ldA~

Hilda
junta
aha
Mohican

2.27.22

DiscU8sion of Spanish

/h/

When you produce h in English your tongue is relaxed and low in your mouth, so that you merely breathe easily across it befare
beginning the vowel that follows. For a Spanish

/h/,

the tongue must be tenser and higher in the mouth, near the roof but not touching

it, so that more friction noise is created when air is forced pasto It is especially difficult fer an English speaker to produce Spanish

/h/

between vowels and after a stressed syllable as in /m~hl.ko.t. d~heme/, etc. Though always stronp;er than English h Spanish

/h/

carries more or less friction noise depending on the area of the Spanish speaking world. Listen carefully and imitate what you hear

to the best of yo1ll' ability.

2.28

Nasals and palatals

2.28.1

/n/ in Spanish

/n/ differs from English n in that it is usualIy produced against the back of the upper teeth, instead o on the guro ridge
aboye the teeth. ID this respect it is similar to Spanish /t/ and / d/ The correct articulation o /n/ is not too difficult for English
speakers, but there are a couple of combinations of /n/ plus another CODsonant that create problems.
Spanish

2.28.11

The cluster / n t

in Spanish
quantity

VEINTISIETE

Tonto

tant~

lentH

lente~

2.27

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

,
kantb~

canto

,
antJ.d'to
,
tant16
,
pJ.nt
,
hunt
,
,
sant-monikA-!.

antidote
Tantalus
pinto
junta
Santa Mnica

The close yoking of n t in English in words like the ones aboye, especially when not pronounced slowly and in expressions like '1 wanta',
does not happen in the pronun~ion of Spanish
where the
is clearly resonated through the nose before the
begins.

In ti ,

2.28.2

Inl

Itl

IQY land Iny lin Spanish

Speakers from practically aH dialect areas can, when they try, make a difference between forms with /QY/ and those with /ny/ . It
seems, however, that this difference is unimportant from the point of view of its limited usefulness, since the distinction is frequently obscured at
normal utterance speed. It is somewhat like the difference between medial tt and dd after stress in words like shutter and shudder: the difference
is there, and we can make it if we try to, but we usually do noto In the hierarchy of importance of the various details of learning Spanish pronunciation, this is one of the lasto

2.28.21

English

InJ.Y/ , /nyl and Spanish /QY/, /nyl

1.

uranium

raQYo
,

lineal

lJ.Qy~

matrimonial

2.28

,
mOQYo

,
rany
,
mtrimony6

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

,
6toryo.l.

Antony.l.

vineyard

la--!>1QyA~

IAb10yA~

minion

ffi1QY.l.

ffi1ny

onion

de-moQYo~

demonyo~

Hispania

spaQyA~

ispanyA

Hispaniola

~spaQyola

ispAnyola~

canyon

skaQY~

Askany

annuaI

aQYo~

herany~

pinion, pii10n

piQYoo+

opioyoh~

Antonio
linear

The English and Spanish pronunciations of /0/ and

/y/ together (columns 2 and 4) do not sound alike largely he cause in

English, the syllahle division is after the /n/, but in Spanish it is befare the /0/.

Column 3 realIy hardly needs to be given except

that purists would be uncomfortable if we failed to indicate that the contrast can he, and sometimes is, made.

2.28.3

/1 Y/ ,

2.28.31

English /Iiy/, /Iy/ and Spanish /Iy/,

/O)y/,. and / y/in Spanish

/Q)y/,

and

/y/

,
Balearic
polio
alias

VEINTINUEVE

dahlia

baIyA''

ba~a~

ba~A''

pavillion

poly''

poO}JO''

pO~O~

stallion

aIyas''

aO~as

a!; as~

2.29

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

malleable

Amelia

amalya~

. ('\1 ao ~
ama."

oleo

collier

olyo~

oO~o~

ama~a~
,
o~6~

oleography

goliard

olyaOr~

60)~aOr

O!:l a r~

Ilion

million

J.1yoh~

miQ~oon~

alien

billion

ely6~

eO~

Quintilian

quintillion

f:Lly6~

fJ.Q~o~

mi-y.~

The preceding lists are not so much fer dri1l as for i1lustration of an important and widespread dialect difference. To distinguish
the important dialect difference, the

[1]

of the forms in colurnn four is placed in parenthesis,

/O)y/

,since it drops in a1l dialects

except in sorne parts of Castile in Spain, in upland Colombia, Ecuador, Bolivia, Paraguay, and a few other areas. In rnost of these dialects
the minimal difference between
as the

/ny/ -/QY/

the [~] variant of /

2028.4

/1Y/ and

/0Jy/

(the similar forms in columns 3 and 4) can be made, but has the same limited usefulness

distinction. For a1l the other dialect areas, the similar forms of columns 4 and 5 are not distinguished; both have

y/ , described

be lowo

/y/

in Spanish

/y/

has two variants which are obvious to the English ear because they are like two entirely separate sounds in English. We write

these variants with

[y]

for the one that is the y's of rea, res, bar, bur, rache, etco, and with [~J for the one that varies a1l the way from

[ y] to (J) as in judge. In the English words below, either of the two words on each line begins with a sound that is equa1ly likely to occur
in the Spanish iterns of the right-hand column.

2.28.41

English

y and

and Spanish

(y]
,

yes

Jess

~eso~

yellow

2.30

jello

~e16''
TREINTA

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

,
yah

jaw

~a~

yoe

Joe

~O~

uke

juke

yearn

germ

~U9t
,
~erno~

yabber

jabber

~abAt

yea

jay

ye~

,
,

In Spanish these are variants of the same sound. It often puzzles an Engliah speaker to hear both variants because he does not
know which one to imitate. Actually both Spanish varianta may be used by a single speaker. The significant difference in English ia no
longer significant, and you must learn to ignore it.
Not a11

/y/

's in Spanish can be pronounced both ways: only those WhlCh are ayllable initial, and especially those which are

utterance initial. Another way o saying this is that Spanish

[y] will appear at the end of a word or before or after consonants within a

word, prettY much like the English y. In other positions the Spanish

/y/

varies from a

[y],

to sounds English speakers would inter-

pret as the z in azure or the j of judge. As you have probably noticed, we have transcribed this latter variant as
from the

2.29

[y],

to distinguish it

[y] which cannot be pronounced like English j.

Conclus ion
There are, be it admitted, other difficulties in the pronunciation 01 Spanish than those which have been pointed out here. One is

the handling o juncture - that is, the way words run together in a sequence. We call attention to this by the way in which we transcribe
utterances in the text (without spaces separating words). Anolher is the problem of pronouncing various unfamiliar consonant sequences
like

/bw/, /trw/, /yw/

etc. These we are inclined to leave to the correction of the pronunciation of complete phrases as they

happen to turn up - not on the assumption that they are less important, but because there are no drills which will help the student learn
them except repetition o the utterances themselves. If the student has learned to make aH the contrasts describ~d in the foregoing material,
and to avoid the most serious pitfaUs that have also been described, he is weH on his way toward accurate pronunciation o Spanish and
should find that mastery of the ulterances comes much easier than it otherwise would.

TREINTA Y UNO

2.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2
2.3

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

2.31

Pattern drills

2.31.1

Sorne dernonstratives

A.

. of pattern (I)
Presentatlon

lLLUSTRATIONS

,
kes.s.J.
,

2 estle~n~eni~ero.J.

What's this?
a, an (f.)
That's a chair.

kes.sto.J.
,
un.J.
,
,

4 es~lspnaS1~a~

Qu es eso?

Esto es un cenicero.
Qu es esto?
una

Eso es una silla.

(1) The 'presentation of pattern' is a device that will be used here and in subsequent pattern drills to briefly explain the grammar
principIes and chart the illustrative forms that make up the pattern. It will usuaUy consist of three parts: illustrations, extrapolation, and
notes.

The illustrations are a group of sentences, sorne of which have previously appeared as basic sentences and sorne of which have noto
New sentences can be identified by the appearance of an English translation in the left hand column. These 'structural filler' sentences con..
tain forms needed to fiU out the pattern of the point being drilled and should be memorized just as basic sentences. In these sentences the
forms to be drilled are underlined or italicized.
The extrapolation is an arrangement of the forms to be drilled that shows the relationships between these forms. These relationships are analytically 'extrapolated' and shown in a chart for the benefit of those who can grasp the relationships more easily when the; are
presented visually in a spacial configuration.
The noteli, when they occur, are designed to very briefly explain the extrapolation.
A fuller discussion of the pattern is presented after the drills in section 8, entitled 'discussion of pattern'. Further explanation
and cCXTelation with other grammar points can be Iound in the appendix.

2.32

TREINTA Y DOS

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH
That's good.

,
esoezbwn
,.
,

Translate this.

trat!u~k~stb''

Repeat that.

7 rrep1t~sb

Esa es bueno.
Traduzca esta.
Repita esa.

EXTRAPOLA TION

sto

th1S

so

that
NOTES

a. English 'this' and 'that' can sometimes be translated

/ sto/ and /so/ in Spanish.
2.31.11

Response drill (1)

(1) This and subsequent response drills are made up of four groups of questions which are designed to elicit answers that require the use
of the grammar point previously illustrated, but at the same time to insure answers that are completely natural in their most probable contexts. The
four groups are: (1) choice questions, which normally require full sentence replies. (2) Information questions, the answers to which are listed and
can be given satta vace just before the questions. These will also normally require full senlence replies. (3) Yes-no questions to be answered
'no'. The correct answer is listed and can be given satta vace just before the questions. These too will normally require full sentence replies.
(4) Yes-no questions to be answered 'yes'. These will normally require just / s / or a partial sentence reply.

The student's cue for the kind of answer he should give is the presence or absence of a satta vace prompting before the question and whether
the question has an intonation ending with a / / or
The first and second groups end with / / and require answers which are chosen by the
student in group one and suggested satta vace by the instructor in group two. The third and fourth groups end with
and require /n6 / with a
correction which is given satto voce by the instructor in group three and
/with or without additional elaboration, usually in the form of a partial
sentence, in group four.

/t /.

/5

/t /

The student should not need to look at the materials to do this drill orally.

TREINTA Y TRES

2.33

UNrr 2

SPOKEN SPANISH
lladel Problem:

,.

,
( el,entro.J.]
,
[ nsyetA.J.]

,.

1 &~est2esp'Qyo1121~g16s~

,
2 kes.6so.J.
,.,
3 As..es.t2unwebe1
,
,
4 As.es.ountres t

"

Model Aua~r:

1
2

3
4

esot

6sAsplQyol~

,
,
esot 6sAltentr6.J.
,
,
,
estot nd~6~nsyete~
,
,
,
estot s i'' ,~ntres~

Model Problem:
1 Ea eato eapalol o ..Ja?
(el celltro) 2 Qu ea eso?
(- aiete) 3 Ea eato UD BlIeve?
4 Ea eso UD trea?

Model A_wer:

1 Eso? Ea ea..aol.
2 Eso? Es el ceBtro.
3 Esto? No, ea _ alete.
4 Esto? Si, es UD trea.

TBElNTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

..
~estQunlapl~1Qunaplma~
,.

.., . ..

2 ~est~unasl~a1QunamsA.J.

,
[n11bro+]

3 ke~sto~

..

5 ~~es~unaplumat

[nplum.J.J

6 eaestQunlapl~t

,.
,

.,
,
estot no1s~nlapi~+
,.,
,
esot no+s~nplum~
,

,.

[nlapi+]

".

..,

7 es.es~unotel t

,.

8 eaest~un~enl~erot

(un lpiz)
(una pluma)

TREINTA Y CINCO

..' .

s.esQunaslC1)jat

(un libro)
(un cenicero)

,
,
esot s;n11bro.J.
,
,
estot ~uneni~er6+

[n~nlerb.J.J 4 ke~s6''

,
,
esot -s..unapluma.J.
,.
,
estot s.unmesa.J.

,.,
,
esot s11~nbtl.J.
,.,
,
esot si+~neni~ero.J.
, .,
,
estot si.J.spns1illy.J.

1 Es esto un lpiz o UDa pluma?

2 Es esto una silla o una mesa?

Eso? Es una pluma.

Esto? Es una mesa.

3 Qu es esto?
Qu es eso?

Eso? Es un libro.
Esto? Es un cenicero.

5 Es eso una pluma?

6 Es esto un lpiz?

Esto? No, es un l&piz.

Eso? No, es una pluma.

7 Es eso un hotel?
8 Es esto un cenicero?
9 Es eso una silla?

Eso? Si, es un hotel.

Eso? Si, es un cenicero.
Esto? Si, es una silla.

"

2.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 2

2.31.12

Translation drill (1)

,
1 That's good.

eSQlezbwn~

Eso es bueno.

2 This isn't Spanish.

. ". .
estoln~es~spaQy61~

3 How's that going?

ketallbas6~

Qu tal va eso?

4 What's that?

kes.sb~

Qu es eso?

Qu es esto?

."

5 What's this?

,
kes.st
,

6 That's too mucho

es~ezmcho

7 1 don't want that until

tomorrow.

1 want that later.

lO This is going very well.

11 The young lady wants this.

(1)

2.36

Eso es mucho.

nokyerQesQlstamaQyana~

No quiero eso hasta maana.

,.

kyerS?esollwg~

9 1 regret this very muc h.

Esto no es espaol.

Quiero eso luego.

."

syentomuch~lst6~

, ." ,
estobalmuybyn
,.
,

laseQyor1talkyersto~

Siento mucho esto.

Esto va muy bien.
La seorita quiere esto.

Translate the English sentences to Spanish. The student should cover the Spanish answers while doing this drill orally.

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 2

SPOKEN SPANISH

B.

'
'f
DISCUSSlon
o pattern (1)

Basically, / so/ is used to refer to ,an object which is relatively nearer the person being addressed than it is to the person
speaking, whereas /sto/ refers to an object relatively neare!" to the person speaking. Roughly, then, they correspond to the English
words that and this, but in Spanish the ending
on these two words indicates that th: speaker does not know what the Spanish word
for the object is (as when asking the question 'What is this?'), or that the speaker 1.S aIlswering a question in which /sto/ or /so/

/-0/

is used, or that the speaker s referring to a 5ituation or set of circumstances instead of to an object(as in /~sQesbwno"'.1.
Otherwise the speaker would choose these forms with other endings, which will be presented in Unit 7.

(1) This and subsequent discussions of pattern are not designed for use in the classroom. They are explanations of the structural
patterns of the drills for the orientation of students who feel that such explanations are helpful to their eHorts to master the langua~e. Classroom time should be reserved for drilling the language itself, leaving grammar explanations largely for home study or special grammar seSSlons
af the cIass.

TREINTA Y SIETE

2.37

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH
3.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White's arrival in Surlandia.

John White, an American arriving fOl' the first time in Surlandia, a country south of the United States, has been met at the airport aDel
seen through customs to his hotel by American friends. They leave him at the hotel, were he checks in at the desk and then is accompanied
to his room by the porter carrying his bags. He arrives in the room.

ENGLISH SPELLING

AID TO LISTENING

to you

le

,
gust~

(it) pleases, is pleasing (to please)

to you is pleasing

gstaer.l.

gusta (gustar)
le gusta

,
el-kwart~

the room

Por1er

Do you like the room? (1)

SPANISH SPELLING

el cuarto

legust~elkwartot

Mozo

Le gusta el cuarto?

,
me--gusta~

to me is pleasing

IVAite
Yes, 1 do.

S 1' mg U S t

IVAite
S, me gusta.

,
(you) want (to waDt)

me gusta

kyere~

krex.l.

the water
mineral
soda water

UNO

quiere (querer)
el agua (f.)

. ..

agwa-m~nerl

mineral
agua mineral

3.1

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

Porter
(
Do you want soda water? 2)

...,

Mozo
Quiere usted agua mineral?

kyer~ustectlagwam1nera11

,
,
subaJ Sb~r~

rise, bring up (to go up)

suba (subir)
la (.)

it

..
(3)
brmg lt up to me

subamela~

sbamela

later

despus

White
Yes. Bring it up to me later.

,
,

(you) need (to need)

ne~slt~ ne~sitar~

necesita (necesitar)

anything, something

a190~

algo

else

algo-ms~

anything else

Porter
Do you need anything else?

near

(4)

near to
here

3.2

White
S. Sbamela despus.

s~i submelaldespws~

,.

.,

ne~es1talaomast

ms
algo ms

Mozo
Necesita algo ms?

,
~erk~

cerca

~erk--de~

cerca de

aqu

DOS

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

.. ...

White
Ves, Is the American Embassy'

,
,
,
,.
si stalembaha~amer~kanal

IVhite
Si. Est la Embajada Americana cerca de aqu?

near here?

,
far

lehs

the avenue

l~-abn~d"a

la avenida

Columbus

koloh

Coln

Porter
No. It's quite a distance.

On Columbus avenue.

, ,
n estalehs
,.

..

enlben~~al~eko16n~

Mozo
No. Est lejos.

En la avenida de Coln.

that

que

.,
(5)
. h
t here 1S t at, 1t s necessary

hay que

to take
the taxi
It's necessary to take a taxi.

,
l-taksi.f.
,
.,
ayketomaruntksi.f.

Thanks. Here you are.

Porter
Thank you very much, sir.

the elevator

9ra~yaS'' ak1ty~ne~

tomar
el taxi

IVhite

TRES

lejos

mucha z gryaslseQy6r.f.

Hay que tomar un taxi.

IVhite
Gracias. Aqui tiene.
Mozo
Muchas gracias, seor.

el ascensor

3.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT S

fue yoa goiag dowD in tbe e levator?

... .

bahfenelas (~ensort

Baja en el ascensor?

now

or~

ahora

same

m1zm6~

mismo

right now

aora~zm6''

ahora mismo

"mte
Yes. Right now.

,.

fhite
Si, ahora mismo.

si~ aoramzm6~

the box, the cuhier'a desk

Where's the cashier's desk?

la caja

,.

dondestalakha~

D6nde est la caja?

first

primer~

prlmer6~

the floor

el-p~sb~

el piso

the entrance

l~-entrad"a~

la entrada

Porter
On the first floor to tlle right
of the entrance.

primer (primero)

Inl.lprimerpsQI illcterecha Icte1lentrctl''

Mozo

En el p.oimer piso, a la derecha

de la entrada.

(Mr. White goes down on the elevatar and ap to lbe cubier's window.)

3.4

(you) can (to be able)

pwe<!e~ p6d'er~

paede (poder)

to change, exchange

kambyr~

cambiar

to change fOl' me

kambyarm~~

cambiarme

,
,

CUATRO

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANlSH

,
some, a few

uns''
,

the dollar

~l-dolr.l-

el dlar

some dollars

n oz-d olre s''

unos dlares

IV/aite
Can you change a few don. . f. me?
Cashier
Yes. How many?
how, at what
the change, exchange
IV hite
Ten. What's the rate o exchaoge?

unos

-.

pwe4e'kmbyarmt'~n6z401are51

,
,
51-+ kwantos
,
a-komo+
,
el-kamby6.t.
,

,.,

dye''

akomo~stal~lkmby6.t.

)f/aite
Puede cambiarme unos dl.ea?
Cajero
Si. Cuntos?
a

cmo

el cambio

White
Diez. A cmo est el cambio?

,
the bill

el-biO~ete

el billete

the bilIs

16z-bi('r~etes+

los billetes

,
el-cheke

the check
Cashier
In bilIs or in a check?

,.

AmbiC',yetes IQenchk.l-

,
est+
,
byahero''

this
traveler
J' /aite
This trave ler'. check.

CINCO

,.

estecheke'hyah6r6~

el cheque
Cajero
En billetes o en cheque?
este
viajero
IV/aite
Este cheque v.iajero.

3.5

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

,
enton~s''

then

Casbier
Five to one, then.

it

entonces

..

Cajero
A cinco por uno, entonces.

a~1~koporn~lent6nies~

lo (m.)

.
.
komoloky~re~
,

How do you want it?

Cmo lo quiere?

the coin, the change

Vlhite
Eight in bilIs and two in change.

la moneda

. .

,
kwesta+

(it) costs (to cost)

,
How much does a taxi to the
American Embassy cost?

3.6

,..

,
,.
ochQemb1Q~etestidos"enmoneta~

White
Ocho en billetes y dos en
moneda.

,
kostar~

cuesta (costar)

...

kwantokwest~untaks~lal~embaha4amer1kna~

Cunto cuesta un taxi a la

Embajada Americana?

the peso

,
l-peso+
,

el peso

the pesos

los-pesos~

los pesos

less

menos~

menos

SEIS

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

Cashier
Two pesos more

Ol'

less.

for, in exchange fOl'

por

1 a-im f rmA i yon

the information

WAite
Thanks for the information.

3.10

Cajero
Dos pesos ms o menos.

dospsz Im~mns~

la informacin

graiyas Iprl~imf6rma~yon

IfAite
Gracias por la informacin.

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) As can be seen by comparing the literal translation in the build-up with the free translation given in this sentence, there is simply
not any literal way to equate the English idea of 'liking' something with a word in Spanish which takes an object as the English word like
does. Rather, one has to say that the object which he likes is 'pleasing' to him. Thus '1 like it' becomes 'It's pleasing to me'.

(2) Agua mineral, which literally means 'mineral water', may be carbonated 'soda water' or it may simply be purified drinking water.
The terms used for purified drinking water differ from one area to another. Sometimes such water is called by the trade name of the company
that distributes it, such as 'Agua Gitig' in Ecuador, or 'Agua Chuqtiitanta' in Peru. At other times it is called agua cristal. At any rate,
one should be certain that he finds out what to ask for, since the public water supply is safe in only a ver y few places in the Spanish-speaking
world.

/me/

(3) The forms

and /la/ in the utterance
be discussed in detail beginning with Unit 10.

/sbamela/

are called clitic pronouns, or, for short, just clitics. They will

(4) Note that the word /~rka/ 'near' modifies a verb, but does not function as a phrase relator. The English word near, however,
functions in both capacities. That is, in English we can say 'He didn't even get near' or 'He didn't even get near the house.' The Spanish
equivalent of near is /~rka/, in the first example, but /~rkal plus
'near of, near to', in the second.

del,

(5) This idiom is especially useful to bear in mind. It is the equivalent of several English expressions. The closest is 'It is necessary
to.. .', but the most frequent is 'Y ou've got to .. .' or 'Y ou have to.. .' or 'Ya gotta .. .', in all three of which the you. does not refer to you
personally, but really means something like 'Qne should.. .' or 'One ought to.. '.

SIETE

3.7

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

3.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

3.21

Pattern drills

3.21.1

Gender o singular nouns and adjectivee

Presentation o pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

,.
1.

pasem~erol1br+

Pseme el libro.

2.

,
demelaplmA+
,
,

Dme la pluma.

3.

tyen~unlap~t

Tiene un lpiz?

..

..

,
Do you have a pen?

,.

4.

tyen~unaplumat

Tiene una pluma?

5.

,
muchogsto+

Mucho gusto.

,
,
tyen.J.. tener.J..

(it) has (to have)

, .,
6.

tiene (tener)

tyenemuchagwat
,
,.

Tiene mucha agua?

7.

este~hekebyahro+

8.

, .,
,.
dondestall~embahadamer1kn+

Este cheque viajero.

Dnde est la Embajada
Americana?

EXTRAPOLA TION
Masculine
artiele
noun
Definite
Indefinite

3.8

el
un

lbro
lbro

Feminine
artiele
noun

la
una

msa
msa

'the'
'a(n)'

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

Gender fOl'DlS 01 adjectives

Masculine

Feminine

........ a
........ e

........ e
NOTES
a. A11 Spanish nouns can be divided into two groups, or subclasses, ca11ed 'masculine' and 'feminine'.
b. Spanish articles, like many other Spanish adjectives, have distinct masculine and feminine forms.
c. The masculine form of adjectives appears only with masculine nouns, the feminine form with feminine nouns.
d. Many Spanish adjectives have gender marking endings (distinct masculine and feminineforms/mcho - mcha/); others,
primarily those ending in
or in a consonant /minerl, trs, sy~te/t etc.), do not have different endings
when used with masculine or feminine nouns.

/-e/

3 2111

' , dr'll
Substltutlon
I (1),
- Item s ub"
stItutlon
Model Problem:
AID TO LISTENING

..

SPANISH SPELLING

es t~es.unlpi~.J.

Esto es un lpiz.

_______ ~en1ro.J.

_ _ _ _ cenicero.

..

Mode 1 Answer:

.. ..

est~e~unien1ro.J.

Esto es un cenicero.

(1)
This and subsequent substitution dri11s are designed to elicit !rom the student slight variations on ~iven sentences. These variations
concern the structural relationships within the grammar point being drilled, such as the agreement between articles and nouns in the present dri11.
The model problem and answer are given only this once. A11 subsequent substitution dri11s are to be carried out in the same way.

The student should nol need to look at the materials to do this drill orally. Both the Aids too Listening and the Spanish Spelling are given
for a11 dri11s (on top haH and bottom half of page, respectively); they are for the instructor to use in class and for the student to use in home study:
not in class.
NUEVE

3.9

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

.. .

es~eaunaplma

otl

----- .

_ _ _ _bl0\Jte
m~sa

----....;
-----11bro

...,.
~~estounabenl~at
,.
., .
-----moneaat
, .
-----'kwarto1
, .
_ _ _ _s lQ:Y a t
, .
_ _ _ _ es 01

e s o,. e S.U not 1

eSQes.umbl0)jt

esoes.unams
A
,.

..

e s o,. e s.un 1 f bro

~p.

1 Eso es una pluma.

hote 1.
_ _ _ _ billete.
_ _ _ _ mesa.

----

----libro.
2 Es esto una avenida?

moneda?

cuarto?

silla?

peso?

3.10

...,.

,
SEstounamoneaa1
,.

s.estouI)kwartot
,.

.., .

s.es tounas
10\J.a1
,.

,.

s.es toumo
es o t
,.

un bote 1.
un billete.
una mesa.
un libro.

Es o
Eso
Eso
Eso

es
es
es
es

Es
Es
Es
Es

esto
esto
esto
esto

una moneda?
un cuarto?
una silla?
un peso?

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

dondestallakha~

. .
. .

-----embahaa~
. .

_ _ _ _a,s(i)ens6r~

dondesta I ~las(~ ens6r~

. .

graiyas Iporlaplma~

. .. ..

___________ienl~~rO~

gra~yaslporelienl~~r

____________lmformaiy6n

graiyaslporl~lmformaiy6n~

___________ lpi~~

gra~yaslpor~lpii~

____________ chk

graiYoslporelchk~

. . .

ONCE

.,

dondestal~lseQy6r~

_________seQyorfta~

.
, . , .. .
dondestallaseQyorfta~
, . ,
. .
dondestall~embahaa~
, . ,
. .
,

_____seQy6r~

,.
,

. . . .

..

3 Dnde est la caja?

seor?

seorita?

Embajada?

ascensor?

Dnde
Dnde
Dnde
Dnde

est el seor?
est la seorita?
est la Embajada?
est el ascensor?

4 Grac ias por la

_____
_____
_____
_____

Grac ias
Grac ias
Grac ias
Gracias

por
por
por
por

pI urna.
cenIcero.
informacin.
lpiz.
cheque

el cenicero.
la inf ormac in.
e 1 lpiz.
el cheque.

3.11

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT3

,
5

a~ ~ s t a ~ 1 gw

"..

,.

a~~stalaseQy6r

___ msa

a~estalamsa+
n

___ entrda~

a~~stal~entrda

...

.,

,
,
a:Lestaeltksi+

___ tksi
6

___ seQy6ra~

dondestallaseQyoramer~kna~

,
seQyor

"

."

dondestal~lseQyoramer:Lkn+

seQy6r~ta

dondestallasQyr~tamer~kna~

tel
,
mneeta

..

, ."
,
.
dondestalelbtelamer:Lkn+
, .,
,
.
n

~.

...

dondestallamnedamer~kna

5 Ah est e 1 agua.
_ _ _ _ seora.

Ah est la seora.

_ _ _ _ mesa.

Ah est la mesa.

_ _ _ _ entrada.

Ah est la entrada.

- -_ _ taxi.

Ah est e 1 taxi.

6 Dnde est la seora americana?

3.12

seor

Dnde est el seor americano?

seorita

Dnde est la seorita americana?

hotel

Dnde est el hotel americano?

moneda

Dnde est la moneda americana?

DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

,.
a~~stallm1zmas~A+

_____

..

!ien~!iro+

_______ plma~

____________ seQy6r+

.
____________seQy6r+
,
8

,...

a1~stal~lm1zm0!ien1!ir~
,
,
,.
1~stallm1zmaplma~

,..

1~stal~lm1zmoseQy6r~

,..

~~stallm1zmaseQy6r+

1~stal~lotrochke+

_ _ _ _ _ entrd"a.1-

__________tksi+

_ _ _ _ _ _ libr.1-

a1~stall~otr~entrda+

.
1estalelotrotksi+
,
,
, .
1~staJl~otrams+
,
,
, .
,

_______ms a+

"

1~stal~lotrolibro+

7 Ah est la misma silla.

_ _ _ _ _ _ cenicero.

Ah est el mismo cenicero.

_ _ _ _ _ _ pluma.

Ah est la misma pluma.

_ _ _ _ _ _ seor.

Ah est el mismo seor.

_ _ _ _ _ _ seora.

Ah est la misma seora.

8 Ah est el otro cheque.

TRECE

_ _ _ _ _ entrada.

Ah est la otra entrada.

_ _ _ _ _ taxi.

Ah est e l otro taxi.

_ _ _ _ _ _ mesa.

Ah est la otra mesa.

_ _ _ _ _ libro.

Ah est el otro libro.

3.13

UNIT 3
9

SPOKEN SPANISH

tyen~lnaplumabwna+

lap1~

S1r~a

,
11bro
,
mesa

10

tyen~lnlap1~bwno+

tyen~ InaS10~abwn+

tyen~ln11brobwn6+

-1-

,
, ,
teD9oltrezd1azms-1,
__________tardez_+

,.
_ _ _ _ b10~etez _+
,
_____ nochez __+
,
_ _ _ _ _ d olarez.-+

..

,.

,.

,
,
tyen xlnamesabwn-1-

.
.

,
, ,
teD9oltrestaraezms-1,
,
,.
telJgo Itrezb1C~etezms+
, .
, ,
teD9oltreznochezms+
,
, ,.

teDgoltrez~olarezms+

9 Tiene una pluma buena.

_ _ _ lpiz _ _ o
_ _ _ silla _ _ o
_ _ _ mesa _ _

Tiene un lpiz bueno.

Tiene un libro bueno.
Tiene una mesa buena.

10 Tengo tres das ms.

__________ tardes __

Tengo tres tardes ms.

______ billetes_.

Tengo tres billetes ms.

___________ noches __
____________dlares__

3.14

Tengo tres noches ms.

Tengo tres dlares ms.

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

11

.,

UNIT 3

tyenel1~konochezms~

,
_____ d1az

,
________tardez
~
,.
_______ b1CQletez _
,
________dolarez
~

..

tyenel1~kOdOlarezms

Response drill

.,

. . .

estal~entra~~laladerechat~alR1ky~r~a

stla~recha

kyer~unlap1t2unaplma

kyr2naplum~

kyer~un11brot2unchke~

kyrQnchek

,.

..

. .

11 Tiene cinco noches ms.

_ _ _ _ dias _ _
_ _ _ _ tardes _ _
_ _ _ _billetes_.
_ _ _ _ dlares_.

QUINCE

.,.

. .
, . , .. , .
tyene I1IJkob1C~etezms~
,. , . , . .

3.21.12

,.

tyenel1~kod1aZms~
,.
,
,
tyenel1~kotardezms~

Tiene cinco das ms.

Tiene cinco tardes ms.
Tiene cinco billetes ms.
Tiene cinco dlares ms.

1 Est la entrada a la derecha o a la izquierda?

Est a la derecha.

2 Quiere un lpiz o una pluma?

Quiero una pluma.

3 Quiere un libro o un cheque?

Quiero un cheque.
3.15

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

. , . ,..
tyen~umb~CIMetet Qunamontt+
,. - . ,
.-.
~ayunseQyortQunaseQy6r+
, . ,dondestalasQMa+

dond~ayunptl+

4
5

,
[nplkwarto]
,
[en~lientroJ

- -

"

legust~eO)lapJ.it

[n~lientroJ

stalaseQyorldmol~nak~t

[nlapiiJ

, - -,

.
tyen~unaplumat
-

, - -

- ,

11

lgust~elientrot

12

estalaseQyorak~t

13

ayunamesa~t

3.16

,-

"

10

t~I)gQnamoned+

ynasertyora+

,
s t aen.e lkwr t 0+
~
- "- ,
,

ayunptellen~lientro+

,
[lpluma]
,

, .,

,
,
no+ megstlplum+
,
,
,
no+ estal~n~lientro+

no tI)9Qnlapii+
,
,
si+ mgstmucho+
,
,
s).-+ s~estk+
ro
,
,
s).-+ s~y+

4 Tiene un billete o una moneda?

5 Ah hay un seor o una seora?

Tengo una moneda.

Hay una seora.

(en el cuarto)
(en el centro)

6 Dnde est la silla?

7 Dnde hay un hotel?

Est en el cuarto.
Hay un hotel 'n el centro.

(la pluma)
(en el celltro)
(un lpiz)

8 Le gusta el lpiz?
9 Est la seora de Molina aqui?

10 Tiene una pluma?

No, me gusta la pluma.

No, est en el centro.
No, tengo un lpiz.

11 Le gusta el centro?
12 Est la seora aqu?
13 Hay una mesa ah?

S, me gusta mucho.
S, s est aqu.
S,shay.

DIECISEIS

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

3.21.13

Translation drill

....

1. That's a coin.
2. No, this is not a bill.
3. The young lady is at the

esS?e9.unamOnd~~

,
,
no.1- stbnQes
,

lmbiO~te~

No, esto no es un billete.

..

lseQy6rlt~lesta~nl~embah~a~

Embassy.

4. Do yu want a chair?

Eso es una moneda.

..

kyer~unas lC~J at

Quiere una silla?

,.

5. Do you have the check or not?

tyenelchek~ton6~

6. The teller's window is to the left.

lakah~lestal~lkyrdai

,.

Tiene el cheque o no?

La caja est a la izquierda.

"

7. The Embassy is not far from here.

1~embha~alno~staleh6zla~3~!

8. I want you to meet a young lady.

kyeropresentarl~I~6n~seQy6rlt~

..

,.

La seorita est en la
embajada.

La embajada no esta lejos de

aqu.

.
,
, . .
elbaQYRI~stalaQerch
,
. , .
teI)9S?uIJkvartS? I en.elotl~
, . ,.
kyer~unlapl~t
,
, .
,
, .
lesusta/labenleakolon1

Quiero presentarle a una sefiorita.

,.

9. Do you like Columbus Avenue?

10. The bathroom is to the right.
1I. I have a room in the hotel.
12. Do you want a peDcil?
13. Do you need a pen?

ne~eslt~unaplumat

14. Where's there a chair?

dond~ay lunas iC~~a~

15. Is the hotel downtown?

esta~lotellenel~entrot

DIECISIETE

..

El bao est a la derecha.

Tengo un cuarto en el hotel.
Quiere un lpiz?
Necesita una pluma?

..

.,

Le gusta la Avenida Coln?

.Dnde hay una silla?

Est el hotel en el centro?

3.17

UNIT 3
B

SPOKEN SPANISH
Discussion of pattern

In Spanish there is a large elass of words to which the label noun can be applied. A noun can be identied by the fact that it can have
endings added to it to change its reference from one to more than one (as explained in Unit 4) and by the fact that it belongs to one 01 two sub
elasses, called masculine and feminine. While a noun can change for number, it has only one gender or the olher, which is inherent and does
nol change. The terms masculine and feminine are convenient but more or less arbitrary tags to represent grammatical categories and have
nolhing to do with gender or sex in the real w<X'ld. Nouns that have appeared so far inelude /el-gsto, el-lpl., la-b,
el-libro, el~enl.ro, el-espaQy61, la~~a, la-embahda, el-bQYo, el~ntro, el-otl,
el-kwrto, el-gwa, la-abenda, el-tksl., el-as(~ens6r, la-kha, el-pso, la-entrda,
el~hke, el-d61ar, el-kmbyo, el-bl.~Yte, la-monda, la-l.mformay6n/.

lel/

You will notice that the word /el/ or the word /la/ precedes each noun. These are the singular forms of the definite artiele:
is masculine, and /la/ is feminine. When memorizing each noun it is well to memorize its gender at the same time. Usually this can be done
by memorizing the appropriate f<X'm of the definite artiele with the noun. ( / e l-gw
is an exception, since it is actually feminine.) The
words /el/ and /la/, called definite anides, are usually the equivalent of English 'the'. The words /un/ and /una/, called
indefinite articles, are usually the equivalent of English 'a' <X' 'an'.

a/

The artieles, and other adjectives which change for gender, must appear in the same gender category as the noun with which they are
assoc iated. This is called gender agreement, and the associated adjective is said to agree with the noun. Thus adjectives differ from nouns in
having two gender forms in <X'der to agree with nouns from either subelass.
There are two subelasses of adjectives those which show a gender change, and those fer which distinct gender forms are only potential. In
certain circumstances the latter subelass can show a change (see Unit 39 for a discussion of diminutives) but usually they have the same endings for
for masculine and
for feminine forms, though sometimes
masculine or feminine agreement. Usually the forros which change have a final
the masculine form may end in a consonant, as/espaQy6l- espaQy61a, l.ngls -l.nglsa/when these are used as adjectives.

/-0/

Other adjectives, like /minerl, sys, syte/, which end in

/-e/

-al

or in a consonant do nol change. Thus:

mcho~sto

mnos:-gsto

mno~-l.mformay6n

Note that in Spanish adjectives usually follow the noun modified: /embahda-amerikna, chke-byahro/ etc.
Some adjectives, like the artieles / el, la/, etc. always precede : Il~-abenda, d6s-ps osi , etc. These are usualIy 'number'
or 'limiting' adjectives. Some adjectives, however, may follow or precede the nouh: !plma-bwna, bwna-plma/.

3.18

DIECIOCHO

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH
3.22

Replacement drills (1)

Mode 1 Problem:

'"
tyn~nlapl~t
'"
___-..lplumat

kyr~

Model Answer:

tyn~napluma1
,

kYr~naplumat

Model Problem:
Tiene un lpiz?

pluma?
Quiere
?
Model Answer:
Tiene una pluma?
Quiere una pluma?

(1) This and subsequent replacement drills are designed as a fast moving substitution-type drill on selected basic sentences, with the
substitutions occurring in different parts of the sentence, each being a single change -plus any obligatory associated change(s)- o the sentence
immediately preceding.

The student should not need to look at the materials to do this drill orally.

DIECINUEVE

3.19

UNIT3

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
.
komoestaustctt
,.
..
laseQy6r+
"

A
1

..
".
"
.
komo~stal~lseQy6r
"
."
.
dondestal~lseQy6r
, . , .. .
dondestallaseQyort
".
, .. .
komo~stallaseQyort

"

donde

,
5

. .

komo

~lseQyorhwyt+

,."
"
komo~stal~lseQyorhwyt+

dondestal~lseQyorhwyt+

"

6
7

seQyortA

"
donde

~omo~stallaseQy6ra

seQy6r+

"

.,

Cmo est usted?

1
2
3 Dnde

4
5 Cmo
6

7 Dnde

3.20

....

la seora?

Cmo est la sefi ora?

seor?

Cmo est el sefior?

Dnde est el seor?

seorita?

Dnde est la seftorita?

Cmo est la seorita?

el Sr. White?
?

Cmo est el Sr. White?

Dnde est el Sr. White?

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNrr 3

...

"

kyer~ustedlagwam1neralt

.,

. . algomast
,
,

.,

..

elseQyorhwaytl
,

,
,
,
, .,
kyerelseQyorhwaytlalgomast

..

.,

.,

n~es~tR

,
____usted

neis1t~elseQyorhwaytlalgornas1

n~s1t~usteQlalgomast

,
__________algot
5
,

d1i~----

n~s~t~ustedlalgo1

-----_

.,

d~i~ustedlalgot

,
.....bwnozct1ast

d1i~ustedlbwnoz~~ast

Quiere usted agua mlOeral?

algo ms?

Quiere usted algo ms?

2 _ - el Sr. White

Quiere el Sr. White algo ms?

3 Necesita

Necesita el Sr. White algo ms?

4 _ - usted

Necesita usted algo ms?

6 Dice
7

VEINTIUNO

kyer~ustedlalgomast

algo?
?

'buenos das'?

Necesita usted algo?

Dice usted algo?
Dice usted 'huenos das'?

3.21

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
, .,
n~s~t~lalgomast

_____uno __t

tyen~

,
_____ ooz_ _t

kyere

.
_________ menost
,

5
6

,
ay

_____trez __t

t
,

,.,

tyen~lunomast

,.
, ,
tyene Ictozmast
,.
,
,
kyereldozmast
,.
, ,.
kyerelctozmenost
, , ,.
ayetozmenost
,
".
ayltrezmenost

Necesita algo ms?

uno _ _ ?

Necesita uno ms?

2 Tiene

?
dos _ _ ?

Tiene uno ms?

4 Quiere

Quiere dos ms?

menos?

6 Hay

Tiene dos ms?

3.22

,
,.,
n~es~t~lunomast

tres

Quiere dos menos?

Hay dos menos?

Hay tres menos?

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

.. ...

,
,
,.
'
~stall~embaha4amer1kanal~rka~~ak1t

.,

.,.,

.,.,

.,.,

..

..

,.

,
___ ~lotel------_-_-t

_______1~gles

estal~lote11~glesl~~rkad~ak1t

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ l~hoz

estal~lote11~glesll~hozd~ak1t

<t~A1

., .

t
t

___l~embahad'a,

________espaQYola.-----t

--

otel

estal~lotelamer1kanoli~rkad~ak1t

stal~lote11~glesll~hzd~1t

.,.

..

,.

3
4'

.,. .

Est el Hotel Americano cerca de aqu?

Est el Hotel Ingls cerca de aqu?

lejos_?

Est el Hotel Ingls lejos de aqu?

de ah?

5 ---la Embajada
6
7 _ e l Hotel.-.

?
Espaola

?
?

stall~embahad~espaQyolallnz~~a1t
,
,
,
stal~lotelespaQyolllhozd~a~t

?
ingls

stall~embahad~1~glesall~hzd~a11

Est la Embajada Americana cerca de aqu?

1 ---el Hotel

VEINTITRES

...

Est el Hotel Ingls lejos de ah?

Est la Embajada Inglesa lejos de ah?
Est la Embajada Espaola lejos de ah?
Est el Hotel Espaol lejos de ah?

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

dondestalakha~

. , .
dondestaelot~l+
,..
, . ,..
dondestalaseQy6ra~
,.
,..

ot~l

1
2

seQy6ra+

komo

komo~stalaseQy6r+

komo~stalJstd"+

".

hwn

,
donde

komoestahwn+
,...
,
,
dondestahwn+

l~entr<1a+

,.

ustc!~

4
5

.
.

dondestal~entrda~

Dnde est la caja?

1

hotel?

Dnde est el hotel?

seora'?

Dnde est la seora?

3 Cmo

Cmo est la seora?

usted?

Cmo est usted?

Juan?

Cmo est Juan?

6 Dnde
7

?
la entrada?

Dnde est Juan?

Dnde est la entrada?

VEINTICUATRO

UNIT3

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

,
kOr:l0 lokyret

F
1

d"~t

ne~esta+

. .

3
4

5
6

,
donde
,
k6lJke
,
donde

+
{-

kyr+

Cmo lo quiere?

1 _ _ _ dice?

Cmo lo dice?

Cmo lo necesita?

necesita?

3 Dnde

?
quiere?
?

6 Dnde

Dnde lo necesita?

4 Con qu

VEINTICINCO

dondelokyr
,
dondelotyne

tyne

..
, . . . .
komolone~es1ta
, .
. .
dondeloneiest+
,
..
k6Dkelone~est
,

k6I)kelokyret
, .

komolod1~e

tiene?

Con qu lo necesita?
C on qu lo quiere?
Dnde lo quiere?
Dnde lo tiene?

3.25

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

. . dn11 s (1)
VanatlOn

3.23

. .

demelaplma~

Dme la pluma.

,
1 Give me the book.

demeQ)lbrb~

2 Pass me the peno

, .
.
pasemelaplma+

3 Give us the book.

denos.ea)lbro~

4 Give us that.

denos.s6+

5 Take us downtown.

Q~ebenospl~ntrb~

6 Take me downtown.

O~ebem~al~ntro~

7 Take me to the hotel.

(l)~ebem~alotl~

Dme el libro.

..

Pseme la pluma.

Dnos e 1 libro.

,
,

...

,.
,

Dnos eso.

Llvenos al centro.

Llveme al centro.

Llveme al hotel.

(1) This and subsequent variation drills consist of translations of sentences similar to and within the basic structural rame o
selected basic sentences.

The student should cover the Spanish answers while doing this drill orally.

3.26

VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

UNIT 3

lgust~elkwrtot

1 Do you Hke the book?

lgus t~a:D11brot

Le gusta el libro?

..,

2 Do you Hke the hotel?

le9ust~elote11

Le gusta el hotel?

3 Do you like the Embassy?

,
lgustalRembahada1

Le gusta la embajada?

4 Do you Hke the avenue?

lgustalaben1da1

Le gusta la avenida?

5 Do you Hice (the) Spanish?

,
.,
legustRelespaQyolt

Le gusta el espaol?

. . .,.

...,.

,
6 Do you Hke (the) English?

1 Do you Hice (the) Miss MoliDa?

,
nd'J.

lgust~ell.I)91est

Le gusta el cuarto?

... . , . . , .

lgustalaseQyorl.tamo11na1

Le gusta el ingls?

Le gusta la seiorita Molina?

estal~hos''

1 No, it's near.

no-

esta~rka+

2 No, it's 10 the rigk.

,
no

estala<!er~ch

3 No, t'. to the left.

no stalil.~kyrda''

,
4 No, it'. up ahead.

No, est a la derecha.

No, est cerca.

No, est a la izquierda.

no"l estad:elnt

No, est adelaDte.

SPOKEN SPANlSH

UNIT 3

,.

5 Yes, it's at the entrance.

si~ ~stalaentrd~
,..

6 Ves, it's here.

S l~

,
stak 1~

S, est aqu.

S, est ah.

7 Ves, it's there.

.,

S, est a la entrada.

ayketomarluntaks~t
1 Is it necessary to take a room?

Hay que tornar un taxi?

, .. , .
,
ayketomarluDkwartot

Hay que tomar un cuarto?

..

2 Is it necessary to take the

elevator?

3 ls it necessary to take anything

else?

, ..,
. ,
ayketomar !elas (~) ensort

Hay que tomar el ascensoc?

, .., , . ,
ayketomarlalgomast

Hay que tomar algo ms?

4 Is it necessary to say that?

., ,.
aykec!eilr/esot

. ..,

,.

5 ls it necessary to translate that?

aykGtradU~lrlesot

6 Is it necessary to cash a check?

,
,
,.
aykekambyarluncheket

..

Hay que decir eso?

Hay que traducir eso?

Hay que cambiar un cheque?

..

7 Is it necessary to have
traveler's checks?

3.28

,
,
, . . ,.
ayketenerlchekezbyaherost

Hay que tener cheques viajeros?

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNlT 3

..

,.,.

pwe~elkambyarm~Jestecheket

1 Can you break this bill far me?

Puede cambiarme este cheque?

..

,.

2 Can you change one dollar

for me?

Puede cambiarme un dlar?

. .

Puede cambiarme la pluma?

..,

.,

pwede IO)~ebarm~ Ialotel t

...

..

Puede llevarme al hotel?

,.,.

pwe~elpresentarm~lalseQyormo11nat

,.

Puede cambiarme este billete?

".

,.
pwe6elkambyarmellaplumat

5 Can you introduce Mr. Molina

to me?

,.

4 Can you take me to the hotel?

,.

pweaelkambyarm~lundolar1

,.

3 Can you change the pen for me?

..

pwedelkambyarm~lesteb1Q~etet

.,

Puede presentarme al seor Molina?

,.

6 Can you tell me that?

pwede/deilrm~lesot

7 Can you repeat that for me?

,.
,.
pweoelrrepet1rm~lesot

Puede de c irme es o ?

..,

,
F

Puede repetirme eso?

...

kwantokwest~untaks*lal~mbaha~amer1kna

,
1 How much does a taxi to the
Embassy cost?

VEINTINUEVE

kwantokwest~untaks*'al~embahada

,
2 How much does a taxi to the
hotel cost?

Cunto cuesta un taxi a la Embajada

Americana?

.,

Cunto cuesta un taxi a la Embajada?

kwantokwest~untaks*lltel~

Cunto cuesta un taxi al hotel?

3.29

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

.
.
kwantokwestRuntakslalabn1~ako16n~
,

3 How much does a taxi to

Columbus Avenue cost?

,
4 How much does a taxi
downtown cost?

.,

Cunto cuesta un taxi a la

Avenida Coln?

Cunto cuesta

UD

taxi al ceatro?

kwantokwestR~11br6~

,
6 How much does the room cost?

kwantokwestRuntaks*lalientr6~

,
5 How much does the book
cost?

Cunto cuesta el libro?

kwantokwest~elkw~rt~

Cunto cuesta el cuarto?

7 How much does it cost?

3.30

,
kwantokwest

Cunto cuesta?

TIlONTA

UNIT 3

SPOKEN SPANISH

3.3

CONVERSATION STlMULUS (1)

NARRArlVE 1

"
,
,.
elsQyorhwaytlestal~n~16telko16n~

El Sr. White est en el Hotel Coln.

2 He has a room there.

.
tyen~uDkwart9Ia

Tiene un cuarto ah.

3 He likes his room.

le9ust~lelkwrt6~

1 Mr. White is at the C olumbus

Hotel.

Le gusta el cuarto.

(1) This and subsequent conversation stimuli are designed to help bridge the gap between pattern-drill sentence practice and actual conversation. They are divided into one, two, or more combinations of narratives and dialogs. The narrative part is a translation drill of sentences in a sequence context, whichsetsthe stage for the dialog following. The dialog is elicited from the participants by the teacher, acting as
a prompter for players who have not learned the ir lines very we 11. He tells each what he should say (until such time as the lines are memorized),
making sure that the participants address each other, talk naturally and meani ngfully, and fully understand what they are saying.

The student should cover the Spanish answers while doing the narratives orally. He should not need to look at the materials to do the
dialogs orally.
The following expressions are necessary for the prompting or direction of the dialogs.

..

Tell him (that) ...

d 19 ale Ike

Dgale que ...

Answer him (that) ...

knt~st~l~lke

Contstele que ...

Ask him if. ..

preg.untele I si

Tell him again (that)...

rrepltale/ke

..

,r

TREINTA Y UNO

Pregntele si

Reptale que ...

3.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

, ,
4 He needs s omething.

n~esltalg

5 He needs to c hange a
twenty dollar bill.

n~s1takambyarl

,.

mbiQ~_ete Ictbeyntect61ars~

Necesita cambiar un billete de

veinte dlares.

. ,..

6 The cashier's desk is to

the right.

..

Necesita algo.

lakah~~staladerch

La caja est a la derecha.

DIALOG 1

,
bwen07d13s IsQy6rta~

Juan, dgale 'buenos das' a

la seorita.

,
bwenozd13S

Srta., contstele 'buenos das'

al Sr. White y pregntele si le
gusta el cuarto.

Juan, contstele que s, que le

gusta mucho, y que gracias.

Juan: Buenos das,'seorita.

IseQy6rhw&yt~

Srta.: Buenos das, Sr. White.

lgust~elkwartot

Le gusta el cuarto?

,
,s 1-.1- mgustamchb Igrvas

Juan: S, me gusta mucho, gracias.

, ,
Srta., pregntele si necesita algo.

n~esltalgot

Juan, dgale que s, que Ud. qui~re

cambiar un billete de veinte dlares. Pregntele que dnde est
la caja.

si~

3.32

,..,

Srta.: Necesita algo?

kyerokambyarlmbi~etel

, . ,dbeynte~61ars+ dondestalakhi
,

Juan: S, quiero cambiar un billete

de veinte dlares. Dnde
est la caja?

TREINTA Y DOS

UNIT3

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
Srta., dgale que est ah, a la
derecha.

sta1laladrech~

Srta.: Est ah, a la derecha.

Juan, dgale que muchas gracias.

,
mu eh a zg r y as ~

Juan: Muchas gracias.

NARRATWE 2

,
1 He goes there.

ba:~

Va ah.

2 The rate of exc hange is

three to one.

dollars.
4 And how does he want it?

,
,
kyerekambyarlbeynted61ares+

TREINTA Y TRES

Quiere cambiar veinte dlares.

..

,
,.
ikomolokyeret
,
,. ,

5 He wants two twenties and

two tenso

El cambio est a tres por uno.

..

3 He wants to change twenty

,.

.,

lkamby~estal~trespor6no~

y cmo lo quiere?

kyereldozaebeynt~lidozdeQyi+

Quiere dos de veinte y dos de

diez.

3.33

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT3

D/ALOG 2

Juan, d ~ale al cajero que

dispense y pre~ntele que
a cmo est e 1 cambio.

,
,.,
dispense~ akomol~sta~lkmbyb~

,
Cajero, c ontste le que est a
tres por uno.

sttresporno~

,
Juan, pregntele si puede cambiarle
este billete.

Juan: Dispense, a cmo est

el cambio?

..

Caj: Est a tres por uno.

..

,.

pwedekambyarmesteb10~etet

Juan: Puede camb iarme este

billete?

,
Cajero, pregntele que de
cunto es.

dek\"Janto~s~

,
Juan, contstele que es de
veinte dlares.

Caj: De cunto es?

".

~zQebeynted61ares~

,.

Cajero, dgale que con mucho

gusto, y pregntele que cmo
lo quiere.

3.34

.,

Caj: Con mucho gusto. Cmo

lo quiere?

dozdebeyntetidozdedy~lpOrfab6r

Cajero, contstele que cmo no,

que aqu tiene.

..

k6nmuchogsto~ komoloky6r6~

Juan, dgale que dos de veinte

y dos de diez, por favor.

Juan: Es de veinte dlares.

Juan: Dos de veinte y dos de

diez, por favor.

komon6~ ak1tyn6~

Caj: Cmo no, aqu tiene.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 3

NARRAT/VE 3

1 He goes to the American

Embass y in a tax i.

,
.
blaembhctarnrikanalentksi+
~

, .,

2 The Embassy isn't faro

l~embah ad ano ~ s t alh os.l-

3 It's on Columbus Avenue.

estal~nlbenldako16n.l-

4 The taxi costs two and a

quarter.

eltaksllkwstalaozbeyntl~1~ko+

Va a la Embajada Americana en
taxi.

La Embajada no est lejos.

..

Est en la Avenida Coln.

El taxi cuesta dos veinticinco.

D/ALOG 3

Chofer, dgale que perdn, que

cmo dice.

,.

,
,.,.
preton.l- kornodliet

Chofer, contstele que no mucho,

que est en la Avenida Coln.
TREINTA Y CINC O

Chof: Perdn, cmo dice?

alaembhd amr ikan

Juan: A la Embajada Americana.

'o

Juan: Llveme a la Embajada

Americana.

,
Juan, reptale que a la Embajada
Americana, y pregntele si est
muy lejos de aqu.

, .
. .
Quebeme)laembahadamerlkna+
~

Juan, digale al chofer que lo

lleve a la Embajada Americana.

,.

.,

estamuylehoz IQ~aklt

Est muy lejos de aqu?

,
"
'" .
nomchb.l- est~nlz.ben~d:akoln+
~

Chof: No mucho, est en la

Avenida Coln.
3.35

UNIT

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
Juan, pregntele que cunto es.

kwanto~s~
,.

Chofer, dgale que dos veinticinco.

dozbeynt1!i1IJko,J.

Juan, dgale que aqu tiene, que

gracias.
Chofer, dgale que gracias a l.

,
k1tyne
,

Juan: Cunto es?

. .

Chot: Dos veinticinco.

gra!iyls~

Juan: Aqu tiene, gracias.

graiyaa~ustedlseQy6r~

Chof: Gracias a usted, seflor.

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

4.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White meets Molina at the Embassy.

Mr. White arrives at the Embassy by taxi and pays the driver.

AID TO LISTENING

ENGLISH SPELLING

SPANISH SPELLING

(1) OVie (to owe)

debo (deber)

to you (1) owe

le debo

..

,
kwantoledbb''

White
How much do 1 oV/e you?

White
Cunto le debo?

(they) are (to be)

son (ser)

,
l-chfr~

the chauffeur

el chofer

Taxi Driver

Chofer de taxi

"
,
sOI)kwatropsos''

It's four pesos.

Son cuatro pesos.

(they) told, said ho tell, to say) (1)

diheron~

dJ.r~

to me (they) told

m-diheron~

dijeron (decir)

me dijeron

they would be (to be)

"hite

seran (ser)

( )

At the hotel they told me it'd be two. 2

UNO

e~eltellmedihero~lk

,.
srJ.and6s''

White
EQ el hotel me dijeron que
seran dos.

4.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

(1) give (to give)

'

to you (1) glve

,
,
ddy+ dr+

doy (dar)

le--doy+

le doy

(3)

la propina

the tip

rn give

you three. One for a tipo

ledoytr~s+

, unodepropina+

Le doy tres. Uno de propina.

bweno+

good, OK

Taxi dnver
O.K. Thank you, sir.

.. .

bueno

ehofer de

tqxi
Bueno, gracias, seor.

bwen+ gra~yaslsQy6r~

(Mr. White enters the Embassy and goes to the Administrative Office. He is taken to the consular section where he is going to work and
introduced to one of the young local employees with whom he is going to be associated.)

Administrative officer
(4)
Mr. Molina, this is Mr. White.

.,.

...

to work

,
nosotr6s~

we, us

4.2

Oficial administrativo
Seor Molina, ste es el seor
White.

va (ir)

(he) goes (to go)

He is going to work with uso

seQyormol~na1 estes~lseQyorhwyt+

..

trabajar
nosotros

batrabahar I k o (n) nos 6trbs~

Va a trabajar con nosotros.

so much

tanto

(5)
to k now h1m

conocerlo

DOS

SPOKEN SPANIlH

1I0Hna
1'. ver, Slad to bow yo., Mr. White.

UNIT 4

.
...
.
tantogustotaekono,'r16Is6Qy6rhw'yt~
.,

miDe

"fAite
The pleasure's miDe.

MoliruJ
Tanto gusto de cODocerlo, selor
White.

mio

61gust2ezmb.&.

"hite
El gusto es mio.

,
since

dezct6''

desde

when

kwand''

cuando

Molina
How long have you been here?

.,

d6z46kwand2lestak''

yesterday

Molina
Desde c uatndo est aqu?

ayer

White
Since yesterday.

"hite
Desde ayer.

,
such

ta1A

how, how goes it

ke-tl''

qut! tal

the trip

el-byahlt'&'

el viaje

Molina
HoY/ was the trip?

TRES

tal

, ,
ketalelbyhe

Molina
Qu tal el viaje?

4.3

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
eks{~ lent-l.

excellent

White
Excellent.

excelente

White
Excelente.

k S (~lent''

the movemenl

,
el-mbimyent,l.
,

el movimiento

the section

la-sk~yoh''

la secci6n

consular

consular

Is there much activity in the

consular section here?

...

,
kasi''
,
syempr

always

,.

,..

si,l. ksisyemprestamozlmuyokupdos''

,
,

,.

estamos (estar)
ocupados (ocupar)

Malin.a
S. Casi siempre estamos muy
ocupados.

ablA.I. ablar.l.

(you) speak (to speak)

4.4

siempre

estamos.!. sta-r
,
,
kpads'' kpr+

busy (te occupy)

White
Do you speak English, ~d". Molina?

casi

(we) are (to be)

Yeso We're almost always

very busy.

,.,

cin consular aqu?

almost

Malina

aylmuchomob1myentQlnlsek~y6Q'k6nslarak~tHay mucho movimiento en la sec-

hahla (hablar)

abl~usted1~gleslsQy6rmoln''

Ifhite
Habla usted ingMs, seor Molina?

CUATRO

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,
abl abla-r.J.

(1) speak (to speak)

hablo (hablar)

poko
,
um-poko+

liule
a liule

Molina
Yeso 1 speak a Hule.

un poco

51+

poco

Molina

abl~ump6k

S, hablo un poco.

,
but

per+

(you) must, ought (must, ought)

deb deber+

pero

debe (deber)

to practice
/

But you ought to practice

Spanish.

Y01D.'

.,

the purpose

,
el-proposito

by the way

a-proposit

pronunya pronnyar+
,
,
aprndyo1 aprndr~

,
prposit

a prop6sito
pronunc ia (pronunciar)
aprendi6 (aprender)

A prop6sito.

,.

12abl~lilopr6nun~yalmuyhy~n''

,
Where did you learn it?

You speak it and pronounce it

very well.

Pero usted debe practicar el

espaol.

el prop6sito

(you) learned (to learn) (6)

By the way.

.. .

per~ustedf~ebeprakt1karlelespaQYo~+

(you) pronounce (to pronounce)

CINCO

,.

practicar

Lo habla y lo pronuncia muy

bien.

. . .

donde12aprendy.J,

Dnde lo aprendi?

4.5

SPOKEN SPANlSH

UNlT 4

,
li-skwela~

the school

la escuela

,
l-lelJgw.l.

the language, tongue

,.

la lengua

schoolof languages

eskwela-4e-16lJgws~

escuela de lenguas

!he slate

l-estad'b~

el estado

united (to unite)

,
(Jn14'6'' n1er-l.

the United Statea

16s~st4'6s~n14'6s~

unido (unir)

,.

rlte
At a language achool ia the
Statea.

..

~RfASkw61l4'lelJgwaslln16~'sa4'o~un4'6s

los Estados Unid.

t'laite
En UDa escuela de lenguas eB
los Estados Uaidos.

ll-kosl~

the thing

la cosa

aay (to aay) (7)

,
,
d1g'' d, 1-r''

diga (dec ir)

BOl to me .ay

n o-1De-d' 191''

no me diga

,.,

,.

lIolina
ADOlher thi.. DOD't caU me
Mr. MoliDa.

otrak6s~

..

,.

nome41gafseQyormolnl''

lIolilllJ
Otra cosa. No me diga _ _

Mola.

my (mine)

mi (mto)

the Dame

el nombre

. .
minombreshos6''
,

My

lUlDIe

ia J oe.

Mi 1IOIIlbre es Jos.

oh

ah

the miDe

elmlo

Wte
Oh. All right.

ttiae ia J.....

1 muyby'n~

.
.lm12eshwnl
,

',"e

Ala. muy bieD. El mlo ea JUD.

SEIS

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

4.10

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) /d~hron/ dijeron is a Past 1 tense form of a fairly irregular type which will not be drilled in detail until Unit 23.

(2) Notice that in the English translation the word /ke / 'that' is left untranslated, even though we can also say 'They told me that
it'd be two.' This omission in English is very common, but it never happens in Spanish. While there will be drills on this matter later in this
text, it would be well for the student to fix in his mind here and now the fact that the verb /de~ir/ 'to say, to tell' always requires /ke/
'that' after it if there is another verb being introduced by it.
(3) Notice that the word /le/ le is '(to) you' in the context of the complete utterance. Formal usage in contexts that mean 'you' is
actually the same as in those that mean 'him, her'. The sentence / led 6y tr S ~ /
le doy tres can be translated either '1'11 give you three',
'1'11 give him three', or '1'11 give her three', and only the context will distinguish which translation is appropriate.

(4) Que of the very common uses of the definite article in Spanish where it is never used in English is in talking about a person whose
name is cited with /sery6r/ or /seQyor tal or /sery6ra/: 'The Mister White', 'The Mrs. Smith', etc.

(5) The form /10/ lo which appears here in the literal meaning 'him', but referring to the person being addressed (that is, 'you'see note (3) aboye), often has the form / le / le in Spain. For this reason a person who plans to go to Spain should practice saying
/konorle/ conocerle as well as /konOirlo/conlPcerlo. We will not bother to point out this difference throughout this book, since
the teacher can readily point out which form he himself uses ( /
or
and that is the one the student should imitate. It may be
is used in Latin America
noted here that the difference between Spain and Latin America on this point is easily stated by rule: the form
only as an indirect elitic form but in Spain it occurs also as the direct clitic form if the reference is to a male human being where
would
be used in Latin America.

le/

(6)

aprendy6/

/10/ ),

/le/

/10/

aprendi is a regular Past 1 tense form which will be drilled in Unit 17.

(7) The form / dig a/ diga is a cornmand form which will be drilled, along with others of the type, in Unt 27. As in the present sentence,
t can be used with the meaning 'call'.

SIETE

4.7

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

4.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

4.21

Pattern drills

4.21.1

Number in nouns and adjectives

A.

Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

...

,
Hand me the books .

pasemelozlbrs

Give me the pens.

demelasplmas

Pseme los libros.

..

Dme las plumas.

..

3 pwe~elkambyarm~lnzdolares1
Give me sorne pens.

,
demeunasolmAst
-~

Buenas noches, seorita.

7 muchaz9rjyaslsQyr~

4.8

Buenos das, seor.

6 bwenaznochslsQyrta~

D me unas pl zunas.

,
5 bwenozdlaslseQy6r~

Puede cambiarme unos

d&lares ')

Muchas gracias, seor.

OCHO

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

EXTRAPOLA TION
Nouns and adjectives

singular

plural

..........vowel

..........vowel

.....consonant

.....consonant

-s
-es

Partially irregular patterns o artic les

Definite articles

Indefinite articles
sg
ro

un

una

pI

unos
unas

ID

sg

pI

el
la

lQ.s
las

NOTES
a. Spanish nouns, Hice English nouns, have different forms in the pi_al.
b. Spanish adjectives, unlike 8":08t English adjectives, also have diffeJ'ent forms in the pl1D'8l.

NUEVE

4.9

UNIT 4

4 o.
21 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

SubStltutlOD drll
1
o

. (1)
Domb er Sah
StltutlOD

Model Problem:

,
,
k11ynbtelbwn6l
Mode I Answer:

ak1lyn6&btelezbwnsl
,.

2
3

t~lJg2naplumSleks(we16ntAl

,
tynelm1zmolibr''
, .,

kyer2elotr~61rt

..

t~lJg2nasplumas.eks(~ elntes''

ty~n16zm1zmoz11brbs''

.,

kyerolo~otroz461arest

Model Problem:
Aqu hay

UD

hotel bueno.

Mode 1 Answer:
Aqu hay unos hoteles bueDos.

1 Tengo una pluma exceleDte.

Tengo unas plumas excelentes.

2 TieDe el mismo libro.

Tiene los mismos libros o

3 Quiero el otro dllar.

Quiero los otros dlares.

(1) Nurnher substtution involves a change between singular aod plural forms. In the present drilI these forms are nouns; change the
singular nouns (and any associated adjectives> to plural and plural nouJlS (with any associated adjectives) to singular.

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

,.

4 t~ng2nchekebyah~ro~

. .

5 ablolk6nlseQyor1t~espaQy61a~

.. .

,
,
ablo Ikonla(s) se12yr1 tas.espaQy61s~
,
".

..

6 neies1tiunamesabw~na~

ne~es1tiunazmesazbw~ns~

7 ablalk6nelm1zm2amer1kn~~

ablalkon16zm1zmo~amer1knos~

,.

ONCE

..,.

,.

tngQn6schekezbyahrbs~

,.

..

,.

...

4 Tengo un cheque viajero.

Tengo unos cheques viajeros.

S Hablo con la seorita espaola.

Hablo con las seoritas espaolas.

6 Necesita una mesa buena.

Necesita unas mesas buenas.

7 Habla con el mismo americano.

Habla con los mismos americanos.

4.11

UNIT 4
4.2L12

SPOKEN SPANISH
Response drill

,
[nlmes]

kyrepokagw~tomcha~

,
.,
,
,
abl~uste~lknlm1zmoseQyortokon~tr~

tyn~lotraplum~tolam!zm

tl)gotr

hliustdlmuch2eSpaQyolfop6k~

blpok

tyn~lotroz11brostolozmzms~

teI)gollbzm1zms''

,
,
,
dondestallsQyr1tiespaQy61

, .,
,
dondestallamonedamer1kn

..

..

..

. ..

. .

[nlientro]

"

...

kyrpok
,
,
ablolknklm1zmb~
,
,

. .

lsQyr1t~espaQyolilst~n

l~entr~
,

lmndmrikan'esta~nlam~s''

1 Quiere poca agua o mucha?

Quiero poca.

2 Habla Ud. con el mismo seor o con otro?

Hablo con el mismo.

3 Tiene otra pluma o la misma?

Tengo otra.

4 Habla usted mucho espaolo poco?

Hablo poco.

5 Tiene otros libros o los mismos?

Tengo los mismos.

(en el centro)

6 Dnde est la seorta espaola?

La seorita espaola est en el centro.

(en la mesa)

7 Dnde est la moneda americana?

La moneda americana est en la mesa.

4.12

DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

.,

.
,
SDl1brbbwen2Iestak!~

,.

8 dondestal~11brobw'n6~

[aki~ ]

.
,
, ..
,.
,
abliuste~lkon16(~seQyorea1ijglesest
no~
,
, . , , ., .
10 tyen~ustedlotrol~brot
,
,
.
,
,
. . ,
11 abl~ustedlmuchQespaQyolt
,

[k6nl(s) seQyoras~] 9
,
[elm~zmo]

[poko~]

..

, .
,
ablo Iknla(s) seQyora5.1ijgl'sls~
,

no~ t~ijg~~lm1zm~

no~

..,.

,.

.,

12 aylmucho~otelezbwenoslak1t

"

si~
.
, .. , .
,.,
tyen~almuchazmonedaslam~rikanast si
,
, ... ,
,

"

13

14 aylmuchomob~myentQlenlask~y6ij

,
konslart

1S ne~es1t~ln6schkezbyahero5t

(aqu) 8 Dnde est el libro bueno?

(con las seoras) 9 Habla usted con los seores ingleses?
(el mismo) 10 Tiene usted otro libro?
(poco) 11 Habla usted mucho espaol?

TRECE

UNIT 4

,
blopok''

ymuchs~

ty~nemuchas~

si~ ymucho''

"

5i~ ne~51t~ns''

El libro bueno est aqu.

No, hablo con las seoras inglesas.
No, tengo el mismo.
N~ hablo poco.

12 Hay muchos hoteles buenos aqu?

S, hay muchos.

13 Tiene ella muchas monedas americanas?

S, tiene muchas.

14 Hay mucho movimiento en la seccin consular?

S, hay mucho.

15 Necesita unos cheques vajeros?

S, necesito unos.

4.13

UNIT 4
4.21.13

SPOKEN SPANISH
Translation drill

1 There 're many good

schools here.

2 There's an excellent
school there.

,1

note~gollb~otrozdolaresla6ri

,..

, .

Puede cambiarme unas

monedas americanas?

No tengo los otros dlares

ahora.

tDglmuypokozbJ.~~~ts.l-

Tengo muy pocos billetes.

,.

pasem~lotrolpi~~

8 Give me the other checks.

demello~otroschkes.l-

",.

Siempre hablo con las mismas

seoras.

.,.,

7 Hand me another penc i1.

9 1 always leave good tips.

pwe~ekambyarm~ln~zmneda~amerlkanast

,.

4.14

'..

'/.

6 I have very few bilis.

Ahl hay una escuela

excelente.

syempr~ablolkbnlizmlzma(~seQy6rs~

".,..

5 1 haven't got the other

dollars now.

Aqu hay muchas escuelas

buenas.

,.-

'

4 Can you change sonle

American coins for me?

,.

aJ.ay ln~eskwel~eks (~elnte.l-

3 I always speak with

the same ladies.

..

aklylmucha~eskwelazbwns~

Pseme otro lpiz.

".

,;
""
, "
syempre~oylprplnazbwnas

Dme los otros cheques.

Siempre doy propinas buenas.

CATORCE

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

. of pattera (1)
B n18e_10D
Both English and Spanish use the cODcept of number, which distiDguishes Ofle (singular) from more than Ofle (plural). English nouns
regularly add an ending for plural forms, e.g., the endings of the words 'cat!., dog!, hors~', the particular ending that appears depending on
what sound the singular form ends with. In Spanish the plural eDding aIso depends on the last 80und of the singular lorm, though witl~ a different formula: words ending with a vowel add
with a conSODant, /-es/, as /msa - msa~ otl- otl,W .

/-S/,

Adjectives in English do not usually change in form when modifying plural nouos: 'the hoy - the hoys, good book - good books'.
However, the indefinite article ~ (a special kind of adjective) can appear only with singular DOUDS: 'a boy' but 'some boys'; and tbe dernonstratives (another special kind of adjective, often used wben pointing) genuinely change wheD modying plural nouns: 'this bo)' - these boys,
that book - those booo'.
Almost all Sanish adjectives change forms for siDgular and plmal in the same way nouns do; that is, add
in a vowel, /-eS/ if in a consonant.

/-S/

if tbe word ends

The patterns of pluralization ol the articles {the special adjectives, equivalent to 'a, an, sorne, the' in EDglish, used before Douns to
limit tbeir application, definitely or iDdefinitely} are slightly irregular. Tbe irregularities are cbarted iD tbe presentatioD 01 panern that began
tMs section- witb irregular elements underliDed.

(1)

QUINCE

T.re 8ft lTeplar far..... See .ppeDdix lar presentatioD of them.

4.15

UNIT 4
4.21.2

A.

SPOKEN SPANISH
The irregular verb

es tr/

Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

,
1

stoybyfjlgr~yas

I'm in the bathroom.

~o~stoylen~lbQY

you (fam.)

(you) are (to be)

Howare you?

3
4

yo

..

es tas es tar
,
,
komoestast+
"'--,
,
komoestaustd+

.
.

'"

'"

,
,
komoestal
"'-,

she

,
How is she?

7
(you) are (pi.) (to be)

4.16

Yo estoy en el bao.

t6
ests (estar)
Cmo ests t?
Cmo est usted?
l

How is he?

Estoy bien, gracias.

eC~a+

Cmo est l?
ella

kom~estaQ~a

,
,.
,..
ksisyemprestamoz ImuyokupdS~
,
,
estah estar

Cmo est ella?

Casi siempre estamos muy
ocupados.
estn (estar)

DIECISEIS

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
steds~

you (pI.)

ustedes

, .
.
kom2estanPst~des~
,

How are you all?

Cmo es tn ustedes?

,
they (m.)

How are they?

eQ}JS~

ellos

kom2estan.~os~

Cmo estn ellos?

EXTRAPOLA TION

sg

1st person

est6y

2nd person
familiar

ests

2nd person
formal

est

pi

estmos

estn

3rd person

NOTES
a. Spanish verbs change to agree with their subject for singular and plural, for first person (1), second
person (you), and third person (he or anything else).
b. Second person is further distinguished for familiar or formal.
c. Second person formal and third person take the same verb forro in the singular; all second and third
person take the same forro in the plural.

DIECISIETE

4.17

UNO' 4

4.21.21

SPOKEN SPANISH

SubatitutiOll drilla - Dumber aubetilutioa

i!odel Problem :

....

stamo~en~lot'l~
Model Answer:

estoyen.elot~lt

1 estanA~

~sta~

2 star~ozbyn~

estoyby,"~

Model Problem :
Estamos en el hotel.

Model Answer:
Estoy en el Letel

1 F.tlfn ah.
2 Estamos hieL

Est' 1.
Estoy Liea.

4.11
DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

tJNIT 4

estbyen I~k

stal~nl~eskw~l~

st~nl~nl~~skw~la

5
6

. . .

".
estamoslenl~embahda~

no~staby~nla1

no~stambynl

;..

. .

stoylenl~embahda~

/ .

DIECINUEVE

,
estmbyenlki

..

stamoslenel~~ntro

, ..

estoyen.el~ntr+

3 Est&n bien aqu.

Est bien aqu.

4 Est en la escuela.

Estn en la escuela.

5 Estoy en la Embajada.

Estamos en la Embajada.

6 No est bien ah.

No estn bien ah.

7 Estamos en el centro.

Estoy en e l centro.

4.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4
Person - number substitution
Model Prob lem:

.,.

~ntonYQlesta~n~l~ntr~

stedes
~,'iodel

Answer:

es tan1en..e lin tro4,

1 ~6~sty ImuYbyn.~k.}

~l~y g.

.}

st Imuyby~n.ak1~

nos6trs

.}

stmoz Imuybynakl~

stnlmuybynak~

s td

~1odel

estlmuybynakl~

Problem:

Antonio est en el centro.

Ustedes

------

Model Ans\',-er:
Estn en el centro.

1 Yo estoy muy bien

aqu~.

------

Alicia
Nosotros
Alicia y Antonio
Usted

------

4.20

Est muy bien aqu.

Estamos muy bien aqu.
Estn muy bien aqu.
Est muy bien aqu.

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

pahl~lesta~nl~embahda~

estoyenl~embahd~

ntony~

.t.

, .
loseQyores
,

.t.

sta~nl~embahda~
,.
..
estanenl~embahda

lsQyor1t~---------_.t.

esta~nl~embahd

. .
..

,..

.t.

~o

.,

,..O'.

'1

11iya*~ol~stamo~en~lot~1~

.t.

~o

, ..
stedes
,
,
elkantony2
,

. .. .

stoyen,elot~l..

..

.t.

estanenelot~l.t.

.t.

estanenelot~l''

--..

eIDJ~,

..

, .

..

, .. .
estaenelotl.t.
n

2 P ah lo est en la Embajada.

y0

Antonio
Los seores
La seorita,

Estoy en la Embajada.
Est en la Embajada.
Estn en la Embajada.
Est en la Embajada.

- - - - - -__

3 Alicia y yo estamos en el hotel.

y0
_

VEINTIUNO

Ustedes
El y Antonio

_
_

EHa

Estoy en el hote 1.
Estn en el hotel.
Estn en el hotel.
Est en el hotel.

4.21

UNIT 4
1..21.22

SPOKEN SPANISH
Response drill

. . ,
. . .
~enl~embahd~
, . . ".
,

estalaseQyor~lnAlotelt

,
st~nl~mbahad~

,.

stanlozblO~eteslkltQa~
,.
,.
,
stan~stedeslnl~skwelat

oen.elotl~
,.

..

"..

"..

stanlo(s)seQyores /aklt

,
S t m s.n 1 ~ s kwe1 .t.
,
stnnl~entr~

~ en.e1 ~ n tr.t.

,
[byn.l- ]

[en.elientro.t. ]

[oye-n.!. ]

dondesta~lotl~

lO

, ..

komQestan~stds~

,
st6ybyeQ'griyas~

st~n.lientr.t.

,
stmzbyeQlgriyas.!-

1 Est la seora en el hotel o en la Embajada?

Est en la Embajada_

2 Estn los billetes aqu o ah?

Estn aqu.

3 Estn Uds. en la escuela o en el hotel?

Estamos en la escuela.

4 Estn los seores aqu o en el centro?

Estn en el centro.

5 Cmo est usted?

Estoy bien. Grac ias.

(en el centro)

6 Dnde est el hotel?

Est en el centro.

(bien)

7 Cmo estn ustedes?

Estamos hien. Gracias.

(bien)

4.22

, . ,
komoestaustet.t.
,..
,.
, - , ..

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

U~Ir

[erka~]

[en~lentr~]

[nl~mbahada~] 10

11
12
13

(cerca)
(en el centro)

.",.

.,

",

~stalRembahc~allehozdel~entrot
,
,.
,

. .

s tanlo(s) seQyores IakJ. t

,.

~staustedlnh16telt
,.

,,,.

''''
sta~azlbyenak1t

,.

,.

estanuste~eslkupadost
"
,
sta~stedlkpadot

no' est~erka+
,
,

n01

,
noi

estnenlientr~
,/

st6ynl~mbahada

,
s11 stnmuybyn+
,
,
s11 stmzmuylkpdosi
,

,
sJ.1 estymuylkpd
,

8 Est la Embajada lejos del centro?

No, est cerca.

9 Estn los seores aqu?

No, estn en el centro.

(en la Embajada) 10 Est usted en el hotel?

VEINTITRES

No, estoy en la Embajada.

11 Estn ellas bien aqu 1?

S, estn muy bien.

12 Estn ustedes oc upados?

S, estamos muy ocupados.

13 Est usted ocupado?

S, estoy muy ocupado.

4.23

UNIT 4
4.21.23

SPOKEN SPANISH
Translation drill

.
.
,. .
loz11broslestanenlams~
,

1 The books are on the taLle.

2 We're in a hotel a long way

from here.

"..

estamoslenUnbtelllehoz~~ak1~

Los libros estn en la mesa.

Estamos en un hotel lejos de aqu.

3 How are you?

kom2esta~std~

4 Are you Dusy?

"
,
estausted/6kpadot
,..

Cmo esta{ usted?

Est usted ocupado?

5 The elevator is to the left.

elas(~ensorlestal~1~kyrd+

6 Where's the cashier?

,
,
dondestallakh+

Dnde est la caja?

"

7 Columbus Ave nue is very near

here.

lben1dklonfestmuy~erka/d~k+

8 They're very busy.

.
.
eOOyoslstnmuyokupds~

9 Good evening. How are you?

,
,
,
,
bwenaznochs+ komoestaust~+
,..
,..

El ascensor est a la izquierda.

La Avenida Coln est muy cerca

de aqu.

Ellos estn muy ocupados.

Buenas noches. C6mo est usted?

VEINTICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

B. Discussion of pattern
The following discussion needs the prior c1arification of two concepts:
verb - a word identified in English by the endings it can occur with, as: 'work, work~, work~, work~', oc sorne internal modification,
as: 'sing, sing~, s~ng, s!!ng, sing!.!!g.' Spanish verbs are similarly identified by comparable (though more numerous and complex)
endings and changes. Verbs in English and Spanish commonally express action, occurrence, etc.
pronoun_ one o a relatively small group o words which contain the categories o person, number, and case.

The following chart lists

the English pronouns which can occur as subjects of verbs:

sp;

VEINTICINCO

pi
we
(you and I)
(Bill and I)

1st person

2nd person

you

you
(you and he)
(you amI Bill)

3rd person

he
she
it
(the book)

they
{he and she}
(Bill and he)
(the books)

4.25

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

The concept of person exists in English pronouns, but has a very limited application to English verbs. Most verbs in English occur with
an ending in what might be called the 3rd person singular forms: '1 hit - he hits, I dig - he digs, I miss - he misses'. In Spanish there are usually
five (1) widely used forms, which accompany and agree with different pronoun suhjects, showing person and nurnher distinctions. The following chart
gives examples of these forms, with the verb / e s tr/ .

y6

est6y

ests

ustd
l

est

(~~ya

nos6tros

estmos

ustdes
Q)yos
Q)yas

estn

Second and third person verb forms are identical, except that the concept of familiarity makes a distinction between second person singular
familiar and second person singular formal forms. In Spanish, two persons addressing each other will select one of two suhject pronouns, i.e./US td/
or/ t;' Automatically, the accompanying verb will take specific endings depending on which pronoun has been selected. Thus, the sentence 'How
are you?' can be translated either as /k mS?-es t~s td~ / or ;K 6ms<-es ts-t+ /
This selection involves a pattern of personal relationships which is by no means simple or even the sam~ throughout the Spanish speaking
world. Furthermore, it implies that the speaker must select one set of forms or the other when addressin#?; another individual depending on their
personal relationship. For the sake of brevity, the distinctions involved have been termed formal /us t'd/and familiar/t/, and in general way
correspond to the usage of 'Sir' or 'Mister' and first names in English. However, the Spanish and English usa~es do not correlate one hundred per
cent, and in Spanish there is a finer gradation from formality to familiarity in which both the selection of/US ted/or /t/ and the use of titles, first
names, and last names play an important parto Thus, in greeting Mr. Juan Molina, there are the following possibilities:
Cmo est usted, seor Molina?
Cmo est usted, Molina?

Cmo est usted, Juan?

Cmo ests t, Juan?

(1) Two other forms exist: /bos 6tros/ ,a 2nd person familiar plural form, is still used in parts of Spain, though considered archaic
in other dialect areas; and /b6s/, a 2nd person familiar singular form, used in sorne areas in place of or alongside /t/, the more common formo
80th /bos 6tros/ and /"065; require separate and distinct equivalent verb forms. See Appendix.

4.26

VEINTISEIS

UNrr 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

It does Mt follow that in his answer to a greeting, Mr. Molina is automatically going to use the sarne set of forms selected by the first speaker.
For the status of personal relationships between two individuals depends on such factors as their diEEerence in age, period of mutual acquaintance,
sex, rank, and Eamily relatiooship.
There are no rules of thumb which can guide the student in his selection of usted or trE forms. Rather, it is a question of feeling for
differences which he will develop as he adjusts to the cultural patterns of the individuals in any specific Spanish spealcing area.
Spanish verbs, unlike English (except in the case of commands), can appear with no accompanying prODoun or noun subject with
no loss of meaning content, Le., they contain their pronominal reference. Indeed they most frequently do appear alone, unless the pronouns
are present for special empilas is or contrast or unless (as is p08sibIe with 3rd person forms) the context does nol make the reference elear.
Thus the following translation correlations are usuaUy correcto

jy6 est6y/

I am

/t ests/

YOI&

he(she)is(y. are)

/l est/

leis

/estmos/

we are

/nos6tros estmos/

we are

/estn/

they(you)are

/(l'yos estn/

cAeyare

/est6y/

1 am

ests/

10U

/e3t/

are

/-y/

are

rhe verb / e s t r/ has certain irreRularities in ita pattern, name Iy tite addition 01
to the first person singular form and
tbe occurrence ol. stress on the endinWl ol all sinRula!' and second - third_person pI. .l forma. These irregularities wiU become more obvious
by contrast with tite regular pattern which wiU Le presented in Unit 6 ..

VEIN'I1SIETE

SPOKEN SPANISH

sijkwatrosenyor!ts~

..
.

s.unas eQyor ta.l.

,
s.unseQy6r~

,
snochoseQy6res.l.

.
snochod61res~
, .
,

d~bochod61rs~

tijgochod61rs~

Son cuatro pesos.

1
2

seoritas.

Es una seorita.

una

seor.

4.28

Es un seor.
Son ocho seoresv

4 --S}cho

Son cuatro seoritas.

dlares.

Son ocho dlares.

6 Debo

Debo ocho dlares.

7 Tengo

Tengo ocho dlares.

VEINTIOCHO

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

.,

dzdkwand~lestak1~

sta-------+

_ _ _ _estamos_+

stkwand2lestamoaakI+

_____________okupd'os~

stakwand~lestamoaokupdos+

d~zd'

5
6

,
.,
stkwand2lestakI+

..

---------~
, .

--------,

.,.

.,

.,

..

..
..

d~zdkwand2Iestoylnl~estadoaund6s+

dzdkwand2Iestal~nloastadoaun1dos+

Desde cm1ndo est aqu?

?

1 Hasta
2

Hasta cundo est aqu?

estamos_ _ ?

3
4 Desde

Hasta cundo estamos aqu?

ocupados?

Hasta cundo estamos ocupados?

Desde cundo estamos ocupados?

en los Estados Unidos?

VEINTINUEVE

.,...

d~zd'ekwand2Iestamoslnloastad'oaunid'6s+

-------------

d~zdkwand~lestamoaokupd'os+

_ _ _ _estoy
,
esta

-----

.,...

nloaestado~unid'6s~

.,..

Desde cundo estamos en los

Estados Unidos?

estoy

Desde cundo estoy en los

Estados Unidos?

est

Desde cundo est en los

Estados Unidos?

4.29

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

...

,
4

,
akJ.t

_pokas

. .

,
lJ.bros

mesas

,
aorat

.aJ.f,

. ..,

, ,
.,
aymucholrnob1rny ent21ak1t
, ,
,. .,
ayrnuchaslkosaslakJ.t

kosas

ayrnuchaslkosaslaorat
, ,.
,
,
aypokas Ikosas laorat
, ,.
,
,
aypokas IkosasjaJ.t
, ,.
,
,
aypokozllJ.broslaJ.1
, ,.
,
,
aypokazlmesaslaJ.t

.. .
..
..

t
t

..

Hay mucho movimiento en la Seccin Consular?

aqu?

Hay mucho movimiento aqu?

cosas

Hay muchas cosas aqu?

ahora?

4 _ _ pocas

4.30

..

aymucholrnob1myent2Inlas6k~yo~konsulart

Hay muchas cosas ahora?

Hay pocas cosas ahora?

ah?

Hay pocas cosas ah?

libros

Hay pocos libros ah?

mesas

Hay pocas mesas ah?

TREINTA

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

s~1 ksi5yempr~lstmo5pkp~6s

3
4
5

est6y

,
__nzbeies

Iestmos.ak+

511 nazbeieslest6yokupd+
,
,
si+ 6trazbeieslst6yokpdO+
,
,
si+ 6trzbe~eslestmoshkpds+
,
,
s+ ksisyempr~lstmshkpds+

S, casi siempre estamos ocupados.

1
2

aquo
est0f.

3 _ _unas veces
4

6
7 _ _casi siempre

S, casi siempre estamos aqu.

S, casi siempre estoy aqu.

S, unas veces estoy aqu.

ocupadoo

5 _ _otras veces

TREINTA Y UNO

7 _ksisyempr~

.
estamos
,

,
,
s+ nzbe~eslest6yk+

kpdO+

si~ ksisyempr~l5t6yak+

+
+

,
_trzbeies

s1.~ ksisyempr~

ak~

_
estamos

S~ unas veces estoy ocupado.

S, otras veces estoy ocupado.

_

S, otras veces estamos ocupados.

Si~ casi siempre estamos ocupados.

4.31

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,.
,
, .,.
E abl~usted1~gles IseQyormo11nat
,

,
amrikano

. .,.

,.

seQyor1ta------t

.,.

. ..,..,.

,.

. , . . , .

~stdespaQyolalseQyor1tamo11na1
,
. , .. ,
. , .. ".
abl~ustedespaQyollseQyor1tamo11nat
,
.,

,
' '0
ablo~o~spaQyollseQyorltamo11na1

ablo~obyenlseQyor1tamollna1

,
byen 1

E~

" .

Habla usted ingls, seor MoliDa?

1 Es
2

americano

espaola

5 Habla
6 _ _ yo
7

Es usted ingls, Sr. Molina?

Es usted americano, Sr. Molina?

. seorita__ ?

4.32

6~stdmerikanolseQyormo11na1
,.
~~stdmerikanalseQyor1tamo11na1

}lO

. , .

-_---_---t

~stdiDgleslseQyormo11na1

,
spAQyolal

5 abl~

Es usted espaola, Srta. Molina?

Habla usted espaol, Srta. Molina?

.?
bien

Es usted americana, Srta. Molina?

Hablo yo espaol, Srta. Molina?

IlaLlo yo bien, Srta. Molina?

TREINTA Y na;

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

minombreshos

..
.

J.I)gls~

minombres.1I)gls~

ste

minombres.st
,

lJ.bron -

mi11br2es.st~

3
4
5

,
_ll.bros

bwns

----plumas

mi11br~es.eks(~

mi s p luma (s) s ombwn s ~

Mi nombre es Jos.

ingls.

Mi nombre es ingls.

ste.

Mi nombre es ste.

3 -libro

ti

Mi libro es ste.
excelente.

buenos.

plumas

Mi libro es excelente.
Mis libros son excelentes.

S -libros

TREINTA Y TRES

.. .
, .
.. elnt
,
miz lJ.bro(s) s on~k(~ elnts~
, .
.
mizllbro(s) sombwns
,.
.
,

eks (i) e ln t

Mis libros son buenos.

Mis plumas son buenas.

UNIT 4
4.23

SPOKEN SPANISH
Variation drills

kWantoled"b~

Cunto le debo?

,
1 What do 1 owe you?

kele~b~

Qu le debo?

2 What are you telling him?

Qu le dice?

..
kelet!l.hrn~
, .. .
,

3 What did they tell him?

4 When did they teIl him?

kwandole~l.hrn~

5 Where did they tell him?

dondeledl.hrn.l.

6 How did they tell him?

komoledlhrn~

7 How is he getting along?

komoleb~

,
B

Qu le dijeron?

Cundo le dijeron?

...

Dnde le dijeron?

...

Cmo le dijeron?

..

Cmo le va?

,.. .

l~6ytres~ uno4epropna~

Le doy tres, uno de propina.

,
1 Dere are four, two f a tipo

,..

led6ykwatr~ dozdeprop1na~

Le doy cuatro, dos de propina.

,.

2 lIere are t wenty, ten lar a tipo

l~6ybeYJlt~ dye~4epropfna~

3 Here are ten, five f a tipo

ld6ydye~~ i1~kodepropina~

Le doy veinte, diez de propina.

,..

Le doy diez, cinco de propina.

TRE~TTA

Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

.. .

4 Here are eleven, one for a tip.

l~6yonie~ uno~eprop1n~

5 Here's a dollar and no tipo

led6yund61ar~ na~a~eprop1na~

6 Here's this, that's far a tipo

ld6yest6~ esodeprop1na~

7 I'll give you this, not that.

led6yest~

Le doy once, uno de propina.

.. .

Le doy un d61ar, nada de propina.

.. .

Le doy sto, eso de propina.

,
eson6

Le doy esto, eso no.

,
btrbaharlk6(~ns6trs~

Va a trabajar con nosotros.

1 He 's going to work with you aIl.

btrbharlknst~des~

Va a trabajar con ustedes.

,
2 She's going lo work here.

btrabaharlak~

Va a trabajar aqu.

,
3 She's going to speak Spanish.

bblrlespl2ydl~

Va a hab lar es pa 01.

4 He's going to learn English.

"
bprndrliD9 1s

Va a aprender ingls.

,
5 He's going to say something.

bde1rlg

6 She's going to translate the name.

btradi1rllnombr~~

7 You're going lo be very busy.

b~strJmuyokup46~

Va a decir algo.

TREINTA Y CINCO

Va a traducir el nombre.

..

Va a estar muy ocupado.

4.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 4

511 ~~abl~ump6ko~

S, yo hablo un poco.

'.

1 Ves, I speak a loto

5i~ ~2ablomch

S, yo hablo mucho.

2 Ves, you speak more.

,
5i

S, usted habla ms.

3 Yes, he speaks less.

, "
si elablam6ns~

".

stedablams~

~6tQg~lQkoa61res~

si

5 Ves, you have fiEteen.

si stedtyenekne

6 No, 1 don't have mucho

,
no1

no1

S, yo tengo cinc o dlares.

"

S, usted tiene quince.

,.,

~onoteQgomcho~

4 Yes, 1 have five dollars.

7 No, 1 don't owe mucho

S, l habla menos.

No, yo no tengo mucho.

~onodebomch

No, yo no debo mucho.

,
,
pr~steldbepraktikrlel~spaQydl~

Pero usted debe practicar el

espaol.

1 But you ought to ractice

English.

pr2steldbeprktikrleliDgls~

,
2 But you ought to say

Pero usted debe practicar el

ingls.

pr2steldbe~elrlgo

Pero usted debe dec ir algo.

something.

,
3 But Jau ought to take a

pr~steldbet6mrlntaksi

Pero usted debe tomar un taxi.

taxi.

4.36

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

4 But you ought to speak less.

pr~steldb~ablarmns

5 But you ought to speak more.

pr~stel~b~blarms

6 But you ought to go to the

prQsteldb~rll~mbhada

Pero usted debe hahlar menos.

,
Pero usted debe hablar ms.

Pero usted dehe ir a la Embajada.

Embassy.

7 But you ought to go up in the

pr~ste /dbsbr Inlas(~)nsor~

elevator.

,.

., .

otrak6s~ nomed19alseQy6rmolln~

,.
7

1 Another thing, don t tell me

Pero usted dehe suhir en el

ascensor.

Otra cosa, no me diga Sr. Molina.

otrak6s~ nome~lg~so~

Otra cosa, no me diga eso.

tha1.

,.
7

2 Another thing, don t repeat

,..

otrak6s~ nomerreplt~so

Otra cosa, no me repita eso.

that to me.

,.
7

3 Another thing, don t

translate that for me.

4 Another thing, don t give

,..

otrak6s~ nometradu~k~s

,.
otrak6s

Otra cosa, no me traduzca eso.

nomedepropn~

Otra cosa, no me d propina.

me a tipo

5 Another thing, don't pass

,.
, . ,
otrak6s-!. 11011epaseO)lt>ro~

Otra cosa, no me pase e l libro.

me the book.

TREINTA Y SIETE.

4.37

Ul'Hl

,.
6 Another thing, don't take
me to the hotel.

,.,.

4.3

otrak6s~ nome~eD~alot~l''

Otra cosa, no me lleve al hotel.

,.,...

,.
7 Another thing, don't take
me to the Embassy.

SPOKEN SPANISH

otrak6sa~ nomeQ~eb~al~embah5da~

Otra c osa, no me lleve a la

Embajada.

CONVERSATION STIMULUS
NARRATWE 1

,
1 Mr. Smith and Mr. White are
at the Embassy.

elsQy6rsrnl~l*elseQy6rhwaytl

estnAnlaemb~ha~~
".

e n la Embajada.

,
2 MI'. Smith wants him to meet
MI'. Molina.

3 Mr. White speaks Spanish

very well.

els~Qy6rsml~lkyrepr6sntarl~lil

El Sr. Smith y el Sr. "hite estn

sQyormoln~~

El Sr. Smith quiere presentarle al

Sr. Molina.

.,
"
lsety6rhwayt Iblariluybyen I

El Sr. White habla muy bien

espaol.

,
4 He learned it in school.

l~prendyol~nl~eskwela

,,,
5 Mr. Molina speaks Enp;lish a
littie, not mucho

4.38

Lo aprendi en la escuela.

elseQy6rm611n~labl~iDglesl

mpk6nomch6~

El Sr. Molina habla ingls un

poco, no mucho.

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

DIALOG 1

Sr. Smith, dgale a Juan que Ud.

quiere presentarle al Sr.
Molina.

,
,
,
hwan~ kyrpresentarl~llseQy6rmlln~
, -

Jos~, dle su nombre -Jos Molina-

Smith: Juan, quiero presentarle

al Sr. Molina.

,-

hsemoln~ muchogst~

Jos: Jos Molina, mucho gusto.

y dgale que mucho gusto.

Juan, dgale que igualmente y dle

su nombre -John White.
Pregntele que cmo se dice
John en espaol, que si Juan.

Jos, dgale que s, que Juan y

dgale que l habla muy
bien el espaol.

"

igwalm~nt~ J~hwayt~

~1~eIJnlnspQy61~

lspQy61~
,
2uchazgr~ysJ,

Jos~,

ondel~aprendy6J,

ingl~s.

Juan: Igualme nte, J ohn White.

hwant

Cmo se dice 6John' en

espaol?, Juan?

Jos: S, Juan. Usted habla muy

bien el espaol_

Juan: Muchas gracias.

. . .
,

Juan, dgale que en la escuela.

Pregntele si l habla

"
".,
slhwa-n-l. stedabla Imuybyn I

Juan, dgale que muchas gracias.

pregntele que dnde lo

aprendi.

..

komose

Jos~:

Dnde lo aprendi?

enl~skwela *ust~~

Juan: En la escuela. Y usted

habla ingls?

bl~mpoklnomsJ,

Jos: Hablo un poco, no mis.

aDl~lI)glest

Jos, contstele que Ud. habla un

poco, no ms.

TREINTA Y NUEVE

4.39

Ul~11

SPOKEN SPANISH

NARRAT/VE 2

1 John's heen here since yesterday.

,.
"
,
hwanestak1Idezd~a~r~

2 He's going lo work in the Consular

,
.,
,
.,
batrahahar(enlsekyoijkonsulr

Juan est aqui desde ayer.

Section.

Va a traba jar en la Seccin

Consular.

3 The Consular Section is on the

main floor.

lsekiy6~k6nsularl
est~nelprimerp1s
,

4 It's to tlle right of the entrance

t:

nlasekiy6~knslr~

doing there.

Est a la derecha de la entrada.

..

ksisyempr~lestnmuyokupdsl

6 But right now there sn't much

r. onsular est en el

primer piso.

estl~erechaldel~entrda

5 Most of the time they ~ re very hus}'

in the Consular Section.

La Secc i60

Casi siempre estn muy ocupados

en la Seccin Consular.

pr~a6ram1zmofn~aymucho

..

mob~mynt~'1

Pero ahora mismo no hay mucho

movimiento ah 1.

D/ALOG 2

Jos, pregntele al Sr. White que desde

cuando est aqu?

-,

d~zdekwand~lestak1IseQy6rhwyt

Jos: Desde cundo est aqu i

Sr. White?

Juan, dgale que no le diga 'Sr. White',

que le diga 'John' o 'Juan'.

4.40

, . ,.
,
nomed1ga/seQyorhwyt
,
,
dgamja-n !hwn

Juan: No me diga 'Sr. White'.

Dgame 'John' o Juan'.
CUARENTA

UNIT 4

SPOKEN SPANISH

Jos, dlgale que est bien, y

otra vez pre~ntele que desde
cundo est aqu?

Jos: Est bien, Juan. Desde

cundo est aqu?

Juan, dgale que desde ayer.

dzd~~r
,

Jos, dlgale que a Ud. le dijeron que l va a trabajar

con ustedes.

Juan: Desde ayer.

11

mdiheroDlkbtrabahrlk6~nsotrbs~

Juan, dgale que s, y preg.ntele que dnde est la Secc ibn C ons ular .

si+ dondest !laSel(iy6I;Knslr+

Jos, dlgale que en el primer piso,

a la derecha de la entrada.

n.l:)rimerps~

,
aladrecha

aelaentret-i
,.
,

Juan, pregntele si hay mucho

movimiento ah ahora.

11

CUARENTA Y UNO

Jos~: En el primer piso, a la

ayimuchomoblmyentQla1~orat

"

Juan: Hay mucho movilTliento

ah~ ahora?

. .

ksisyempr~lstmozlmuyoku~dsi

'",.

Juan: S. Dnde est la Seccin

Consular?

derecha de la entrada.

Jos, contstele que casi siempre

uetedes estn muy ocupados, pero
que ahora mismo no hay mucho
movimiento.

Jos: Me dijeron que va a trabajar

con nosotros.

...

pr2aoramlzmotn~aymuchomoblmynt~

Jos: Casi siempre estamos muy

ocupados, pero ahora mismo
no hay mucho movimiento.

4.41

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

5.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White's first day at work.

In their office, John White and Jos Molina begin to get better acquainted.

ENGLISH SPELLING

SPANISH SPELLING

AID TO LISTENING

ser

to be
your (yours)
the desk

Molina
John, this is going to be your desk.

..

e 1 escritorio

Molina
Juan, ste va a ser su escritorio.

hwan.l- estebaserls~skritoryb

,
,
kwlkyr kwalkyer

whatever

(O

cualquier (cualquiera)

k-n~s~te ne~sitar.l-

que necesite (necesitar)

notify (to notify)

b~s.l-

avise (avisar)

notify me

ab~sm.l-

that (you) may need (to need)

Whatever you need, let me know.

bisar

kwalkyerkosalkene~es~tetab1sme
mch~simos~

very much (much)

White
O. K. Thanks a lote

avseme

...,.

,.
,

UNO

su (suyo)

,
l-eskri toryo.&.

,
muybyn

..

,
much

mCh1s~mazgr~ys~

Cualquier cosa que necesite, avseme.

muchsimos (mucho)

White
Muy bien. Muchisimas gracias.

5.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

,
lA-part'''

the part

,.

Malina
What part of the States are you
from?

la parte

..

d~keparte /etlos.stal'tos.unos les.std-!-

Malina
De qu parte de los Estados
Unidos es usted?

(1) am (to be)

White
rm from San Francisco,
Californiac

soy (ser)

soyldsmfrnilSklkalifornya~

Where are you from?

White
Soy de San Francisco,
California.

".

!US tede<1nds-!-

y usted, de dnde es?

Malina

Malina

rm from heleo

Soy de aqu.

(you) carne (to come)

1 -famJ.ly-!-

the family
"

Did you come with your family?

vino (venir)

,
o

la familia

bJ.nQustedlkonsufam11yat

Vino usted con su familia?

,
bachelor

White
No~

rm a bacheloro
married (to marry)

soltero-!-

,
"
no+ s6y /sol ter6~

,
"
kasado+ kasar+

soltero

White
No, s oy s olteroc

casado (casar)

DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

What about you? Are you married?

*st~~ ~sksa~ot

y usted, es casado?

,
tambyen~

also, too

Malina
No, I'm a bachelor, too.

,
n01

tambin

s6yslter6ftmby~n~

the hour

Mall.na
No, soy soltero tambin.
la hora

White
What time is it?

White
Qu hora es?

,
l-kwarto~

the quarter

Malina
It's a quarter to twelve.

, .

el cuarto

s6nlaz~o~elmenoskwrt~

Malina
Son las doce menos cuarto.

es-k+

it is that

es que

already

ya

l-ambri

the hunger

tner-ambr.l.

to be hungry

Are you hun~f) aIready?

enough, quite (a bit)
good
the restaurant

TRES

e 1 hambre (E)

".

tener hambre

"".-

eslkyatyen~ambret
,
bstant~

Es que ya tiene hambre?

Lastante

,
l-rrst6rah~

buen (bueno)
el restorn

5.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

White
Ves, quite hungryo Is there a good

,
e

restaurant near here ?

,.,

si~ bastant~

e'

ayumbwen
e e,

rre5toranlerka~~ak~t

,
l-t>wel tA~

the turn

la vuelta

around the c orner

a la vuelta

cheap, inexpensive

bratb~

barato

,
511 y6nQllbweltal
,

that's good and inexpensive.

Malina
S, hay uno a la vuelta

kzbwenQ1brt6~

que es bueno y barato.

to lunch

p6demos.t. p6d:er~
,
Almraer.f.

almorzar

together

hunt6s~

juntos

(it) seeJTIS tto seem)

pre~~

to you lit) seems

le-pAre.f.

(we) can (to be able)

, e. . ,

preer.f.

We can have lunch togethero

p6~emo~almorarfh6nt6s~

00 K with you?

lpareet>yent

parece (parecer)
le parece
Podemos almorzar juntos.
Le parece bien?
vamos (ir)

Let's goc

podemos (poder)

let's go, we go (to go)

restorn cerca de aqu?

,
-lA-bweltA.t.

Malina
Ves, tiJere's one around the corner

White
Sure

White
S, bastanteo Hay un buen

komon6~ bams~

White
Cmo no. Vamos o

504
CUATRO

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

5.10

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) /neieste/neeesite is an example of a verb form which has no exact equivalent in English. Forros of this type are called 'subjunctive.'
The particular use of a subjunctive construction illustrated in the present sentence will be drilled in Unit 40. Subjunctive forms will be designated
in English by the translation device 'that (you) may '

5.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

5.21.1

Pattern drills

5.21.1

The irregular verh

A.

/sr/

Presentation of paUern

lLLUSTRATIONS

,
,
n01 s6yslter
,
,
eres ser
,
,
itui ~reskasadot

*ste~ ~skasaoot

y usted, es casado?

min~mbr~~h~s

Mi nombre es Jos.

,
no

1
(you) are (tobe)
And you, are you married?
.-._-

--

._--------

(we) are (to be)

No, we're single.
(you) (pI.) are (lo be)
CINCO

,
S

6m6(s) S l teros

No, soy soltero.

eres (ser)

y t, eres casado?

somos (ser)
No, somos solteros.
son (ser)

5.5

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT5

,
And are yon aH married?

*ste~s~ s6~kasartost

snllaz~o~emenoskwrto~

y ustedes, son casados?

Son las doce menos cuarto.

EXTRAPOLA TION

1
2

fam

2-3 for

sg

pl

s6y

s6mos

res
,

es

s6n

NOTES
a. Spanish has two verbs which translate English ato be':

/estr/, presented

in Unit 4, and

/sr/,

presented

in this unit.

5.6

SEIS

UNIT5

SPOKEN SPANISH
5.21.11

Suhstitution drills

Number substitution

1
2

,
s6yamerikano
,
s6I)kasad"os
,
S 6m6(s) S O1te l' S ~

4 s6ndek1.~
,.

,
s6ms.merikans~

~sksado

s6yslter~

~z<1eak1.~
,.

5 zd"klifornya~

s6ndekalifornya~

6 s6yd~ak1

s6mzd~ak1.~

7 ~s.amerikan~

s6n.amerikans~

SIETE

,
,

1 Soy amerioano.

Somos americanos.

2 Son casados.

Es casado.

3 Somos solteros.

Soy soltero.

4 Son de aqul.

Es de aqu.

5 Es de CalifOl"nia.

Son de California.

6 Soy de aqu.

Somos de aqu.

7 Es americano.

Son arner icanos.

S.7

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH
Pcrson - nu:nh5r 's.mstitution

1 antonvoez~echil~

,
soyd'echl1et
~

,
,.

sondechle~

eZaechle~

sted

azdechle
"

ti

antonyol*1liya_.

"

p ab1 2

"
,.
,
nosotro(s) somos Imerikans
,

alliY~

, .

ustedes

---------i

" ..

')

1 '
1
as,Zlmer l.{dna+
, ,.
son.amerlkns~

..

1 Antonio es de Chile.
Yo

Soy de Chile.

Pablo

Es de Chile.

Antonio y Alicia_.

Son de Chile.

Usted

Es de Chile.

2 Nosotros somos americanos.

Alicia

5.8

Ustedes

Es americana.
Son americanos.

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

,
~o

...
, . . .
sonamerJ.knos
,

soyamerJ.kno,,

e~os

'

. .

3 ~lJ.)yge(s) soltera

. .

,
,
el.antonyo

.t-

s omo(s) soltros''

.f.

sonsolt~rs''

eCOJa

.f.

.
,
.
e (s) soltr.f.

H-O

..

soysolt~r6''

pablQl~o

Yo

Soy americano.

Ellos

Son americanos.

Somos soheros.
Son s oheros.

Ella

Yo

Soy sohero.

3 Alicia es soltera.
Pablo y yo

El y Antonio

NUEVE

Es soltera.

5.9

UNIT 5
5.21 . 12

SPOKEN SPANISH
Response drilI

. .

1 alJ.iy~e(5)

..
. .

501 ter~t Oka5~d~

~.

2 e~ustdamerikanotQespaQy6l~

....

,.
3 son.OO~Ozd:chJ.l~t od:elos.es tado5.

,
(s) slter+
,
s6yamrikano~

s6nldelo~estdoaUn1~OS~

unidos.!.

.,.

[l~estd:6anJ.~os]

4 dd:ondeso~std:es+

[smfran~J.sko]

[ launa]
,
[kalifornya]

dedondes.us td+
'"

6 k~or~s+

"

7 dekeparte~~~

,
somozldelosAstdoan1dos+
;

s6ydesmfrn~J.sko+

ezl~una+
l'

zc1"eklifornya+

1 AHc ia es s oltera o casada?

Es soltera.

2 Es usted americano o espaol?

Soy americano.

3 Son ellos de Chile o de los

Son de los Estados Unidos.

Estados Unidos?
(los Estados Unidos)
(San Francisco)
(la una)
(Californi::l )

5.10

4 De dnde 'son ustedes?

Somos de los Estados Unidos.

5 De dnde es usted?

Soy de San Francisco.

6 Qu hora es?

Es la una.

7 De que parte es ella?

Es de California.

DIEZ

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,.
es.eldechl.let
,. ,.

[los.estds.. nldos]

[lazdoie]
,
[ksad]
,

9 s6nlazdo~elmenoskwartot

[am~rlkan6s]

. .

nd~ s6nlzdo~e~
,

.f

nd~ s6yksad6~

,.
s6~stedes lespaQyolest

,
n01

.,.

,.

11

,.

10 s~stedsolterot

Sl.~ s6yksado~

13 s6nBO~os~merl.kanost

si+

(los Estados Unidos)

(las 12)

....,.

s6mo~merikans~

~2 s~stedkasadot

s6Qmerikanos~

8 Es l de Chile?

No, es de los Estados Unidos.

9 Son las doce menos cuarto?

No, son las doce.

(casado) 10 Es usted soltero?

(americanos) 11 Son ustedes espaoles?

ONCE

nd~ ~zde16s.estd6sUnl.ds~

No, soy casado.

No, somos americanos.

12 Es usted casado?

S, soy casado.

13 Son ellos americanos ?

S, son americaDos.

5.11

UNIT 5
5.21.13

SPOKEN SPANISH
Translation drill

1 We're from San Francisco.

,
,
somoz Idsmfran1Skb+
,

Somos de San Francisco.

2 She's married, too.

OO~~eskasadaltambyn

Ella es casada tambin.

3 The hotels are excellent.

,.
los"bteles Ison,.eks(i>elntes+
"

Los hoteles son excelentes.

4 Where's the lady from?

.. .
...
d~kepart~lezlaseQy6ra+

5 Where 're you from?

,
ded:ondes.us td:+

6 My name is Pancho.

minombrespnch6~

Mi nombre es Pancho.

7 I'm (an) American.

,
soyamer1kno+
,
.

Soy americano.

8 How much is the tip?

De dnde es usted?

..

...

kwant~ezlapropna~

9 They're from the Consular

Section.

De qu parte es la seora?

..

eQMOS Is6ndelasek~yoDkonsulr+
,

..
.

lO When is the trip?

kwand~e~elbyhe+

11 The pleasure is mine.

elgustQezmi+

Cunto es la propina?
Ellos son de la seccin consular.

Cundo es el viaje?
El gusto es mo.

,
12 We 're married, too.

s6m6sksa~os'tambyn+

13 The restaurants are not

expensive.

lzrrestoraneslsombarts+

,.

5.12

"

Somos casados tambin.

Los restoranes son baratos.

DOCE

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

B. Discussion of pattern

The verb /sr/

is highly irregular in the present tense, as will be seen by comparing it to regular verb patterns presented in Unit 7.

Both /estr/ and /sr/ translate the English verb 'be'. They are not, however, equivalente Rather they divide an area of
meaning which is included in the content of a single English concept, named by the verb 'be'. Therefore a confusion between the two
cannot be thought of as a relatively minor mistake simply because they express aspects of what is considered 'the same thing' in English;
in Spanish /sr/ and /estr/ are as genuinely different as any other two verbs, and the use of one when the other is expected is
painfully obvious.
The difference between /sr/ and /estr/ can perhaps best be generalized by other English concepts: /sr/ is the link
of identity, (the essential, inherent or permanent), / e s t r/
the link of association, (the casual, accidental or temporary). This generalization is more useful descriptively in sorne cases than in others. Thus when a noun follows the linking verb to express complete identity,/sr/
is always selected:

J ohn is m}'" brother.

When an adjective follows the linking verb, one has to decide whether the link of identity or the link of association is appropriate.
The choice may often seem quite arbitrary to Americans, but when identity is involved ( / sr/) ,there seems to be a more inherent connection between the noun and the quality; when association :s involved ( / e str/) , the connection is more or less ine idental.
Thus even though /sr/ and /estr/ appear in utterances which show no other difference, the two utterances will never have
the same 'meanmg'. If a person describes a house with an adjective like pretty, saying 'The house is pretty', he cannot, in Spanish, express
only this much of the idea. He must also say ether that the house is intrinsically pretty,

/lak~s~lesbon!ta~/
or that it presents an unusually attractive appearance on a specific occasion (1ooks pretty),

/laks~lestbonta~/
There s no way to make the mcomplete statement (from the Spanish point of view) that the house 'is' pretty; additional refinements in meaning
are oblgatory in the choice of /sr/ or /estr/ Through this choice the Spanish speaker indicates the circumstances he considers
"dentity and distinguishes them from those he considers association.
TRECE

5..13

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

The distinction is, to be sme, forced by the structure of the language (the divided linking verb), but it is no less real to the speaker of
Spanish, who never hesitates to select the correct forme lt is only the American, whose background lacks the experience of making a meaning
distinction, nonsignificant in English but highly significant in Spanish, who experiences a confusion between the two forms. In a very real
sense, using /Sr/and /estr/ correctly involves an entire way of life, and an American seeking proficiency in spoken Spanish needs
to acquire a 'feel' for the distinction by making a large number of sentences his own through memorization in meaningf ul contexts.
When a verb modifier appears with the linking verb, assoc iation is generally se lected (/e s tr/ ), though not exclusively. Notice
the following contrasts, most of which are illustrated in basic sentences:

/estr/

association

/ S r/

identity

/k6mQestmara~/

How's Mary?

/km9smara.J.

What's Mary like?

/d6ndests~esp6s6.J./

Where's your husband?

/ded6nd(s) s\.1esp6so.J. /

Where's yom husband from?

/d6ndestlafysta.J./

Where's the party?

/d6ndslafysta.J./

Where's the party being held?

Other c1assifications and examples can be found in the appendix.

5.14

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH
Replacement dril..

5.22

"

UNIT 5

.,

dkeparteI4~16~est4o~n1~bsl~~std+

_______________

~}J.6s+

+
+

_____________s

________kli f orny ~,

'/

d~keparteld16sAstd6s~n1d6sls6nAO~bs+

"
,
dkeparte ld"16s.stds.n1dos Is.~l+
".
,
dkepartelrtkaliforny~ls.~l+

".

dkeparteldkalifornyals6nl(~sQy6ras+

_ _ _ _-

st~d+

____________s6moz

, .,
ddondeson Il(s} s~Qy6rs+
,
d40nde,.. les.st~d+
,
d4ondls6mznos6tros+

A De qu parte de los Estados Unidos es usted?

1

ell08?

ea~?

..--;Calornia

QUINCE

De qu parte de los Estados Unidos es l?

~_?
~-=-=-las

De qu parte de Calornia es l?

seoras?

5 _dnde
6

De que parte de los Estados Unidos son ellos?

-.?
usted?
somos _ _-J?

De qu parte de Calornia son las seoras?

De d6nde son las seoras?
De dnde es usted?
De dnde somos

DOS otros ?

5.15

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

. .., .

,.
B b1nolkonsufam11yat

______ffil.
t
1
,
2 baha
t

. .., .

,.
b1no/konm1fam11yat
,.
bahajkonm1fam11ya1
,.
bahalkonlafam11yat
,.
.,
bahalkonlasfam11yast

. .., .

'----., .
fam1lyast
,
seQyort

4
5

. .., .
. .
.

la

trbaha

.. .

.. . ,
,. . .
. ,.
trbaha Ikonlo(s} seQyorest
,.

trabahalkon~lseQyor1

t
los

,.

bahalkonelseQyort

---t

Vino con su familia?

1

mI

2 Baja
3
4
5

6 Trabaja
7

la

Vino con mi familia?

Baja con mi familia?

Baja con la familia?

familias?
seor __?

2
los_?

Baja con las familias?

Baja con el seor?
Trabaja con el seor?
Trabaja con los seores?

5.16

DIECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

no s6ys61ter''
1

_s6mos

..

~1l)k6''

..

3 _s6n
",

_bwenAsl

no'' s6mo(s) s6lter6s''

no'' s6mos(w 1IJkb''

nd'' S6n1I)k6''

,
,

no'' s6mbwenas''

mas~

..

no''

~ymas''

7 _kyro_''

no''

ky~rmas''

-'v

no'' s6nmas''

No, 80Y 80ltero.

1 _80mos _ _

No, somos solter

No, 8om. cinco.

cinco.

3 _son _ _-"

No, 80n cinco.

"
5

No, son buenas.

6 _hay

buenas_
~_

7 _quiero_

DIECISIETE

No, 80n ms.

No, hay ms.

No, quiero m.

5.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

,
*std~

s6~

2
3

s6y
,
_nosotros

~stedes~s6~kasadost

t
,
solterost

~stedes~s6ns61terost

,
le<'l~~(s) solterat
,
,
i~o'' s6yslterot
,
,

t
,
solterast

*~as''s6nslterast

t
,
___________ amrikanost

inosotrbs~s6m6(s) solterost

inosotrbs~s6m~amrikanost

Y usted, es casado?

son _ _ ?

y ustedes, son casados?

_solteros?

y ustedes, son solteros?

3 _ella,

y ella, es soltera?

soy

y yo, soy soltero?

_ solteras?

6 _nosotros
7

5.18

--e)y~

4
5

,
skasadot

_ americanos ?

y ellas, son solteras?

y nos otros, s omos solteros?

y nosotros, somos americanos?

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

".

1
2

btel

_muchos

4
5

.aben1das
., .

,
taks1S

. t .,.

l~embahadat

..,.
...,.

,
,
,..,
ay Imuchos.oteles I() erka<1~ak1 t

.,t

"..

"

aylnptell~erkad~ak~t

a1t

_ _ bstantes

ay
,
ay
,
ay
,
ay
"
ay

,..,

Imuchas.aben~das I() erkad~ak1 t

,
".
"
,
Imuchas.aben1d" as I() erkad~a~t

...

..

...

"
".
,..,
/bstantes.abenl.etas 1(~erkad~aJ.t

.. ,
Ibstantestaks1S 1(~~rkad~a1t
,.,.
,....".
Ibstantestaksl.s I(werkadel~embaha<:tat
,.".

Hay un restorn cerca de aqu?

1 _hotel

Hay un hote 1 cerca de aqu?

muchos

Hay muchos hote les cerca de aqu?

Hay muchas avenidas cerca de aqu.?

2 _

3 i.

avenidas
ah!?

5 -bastantes

6 '
7

DIECINUEVE

."

aylnrr~stbranl~erkad~ak~t

taxis

Hay muchas avenidas cerca de ah?

Hay bastantes avenidas cerca de ah ?

Hay bastantes taxis cerca de ah 1?

la Embajada?

Hay bastantes taxis cerca de la Embajada?

5.19

SPOKEN SPNISH

UNIT 5

pbdemosllm6r~arlhntos~

trah~~~

1
2

,
J.r

a!~

pwed~

tamby~n~

podemoslalmor~arlotrab~~~

kyer2Ialm6r~arlotrab~~~

ky~r2J.rltrah~~

kyer2J.ra~

"'.

pwe<!~J.ra~

pwe<!~l.rltamby~n~
11

.t.

7 neies1t~

,
kyerS?

neieSl.tiJ.rltambyn~

Podemos almorzar juntos.

otra vez.

Podemos almorzar otra vez.

2 Quiero

Quiero almorzar otra vez.

3 _ir

Quiero ir otra vez.

ah.

Quiero ir ah .

5 Puede_.

Puede ir ah .

Puede ir tamhin.

7 Necesita

tambin.

Necesita ir tambin.

5.20
VEINTE

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH
5.23

Variation drilIs

,
A

lst~~ de~ond~s~

y usted, de dnde es?

,
1 And where's the gentleman
from?

*elsQyr~ dedonds~

2 And where's Mrs. Molina

from?

..

y el seor, de dnde es?

ilAs~Qyoramolfn~ d~dond~s~

y la seora Molina, de dnde es?

,.lelch6frdetaksi~ dedond~s

y el chofer

4 And where's the waiter from?

,
,
*elmoi dedonds

y el mozo, de dnde es?

5 And where's the cashier from?

,
,
lelkahero
dedonds
,.

y el cajero, de dnde es?

3 And where's the taxi

driver from?

..

6 And where're John and Joseph

from?
7 And where're the Molinas from?

VEINTIUNO

,
ihwanlhos

de~taxi,

de dnde es?

,.

dedondes6n~

,
,.
ilzmllna ddondes6n

y Juan y Jos, de dnde son?

y los Molina, de dnde son?

5.21

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

s6y~esamfrani1sk6Iklifornya~

Soy de San Francisco, California.

1 I'm from the United States.

soyldelo~estdo~n1dos~

Soy de los Estados Unidos.

,
2

I'm from Florida.

s6ydeflor1da~

Soy de Florida.

,
3 I'm from here.

s6Yd~aki~

Soy de aqu.

,
4 I'm a bachelor.

s6ysolter~

5 I'm a taxi driver.

s6ych6f~rdtaksi~

6 We're married.

s6moskasad"6s~

Somos casados.

7 We 're s ingle.

,
S 6m6(s) S lterbs.J.

Somos solteros.

Soy soltero.

,
Soy chofer de taxi.

Qu hora es?

5.22

1 What day is it?

Qu da es?

2 What language is it?

Qu lengua es?

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

, ,
k~otelsJ.

3 What hote l is it?

Qu hotel es ?

4' Wbat sc Lool is it?

keskwel~s~

Qu escuela es?

5 What tables are they?

, ,
kemesa(s) s6n-l.

Qu mesas son?

6 What books are they?

ke11bro(s) s6n-l.

, ,

Qu libros son?

, ,
7 What (kind of a) thing is it?

kekosis~

Qu cosa es?

,
,
s6nllzdo~emenoskwrt6''

Son las doce menos cuerlo.

~

.".

1 It'a (ifteen to twelve.

56nllaz~o~emenosk!nie~

2 It's ten to eleven.

56nlla~on~emenozdyi~

3 lt-s twenty to seven.

s6nll(~syetemenozb'ynt6''

Son las siete menos veinte.

4 h's five lo nine.

,
,
56n )lznwebemeno(s) ~1!Jkb-l.

Son las nueve menos cinco.

Son las doce menos quince.

.".
,

Son las once menos diez.

...

. .

5 h's a quarter lo eight.

VEINTlTRES

.,.

s6nlla~ochomenoskw&rtb''

Son las ocho menos cuarto.

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

,
s6n )lA(s) se\ts''

6 It's su.

Son las seis.

Es la una.

7 It's one.

,
, ,
Yatyen~ambret

.
,..
~atyenelloz401arest
, ,
. ,.
~atyen~lelcheket
, ,
.
,.
~atyen~luijkwartot

Ya tiene hambre?

, ,.

1 Have you got the dollars already ?

2 Have you got the check already?

3 Has she got a room alr.eady?

4 Has she got atable already?

~atyen~lunamesat

..
~atyenelbeynte~olares1
,.

5 Has he got twenty dollars

already?

,
6 Does he have a hotel?

7 Does he Lave a taxi?

5.24

Ya tiene un cuarto?

Ya tiene una mesa?

.,

Ya tiene veinte d61ares?

..,

tyen~unJ)telt

Ya tiene el cheque?

..,.

Ya tiene los dlares?

Tiene un hotel?

tyen~untaks~ t

Tiene un taxi?

VEINTICUATRO

UNIT 5

SPOKEN SPANISH

"

,.

,.

si~ yun2lalabweltalkezbwen21bart6~

1 Ves, there's one here that's

very good.

2 Ves, there's one here that's

excel1ent.

~
"
,
S1-+ yun~ I Ak1 Ikes.eks (~elent~

S, hay uno aqu que es excelente.

511

6 No, there's not another one to

the left.

7 No, there's not another school

o Ianguages.

VEINTICINCO

,. ,

,.,

yun~la1Ip~r6kwestamucho~

si~ yun2Ienl~~mbahadalpr2

,
staQkupdo''

"

5 Ves, there's one on the first

floor who is an American.

S, hay uno aqu que es muy bueno.

"

4 Ves, there's one at the Embassy

but it's busy.

s11 yun~1k1Ikzmuybw~not

,
3 Ves, there's one there, but it
costs a loto

S, hay uno a la vueha que es bueno

y barato.

S, hay uno en la Embajada pero

est ocupado.

,.

si~ yun~lnAlprimerp1sol

kes..merikan~

,
n''

S, hay uno ah, pero cuesta mucho.

S, hay uno en el primer piso

que es americano.

"

n2ayotr2Ial~iky~rda''

,
"
noi n2ayotr~'eskw~ldel~~9ws~

No, no hay otro a la izquierda.

No, no hay otra escuela de lenguas.

5.25

UNIT 5

5.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

CONVERSATION STIMULUS

NARRATWE 1

,..

1 1t's almost twelve o'dock.

s oI)kas :Llaz<!6~~''

2 J ose i~ going to uve lunch

with John.

h6selbalmoriarlkoI)hwn~

"

,.

Son casi las doce.

Jos va a almorzar con Juan.

3 John isn't very hungry.

hwanlnotyenelmuchmbr~

4 There ' s a good res taurant

around the e orner.

ymbwenrrestoranlalabwltA~

5 The restaurant is quite

inexpensive.

lrrestoranlAzbastantebarto

.,

Juan no tiene mucha hambre.

..

,.

Hay un buen restorAn a la

vuelta.

El restorAn es bastante
barato.

DIALOG 1

Jos, preg6ntele a Juan si

no va a almorzar.

Juan, contstele que Ud. no tiene

mucha hambre y pregntele que qu~
hora es.

"
.,
,
nohalmorarlhwant

"

.,

Jos: No va a almorzar,
Juan?

noteI)gomuchmbre~ k~or~s~

Juan: No tengo mucha

hambre. Qu
hora es?

5.26
VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

,..

Jos, dgale que son casi las

doce, y pregntele si pueden
almorzar juntos.

. .

Jos, dgale que a la vuelta, que

hay un buen restorn ah.

pbdemos

Jos: Son casi las doce. Podemos

almorzar juntos?

almorar Ihuntos t

Juan, contstele que muy bien, que

vayan, y pre~ntele que adnde
pueden ir.

so~kas11azdSe~

,.

muyby~m~bam6s+ a~onde

., .

poetemosr+

,
albwelta+ ylm
,
.,
bwenrrestoranla+

Juan: Muy bien, vamos. A d6nde

podemos ir?

Jos: A la vuelta. Hay un buen

restorn ah.

. .

Juan, preguntele si es barato.

,
,
ezbaratot

Jos, dgale que s, que es bastante

barato.

Juan: Es bal'ato?

,.

si~ ~zbastantebart6~

Jos: Sl, es bastante barato.

NARRArlVE 2

1 Carmen del Valle is in the restaurant.

,...

.,

karmendelbaO>&~lesta~nelrrestorn''

,.

2 J ohn wants to meet her.

hwa~kyerekono~rla~

3 She is at atable on the lelt.

~Restal~nunamesalR1~kyr4a~

4 Carmen speaks English very well.

karmenlblRi~glezlmuyby6n~

VEINTISIETE

.,

Carmen del Valle est en el restorn.

Juan quiere conocerla.

~..

"

Ella est en una mesa a la izquierda.

Carmen habla ingls muy bien.

5.27

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

,
5 She learned it in school, in
the States.

lQaprndyol~nlReskwel

Lo aprendi en la escuela,

..

en16~stado~un1dos~

en los Estados Unidos.

D/ALOG 2

.
.
a1~stalkarmendelb~e+
, . . ., .
,

Jos, dgale a Juan que ah est

Carmen del Valle. Pregntele
s i quiere conoe erla.

S1~

Quiere conocerla?

".

k6m6no1 dondest+

Juan: S, cmo no. Dnde est?

Jos, dgale que est ah a la

izquierda.

est11lRi~kyerda~

Juan, pregDtele a Jos si Carmen

hab la ingls .

abl~1~gleskarment

Jos, contstele que s, que lo habla

muy bien, que lo aprendi6 en los
Estados Unidos en la escuela.

si~ 12blamuybyn~ lQprendyol

5.28

Jos', Ah est Carmen del Valle.

kyerekono~erlat

Juan, _contstele que s, que c6mo

no. Pregntele que dnde est.

Jos: Est& ah, a la izquierda.

Juan: Habla ingMs Carmen?

"

.
.
,
~n16~stado~un1doslenl~eskwel+
,

Jos~:

S, lo habla muy bien. Lo

aprendi en los Estados
Unidos en la escuela.

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 5

NARRATWE 3

J ohn is de lighted to

hwanlsttijkanta~ol~~kn6,era

JuaD est eDcantado de CODocer

meet Carmen.

krmeo.J.

2 He talks with her iD

English and then in
Spanish.

~n;sp;Qy61''

,.

n01

Habla con ella eD iDgls y luego

eD espaol.

eld1ielk~z~ekallfornya.J.

4 No, he isn't from SaD

Francisco, he's from
San Diego.

..,

.,

ahlalkonl~~e~~glestilwe9~

3 He says that he is froro

California.

a Carmen.

El dice que es de Calornia.

ln~ez~esamfransko''

zdsndyeg,6.J.

5 He arrived yesterday.

No, l no es de San FraDcisco,

es de San Diego.

ViDo ayer.

.. ..

6 He didD't come with his

family.

7 Be's siDgle.

VEINTINUEVE

, ,
nob1nokonlafam11ya.J.

No vino con la familia.

,
(s) S bl terb.J.

Es soltero.

5.29

SPOKEN SHANlSH

UNIT 5

V/ALOG 3

Jos, dgale hola a Cumen y

pregntele que qu tal.

ollkrmen~ ketl~

Carmen, dgale hola tamhi~n y

pregntele que qu~ tal, que
cmo le va.

olalh6s~~ ketl~ komoleb~

bastantehY~ijlgriyas~

karmen~ kyeropresentarl~1

Cumen, quiero pllesentarle

alseQyorhwvt~ hwaijhw~yt~

al Sr. White, Juan White.

. .

muchOQust6lseQy6r~

Carmen, cont~stele que s, cmo no,

que encantada. Dgales a los dos
que se sienten.

...,

Juan~

Encantado de oonocella,
seorita.

".

podemosllrn6r$arlkonste~lkarment

Jos~: Podemos almol2lar :con

usted, Carmen?

,
,
s1i k6monol

eijkntada~ syentns~

Carmen: S, cmo no, encantada.

Si~ntense.

,.

Jose, dgale a Carmen que Juan es

de California.

Carmen: Muoho gusto, seor.

ijkanta~odekonoierllseQyor!ta~

Jos, pregntele a Carmen si

pueden almorzar con ella.

.,

Juan, dgale a la seorita que

encantado de conocerla.

JaseS, Bastante bien, 81'aoias

,...,

Carmen, digale a Juan que :muoho

gusto.

Carmen: Hola, Jos~ qu~ tal?

Cmo le va?

Jos, contstele que bastante bien,

que grao ias, y d gale que quiere
presentaJle al Sr. While, Juan White.

Jos: Hola, Carmen, qu 'tal?

...

hwanezdeka11f6rnylkrm6n~

J08~:

Juan es de California,
Carmen.

THEIN'nA

UNIT 5

SROKEN SBANISH

Carmen, dgale que dispense, que

c6mo dice.

,.

Jos, reptale que Juan es de

Calif<rnia.

., .

dispens~ komod1~et

...

kehwanez~eka11f6rnya~

" ,
Carmen, diga ah, s? y pregntele a Juan que de qu parte,
si de San Francisco.

Juan, contstele que lno, que Ud.

6S de San Diego.

als1t

,
n01
.,

CMmen, p.eg.ntele que cundo

vino.

TREINTA Y UNO

,
desamfrn1Skot

Carmen: Ah, s? De qu parte?

De San Francisco?

,
s6y4esandyeg6~

Juan: No, soy de San Die80.

Carmen: Cundo vino?

Juan: Ayer.

. .., .

,.
b1nolkonlafam11yat

Juan, oontstele que no, que Ud.

no tiene familia, que _ sohero.

dkeprte~

Jos: Que Juan es de Calcrnia.

kwandob1n~

Juan, oontstele que ayer.

Carmen, pregntele si vino

con la familia.

Carmen: Dispense, c6mo dice?

,.,

..

CMmen: ViDO

OQD

la familia?

no~ ~onoteijgofamlya~ s6ysblter~

Juan: No, yo no tengo familia,

soy soltero.

5.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

6.1

UNIT 6

BASIC SENTENCES.

J ohn White

White and Molina have lunch together.

and J ose Molina enter the restamant.

AID TO USTENING

ENGLISH SPELLING

there (in that place)

all

d~sbkupad6~ ds6kupar~

empty (to vacate, empty)

Jose Molina
There's an empty table over there.

SPANISH SPELLING

"
~1aylunmslrts6kp~~

ourselves

sAntarnbs~ sntars~

to seat ourselves (to seat oneself,

to sit down)

...

nos
sentarnos (sentarse)

John White
Vamos a sentarnos.

bamos.as en trnos ~

,
let's see (to see)

bAambs~ ber~

veamos (ver)

the menu

el-menti~

el men

Jose Molina
Let's see the menu.

.. .

,
bamos.e lmen~
,

(you) wish (to wish)

UNO

Jos Molina
All hay una mesa desocupada.

sentar

to seat

John White
Let's sit down.

desocupado (desocupar)

Jos Molina
Veamos el men.

desen~ dsar~

desean (desear)

6.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 6

Waiter

What will

Y08

have, gentlemeD?

,
,.
ke4esean~stdeS'SeQy6res~

Mesero

Qu deseaD ustedes, sdores?

el sandwich

the sandwich

,
el-hamoh~

the ham

el jamn

John White
Yo quiero un sandwich de jamll.

Jo/m White
1 want a ham sandwich.

,
the salad

l~-ensalada~

la ensalada

l-lechug.J.
,
el-tOmate.J.

la lechuga

the lettuce
the tomato

el tomate

Tambin ensalada de lechuga y tomate.

Alao a lettuce and to...to salad.

la cerveza

the beer

ADd a beer.

..

lo una ~ e rt) ~ a.J.

y .Da cerveza.
a mi

to me

,
bring (to bring)

trayqa.J. trieor-l.

traiga (traer)

,
bring me

6.2

traygme~

tr ig ame

DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 6

l~op-l.

the soup

la sopa

,
the vegetable

la-lc;umb~-l.
,

la legumbre

the chop

la-chletil-l.

la chuleta

the porle, pig

11eret

el cerdo

the wine

l-bl.[lo'"

el vino

Jose Molina
Bring me vegetable soup, pOl'k chope
and wine. (1)

los Moli1l4

A mi trigame sopa de legumbres,

chuletas de cerdo y vino.

,
chltzrt~er~Ql.bno'"
,

the dessert

l-postr'"

el postre

of (f 01') dessert

"
di!-postr

de postre

(you) want (to want)

ky~rn kr~r'"

quieren (querer)

Ifaiter

Mesero

What'll you have fOl' dessert?

De postre, qu quieren?

the pie

el pastel

,
l-mfm~ana

the apple

la manzana

There's some apple pie, that's very good.

Hay un pastel de manzana que es muy

bueno.

,
(we) try (to try, to taste)

John Jfhite

Shall we try it?

TRES

probamos prbbar'"
,

loprbbamost

probamos (probar)

John Ifhite

Lo probamos?

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNlT 6

,
(I) have (to have)

e'~

eaten (to eal)

kom~d"o~ kome'r~

(I) have eaten

he (haber)

comido (comer)

(2)

Jose Molina
I've alrea3y had it. It's excellent.

ate'r~

-kom~d"~

he comido

, ,

Jos Molina
Yo ya lo he comido. Es bueno.

~o~alQekomdo~ ezbw~n~

,
para~

for

para

Traiga para los dos.

Bring us both sorne.

si

if

,
to treat

trata'r~

ourselves (we) treat of you (to

address as)

n6s-tratamoz-de-t~ tratarse-d~

tratar
~..

What do you say if we just use 't'? (3)

tyens.!.

tEme'r~

6.4

tienes (tener)
la razn

the reason

(you) go (to go)

nos tratamos de t (tratarse de)

Qu le parece si nos tratamos de t?

(you) have (to have)

John White
y ou're right. Good idea.

,..

tyenezrra6n{

,
muyby~n~

John White
Tienes razn. Muy bien.

vas (ir)

CUATRO

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
bi.bir~

to live

vivir

lose Molina
Are you going to live at the hotel?

los Molina
Vas a vivir en el hotel?

(I) think (to think)

pyens~

to look for (4)

bskar~

the apartment

el-aprtament''

pensar''

pienso (pensar)
buscar

el apartamento
loAn )fAite
No, pienso buscar un apartamento.

loAn )fAite
No, 1 plan to look lar an apartment.

fcil

easy

,
eI)k6ntrar~

to find

la it easy to find one bere ?

;sf~~~lldeI)kntrrk~t

Es f'cH de encontrar aqui?

kre~ kr~er~

(I) believe (lo believe)

lose Molina
1 tbink 80.

encontrar

creo (creer)

los Molina
Yo creo que si.

~okr;'kes1
,

kyers

(you fam.) want (to want)

kerer~

you, to you (fam)

te

,
pwed'b~

(I) can (lo be able)

quieres (querer)

pd'er

puedo (poder)
ayudar

to belp

,
H you want,l can belp you.

sikyerest~oltepw~~dar~

Si quieres, yo te puedo arad

the cbeck, tbe bill

"aiter! the cbeck.

CINCO

,
mo~''

l~went~

la cuenta

lkwent~

Mozol La cuenta.

6.5

UNIT 6

6.10

SPOKEN SPANISH

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) The Spanish equivalent of 'bring me' in this sentence is [amil tr~ygame] a m trigame 'to me bring me'. The reason why a m is resent is to indicate
contrast with what the other person is having. This is shown in English by extra stress on the word me, but in Spanish one cannot make the contrast by placing stress on the
me of [trygame ]

(2) Note that there are two verbs meaning 'have' in Spanish. You have already had tener, which means 'have' in the sense of 'possess'. Thisnew verb, haber,
means 'have' the auxiliary verb form in verb constructions like 'have gone, have been,' etc. Constructions with haber will be drilled and explained in detail in Unit 9.
(3) This is the first occurrence in the dialogs of the use ol the verb and pronoun forlOS that are ordinarily caBed the familiar forms. They are in contrast with the
formal forms tl&at go with the pronouns usted and ustedes. As explained in Unit 4, the problem of when to use t and when to use usted is a very complex one indeed, and you
should observe throughout a11 the remainder of the text which people use the t forlOS with each other and which ones use usted.
(4) Notice that the single word

6.2

DRILLS ANO GRAMMAR

6.21

Pattern drills

6.21.1

Preaent tense fOl'lll8 of relalar

A.

[buskr] buscar means

/-r/

'to look for', not just 'to look' - that is, no preposition is needed to translate the 'for' part of 'look for'.

yerba

Preaentation of pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

S J..J.

~ot~a~tt6~

Do you apeak Englieb?

,
ablas.1l)glest

Ale

,
.,
buskas lun~partamentot

,
I ('ll) be lp

Y01&.

ab19ump6k6.J.

.
..

. ...

Y01&

lookiDIJ lar 8n 8partment?

Si, Wlo UD poco.

Yo te ayUllo.

SEIS

UNrr6

SPOKEN SPANlSH

,.,

,
5

abl~uste~1~glest

nies1talgomast

Habla uated iagl_?

.,

"

Necesita algo mis?

John worlcs with us.

Juao ,rabaja con nosotros.

.,
nostrtamozdetut

si

~.

,..

,
Yes, we speak a Hule.

Nos 'ratamos de 't'?

blamos~mp6k

Si, Iwb lamos un poc o.

10

,
,
,.
kedeseanpsteds IsQy6res

The gentlemen take a taxi.

11

16(s)seQyores Itomanuntksi

The ladies practice a lote

12

l(~sQyoraslprkt1kanmch

,.
,

Qu desean ustedes, .elore.?

,..

Los seores toman uo taxi.

Las seoras practican mucho.

EXTRAPOLATION
sg

-O

(am

2_3

pI

-mos

-as
-a

-an

NOTES
a. Spanish regular verbs can be grouped iolo tAerne classes. Which set o( endings a verb takes depends on which theme c .... the verb beloag_ tOe

b. Regular

SIETE

/-r/

verbs bave the tbeme

lal recurring in the eodings o( aIl present tense forms except 1 sg.

UNIT 6

6.21.11

SPOKEN SPANISH

Substitution drilIs - number substitution

,.
1

trabaholnweb~6rs~

ablan.espaQy61~

abl~espaQy61~

n6n~es~ta(~nda~

n6ne~s1tan~''

. .

trbahomch~

., ..
notrabahan.al~
"
.
ne~is1totro11br~
,

6
7

6.8

., .

notrabaha1~

, .,

neiesitamo~otro11br''

1 Trabajo nueve horas.

Trabajam08 nueve baraa.

2 Hablan espaol.

Habla espalol.

3 No necesitan nada.

No necesita nada.

4 Trabajamos mucho.

Trabajo mucho.

S Hablan ingls.

Habla iDRls.

6 No trabajan ah.

No trabaja aM.

7 Necesito otro libro.

Neceeitamoe otro

.0.
OCHO

UNlT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

P. . . -

s"titutioa

. ..,..

,
nosotrostrabahamo~ak1~
~o\.(,

a11~ya1antonyo

,
el

ste~es

D. . . . .

trbahan.ak1~

trabahak1~

~2b16p~k2~SP~Qy61~

..

.
..

trbahan.ak!~

blp~kQ~SP~Qy61~
blampk2~SP~Qy61~

yOI

trbahQak1l

~~2,
antonY2~p~bl~

Trabajo aqul.

Alicia Y Aatoaio_.
El
_

TrabajaD aqul.

Ustede:1IIl.8

TrabajaD aq.

Trabaja aqul.

2 Yo hahlo poco espaloL

Ella.

AatODio 1 Pablo.-

Babia poco espalol.

1Iabla. poco espalo!.

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISB

"

11~Y~1~O~

ablm6spok2espaQy61~

ste~

blapokQespaQy61~

. .

. .

,.
,
11~yaln6ne~es1tapermis6~
,

---

n6ne~es1toperms6~

n6ne~esitamosperms6~

ef"~az

n6ne~es1tamperms6~

ste~ez

n6ne~es1tampermisb

~o

nsotroz
,

Alicia y yo
Usted

"

Hablamos poco espalol.

Habla poco espalol.

3 A licia no necesita permiso.

y 0.

Nosotros

6.10

No necesito permiso.
No necesitamos permiso.

Ellas

Ustedes

No necesitan permiso.
No necesitan permiso.

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANISH

6.21.12

UNIT 6

Response drill

trab~h~st~a~k~tQ~Dka11f6rnYl

trbhQk1''

~bl~n~st~d~zby;nl~1~sp~Qy~ltQ~1~~91s+

ablmzby~nleli~91~s+

trb~h~ll~nl~mb~h~~~t~k~
ne~es~t~~st~~I~nl~p~itQ~n~plm+

trabhk1'~

k~~blim I0ys.kl

d~nd~tr~b~hQlstal

k~~bl~lustjk~

[espQyo'l'' ]
,
[k1'' ]

(espaol)
(aqu)
(espaol)

ONCE

,
neiestQunplumal
,

bln. s pQYo1.''
,
trbhQkil
,
blQespaQyo"l''

1 Trabaja usted aqu o en California?

Trabajo aqu.

2 Hablan ustedes bien el espaolo el ingls?

Hablamos bien el ingls.

3 Trabaja l en la Embajada o aqu?

Trabaja aqu.

4 Necesita usted un lpiz o una pluma?

Necesito una pluma.

5 Qu hablan ellos aqu?

Hablan espaol.

6 Dnde trabaja

us~ed?

7 Qu habla usted aqu?

Trabajo aqu.
Hablo espa6ol.

6.11

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
[seys]

kw~nt~s;ras /trabahmoznos6tr6s

as ]

n~es~t~~st~d~ZIm~7m~s~st

[ S J.a~

,
[ akl. ]

10

[ iI)g 1es ]

11

trbah~eleI)kall.fornyat
,
,
,
abl~ustedbyenlelespaQyolt

12
~

13

(seis)
(smas)
(aqu)
(ingls)

6.12

.. .

trbahusteobastantet

,
,
no+ ne~s i tm6zm (s) s l.Q~ s.&.
,
,
n+ trbhakl.+
,
,
n+ b16by~~liI)gles+

si.&. st~d~slblnespQy61.&.
,
,
si1 trbhbbstante+

8 Cuntas hc:ras trabajamos nosotros?

Trabajamos seis horas.

9 Necesitan ustedes ms mesas?

No, necesitamos ms sillas.

10 Trabaja l en California?

No, trabaja aqu.

II Habla usted bien el espaol?

No, hablo bien el ingls.

12 Hablamos l y yo espaol?

S, ustedes hablan espaol.

13 Trabaja usted bastante?

S, trabajo bastante.

DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

6.21.13

UNIT 6

Translation drill

No pronuncio muy bien.

1 1 don't pronounce very well.

,..

nQablamoz !muchQespaQy61+

3 When do you aH need the desk?

kwandone~esl. tan,ustelies 1eleskritoryo+

. ..

.,

,
Cundo necesitan ustedes el escritorio?

4 Sbe doesn't need anything no..

Ella no necesita nada ahora.

5 1 always take a taxi.

Siempre tomo un taxi.

6 Where do you work?

Dnde trabaja usted?

7 Do you all speak Spanish?

Hablan ustedes espaol?

8 1 haven't worked sDce yesterclay.

No trabajo desde ayer.

9 Do 1 pronounce well?

Pronuncio yo bien?
,

10 We'll cash the checks later.

11 They almost always speak in SpanisL.

TRECE

No hablamos mucho espaol.

2 We don't speak much Spanish.

,..

despwes Ikmbyamo71oschks+

Despus cambiamos los cheques.

Ellos casi siempre hablan en espaol.

6.13

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNJT 6

,
12 We work in a language school.

. .

trabhamos ln~nskweladelDgwas~

Trabajamos en una escuela de lenguas.

Habla usted espaol?

13 Do you speak Spanish?

B.

Discussion of pattern

Determining which verbs are regular and which are irregular in a language like Spanish is a matter of statistics. When one examines aIl the verbs in the lexicon,
the largest group which has similar changes within a patterned frame is considered regular; other verb patterns are most economically described in terms 01 their deviatioD
from this estabJished norm.
An examination of Spanish verbs shows that the infinitive forms (traditionaIly the 'center' or 'point of beginning' in the verb pattern) can be divided into three
groups, according to what vowel precedes the final
The three groups can be referred to as I-r
and I-r verbs. The identifying vowel is
caIled the theme vowel, since it recurs in many of the conjugated forms of the verbo That part of the infinitive which remains when the
(vowels plus
is
removed is known as the stem.

I-r I .

1, l-r1,

I-rl theme

From among these three subclasses of verbs, the present discussion describes those of the

I-Vrl

Ir/)

class which are regular in the present tense.

One of the characteristics of regular verbs in Spanish is that person, number, a~d tense categories are signalled by changes in the endings. In regular verbs (and in
sorne irregular verbs) there are no changes in the stem other than the occurrence or non-occurrence of strong stress, which is shifted to the ending for 1 pI forms in the
present tense:

pI

sg
~

2 fam

2-3

":a

-mos

as

-'

an

The importance of the correct placement of strong stress cannot be over-emphasized. As other tense forms are presented where the only difference from sorne of the
forms aboye is a different placement of the strong stress, it will be seen that this feature carries the entire burden of distinguishing the otherwise identical forms. A mistake
in stress placement will more likely lead to misunderstanding than a malpronunciation of several sounds. The results will be every bit as striking as 'Abbot' ,...., 'a bat'

6.14

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 6

are in English when stress (and a structurally obligatory, corresponding vowel substitution characteristic of the English phonological pallern) is shifted from the first to the
second syllable.

/-0/

In the Spanish pallern the

ending of the 1 sg form is distinct. In the other endings the theme vowel /a/ appears, followed by
These are the regular signals of 2 sg fam, lpl , and 2 - 3 pi respectively; these endings recur in other theme class and tense form pallerns.

6.21.2
A.

The semantic differences between /

/-S,

-mos,

-n/.

e s t (o) / and / y /

Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

,
1

dondesta~lDQy6

dond~ayumbQy6

,
Where is (there) a bathroom?

Dnde est el bao?

,.
Dnde hay un bao?

EXTRAPOLATION

Definite

~st

Indefinite

ay un...

el. .. ]

-1

NOTES
a.
b.

QUINCE

/est/ translates 'is'.

/y/ lranslates 'there is'

or 'isthere?'

6.15

UNIT 6
6.21.21

SPOKEN SPANISH
Substitution drill

d~nd~;y~n.;t l

___

~l--

"
ak l~S
tae 'litro+I

- - - - ~n _ _
a*~y~n~s~Qy;rta

---

la

d~nd~~y~n~(s)s"l~as

- - - - las

ak~~st~nl;7lpiiS

----- un07

1 Dnde hay un hotel?

e~?

Dnde est el batel?

2 Aqu est el libro.

_ _ _ UrL-.

Aqu bay un libro.

3 Ah hay una seorita.

_ _ _ la
_

Ab est la seorita.

4 Dnde hay unas sillas?

las

t'Dnde estn las sillas?

5 Aqu estn los lpices.

_ _ _ _ un 08_ _
6.16

Aqu bay unos lpices.

DlECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

6.21.22

UNIT 6

Translation drilI

1 Where is there a cheap restaurant?

Where's the cheap restaurant?

2 There's a room for you a1l.

There 's the room for you aU.

3 There're the empty tables.

There're some empty tables.

4 There isn't a chauffeur here.

The chauffeur's not here.

d~nd~~ylnrrestor~mb~rt

Donde hay un restorain barato?

d~nd;st~lelrrestr~mb~rt6

i.D6nde est el restorn barato?

a~~yIijkw~rtlpar~st~es

Ah hay un cuarto para ustedes.

a~~st~l~lkw~rtlpar~stds

Ah est el cuarto para ustedes.

a~~st~nllazm~s~zd~S~k~pds

Ah estn las mesas desocupadas.

a~~ylnazm~s~z~;s~k~pdas

Ah hay unas mesas desocupadas.

nQ~y~nch~f~rlak1~

No hay un chofer aqu.

n~~st~~lch~f~rlak1

No est el chofer aqu.

,
S Is the pie good?
Is there a good pie?

6 Is the hotel around the corner?

Is there a hotel around the corner?

7 The waiters are here already.

There 're some waiters here already.

DIECISIETE

esta~lpastelbwenot
,.
,

Est el pastel bueno?

ayumpastelbwenot

Hay un pastel bueno?

st~~l~t~ll~l~bw~lt~t

Est el hotel a la vuelta?

~y~n~t~ll~l~bw~lt~t

Hay un hotel a la vuelta?

~~~st~nll~zm6~s~k1~

Ya estn los mozos aqu.

~~yl~n~zm6~~ak1~

Ya hay unos mozos aqu.

6.17

UNrr 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

8 Where's the apartmeDt with two rooms?

D6Dde est el apartameDto COD dos

cuartos ?

Where is there aD apartmeDt with two

rooms?

9 There's a restatn'ant up ahead.

The restaurant's up ahead.

B.

Dnde hay UD apartamento con dos

cuartos ?

a~~d~l~nt~l~y~nrr~strn

Ah adelante hay un restarn.

a~~d~l~nt~l~st~~lrr~strn

Ah adelante est el restorn.

Discussion of pallern

When a reference to the location of something is definite, / e s t / is used, with the definiteness marked by the occurrence of a definite artiele. When the refereDce
is nol definite, the uniquely irregular form /y/ (from the verb /abr/ ) is used, usually but not necessarily accompanied by an indefinite artiele.
When the definite reference occurs, the normal agreement for number between subject and verb prevails:

,
/d~nd~stalas 0)y /

Where's the chair?

/dondes tanla(s) s0'yas /

Where're the chairs?

but when indefinite reference occurs, there is no corresponding change in the verb farm; /

y/

can appear with either singular or pltn'al forms:

/ay~nl~brQ~nl~msa/

There's a book on the tableo

/y~n;sl~br~~nl~ms/

There're sorne books on the tableo

One may be definite in number, but still indefinite in reference. Thus:

e ompared to:

6.18

/yd~spl~ms lk1/

There're two pens here.

/lsd~spl~ms lstnk1/

The two pens are here.

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

6.22

UNrr 6

Replacement c1rills

1
2

kwarto

akJ.

.1.

aQ~~~yl~kw~rt~d~s~k~pd6.1.

.1.

k~~yl~kw~rt~d~s~k~pd6.1.

aesokup<'t6s.l.

k~~ylnskw~rt~zdesokupd6~.I.

.1.

ak~~yln~)s~Q~~zdesokupdas.l.

.1.

ak~~st~llas~~~d~S~k~pd.l.
ak~~st~llas~1~~bwna.l.
k~~y lna(s) s~Q~~zbwnas.l.

Sln~az

la

bwna.l.

nas

.1.

All hay una mesa desocupada.

cuarto

2 Aqu

Aqu hay un cuarto desocupado.

desocupados.
sillas

7 ____ unas

Aqu hay unos cuartos desocupados.

Aqu hay unas sillas desocupadas.

la

DIECINUEVE

All hay un cuarto desocupado.

Aqu est la silla desocupada.

buena.

Aqu est la silla buena.

Aqu hay unas s illas buenas.

6.19

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANlSH

be~ms.lmn~

kyerolakwnt''

man~ns''

..

__dye~

b1t1 \1 ts''

. .

bamozlakwnt~

kyero

kyerolazman~ns''

.
.

kyrdye~man~nas''

kyrodye~b1Q~ts''

,.

--l1lenoz

kyr6menozb10~ts''

tl')go

tI)gomnzb~~tes''

Ve..-el_R.

6.20

kwnta~

cuema.

Veamos la cuema.

2 Quiero

Quiero la cuema.

manzanas.
_
_
_diez
__
4

Quiero las manzanas.

Quiero diez billetes.

billetes.

Quiero diez manzanas.

6 _ _ _menos __ o

Quiero menos billetes.

7 Tengo

Tengo menos billetes.

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNrr 6

e
std"

k~d~s~~lst4IsQY6r,J.

_kyer~

k;ky;r~lstdlsQy6r,J.

-~1!i~

,J.

k~d~!i~lstdlsQY6r,J.

komo

k~m~d~~~lst4IsQy6r,J.

__ estan

k~mQ~st~~~stds IsQy6rs~

sQyrita

,J.

detonde

k~mQ~st~~stdlsQyrita,J.
dd~nd~~~stdlseQy6rita,J.

Qu desean ustedes, seores?

1

usted,

Qu desea usted, seor?

2 _quiere _ _ ,

Qu quiere usted, seor?

3 _dice_ _ _ ,

Qu dice usted, seor?

4 Cmo

Cmo dice usted, seor?

Cmo estn ustedes, seores?

5 _ _estn _ _ ,

VEINTIUNO

, seorita?

Cmo est usted, seAorita?

7 De dnde

De dnde es usted, seorita?

6.21

UNrr 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
_____ poko-

~~ky~rQlmp~krt~tmte~

_________ tomte

______ s opa

~~ky~rQlnas~p~rt~t~mte~

____ la

~~ky~rllas~p~d~tmt~

_,.,~ebo-------_

~~~~bllas~p~d~tmte

nsotro7

ns~trz IQ~eb~mz Ilas~p~d~tmt

__________ le~mbrs~

ns~trz Ir~b~mzllas~p~d~1~9mbres~

Yo quiero un sandwich de jam6n.

1

poco

Yo quiero un poco de jam6n.

tomate.

sopa

Yo quiero la sopa de tomate.

Yo llevo la sopa de tomate.

6 Nosotros
7

Yo quiero un poco de tomate.

Yo quiero una sopa de tomate.

la

5 _llevo

6.22

.. .

"
,
~okyerQlmpokorteham6n~

Nosotros llevamos la sopa de tomate.

legumbres.

Nosotros llevamos la sopa de legumbre

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

b~~~b~h~rl~~~lt~lt

~s t~(t~aUnJ.dOS t

1
2

_ _trabahar

b~~~tr~b~h~rl~nl~~st~d~~~n~~st

dsean

ds~~ntr~b~h~rl~nl~~st~d~n~d~st

ds~~ntr~h~h~rl~nl~~mb~h~d~t

embahadat

kyere

ky~r~tr~b~h~rl~nl~~mb~h~d~t

___a lmor!i ar

ky~r~~lm~r!i~rl~nl~~mb~h~d~t

pdemos

po~~m~~~lmr~~rl;nl~mb~h~d~t

V. a vivir en el hotel?
1

Estados Unidos?

2 _ _ trabajar

_?

3 Desean

.-

VElNTITRES

b~s~h~b~rl~nls;st~ds~n~dst

?
Embajada?

Vas a vivir en los Estados Unidos?

Vas a trabajar en los Estados Unidos?
Desean trabajar en los Estados Unidos?
Desean trabajar en la Embajada?

5 Quiere

6 ----Jllmorz_

Quiere almorzar en la Embajada?

7 Podemos

Podemos almorzar en la Embajada?

Quiere trabajar en la Embajada?

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

F
1

__ kyero

otl~

noi

kyerobuskarunotl~

el __ ~

no+
,

kyerobuskarelotl~

_ _ petemoz
,

S1~

. .

no~ pdemozbuskarelotl~

J.

si~ pO~m~zb~sk~rl~tl~

,
apartamntos~

. ,..

eI)kontrar__~

s~i p~m~~~I)k~ntr~r~l~tl~
si~ pd~m~~~I)k~ntr~rll~s
apartamnts~

No, pienso buscar un apartamento.

1 _, quiero
2

_ _ _ _ _ _ hotel.

_ _ _ _ _ el _ _

4 _, podemos

5 S,

6_ ,
7 _,

6.24

encontrar

No, quiero buscar un apartamento.

No, quiero buscar un hotel.
No, quiero buscar el hotel.
No, podemos buscar el hotel.
Si, podemos buscar el hotel.

_
apartamentos.

S, podemos encontrar el hotel.

Si, podemos encontrar los apartameDtoe.

VEINTICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNrr 6

Variation drills

6.23

.. ,...

m1ItraY9amelsopa~elegmbrs~

A mi trigame sopa de legumbres.

1 Bring me a sandwich.

A mi trigame

2 Bring me an apple pie.

A mi trigame un pastel de manzana.

3 Bring me a tomato saJad.

A mi trigame una ensalada de tomate.

4 Bring me a beer.

A mi trigame una cerveza.

5 Give me (some) more soup.

A mi dme ms sopa.

6 Give me (some) more chopa.

A m dme ms chuletas.

7 Hand me an "apple.

A m pseme una manzana.

UD

sandwich.

Hay un pastel de manzana que ea muy

bueno.

1 There's an American wine that's

very goOO.

Hay

2 There's a school ollanguages

that's very good.

Hay una escuela de lenguas que es muy

buena.

VEINTICINCO

UD

vino americano que ea muy bueno.

6.25

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

3 There's a restauraDt that's Dol

very ~ooo.

Hay UD restor'D que DO es muy bueno.

4 There are sorne Americans iD the

hotel who are from KaDsas.

Hay unos americaDos en el botel que

s on de Kansas.

5 There's a gentleman here who

doesn't speak Spanish.

Hay un seor aqui que DO babIa espaol.

6 There're sorne apartments, but

they're not very goOO.

Hay UDOS apartameDtos, pero DO SOD

muy bueDos.

7 There're sorne peos on the des k,

but they're not very goOO.

~y~n~spl~m~slnAlskrit~ryb

pr6n;s~nlm~ybwnas

Hay UDas plumas eD el escritorio, pero

DO SOD muy buenas.

Traiga para los dos.

1 Bring (enou~h) for the three (of os).

Traiga para los tres.

2 Bring vegetable soup.

Traiga sopa de legumbres.

3 Bring more hamo

Traiga ms jamn.

,
4 Hand me the water.

5 Give me more wine.

6.26

. .

pasemelgw

Pseme e 1 agua.

Dme ms viDo.

VEINTISEIS

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

6 Gve me tbe bill.

demelakwnta

7 Let me know tbis afternoon.

, .,
b1Semestatr~

Dme la cuenta.

Avseme esta tarde.

Qu le pareee si nos tratamos de 't6'?

1 Wbat do you say (if) we speak

Spanish?

.. .

,
. ,
,
kelepare~els~blamo~espaQy61

Qu le parece si practicamos espaol?

2 Wbat do you say (in we practice Spanish?

3 What do you say (if) we drink wine?

kelepare~elsitomamozbfno~

4 What do you say (if) we take the

e levator?

Qu le parece si hablamos espaol?

. .

"

kelepare~e

Isi tomamos.elas (~ens6r

Qu le parece si tomamos vino?

Qu le parece si tomamos el ascensor?

5 What do you say (if) we come in?

Qu le parece s i pasamos ade lante?

6 What do you say (iC) we go

tomorrow?

Qu le parece si vamos maana?

7 What do you say (iC) we eat lunch now?

Qu le parece si almorzamos ahora?

Tienes razn.

1 You're

VEINTISIETE

ri~ht,

Josepb.

Tienes razn, Jos.

6.27

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNrr 6

No tienes raz6n, Jos.

2 You're not right, Joeeph.

3 Re's right.

,.

Tiene razn.

tyenerra!i6n~

4 I'm right.

Tengo raz6n.

5 I'm hUDgry.

Tengo hambre.

6 Charles aDd Mary are v.y hUJI8I'Y.

Carlos y Maria tieDeD mucha hambre.

7 You're very hUDgry.

Ustedes tieDeD mucha hambre.

Mozor La cuenta.

,
Se6Cl1'itar La cuenta.

1 Missr The check.

.,

,
2 Sir! The book.

Se6Cl1'! El libro.

3 Josepbr The pencil.

Joa! EII'piz.

Mozor A la derecha.

4 "aiter! To the right.

,
5 Waiter I Mineral water.

6.28

mo~~ a9wam1neral~

Mozo! Agua mineral.

6 Madam! To the left.

Se6Cl1'a! A la izquierda.

7 CeDtlemeDI Come iD.

Se6aresr Adelante.

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

6.24

Review drill (1) -

UNIT 6

Tbe use of tbe definite artieles witb titles

1 Howare you, Mr. Molina?

How's Mr. Malina?

2 How are you. Miss White?

How's Miss White?

k~m9~st~~stdlsQy6rmolna~

Cmo est usted, Sr. Malina?

k~m9~st~l~lseQy~rm~lina~

Cmo est el Sr. Molino?

k~mQ~st~~stdlseQy6rithwyt~

Cmo est usted, seorita White?

k~m9~st~llaseQy6r~t~hwyt~

Cmo est la seorita White?

3 PtJl'. Molino. how's Miss White?

Sr. Malina, cmo est la seorita White?

4 Miss Malina, How's Miss White?

Seorita Malina. cmo est la seorita

White?

,
5 Mrs. Malina. how's Mrs. White?

sQy6ram611na~ komQestalaseQyorahwyt~

Sra. Malina, cmo est la seora White?

6 Mrs. Malina. is Mrs. White here?

Sra. Malina, est la Sra. White aqu?

7 Miss Malina, is Miss White here?

Seorita Malina, est la seorita White

aqu?

8 Mr. Malina, is Mr. White here?

Sr. Malina. est el Sr. White aqu?

9 MI'. Malina. where's Mr. White from?

10 Miss Malina, where's Miss White from?

,
,.
,
sQy6rm611n~ dedondesllsQyorhwyt~

sQY6ritm61~na~ de~~nd~7 IlsQy6r~t~

Sr. Malina, de dnde es el Sr. White?

Seorita Malina, de dnde es la seorita

White?

hwyt~
(1) Review drills will be a regular part of the format oC unit six and subsequent units. They will review and correlate structure points previously presented or will
enlarge on structural details which were not sufficient1y developed. They will usually be translation drills, though substitution and response drills will occasionally be used.

VEINTINUEVE

6.29

SPOKEN SPANlSH

UNrr 6

11 Where're you from, Mre. MoliDa?

De d6nde es usted, Sra. Molina?

. . .

And Mrs. White?

11aseQyorahwaytt

y la seiiora "hite?

12 Mr. Molina, is Mr. White (o) American?

13 Miss Molina, is Miss White (an)

American?

6.3

Seiior Molina, es else60r "hite

americano?

seQyritaml~na~ ~zl~s;Qy~r~t~hw~ytl
merikanat

Seiiorita Molina, es la seiorita "hite

americana?

CONVERSATION STIMULUS
NARRATWE 1

1 It's eleven o'clock.

Son las once.

2 Jose and John take atable.

Jos y Juan toman una meaa.

,.
3 They want to see the menu.

kyeremberelmen~

Quieren ver el IDen.

Jos quiere probar las chuletas de cerdo.

4 Jose wants to try the pork chops.

,
,
tambyembakomerln9nsaladaele~mbres~

6 Re's very hungry.

,
,
tyenemuchmbre

~.,

6.30

. . .

5 He's also goiDg to have a green salad.

Tambin va a comer una enaalada de

legumbres.
Tiene mucha hambre.

TREINTA

SPOKEN SPANISH

7 Juan's going to have a ham sandwich

with lettuce and tomato.

UNIT 6

Juan va a comer un sandwich de jamn

con lechuga y tomate.

..

lechu9~1tomte

8 Jose and Jobn want a beer.

Jos y Juan quieren una cerveza.

DIALOG 1

,
Mozo, dgales 'buenos das' a los seores
y pregnteles si desean ver el men.

bw~n621aslseQy6res

s~lp6rfiL6r~ k~mQ~st~nllschOl~t~z

Jos, contstele que s, que por favor, y

pre~ntele que cmo estn las chuletas
de cerdo.

oe~rJ.

Mozo, c ontste le que estn muy buenas.

estnmuybwns~

Jos, pregntele a Juan que qu le parece

si prueban eso, que Ud. tiene mucha
hambre.

. ,
dseamberelmenut

kl~p~r;~e Ihwn Isiprob~m~s.s6~

wltQgbn~chmbr~

Juan, contstele a Jos que no, que Ud.

quiere un sandwich de cualquier cosa.

~~ozo, d~ale

al seor (Juan) que qu le

parece un sandwich de jamn con
lechu~a y tomate.

TREINTA Y UNO

Mozo: Buenos das, seores. Desean

ver el men?

Jos: S, por favor. Cmo estn las

chuletas de cerdo?

Mozo: Estn muy buenas.

Jos: Qu le parece, Juan, si prebamoe

eso? Yo tengo mucha hambre.

Juan: No, yo quiero un sandwich de

cualquier cosa.

kelep~r;~I~ns~~ichdhm~~1
,

..

Mozo: Qu le parece un sandwich de

jamn con lechuga y tomate?

k6nlchu9~1tomt

6.31

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

Juan, contstele que est bien, y que

una cerveza tambin por favor.

Juan: Est bien. Y una cerveza tambin,

por favor.

Jos, dgale al mozo que a ud. otra,

con las chuletas.

Jos: A m otra, con las chuletas.

NARRATIVE 2,

A Juan le gusta mucho el sandwich.

1 John Hkes the sandwich very mucho

,
2 It's very good.

estmuytwn~

3 The pork chops are good, too.

Las chuletas de cerdo estAn buenas tambin.

4 Jose wants another beer.

Jos quiere otra cerveza.

,
5 So does John.

6.32

EstA muy bueno.

ihwantaP.lbyn~

y Juan tambin.

6 Jose wants to use the familiar 'tu'

with John.

Jos quiere tratar a Juan de 't'.

7 John says it's okay.

Juan dice que estA bien.

TREINTA Y DOS

UNrr 6

SPOKEN SPANIS8

D/ALOC 2

, ,

J08~,

ketalels~ichlhwn~
,-w

Juan, cont~stele que le gusta mucho,

que est muy bueno. PreR6ntele a
Jos que qu tal las chuletas.

mgustamcho~ stmuytwno~

preg6ntele a JuaD que q_ tal

el sandwich.

Jos~,

contstele que estn muy buenas

Preg6ntele si quiere otra
cerveza.

tambi~n.

JuaD: Me gusta mucho, est muy bueDo.

y las chuletas, qu tal?

ilaschlets~ ketl~

stnm~ybwnsltambYn~ kyer"

J08~:

~tr~~~rb~~~t

Estn muy buenas tambin.

Quiere otra cerveza?

Juan: Creo que si, Y usted

Jos~,

Juan, digale que est bien, si ~l quiere.

tal el ..Ddwich, JuaD?

Juan, digale que Ud. cree que si, y que

si ~l tambi~n.

digale que si, que Ud. tambi~n,

pero pregnte le que q~ le parece
si se tratan de 't'.

J08~: Q~

,.

J08~:

tambi~D?

S, yo tambin. Pero, qu le
parece si nos tratamos de 't'?

sinstrtamozdet~

,
,
estabyen

sitkyeres~

Juan: EstA biensi t quieres

NARRATWE 3

1 JohD Deeda aD apartmeDl.

Juan necesita un aputa_.o.

2 8e's goiD8 to look lar

Va a buscar uno.

TREINTA Y TRES

0IIe.

UNIT 6

SPOKEN SPANISH

3 Jose's going to help JOhD fiDd ODe.

Jos va a ayudar a JuaD a eDcoDtrar UDO.

4 Re's going to go with him tomorrow.

Va a ir COD l maaDa.

5 Re's going to be busy iD the morDiDg,

bol not iD the afterDooD.

6 JOhD wants to go at tbree o'clock.

7 JOhD likes the hotel where he's

slaying.

p6rlamaQy;n~lb~str6kp~dlpr6
por lat~r(t In6

Por la maaDa va a estar ocupado, pero

por la tarde DO.

hW~~ky~r~~rl~l~strs

JuaD quiere ir a las tres.

"
".
ahwanilegust~le16telldondest

A JuaD le gusta el hotel donde estA.

8 But it's cheaper to live iD aD apartment.

Pero es ms barato vivir eD

UD

ap8aJDento.

DIALOG 3

JuaD, dgale a Jos que Ud. necesita buscar

UD apartameDto; y preg6Dtele si quiere
ayudarle.

6.34

hs~ ne~es~t~lbsk~r~n;p~rt~mnt
kyeres.a~uearmet

JuaD: Jos, necesito buscar DO apartameDto. Quieres ayudarme?

Jos, dgale que cmo DO, que Ud. le puede

ayudar con mucho gusto.

Jos: C6mo DO, yo te puedo ayudar COD

mucho gusto.

Juan, pregntele si l va a estar ocupado

maana.

JuaD: T6 vas a estar ocupado mailanal

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 6

Jos, contstele que por la maana

s, pero que pueden ir por la tarde.

prlm~Qy~n~s1 pr606d~m~sl~r

Jos: Por la maana s, pero podemos ir

por la tarde.

porlatarre
Juan, pregntele que a qu hora.

Juan: A qu hora?

Jos, dgale que a las dos o a las

tres, si le parece.

Jos: A las dos o a las tres, si te parece.

Juan, dgale que a las tres le parece bien.

Juan: A las tres me parece bien.

Jos, pregntele si no le gusta el hotel

donde est.

Jos: No te gusta el hotel donde ests?

Juan, dgale que s, pero que Ud. piensa

que es ms barato v ivir en un
apartamento.

TREINTA Y CINCO

430623

o - 57 -

15

si pr6py~ns~lkzm~zb~r~tl

t iL irem.n,prtmnt

Juan: S, pero pienso que es ms barato

vivir en un apartamento.

UNIT7

SPOKEN SPANISIl

7.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White and Molina look foc an apartment.

John White and Jos Molina leave the restaurant; on the way out they p"ick up a newspaper to check on apartment leads. Theyare
walking over to Molina's car.

ENGLISH SPELLING

AID TO LISTENING

,
l-awto''

the car

Molina
This is my car.

SPANISH SPELLING

el auto

Malina
Este es mi auto.

estezm.wt6''

,
byeho''

old

It's old, but pretty decente

,.

viejo

,.

ezhyeholperobw~no''

Es viejo pero bueno.

,
el-,:>ryo<!iko''

the newspaper

. .

Let's see the papero

UNO

el peridico

,
.,
bamos.aherlelpery6diko+

Vamos a ver el peridico.

the amount, quantity

,
1 -k n tid ac:r ~
,

what a (large) quantity

ke-kant1dd''

qu cantidad

the advertisement

el-nun~yo''

el anuncio

. .
,

la cantidad

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

White
What a bunch oE ads!

IV/Jite

kelknti~a4~an6ny6s~

Qu cantidad de anunoios!

too much

d~masyat!'6~

demasiado

too many

dmasyac!6s~

demasiados

por qu

why
(we) see (to see)
the Eriend

,
l-m1g6'&'
,

the agency

li-ahen~ya~

vemos (ver)
el amigo
la agencia

. .

Malina
Too many. Why don't we see
a friend oE mine who has a
(rental) agency? (1)

,
,
,
dmasyac!6s'' porkenobemosl
,
,

Malina

..

.,.

Demasiados. Por qu no vemos

a un amigo mo que tiene una
agencia?

Anam1gom1olktyen~unahn~ya''

(They go to the .rental agency as Molina suggested. After the introduction oE White and other formalities, th~y inquire about apartments.)

to rent

Malina

Mr. White wants to .rent an

apartment.

7.2

alquilar

lsAQyorl~s41kilarlnprtament6''

Malina
El se or desea alquil.. ,un
apartamento.

DOS

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
only

pbr-Aor''
,
sol-l

available~(unoccupied),

desbkOpad6-l ds6k6pr-l

right now

por ahora

s610
desocupado (desocupar)

(to vacate)

Agent
Right now 1 have only two available.

,.

,.,

prAoralsoloteQgo~6zld6s6k~p46s''

Agente
Por ahora s610 tengo dos
desocupados.

,
el-ed'if1~Y~

the building
the field, the country

el campo

. .

..

One downtown, in the Del Campo

building.

el edificio

,
el-kamp-l

,
,.
,
unQenelentrotenAled'if1yold'elkmp+

without

.
(2)
of f urmture
t he plece
the furnitures
White
Unfurnished?

lz-mweb le s

,
sinmweblesf

,
mwebla~6-l

the month

TRES

el mueble

+
,
mweblar-l

los muebles
White
Sin muebles?
amueblado (amueblar)

furnished (to furnish)

Agent
No, furnished.

sin

,
el-mwebl~~

Uno en el centro, en el edificio

'Del Campo'.

,
,
no+ mwblad'6''

Agente
No, amueblado.
el mes

,7.3

UNlT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH
al mes

per month

White

White

Cuanto al mes?

How much per month?

,
~yent6''

ciento

two hundred

ds(~yentos''

doscientos

to inelude

iljklw1x''
,

incluir

the light

l-lu~''

la luz

hundred

,
n1''

nor

ni
el gas

the gas

"

Agent
Two hundred not inoluding
electricity, water, or gas.

dos(~yentoslsiniljklw1rllu~1

White
And where's the other?

id'ondesta~16tr6''

. .

,
agwaln1gs''

Agente
Doscientos, sin incluir luz, agua
ni gas.

White
y dnde est el otro?

,
that

es~

the outskirts

ls-fwers~

las afueras

big, great

grande''

grande

Agent
That one 's in the outskirts and
it's bigger.

7.4

ese

,.

,.,

esestal~nlafwerast*ezmazgrnde~

Agente
Ese est en las afueras y es ms
grande.

CUATRO

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

m-k6mbyen~ kombnir~

(to) me (t) suits (to suit)

,.
,
,
,
kreolkemek6mbyenemasllprimer6+

White
1 think the first suits me better.

me conviene (convenir)

White
Creo que me conviene ms el primero.

,. ,
p<1emozberlot

Can we see it?

Podemos verlo?

,
la-t1~ab''

the key

,
klarb''

clear, of course

7.10

claro

,..

,
,
s1lklr'' ak1tyenelaroyb''

Agent
Ves, of course, Here's the key.

la llave

Agente
S, claro; aqui tiene la llave.

Notes on the basic sentences

I al

(1) The
a which appears in Ib~mos.~unamgol bemos a un amigo is not to be translated 'to' or in any of the several other
possibilities for the translation of /
It only indicates that the direct object of the verb is personalized, that is, either is a person or is
thought of as a persone It will be taken up in detail in Unit 10.

al .

(2) The Spanish word Imw~blesl muebles is an example of a count nonn (a noun that names items customarily measured by number)
which is correlated with an English word 'furniture', an example of a mass noun (one that names items customarily measured by amount). Thus
Imw~blel can be translated only in a roundabout way by saying 'a piece of furniture', since 'a furniture' is an impossible combination o
'a' directly preceding a mass noun. Further discussion and other examples will be presented in Unit 58.

CINCO

7.5

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISII

7.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

7.21

Pattern drills

7.21.1

Present tense forma of regular

A.

/-r/

verbs

Presentation of paUern

lLLUSTRATIONS

,..

,
1

yokreokes~

Yo creo que s.

,
2

kwantoled~bo''

Are learning Spanish?

aprende~espa~yolt

Do you eat in the restaurant?

,.
komes

You eat very Httle.

stedkomelmuyp6k~

How much does he owe you?

kwantoled~be~

We are learning a lote

aprndemozm6ch6''

.. .

..

,.

Aprendes espaol?

.,

le~elrrestorant

Comes en el restarn?

..
,

7.6

e unto le debo?

Usted come muy poc o.

e unto le debe?

Aprendemos mucho.

SEIS

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

...

,
How much do we owe you?

kwantoledebmos~

,
9

They eat together.

~oskome~h6ntbs~

,
Do they helieve that?

10

Cunto le debemos?

Ellos comen juntos.

., .

kr~~n.~os.eSot

Creen ellos eso?

EXTRAPOLA TION

sg

2
2-3

pI

-O

fam

-emos

-es
-e

-en

NOTES

/-r/ verh endings have the theme la/

l-rl verh endings have the theme lel

a. Where

recurring,

h. The endings are otherwise identical.

SIETE

7.7

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH
SabstitUlioD dril..

7.21.11

Number .ubatitutiOD

komemospastl''

dbbeyntepsos.s.
,
k6menmuchop6strA''
,

dibemos..ump6k6.J.

Aprendt1I)916sJ

~kes''

3
4

7.8

jprend2eSpaQy61''

,.

.. .

prndemo~espaQy61~

.
.
komopast61.J.
,

,
db6mbeynteps6s.l
,
k6m6muchop6str.s.

.
deb2Ump6k6''
, ..
aprenden.1I)91s.s.
,. .
,

kr~emoskes1''

1 Aprendo espaol.

Aprendemos espaol.

2 Comemos pastel.

Como pastel.

3 Debe veinte pesos.

Debe n ve iote pes os.

4 ComeR mucho postre.

Come mucho postre.

S Debemos un poco.

Debo un poco.

6 Aprende ingls.

Aprenden ingls.

7 Creo que si.

Creemos que s.

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNlf7
PersoD Dumber aubstitutioD

"

!i.Q.koIll2~.t.

a11~ya

eO>Jos

.
, . .
, . .
, .
komt~!''
,

..

komt~!''

..

kome~!''
k6memo~1''

ntonYR~o_''

-..

s tec!,

aprnd~m6zmuch2ai''

..

!:j.,

,
prnd6much2af.t,

1 Yo como alH.
Alicia

Come all.

Ellos

Comen all.

Antonio y yo

Comemos all.

Usted

Come all.

2 Aprendemos mucho ah.

yo

NUEVE

Aprendo mucho ah.

7.9

UNrr 7

6steetes

.1.

,
a11,ya
,
,

nosotroz

.1.

pablo
,

al1~YR1karmen

..

!lO

..

7.10

.1.

pr~nd~much2a.l.

..

apr~ndemuch2aJ,

,
antonyoetebenelotl.l.

AprndnmuchQa1~

hwan
3

SPOKEN SPANISH

....

debemo~en~lot~lJ,

...
....

,
deben.elotl.l.

,
debenen.elot61.l.
,
deb2en.elot61.l.

...

Ustedes

Aprenden mucho ahi.

Alicia

Aprende mucho ah.

Juan

Aprende mucho ah.

Al'Itonio debe en el hotel.

Nosotros

Debemos en el hotel.

Pablo

Debe en el hotel.

Alic ia y Carmen

Deben en el hotel.

Yo

Debo en el hotel.
DIEZ

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPAWSH
7.21.12

Response drills

[enl!1~entr6.&.]

,
[ spQyo1.J
,

[dyiseysp~s6s~]

(en el centro)
(espaol)
(16 pesos)

ONCE

If

komluste!lenelentrot~enelapartam'nt6

.. , . . . , .
aprendenuste!eslespaQyolt21~gl~s~
, . , .,
.
debeneOOyozmuch2top6k6~
,

. ..

,
,
dondekomenust6!6s.&.
,
,

ke~prend~lust'~ak1~

kwanto!eb~l''

.,

k6m2nlentrbJ.

prendm6asp~ydl''

d~bmpok6''

...
. .

k6memosenel~ntr6~

~prend~espaQy61''

.
,
debeI4Yiseysp~s6s''
,

1 Come usted en el centro o en el apartamellto?

Como en el centro.

2 Aprenden ustedes espaolo ingls?

Aprendemos espaol.

3 Deben ellos mucho o poco?

Deben poco.

4 Dnde comen ustedes?

Comemos en el centro.

5 Qu aprende usted aqu?

Aprendo espaol.

6 Cunto debe l?

Debe 16 pes os.

1.11

SPOKEN SPANJSH

UNff 7

[l~gumbres~]

[lApArtamento~]

[mucho~]

, , .. . ,
komeQMa Ihamont
, .. ,

..
.

11

(legumbres)
(el apartamento)
(mucho)

7.12

.,

kom~ustedlenelrrestorant
, .,
, .,
aprenden~05lpok2ak1t

..

. .,.

,..
,
kome~stedez'muchRensala4at

10

, , . .. ,
aprendelespaQyolt

n01

k6mlgumbrs~

n01

k6m2nlapartament6~

n01

Aprndnmuch6~

. .

5i~ kom~mzmuch~ensalda~

,
511

aprndspaQyol~

7 Come ella jamn?

No, come legumbres.

8 Come usted en el restorn?

No, como en el apartamento.

9 Aprenden ellos poco aquj?

No, aprenden mucho.

lO Comen ustedes mucha ensalada?

S, comemos mucha ensalada.

11 Aprende l espaol?

S, aprende espaol.

DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

7.21.13

UNIT 7

Translation drill

1 1 always eat dessert.

y6sye.prelk6mop6str6~

2 He eats lots of perle chope.

elk6.lmuchaslchletaz~e1r~6~

,..

,.

3 We learn a lot here.

,
.
aprendemozmuch2lak1~

4 They (f) owe 21 pesos.

eroyzld'bmlbeynt~u.p's6s~

6 Where does she eat?

El come muchas chuletas de

cerdo.
Aprendemos mucho aqui.

5 1 owe the whole (all the)

bill.

Yo siempre como postre.

..

y6dboltodalakw'nta~

Ellas deben 21 pesos.

Yo debo toda la cuenta.

.,

dondekom~~

Dnde come ella?

,.,.

7 By the way, where do you eat?

aprposit~ dondekom~ust4

A propsito, dnde come Ud?

8 They'le8l'n very well.

,.
,.,
eroyoslAprendenlmuybyn~

Ellos aprenden muy bien.

9 We don't believe that.

nOkr~eDlOslso~

No creemos eso.

10 What do you believe?

kekre~lustd~

Qu cree Ud?

11 Does he eat lettuce?

, ,
,
kOllelllchugat

Come l lechuga?

1.13

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

B. Discussion o pattern

/-r/

As the extrapolation aboye shows, the pattern fOl /~r/ theme class regular verbs is very ~imilar to that of
verbs. The
only difference is the appearance of theme /-e-/ immediately after the stem and preceding the person-number indioators, the same places
where the theme
appears in
verb forms.

/-a-/

/-r/
identical for /-r/ and /-r/

Stress patteros are

first syllable of the ending receives the strong stress.

7.21.2

A.

The demonstratives

/ste, se,

verbs. Strong stress occurs on the stem in aH forms except 1 pI, where the

ak~l/

Presentation of pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

,.

estechekehyah~r6~

This soup is (tastes) good.

estasop~lsthwen~

These are my cars.

,
,
es to (s) son Im1s wtos+

1 like these chairs.

,
,
megustan lesta(s)s!O}Js''

~I~st~nlaaafweras~

That lad y is Amer ic an.

~seQyor~l~amrlkana''

1 don't want those (pieces ol)

nokyer21~mwhles~

.,

Me gustan estas sillas.

..

Estos son mis autos.

Esta sopa est buena.

Este cheque viajero.

Ese est en las afueras.

Esa se ora es americana.

,.

No quiero esos muebles.

furniture.

7.14

CATORCE

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

Those ladies are American.

,.
,.
,
esa(s) seQyoras Is 6nAm6rikanas''

Esas seoras son americanas.

akej,''

that over there (m)

That's my car over there.

akelez.~wt6''

Aqul es mi auto.

ak~a''

that over there (fem)

10

aqulla

..
,
ak~aseQyorl'aamrikana''
,

That lady there is American.

aqul

Aquella seora es americana.

1 Hice, those cars over there.

11

mgustnllk~6awts''

Me gustan aquellos autos.

.
,.
,. . .
ak~az.esaslestandesokup4as''
,

Those tables over there are

empty.

12

Aquellas mesas estn desocupadas.

EXTRAPOLA TION

near me

m
f

near him

near you

sg

pI

sg

pI

ste
sta

stos

se
sa

sos
sas

~stas

sg

akl
akQ)ya

(away from us)

pI

akQ)yos
akQ)yas

NOTES
8.

Demonstratives, which are special kinds o adjectives JI have distinct forms for gender and number.

b. Spanish has one set of forms which corresponds to English 'this', two that cOlTespond to 'that'.

QUINCE

1.15

UNIT 7
i .21.21

SPOKEN SPANISH
Suhstitution drills

.
.

~esl'sta4esokup'4a~
,

st

sa

k~a

,
2

F OI'ID suhstitution

.
.
.
stA.es~lesta4esokup641''
,
, .. .
smesil'sta4esokup4.(.
,
, . . .
k~aesilesta4esokup4a.(.
,

elkwart~ezbwn6~

ste

6st~kwart2Iezbwn~~

4se

..

'skwart~lezbwno.(.

1 La mesa est desocupada.

Esta
Esa

-------

Aquel.!a

Esta mesa est desocupada.

Esa mesa est desocupada.
Aquella mesa est desocupada.

2 El cuarto es bueno.

7.16

---------

Este

Este cuarto es bueno.

Ese

Ese cuarto es bueno.

DIECISEIS

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

ktSl

.
ls.partamentos'sombartos~
,

klkwart9Iezbw~n6~

~sts

~ss

kO}Js

Aquel

sts.partamentos Isombarts''
,

ss.prtmentos Isombarts''
,
,.

k~L~~partmentosIsombarts

Aquel cuarto es bueno.

Los apartamentos son baratos.

Estos
Esos,
Aquellos

DIECISIETE

,.

..
_

Estos apartamentos son baratos.

Esos apartamentos son baratos.

Aquellos apartamentos son baratos.

7.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

Number substitutioD

..

, .,.
traygameselen1jr

..

"

,.

,..

"

ak~osledif1yoslso~9rnds~

. ,
____ect1f1~yQ

..

deSe21rl~esa~ah6n~yas

ahn~yas

,.

traygamesosl~en1~6r6s~

dseQ1r'~esahnya

-----,
3

__________~en1~r6s~

..

.,

kele~1f1~YQlezgrnde

1 Trigame ese cenicero.

_ _ _ _ _ ceniceros.

TriKame esos ceniceros.

2 Deseo ir a esa agencia.

_ _ _ _ _ agencias.

3 Aque 110s edific ios s on grandes.

_ _ _ edifJ.Cio
_

7.18

Deseo ir a esas agencias.

Aquel edilicio es grande.

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

,
___skritoryo
,
., ,.

st~skritoryos(sombarts~

..

bamo&aberlesospery6dik6s~

______________pery6dik
6

k~aseQyor2Ie~espaQyla

,.

.,

stzmesaz InosoDgrnds''

~..

.,

,.

+
,

bamo&aberJesepery64ik6~

,.
,
st_m_e_s_alnQezgrnd+

, .
_mesaz

..

steskritorYQ'ezbart6~

_ _ _s eryoras

,.

,.

,.

ak~a(s) seryoras Ison~spary61as''

4 Estos escrtoros son baratos.

_ _escTltorio

Este escritorio es barato.

5 Vamos a ver esos pendicos.

------

perzdico.

Vamos a ver ese peridico.

6 Esta mesa no es grande.

mesas

7 Aquella seora es espaola.

____seoras
____
DIECINUEVE

Estas mesas no son grandes.

Aquellas seoras son espaolas _

7.19

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH
Itero substitution

.,..

,
1

kyrprsentarl~laesase~y6ra~

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _seQyr~
,

_ _skwelas-------~

.,

.,..

kyr6pr.sntarl~laeseseQy6r~

ss4partamentos'sombwnos~

,
saaeskwelaslsombwnas+
,.

demeak~~ozlbr6s~
'"

dem~ak~~asplmas+

____________p16ms~

1 QUIero presentarle a esa seora_

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ seor.

Quiero presentarle a ese seor.

2 Esos apa.-tamentos son huenos

_

escuelas

Esas escuelas son huenas.

3 Dme aquellos Z"b,os

_ _ _ _ _ plumas

7.20

Dme aquellas plumas.

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

., .

pasemeselpi~

____ plm~

, ,

"

.,

...

akexyameSilestadesokupda~

6stasekyonlezgrnd~~

____A41f1~Y9
, .,
'T

...

akelawtQlestadesokupd6~

_mesi,
6

. .

,
,
pasemesaplm

ste41f1Y2Iezgrnde~

...

akexyames~lestadesokupda~

____~eskr1t6ryQ

4 Pseme ese lpiz.

_ _ _ _ pluma.

,..

...

keleskr1t6rY2lstadesokupct~

Pseme esa pluma.

5 Aquel auto est desocupado.

_mesa
_

Aquella mesa est desocupada.

6 Esta seccin es grande.

_ _edificio

Este edife io es grande.

7 Aquella mesa est desocupada.

_ _ _ escritorio

VEINTIUNO

---:

Aquel escritorio est desocupado.

7.21

UNIT 7
7.21.22

SPOKEN SPANISH
Response drill

"

O)

.,.

kyerestelap1,t~estaplma~

,
,
kyerestozlap1~est2esta5plmas~

"

..

slapi~+

,
~ssplums~

1 Quiere este lpiz o esta pluma?

Ese lpiz.

2 Quiere estos lpices o estas plumas?

Esas plumas.

O) The implioit spacia! reference of the demonstratives can be most effectively presented by the use of gestores to indicate positiono
Both tutor and the student should independently use /ste/ for items near themselves and /se/ for. tems near each other or away
from both.
7.22

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

[stoz11hrbs~]

kekyer~lst~

, ,
kekyerl
,
,.,.

,
[stasplumas~]

,
[es]

legust~leste11hrot

kyer~festozl~brost

[esos~J

[esasJ
,
[esa+]

,.
kyer~lestasplumast

lgust'estaplumat

,.,.

,
ssplums~

,.
,
esen6'!' este+
,
,
esozn est6s+

esazn6

ests~

,
esan6+ est+

....---------------------- ----------.

(estos libros)

3 Qu quiere Ud.?

Es os libros.

4 Qu quiere l?

Esas plumas,

(se)

5 Le gusta este libro?

Ese no, ste.

(sos)

6 Quiere estos libros?

Esos no, stos.

(sas)

7 Quiere estas plumas?

Esas no, stas

(sa)

8 Le gusta esta pluma?

Esa no, sta.

(estas plumas)

VEINTITRES

7.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

11
12
13

7.24

,.,

estet s11 ezmuybwnb

,.,
,
esef si~ ezmuybwno~

zbwenQlesel1brot
,

10

,.,

ezbweoQlestel1brof
,
,
,.

,.,

ezbwen~lestaplumat

,
,. ,.
ezbwenlesaplumat
,. ,. ,
s6mbwenoslesozllbrost

esa1 si zmuybwna~
, .,
,
estat si+ zmuybwn
,.
,
,
estosf s11 s6nmuybwnbs~

9 Es bueno ese libro?

Este? S, es muy bueno.

10 Es bueno este libro?

Ese? S, es muy bueno.

11 Es buena esta pluma?

Esa? S, es muy buena.

12 Es buena esa pluma?

Esta? S, es muy buena.

13 Son buenos esos libros?

Estos? S, son muy buenos.

VEINTICUATRO

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

7.21.23

Translation drilI

1 This salad is very 8000.

'st~ensla~~lestmuybw'n~
,
,. ,

. .

2 Those (over there) gentlemen

speak English.

..

keQMo(s) seQyores Iab1an.J.l)g 16 s

3 That roor;, to the left.

~sekwart2al~J.~kyr4a~

4 That's my room over there.

kelezm'1kwrt6~

7 That (over there) young lady

is American.
8 This huilding i8 large.

,.

Aqul es mi cuarto.

,. ,
,
poaemozherlesozmweblest

Podemos ver esos muebles?

,
,
p as eme s az(})J. b es ~

Pseme esas llaves.

. .
, .. . ,
....
akeO~aseqyor1t~le~amerikna~

~st4if1~Y2Iezgrnd~

10 Do you need these hooks?

.
, .
ne~es1t~~stoz11hrost

VEINTICINCO

Este edificio es grande.

En esta seccin estamos muy

ocupados.

.
.
es~l~zlseQyoramo11na~
,

11 That's Mrs. Molina.

..

nkstsek~yonlestmbzmuyokup46s~

Aquella seorita es americana.

9 In this section we are very

husy.

F:se cuarto a la izquierda.

,.

6 Hand me those keys.

Aquellos seores hablan ingls.

. .

5 Can we see those pieces of

furniture?

Esta ensalada est muy buena.

Necesita estos libros?

Esa es la seora Molina.

7.25

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

Bu Discussion of pattern
Derronstrati, es are worus which designate or point ouL usually in terms of spatial arrangement. but sometimes in terms of time relation.
They are a special kind o 'i~mitin~? adjectives which ah'vays precede the nouns they modifyo Besides the forms listed in the presentation above,
demonstrati\es indude definite articJes, which have been separateIy presented because of special functiom, that they haveo
Engli3h as \,,"eH as Spanish has words that can be classed as demonstrativeso The EngIish demonstratives provide a relatively rare exampIe of modifier forr;s which change in English for number reference, as the following chart shows:

near

far

sg

th~s

that

pI

these

those

This chan~e in forro i8 caBed 'infJection for number', and an agreement in form with an associated noun is obligatory~ i e,? we cannot say 'these
book' or that a?plesi'. As has already been shown in unit ..L agreement in number between nouns and adjectives in Spanish is almost always shown
by number nHect ion in the adjecti,e just as it is in this one rase in Englishc
The sjJatial contrast in English demonstratives is a t\o\o-way pattern~ near and not near. The Spanish demonstratives~ however 9 have a
three way patterll" near me ne~r you (or a short way ofO, and nar hlm (or a long way off) Thus / ak 1/ implies more distant in space or more
remote in time. 'i'his extra distinction, coupled with three distinrt gender forms, gives Spanish an inventory of 15 forms? compared to 4 in English,
as follows
9

sg

pI

sg

this

these

that

those

sos, ak1)yos

pI

-_.

ste

stos

se, ak1

sta

stas

esa, akQ)ya

sto

sas, akCDyas

so ,( akC)yo)

VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

Note that the pattern of the Spanish forms deviates from the normal pattern of Spanish modifiers in one important respecto The regular
pattern:

sg
m

pI

-os
-as

-o
-a

/-e/

is present except in the m sg forms, where the endings are

(/ste, se!) or zero
final
appears in the pattern with unmarked, or neuter, gender. The forms /sto/ and
in Unit 2; /akl/J)yo/, though appearing less frequent1y, occurs in similar patterns.

/-0/

(/akl/). A form which has a

fso/ were presented and explained

The demonstratives can occur as modifiers (adjectives modifying nouns) or as nominalized forms (taking the place of nouns). Both
uses are illustrated in the following sentence:

/stelibrQlesmsbartolk~se~/
Note that in English the singular forms are not readily nominalized$ so that

'TlJis book is cheaper than that one~

one' replaces the noun.

The neuter forms almost always occur nominalized, since there are no neuter nouns they can modify.
Spelling conventions have estahlished the practice of marking a written accent on the stressed vowel in masculine and feminine
nominalized forms, except when the letter is printed with upper case type.

VEINTISIETE

7.27

UNIT 7
7.22

SPOKEN SPANISH
Replacement dri118

,
1
2

akel

~erb~~a~

kelezm*wtb~
,

keQ~~ezm~~erb~~

es~ezm~~erb~~

lpi~~

ms~

. .
, .
es~ezm~m~s+

es~ezlamsa~

esa(s} sonlazm~ss''

es~

,
esas

la

esezm~lpi~

Este es mi auto.

1 Aqul
2

Aqul es mi auto.
cerveza.

3 Esa

Aqulla es mi cerveza.
Esa es mi cerveza.

lpiz.

Ese es mi lpiz.

mesa.

Esa es mi mesa.

7 Esas
7.28

la_ _

Esa es la mesa.
Esas son las mesas.

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

lsQy6rhwayt IdesAlkilar lun.apartamnt6~

,
bskar

_seQy6ra,

3
4

-------------------,
_____________ber

los_---

~
~

..

.. . .

laseQy6rahwaytldeshskarlun~partamnt6~
~.

lseQy6rahwaytlds~abskarlunozmwbles~

..

,
"
lseQy6rahwaytldesberlmazmwbles

,
"
lsQy6rhwaytlkyreberlmazmwbls
,
,
l(~sQy6Ishwaytlkyrmbrlmazmwbls

El seor White desea alquilar un apartamento"

-------

2 -seori::llo8

b~car

----_

El seor White desea buscar un apartamento.

La seora White desea buscar un apartamento.

3 -------------.muebleso

La seora White desea buscar unos muebles.

r ----4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ve....
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ms,
_

La seora White desea ver unos muebles.

5
6

7 Los

VEINTINUEVE

JI

lsQy6rahwaytldsAberlunozmwbles~

kyre

"

,
maz

mwbls~

lseQy6rhwaytldsbskarlunapartamnt6~

quiere,

_
_

La seora White desea ver ms muebles o

La seora White quiere ver ms muebles.
Los seores White quieren ver ms muebles.

7.29

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,
id' ond e s t a ~ 1 t r .!.

,
. ".
idondestalams-l.
,
. ,

ms-l.

~sa

i~ondesta~sams~

-l.

ietond es tal as C1~ -l.

,

5
6

*'

ikoffiQestanla(s) seQy6rsi

,
. ,
.
ikomesta~lseQy6r~

y dnde est el otro?

mesa?

esa _ _?

4 t

y donde est esa mesa?

;, y dnde est esa s lla?

la _ _ ?

(:Y dnde est la silla?

seoras?

6 t _ cmo
7 t

;,Y dnde est la mesa?

~illa?

'1030

seQy6ras~

el
,.

idondestanla(s) seQy6ras~

,
komo,..

la_~

i<!ondes ta~s as <l~~

s i(J\J~

el

y donde estan las

~eoras?

Y cmo estn las seoras?

;,Y COPla est el seor?

TREINTA

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

,.

kreorkemk6mby~nmaslelpr1mrb

6tro

__________ffiuchQ

gst

"--------

---------,

le

_ _ _ _ _ _ _--..IpokQ
,

-------------

6 kre~

kreolkemekomby'nmasrel6tro~

.
,.
kreolkemekbmbynmuchQle16tr6~
,.
,.
kreolkemgstamuchQle16tro
,.
,.
,

kreolklgstamuchQle16tr6
,

,'.

kreolklegstapokQle16tro
,
,

kre~lkelgstpokQle16tr6

kre~lklgstapokoll~6tr

__

.-._---~

Creo que me conviene ms el primero.

Creo que me conviene ms el otro.
Creo que me conviene mucho el otro..
Cre o que me gusta muc ho e 1 otro.
Creo que le gusta mucho el otro.
Creo que le gusta poco el otro.
Cree que le gusta poco el otro.
Cree que le gusta poc o la o~ra.

TREINTA Y UNO

7.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

,. ,
pdemozber lot

buskarlot

..

kyere

____1r

,
________t!.es pwes t

hen1r-----t
--_.......
, .

kyerem~

kyer~1rlotrahet

,.
,
pdemozbuskarlot
,
,
kyerebuskarlot
,. . ,
,.,
kyerelbuskarlQlotrabet
, , , .,
,

kyer~1rlt!espwest

.,

kyerehen1rlt!espwest
,.
.,
,
kyeremben1rJ4espwest

Podemos verlo?

buscarlo?

Podemos buscarlo?

2 Quiere

Quiere buscarlo?

otra vez?

Quiere buscarlo otra vez?

Ir

5
6
7 Quieren

venIr

Quiere ir otra ve z?

despus?

Quiere ir des pus ?

Quiere venir des pus?

Quieren venir despus?

TREINTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

"...

s J.. akJ.tyene IlY~be''

laz

------- ---.
2 _ _ _ _ _ _-b10)Jts

3 __a1.

-------um----.

-----------.;
,

mond

6 _ _ _ _ _--esaz----~

c "h'1
. e.<e . I. .

"....
, , . . ..

s i kJ. tyene Ilozh1Q~ts''

1~

,
S J..''

a1 tyene Ilozb1O~ts..

O'..

a1 tyen~ lumb1(!~tl!~

si~ a1tyen~Iunamon~a~

,
, ,
,..
si a1tyen~lesazmondas

,
, ,
,.
si a1tyen~lesech~k

S, aqu tiene la llave.

1 _____ las_.
2

billetes.

3 _

ah

6
7

_
uu.,n

TREINTA Y TRES

"..

S1 kJ.tyene IlazC'yhs

esas

S, aqu tiene los billetes.

S, ah tiene los billetes.
S, ah tiene un billete.

moneda.
_ _ _-

S, aqu tiene las llaves.

.....cheque.

S, ah tiene una moneda.

S, ah tiene esas monedas.
S, ah tiene ese cheque.

7.33

UNIT 7

7.. 23

SPOKEN SPANISH

Variation drills

zbyeholprhweno~

1 les old but inexpensive<

Es viejo, pero bueno.

, .
,
~zhyeho!prbr3t~

2 It 1 s oId but exce liento

Es viejo, pero excelente.

,.

It~s

bip; but inexpensive"

ezgrande:p~robarato

J. b '
1 ~ A"
t"OS.I
Suffi
yenos~erubara

5 They're good and inexpensive ..

S ombw en oS,lb 2,r t

6 Th ey 9re big and good,

sI)grandes.lb w nsi

6s.!-

Son grandes y buenos,

.
Son baratos y bnenos.

. .

bamos.aherl elpecy6d"ikb~

Vamos a ver el peridico.

. .,.

1 Let 1 S go see the apartment

bamoaaher!elapartamnt~

2 Let 9 s go see the building.

bamoaaberleled~fiYO~

7.34

Son buenos y baratos

7 They 9re inexpensive and goodQ

Son viejos 9 pero baratos.

Es grande p pero barato.

4 Th ey 9re oId but inexpensive,

Es viejo, pero ~arato.

l'

Vamos a ver el apartamento

Vamos a ver el edificio.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

UNrr 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

3 Let's go see the rooms.

. ., .

bamo~aberlloskwrt6s~

. . ,.
bamoaakono~erlel~~ntro~
, . . . , ..
.
.
bamo~akomerlenelrrestorn~
, .. .., .
bamoaatrabaharla6ra~
, . .. , ... .
bamos,abuskar lun.apartam~ntb''

Vamos a ver los cuartos.

4 Let's go get acquainted with the

downtown section.
5 Let's go eat in the restaurant.

6 Let's go to work now.

7 Let's go look fOl' an apartment.

. , . ..,.

p6rkenobemosliUnpm190m1o~

2 Why don't we eat in the restaurant?

. , . ..
, . . , . ..
. .
p6rkenokomemosle~elrrestor'n~

3 Why don't we eat later?

pbrkenokomemozI4espw~s~

Vamos a conocer el centro.

Vamos a comer en el restorln.

Vamos a trabajar ahora.

Vamos a buscar un apartamento.

Por qu
mo?

DO

vemos a un amiRo

1 Why don't we see Joseph?

p6rkenobemoslahos'~

4 Why don't we go down in the

elevator?

,
. ,.
porkenobahamos

5 Why don't we speak Spanish?

TREINTA Y CINCO

. . ,. .

,.

... .

lenelas(~ens6r~

. .

p6rken2ablamoslespaQy61~

Por qu no vemos a Jos?

Por qu no comemos en el
restorn?
Por qu no comemos despus?

Por qu no bajamos en el
ascensor?
Por qu no hablamos espaol?

7.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

..

6 Why don't we look for another

apartment?

. .,.

7 Why don't we rent another

building?

, .,

,.

.. .

p6rkenohuskamoslotr2apartam'nt6~

Por qu no buscamos otro

apartamento?

..

p6rkenQalkl1amoslotrQed1f~y6~

Por qu no alquilamos otro edificio?

...

O solote~9oldozdesokupd6s~

Slo tengo dos desocupados.

, .,

1 1 only have five availahle.

4 1 only have one apartment

available.

.,

. ,.. . .
solote~9Qlunamesaldesokupda
, . .
, . ,
, . ..,
.

Slo tengo cinco desocupados.

,....

solote~9QlunodesokupdO~

3 1 only have one table available.

..

solote~901~1~ko4esokup4s~

2 1 only have one available.

Slo ten~o uno desocupado.

soloteI)99I un.apartamento Idesokupd6

., , . , . .
soloteI)9Qlun~skr1toryoldesokupdo~
,.. . .
, .,. ,
soloteI)901~1~koS10~azldesokupdas~
,. ,. ,
,.. . .

Slo tengo una mesa desocupada.

Slo tengo un apartamento

desocupado.

5 1 only have one desk available.

6 1 only have five chairs available.

7 He only has two rooms available.

7.36

solotyeneldoskwartoz Idesokupdos~

Slo tengo un ~scritorio desocupado.

Slo tengo cinco sillas desocupadas.

Slo tiene dos cuartos desocupados.

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

ds(~) yentos~sin.iI)klw1r Ilu~t

Doscientos, sin incluir luz, agua

ni gas.

a9wan~gs~

,
1 Three hundred, not including
electricity, water or gas.

tres(~ yentos~sin.iI)klw!r Ilu~t

,

Trescientos, sin incluir luz, agua

ni gas.

agwan~9s''

,
2 Four hundred, not including
electricity, water oc gas.

kwatro~yents~sin.iIJklwirllu~t

..

Cuatrocientos, sin incluir luz, agua

ni gas.

agwan~gs~

3 Two hundred twenty, not

including water oc gas.

4 Seven pesos, not including beer

or wine.

5 Fifteen dollars, not including

the taxi or the tip.

d OS (~ yen t ozbt1 yn te~ s in).I)k lw ir I

,

..
agwanJ.gs~
, .
, .
syetepsos~sinj~klw!r'~erbe~a
.
n~bno~
, .
kJ.n~ed613res~sinJDklwirlel
, .
. .
taks1n11apropna~
, . ,..
.

6 Two hundred dollars without

furniture.

ds(i> yentozctolares Is1nmwbles''

7 Three hundred dollars furnished.

trs(i> yentoZc1'olares 'amwebldo.J,

TREINTA Y SIETE

. ,.. . .

Doscientos veinte, sin incluir agua

ni gas.

Siete pesos, sin incluir cerveza ni

vino.

Quince dlares, sin incluir el taxi

ni la propina.

Doscientos dlares sin muebles.

Trescientos dlares amueblado.

7.37

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

es~lst~nla~fwerasl*ezmaz

Ese est en las afueras y es ms

grande.

grnde~

1 That one is downtown and is

largero

2 That one is on Columbus

Avenue and is less expensive o

es~lest~n~lientrol*zmazgrnd~

.
harto''

7.38

...

Ese est cerca de la Embajada

Americana.

Ese est a la derecha.

Ese est a la izquierda.

es~lstmuylhos''

,
7 That one is very good.

Ese est en la Avenida Co160 y

es ms barato.

,..

esestal1iky~rd''

6 That one is very faro

~.

esestalader~ch''

,.

5 That one is to the lefto

esesta~erkaldelembhadamer1kna~

,.
4 That one is to the righto

Ese est en el centro y es ms

grande o

"

es~lst~nlheni~ak61onl*ezmaz

"

3 That one is near the American

Embassy.

,.,

Ese est muy lejos,

es~lestmuyhwno''

Ese est muy buenoo

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

7.24

Review drill- The distribution of

sr/

and

/est~r/

...

1 I'm not an American but

I'm in the United States.

, ,
,
nosoyamerJ.kno~prQstoy In16s.
,

No soy americano, pero estoy

s tados.uni<!bs+

en los Estados Unidos.

2 \Ve' re no1 Americans, but

we 're in the United States.

, ,.
. .
, ..
nosomos lamerlkn6s+prQestamosl
, . .
enls.es ta<!os.und's +
,

3 He 's not an American, but

he's in the United States.

,...

5 Carmen 's from Chile, but

she's in Peru.

estamos en los Estados Unidos.

elnQe~amerJ.kno~prQstal~nla

..

El no es americano, pero est

,
estados.unidos.t.

en los Estados Unidos.

,
4 They're froro Chile, but
they're in Colombia.

No somos americanos, pero

Q~(s) s6ndchl.le.t.prQstn.I)klombya.t. Ellos son de Chile, pero estn en

Colombia.

" . ,
,
karmenlzdch11e~prQst~n~lpru1

Carmen es de ChIle, pero est

en el Per.

6 They (f) are married, and

they're in California

,.
,.
O\l(s) s6I)ksadas I*estan~I)kalJ.f6rny.t.

,..

7 She's married, and she's in

California.

9 The hotel is good, and it 's

not faro

TREINTA Y NUEVE

JI

e~skasad'al*esta~I)kallf6rnY''

".

8 He's single, and he's in Cuba.

Ellas son casadas y estn en

California.

Ella es casada y est en

California.

~ l(s) 561 ter o I*es ta~IJkb.t.

Fl es soltero y est en Cuba.

"."
,
ltelezhwenQlin9stalhs~

El hotel es bueno y no est lejos.

7.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

10 The buildIn~s are big and

they're near.

,.
,
16~4if1~yosls6~grandesl*stan~rka~
,

11 The restaurant isn 't cheap

~lrrestorn~

nQezbarto! 1-6stmuylhos''

and it 's very faro

7.3

Los edificios son grandes y estn

cerca.

El restorn no es barato y est

muy lejos.

CO:'iVERSATION STIMULUS
NARRAT/VE 1

1 Juan talks with the

youn~

lady
that works in the cashier's
office.

2 He says he's planing to look

,
,
hwanlblkonlseQyor1tal
,
.
ktrbahenlakhA

trabaja en la caja.

".
,.
'6 .
eld1~elkpyensalbskaru~apartamnto'' El dice que piensa buscar un
apartamento.

for an apartmen' o

,
3 He likes this hote L

Juan habla e on la seorita que

lgustest~otl~

Le gusta este hotel.

4 But it's cheaper living in an

apartment.

..
prQzmazbarttbibrln~nAprta

ment~

5 He wants it furnis hedo

'/.40

Pero es ms bar ato viVIr en un

apartamento.

lokyerxlmwblado

Lo quiere amueblado.

CUARENTA

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

6 But if there isn't (one)

furnished he'll take
one unfurnished.

toma uno sin muebles.

. .

,
Un ami~o que trabaja con l

enlsek~y6~knslart

en la seccin consular, va a

ha~udrle~

ayudarle.

bn~1rlestatrd~

9 Juan thinks it's easy to find

an apartmenL

Pero si no hay amueblado,

nam1golketrahahakon~1'

8 They're going to ~o this

afternoon.

, ,.
tomunos1nmwblsi
,

7 A friend who works with him

in the consular section is
going to he lp him.

p~rbsinQaylmwbladot

Van a ir esta tarde.

hwa~lkr~~ksfaiilleijkontrrapart

Juan cree que es fcil encontrar

apartamento.

mnto.J.

DIALOG 1

..

Juan, dgale a la Srta. que Ud.

piensa buscar un apartamento.

,.....

pyensobuska~nppartamntblsQyorta+
"

Srta. s pregnte le s i no le gusta

este hotel.
Juan, contstele que s, es excelente
pero que es ms barato vivir en un
apartamento.

CUARENTA Y UNO

n61gustest~otelt

s1s.eks(~

p~rQzmazbartt
,
bib1rlen~npartment

Juan: Pienso buscar un aparta~

mento, seorita.

lent

Srta.: No le gusta este hotel?

Juan: S, es excelente, pero es

ms barato vivir en un
a partame nt o.

7.41

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

.. .

"

Srta., pregntele si l cree que

es fc il enc ontrar.

ste~kre~lksfa~11eQkontrart

Srta.~

Ud. cree que es fcil

encontrar?

Juan, dgale que Ud. cree que s.

, ..
kreolkes-l-

Juan: Creo que s.

,.

Srta . , pregntele si lo quiere amue

blado o sin muebles.

Juan, c ontstele que le conviene

ms amueblado, pero que si no
hay, toma uno sin muebles.

lokyer~lamwehla~Qtos1nmwbls-l-

, . ,
,
mekmbyenemaslamwhlado-l-

"

,.

prosinofay1tomQunos1nmwhls~

Srta.: Lo quiere amueblado o

sin muebles?

Juan: Me conviene ms amueblado;

pero si no hay, tomo uno sin
muebles.

NARRATWE 2

1 It's almost three o'clock.

sOI)kas11astrs~

2 Jose and Juan go down in the

elevator.

Son casi las tres.

,....

hbse*hwamfbahanen~las(~ens6r~

Jos y Juan bajan en el ascensor.

.. .

3 Jose has yesterday's paper .

,
,
,
hbsetyen~ llpryod1ko~~a~r''

4 They look at the ad section.

benllsk~yond~ann~yos

5 There are many apartments.

ymucho~apartamnts

Jos tiene el peridico de ayer.

,.

7,.42

,.

... .

Ven la seccin de anuncios.

Hay muchos apartamentos.

CUARENTA Y DOS

UNIT 7

SPOKEN SPANISH

6 One ad says: 'Three-room

apartment, furnished, two
hundred a month.'

nanun~yo4i~ prtmentol

Un anuncio dice: 'Apartamento

4treskwrtos~ mwbla4o~

de tres cuartos, amueblado,

dos (~yen tos.alms''

doscientos al mes.

7 It's too big for Juan.

~zdemasyadogrndlprhwn

Es demasiado grande para Juan.

D/ALOG 2

,..

Juan, d~ale a Jos que son

<casi las tres.

so~kas11astrslhos''

Jos, dgale que tiene razn,

que 'vamos', y que a esta
hora no hay mucho movimiento.

tyenezrra~6m''bamos

,...

Juan,

pre~ntele si

CUARENTA Y TRES

ve algo.

..

estoralnQaymuchomob1ffiy~nt''

..

Jos: Tienes razn, vamos.

A esta hora no hay mucho
movimiento.

,..

.,
Q~ eb asJelperyod1k o4~a~ erf

,..

"

Jos, contstele que s, que aqu

est, y que vean los anuncios.

,.

Juan, pre~ntele a Jos si lleva

el peridico de ayer.

Juan: Son casi las tres, Jos.

si~ k1~St~ beamoslo~ann~ys~

Juan: Llevas el peridico de

ayer?

Jos~: S, aqu est'. Veamos

los anuncios.

"

bes.algof

Juan: Ves algo?

7.43

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

"

Jose, dgale que aqu hay uno:

'Apartamento de tres cuartos,
amueblado, agua, luz; doscientos al mes.

Jos: S, aqu hay uno: 'Apartamento

de tres cuartos, amueblado,
agua, luz; doscientos al mes.

dtreskwartostmwebla~ot

, .,
,.
agw at 1u ~ t d" os (~ yen t oS"a lm s ~

..

Juan, dgale que no le conviene,

que demasiado grande.

si~ ak*ay6no~ apartamentO/

,
,.
,

nomekombyne~~emsyadogrnde~

Juan: No me conviene, demasiado

grande.

NARRAT/VE 3

1 Another one says: 'Unfurnished

apartment, cheap !

Otro dice: Apartamento sin muebles,

barato'

,
mweblest bratot
~.

. .

2 No, Juan wants it furnished.

no1hwanlokyer~lamwebldo+

3 Here's a furnished one-l'oom

apartment.

k~lyn~partmentQlamweblad~t

4 But it's a long ways from downtown, almost in the outskirts.

No, Juan lo quiere amueblado.

,
,

id~u1Jkwrtb+

, , ,.
prQestalmuylehoz I~el~ntro~
,
,

kas*lnlas~fweras~

,
5 And Juan wants to live downtown.

7.44

. .

otrod~e+ partamento/S1n

,..,

Aqu hay un apartamento amueblado

y de un cuarto.

Pero est muy lejos del centro,

casi en las afueras.

ihwa1Jkyereb1b1rlen~1~entro+

y Juan quiere vivir en el centro.

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

,
yotrbs~

,
prbs6nmuygrnd6st

6 There are others but they're

eithe.r too big 01' they're
too far away.

2estnmuyl~hbs~

7 Jose has a friend who works

hosetyen~unam190lktrabahl

for an agency.

Hay otros, pero o son muy grandes

o estn muy lejos.

..,.

...

en.unah~n!iya~

Jos tiene un

am~o

que trabaja

en una agencia.

,
8 They're going to see him.

bnAber lb~

Van a verlo.

D1ALOG 3

,
Jos, dgale que aqu hay otro:
'Apartamento sin muebles,
barato "

Juan, dgale que no, que Ud. quiere

uno amueblado.

ak*ay6tr~prtmentos1n

, .
mwbleztbrato I

~ Apartame nt o

sin muebles, barato. '

,
"
,
n01 kyerQunQlmw~bla~b~
,

Jos, dgale que aqu hay uno

amueblado y de un cuarto.

Jos: Aqu hay otro:

Juan: No, quiero uno amueblado.

,.,

k1IynQamwehlad01id~uQkwrto~

J os~: Aqu hay uno amueblado y

de un cuarto.

Juan, pregntele si dice dnde

est.

CUARENTA Y CINCO

dJ.~e Idondestat

Juan: Dice dnde est?

7.45

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 7

,
Jos, contstele que si, que en
la Avenida Coln, 1621.

si~ nlabni4aklon~

Jos: Si, en la Avenida Coln, 1621.

dye~iseyzbeyntyn+

Juan, pregntele que dnde estA

eso.

,
,
dondestaso-l.
,

Jose, contstele que un poco

lejos. que casi en las afueras.

"

mpokolehos~

Juan: Dnde est eso?

,
kaslnlaafweras+

Juan, dga le que no le e onviene a

Ud., que Ud. quiere vivir en el
centro.

,..

,
.
,
nomekombyn+ yokyerob~b~rl

Jos: Un poco lejos, casi en las

afueras.

nl~entro''

Juan: No me conviene; yo quiero

vivir en el centron

Jos, dgale que muy bien, que Ud.

tiene un amigo que trabaja en la
Agencia del Valle; que pueden
ir a hablar con el.

7.46

,
,
muybyn-l. ~6tijgQnAm~gol
,
,.
ketrabahlenlhen~ya

, .,

,.

delb~'' p~emo~~rlahlarkon~l~

Jos: Muy bien. Yo tengo un amig<

que trabaja en la Agencia
del Valle; podemos ir a
hablar con l.

CUARENTA Y SE~

SPOKEN SPANISH

8.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

UNIT 8

Molina tens White about his neighbors' apartment.

After having seen several apartments that were not suitable, Jose Molina and John White return to the hotel to talk it overo

AID TO LISTENING

ENGLISH SPELLING

'"
krambA+

gosh

caramba

Gosh p now 1 ~emember.

~he

rrkwerdb~ rrk6rdr~

(1) r~member (to remembel')

Mol~na

SPANISH SPELLING

kramba.l.

~orakerrekw6r~o

neighbor

recuerdo <&ec<rdar)

Molma.
Caramba\ Ahora que

el vecino

(they) go (to gol

van (li')

lo remove

mudar

the hOll.''Je

to move (one 9 a residence)

la casa

. .

md:arse-de-ksa~

the week

My nejghbors are going to

n~cuerdo,

mudarse de casa
la semana

".
,. o,.
,
mizh~lnOzlhanamu~arsel~kas~1

Mis vecinos van a mudarse de

move this wee k.

stas~mna~
(they) live tto live)

UNO

'"

casa esta semana.

bJ.ben~ bib1r~

viven (vivir)

8.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

,
igwal-A.!-

equal to, the same as

They live in an apartment just like mine.

igual a

,
"
b1benlen~nftpartamentQligwalalm1o

Viven en un apartamento igual al

mo.

,
kar~

expensive

caro

White
Is it very expensive?

, . ,
ezmuykarot

White
Es muy caro?

l-k6ntraryo
,
l-kbntraryo

el contrario

the price

l-pre~y~

el precio

had

mal~ mal~

t he c ontrary
00

t he c ontrary

"

Molina
On the c ontrary, the price is oot hado

mal (malo)

. .

,
,
"
alkontrary~ lpre~yolnQestaml

(it) gives (to give)

Molina
Al contrario, e 1 precio no est mal.

da (dar)

,
dar-~

dar a

the street

l-kaG\J~

la calle

the yard, the court, the patio

el-paty

el patio

to face

00

White
Does 1t face the street or the patio?

8.2

al contrario

, .,

. .

dalakaC~et Qalpty~

White
Da a la calle o al patio?

DOS

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
bnl. to~
,
l-hJ.5 ta~

pretty
the view

Molina
The street, and it has a beautiful
vlew.

bonito
la vista

.,.

,
dalakaO~~ Ii tyn lmuybonl. tab1st~

Molina
Da a la calle y tiene muy bonita
vista.

,
l~-bi ta~yon~

the room

White
How many rooms does it have?

la habitacin

,
.
kwantaspb1taiyones Ityn~

..,

White
Cuntas habitaciones tiene?

the living room

la sala

the kitchen

la cocina

Molina
A large living room, kitchen and bath.

,.

..

Malina

nsl9randetkil.n~ll.kwartodebQyb~ Una sala grande, cocina y cuarto

de bao.

,
l-drmi toryo~

the bedroom

White
Doesn't it have a bedroom?

notyenelaormitoryot

Molina
No, but the living room is quite large.

,
,.
, .
n01 prlasl~le7bastantegrnde~

the sofa

TRES

,.

".

el dormitorio

White
No tiene dormitorio?

Molina
No, pero la sala es bastante grande.

el sof

8.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

,
1a-kama~

the hed
the sofa-hed

,.

In mine I have a s ofa-hed.

la cama

,
e1-s of a-k m ~

el sof cama

.,

n1arn~atte~gQunsofakm~

En la ma tengo un sof cama.

,
1-rr~lid:a<t

the reality

debe ser

it must be, it's probably

,
komd~

c ornfortab le

cmodo

White
Actually the apartment must be very
c omfortab le.

enrr~li~adtdbsrlmuykomOdQJ

White
En realidad, debe ser muy c6moda
el apartamento.

lpartmnt~

(you) come (to come)

byens~ ben~r~

vienes (venir)

the night

l--noche~

la noche

tonight

esta noche

so

as

(you) see (to see)

Molina
Why don't you come tonight and you
can see where 1 live?

ves (ver)

b~b~ bib~r~

(1) live (to live)

8.4

la realidad

vivo (vivir)

"
".
, .,
prkenobyenes /estanochel
"

*Slbez /dondebb~

Molina
Por qu no vienes esta noche y
as ves dnde vivo?

CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

to leave, to let

dejar

,
dharm

to leave me

White
O.K. Will you let me off at the hotel?

dejarme

,
,.,
,
muybyn kyerez Ideharm~'en~lotelt
,
tner-ke.J.

to have to

tener que

myself

the clothes, the clothing

kambyarm-rt kambyars

cambiarme de (cambiarse)

,
l-rrop

la ropa

,..

,.
1 have to change my clothes.

teQgolkkambyarmelderr6pa~

Tengo que cambiarme de ropa.

to come by

pasar

yon

ti

at eight (o'clock)

a las ocho

-ls-och6~
Molina
Then I'll take yon (to the hoten, and
come by for yon at eight.

,.,
,
ntones /tO~ebQlipspbrt11~las

6cho

the million
(1) hope (to hope, expect, wait for)

CINCO

me

,
to change myself of (to change
oneself)

White
Muy bien, quieres dejarme en el
hotel?

Molina
Entonces te llevo y paso por ti a las
ocho.

el milln

sper

,
sprar~

espero (esperar)

8.5

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

White

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

8.21

Pattern drills

8.21.1

Present tense forms of regular

A.

White

unm1a~ondegr~yas~ tspero~

Thanks a mi11ion. 1'11 be waiting

for you.

8.2

/-ir/

Un milln de gracias. Te espero.

verbs

Presentation of pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

"

as1bez Idondeb1bo~

I live on the first floor.

b1bQl~lprimerpso~

Do you live on the first floor?

,
, ,.
b1bes/enelprimerp1sot

Why don't you open another agency?

Vivo en el primer piso.

abrs~

(you) (fam.) open (to open)

y asi ves donde vivo.

Vives en el primer piso?

,
br1r.l.
,
,

abres (abrir)

, ,
porkenQabres lotrahen~y.l.

Por qu no abres otra agencia?

Sube o baja?

,
writes (to write)

8.6

skr1b~ eskrib1r~

escribe (escribir)

SEIS

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

,.

He writes too much.

eleskr1beldemasya~b

El escribe demasiado.

And so you can see where we live.

, ,
,
1s1bez
Id6ndebib1mOS~
,..

y as ves donde vivimos.

,
,
eskrib1mos eskribir

(we) write (to write)

Why do we write so much?

,
.,.
prkeskr1b1mostnt

b1benle~n~prtamentb~

Are you going up in the e levator ?

Por qu escribimos tanto?

...

10

escribimos (escribir)

Viven en un apartamento.

,.
,
suben lenelas(~ensort

Suben en el ascensor?

EXTRAPOLA TION

p!

sg

-rnos

-=o

2 fam

-es

2--3

-e

-en
NOTES

a. The pattern for

/-r/

verbs dfers from

/-r/

only in the occurrence of

/-/

as the

theme vowel in 1 pI forms.

SIETE

8.7

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

8.21.11

Substitution drills - number substitution

. .
skrib1ffios lenleskwl~
,.
,. .
b1benllehozdel~ntro~
,
... .
subQ 'en~las(~ ens6r~
,
.
,.

1
2

8.8

noabrelerolbr~

bib1mos I() erkad"~aki

,

,..

" -,-.
"

noeskr1bolmcho~

sbenlmeno~a6ra

, , - - -, -

..

. .
,. ,. .
b1bellehozdel~ntr
, . ...
.
Sb1ffiOS len.elas(~ ens6r+
, . .
nQabren Iea)libr~
,. , . .
,

skr1bQlenleskwl~

b1bol~erkad~aki

, .
nQeskrib1moz Imch6+
,
sbe Imenos.a6ra~

..

1 Escribimos en la escuela.

Escribo en la escuela

2 Viven lejos del centro.

Vive lejos del centro.

3 Subo en el ascensor.

Subimos en el ascensor.

4 No abre e 1 libro.

No abren el libro.

5 Vivimos cerca de aqu.

Vivo cerca de aqu.

6 No escribo mucho.

No escribimos mucho.

7 Suben menos ahora.

Sube menos ahora.

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8
Persan - number suhatitution

2 ~lskr1bels61QeniQgle~

~O.

6skr1bols61~~n1~91es~

1 Yo vivo lejos de aqui.

Antonio

Alieia y yo_ _. -

Ud. Ellos

-.1

--------

Vive lejos de aqu.

Vivimos lejos de aqui.
Vive lejos de aqu.
Viven lejos de aqu.

2 El escribe slo en ingls.

yo

NUEVE

Escribo slo en ingls.

8.9

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

k armn...--.

,
nsotros
,
stedes

. --------

.,

...

skr1bels612~i~gles~

,
,
skrib1ffios Is61Qni~gles~
,
,

skr1benls61Qni~gles~

.P

eQ4oaabrenllembaha~a~

~.

~o.

karmen

nosotros

ste~es

Carmen

---

Nc&otros

Uds.

abroll~mbahada~

,.
,
abre Il~embhada..
,
,
abr1moz 112embhada
,

abrenll~embahada..

Escribe s610 en inglse

Escribimos s<Slo en ingls.
Escriben s<S!o en ingls.

3 Ellos abren la Embajada,

yo
Carmen

Abro la Emhajada.
_

Nosotros
Uds.

8..10

Abre la Embajada"
_

Abrimos la Embajada.
Abren la Embajada.

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANJSH
8.21.12

UNIT 8

Response drill

. " ." . , .
eskr1h~uste~lenespaQyoltQen~~gls
,., "
.. ". :), . , ..
b~benustedes lenunapartamentotQen~naksa~
,.,
.
,

1
2

3 eskr1belmuchQtopko~
~

."

.,..

6 kwantoschekesf~skr~bl~

(en un hotel)
(en el centro)
(tres)

ONCE

eskrbepoko~
~..

[enl~entrb+J5 dondeb~b~lst~+

btb1mOslennkasa~

,.
bJ.ben Ienun.otl~
,
,.
b:tbQ Ian.el~ ntr5

4 dondeb~benl~6s

,
eskrbQeniI)gles~

,ji

eskrJ.betrs+

1 Escribe Ud. en espaolo en ingls?

Escribo en ingls,

2 Viven Uds. en un apartamento o en una casa?

Vivimos en una C$\sa.

3 Escribe l mucho o poco?

Escribe poco-

4 Dnde viven ellos?

Viven en un hoteL

5 "Dnde vive Ud,?

Vivo en el centro-

6 "Cuntos cheques escribe l?

Escribe tres.

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

,
[spQydlJ

..

,
,.
,
eskr1ben~stedes lnl~glest
,

[aprtamentJ

blbe0'y InDnkasaf

,
,
abrelllambahaaf
, .. " , .
, .
blben~stedes lenlafwerasf

10

11

(espaol)
(apartamento)

8.12

suten~0yos

,
,
,
noi skriblmos ln~spQYo~~
,
,
,
n b2b~ln~nprtament~
,

. . .

si~ biblmos lenlas.afwra s

,

Ien.els (5) ensort

si~ abrel~embahd{

J..~

, .

suben Ien.elas (ej ens6r~

7 "Escriben Uds. en ingl&?

NO escribImos en espaol.

8 Vive ella en una casa?

No, . lve en un apartamentoo

9 Abre l la Embajada?

S~ abre la Embajada.

10 Viven Uds. en las afueras?

S, vivimos en las afueras.

11 Suben ellos en e 1 ascensor?

S, suben en el ascensor.

DOCE

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANLSH
8.21.13

TranslatioD drill
,

1 We live in an old house

2 They live in a blg apartmeDto

3 What time do Lhey open that

building?

,.

",.
,
ak~orahrenlse~if1~YO~
4,:1

dondebJ.h~ust~d~

5 Does he write the ads?

eskrJ.belllsanun~yost

, ,

Dnde vive usted?

kwandQeskr1h~ust~d~

Cuando escribe Ud.?

."

dezdekwandob1benlustdeaa!~

abrelll~embahadat

"

he open the Emhassy?

~"

9 1 go up at eight o'clock.

Escribe l los anuncios?

7 Since when have you alllived

there?
DObS

A qu hora ahrren ese edificio?

,.

Ellos viven en un apartamento

grande e

4 Where do you live?

6 When do you write?

Vivimos en una casa vieja._

eO~ozb1benlen~nApartamentogrnde~

Desde cundo viven Uds. ahl?

Abre l la Embajada?

.,.

~osubQ Ialas.ch6~

Yo subo a las

..

ocho~

10 They go up at seveno

,
,.
e(1}Jo(s) suben Iala(s) syte~

Ellos suben a las sietec

11 They live near a fdend (o)

". , .
,.,
b1benerka 1d:~n.aml.gomJ.o~

Viven cerca de un amigo mio.

mine~

..

12 1 live in the Uni!ed States..

b1bolenloskstad:o~un1d:os~

13 1 Uve a long ways from the

language schoolo

b1bolehozld:el~eskwelad:el~gws~

TRECE

bib~moslennakasaby~ha~

., .

Vivo en los Estados Unidoso

..

Vivo lejos de la escuela-de

lenguas.

UNIT 8

Bo

SPOKEN SPANISH

DlSC ussion

of pattern

In almos! aIl tense forms other than present tense orms there is no distinction between / - r / and / - i r / theme cIass verb endings~
and they wHI be referred to as/-r-ir/pauernsc The Importan! dHferences are In the theme vowel o the iafinidve and the 1 pI orm o (he
present \:enseo
Below is the complete pattern for regular "erbs in the prebent tense, illu~trated with three common verbs:

abl~r

kom-r

bl.b-fr

&g

bl-o

km==o

bb-o

fam

bl-as

k6m=-es

bb=es

2-3 sg

bl~a

k6m=-e

bib-e

abl~mos

koITr-'mos

bl.b-=mos

bl~an

k60Fen

bb-=en

pI

2-3 pi

,i/
,-=n/

Note that theme class memb6l.'!:lh~p 1 s marktd by the presence o a vowel / a, e

in aH forms excepr 1 sgo AH 1 sg forms have the
endlDg
in cornmonc Nol..e also that the person~nurnber endings /-s ,--mos
are presem in theil" approprate forms regardless of
what theme vowel precedes them~ Note also that /~r/ and
verbs are disdnguished only in 1 pI forms~ where distmct
and
theme vowels appearo

/-0/

/-1-/

8.14

/c=r/

/-e-/

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH
8.21.2
A.

UNIT 8

The obligatory contractions

Presentation of pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

kyeropresentarl~lalseQyormolna~

dalakaO~et Qalpty~

, .,

. .

Quiero presentarle al seor

Molina.
Da a la calle, o al patio?

,
del~

of the, from the

Far from the Embassy, or the

hotel?

,
lehoz

del

..

,.

Idl~~mbahadto~elotl~

--

Lejos de la Embajada, o del

hotel?

,
4

~eledif1iyodelkmp~

En el edificio Del Campo.

EXTRAPOLA TION

el
la
los
las

de

al
a-la
a-los
a-las

del
de-la
de-los
de-las

NOTES
a. The contractions /

al/

and /

de 1/

are obligatory on aH style levels of Spanish.

b. Many other contractions occur, but they are not obligatory.

QUINCE

8.15

UNIT 8

802L21

SPOKEN SPANISH

SuhstitutinB chilla - number s'Ubstitution

1 kyrmpresentarl~lalseQyor~

,
.-..

.--=o="""'e-seQYors
..
~

, ,

kyrempresentarl~ll(~seQyores~

2 l~abedelkwrt~
,

,.

3 lakas~

Iez<1elo(s) seQy6res~

~~

"
~~_seQy6r~

ji

l~abe~eloskwrts~

. . .

lakas~lez4elseQy6r~

1 Quieren presentarle al seorc

______

2 La llave del

__ seoresc

Quieren presentarle a los seores ..

cuarto.

_ _ _~ CUO!toso

La llave de los cuartos.

3 La casa es de los seores.

_ _ _ _ _ _ seor.

8.16

La casa es del seor.

DIECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

....

.
4 kyr~ablarl~elo~9partam~nts
~

.. .

___________________apartamnt6~
,

~..

ky~r2blarldelapartam~nt6~

S ~ebenoslalozrrestorn~s
~

..

---------rrestorn-i

.. . . .

Q~ebenoslalrrestorn

4 Quiero hablar de los apartame ntos,

_ _-...._.

apartame moo

Quiero hablar del apartamento"

5 Llvenos a los restoraneso

_ _ _ _.....Jrestorno

DIECISIETE

Llvenos al

restorn~

8.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8
Item substltution

. .

,.

1 banal~embuh~a~

.
____

otl~

..

ban.alotl~

..

2 bamos.al~ntro+

.
.
.
bamos.alahnya.t.

.
___

ah~n~ya~

.?

..

3 elotelezdelaseuy6ra

_____________seQyr~

,,.

"
elbtelez~elseQy6r

1 Van a la E mba]ada
_~~__

Van al hotel.

hotet

2 Vamos al centro.
_ _ _agenciao

Vamos a la t'lgencia.

3 El hotel es de la seoro.
seo"o

8.18

El hotel es del seorn

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SP ANISH

UNIT 8

,
,.
elkwarto IdalakQMe~
,

elkwartoldalptyo~

5 ky~rbpr~sntarl~lalseQyor~

__~__~~~~_SeQy6r1ta~

4 El e uarto da a la calle

kyr6presntarl~JlseQyor1ta

patw.

El cuarto da al patio.

5 Quiero presentarle al seor.

-------

seorita..

DIECINUEVE

Quiero presentarle a la seorita.

8.19

UNIT 8

802L22

SPOKEN SPANISH

Transl!ltion drill

1 They want to go to

too restaurant . .

., .

..

kyerGn~~lalrrestorn~

""

Quieren ir al restcrn..

~.

2 They want to go to the agency.

kyeren1rlalahn~ya

3 They re going to the same hotd.,

bdnalml.zmotl

4 This is the key to (of) the:: house '.

est~ez IIM'.labcldelaksa~

,
,

5 These are the keys to (of) the

apartment.

QUIeren ir a la agencia..

..

"

Van al mifjmo hot.,t

~

, . . ..

..,

Esta es la llave de la casa.

.,

esta~~onnz~ab~zldelapartamnt~

9..

6 Two hundred dollars a (to the)

month.

dos(~~yentozdolares lalms~

7 This is Mr. Molina's car (the car of

Mr. Molina).

esteaelawtoldelseQyormol!n~

8 This is the light hill (hill o the

light).

. .

. .

. .

. .

Doscientos dlares al mes.

Este es el auto del seor Molina.

est~ezlakwentaldela16~

9 This is the gas hill (hill o the

gas).

''''

Estas son las llaves del apartamento.

estiezlakwentaldelgs~

Esta es la cuenta de la luz.

Esta es la cuenta del gas.

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

B.

UNIT 8

Discussion of pattern

There are many instances of contraction, or telescoping of forms, in Spanish. This is particularly true when two vowels are brought together
at word boundaries. The contraction is usually complete if the two vowels involved are the same. For example, in /d6ndest/ the final
of Idnde/ and the initial
of
are telescoped in normal pronunciation. A slower pronunciation, however, would be /d6nd~

/e-/

l-el

lest/

est-l- /.
The two cases of contraction presented aboye are selected for special driU because they are obligatory; / de / and / e 1/ will always be
no matter how slowly pronounced. The two contractions / a 1/ and / de 1/ are the only ones recognized in the writing system - no others,
however they are pronounced, are written as contractions. Note that it is the weak-stressed
'the' which combines with
and
the strong-stressed /
'he' does noto

/ de 1/ '

1/

VEINTIUNO

/el/

la/

/del ;

8.21

UNIT 8
8..22

SPOKEN SPANISH
Replacement drills

b1benlenpn~partamentb~

,
1
2

kasa~

,
bibl.mos

.t.

bib~mos le~estaksa~

ote1.~

,
trabahamos

es~

trabhamoslen~s~otl~

,.

embaha<!'a~

trabhamoslenest~ot~l~
,

,..

trabhamos lenes~embah4a~

Viven en un apartamento.

casa..

Viven en una casa.

2 Vivimos

Vivimos en una casa..

esta_~

hotel.

5 Trabajamos
6

8.22

,
6

bib1mosl~nesteot~1~
,..

,
,
bibl.moslennakasa
,.
,

,
esta

b1benlennakasa~

Vivimos en esta casa.

Vivimos en este hotel.
Trabajamos en este hotel.

ese _ _

embajada ..

Trabajamos en ese hotel..

Trabajamos en esa embajada.

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

,
'zmuykr6~

B
1

son

sbnmuykr6s-l.

s nmuybartos~

..

hart~

2 ~artos~

zmuybart~

byho~

ezmuybyho+

5 by

s ymuyby~h+

son

sonmuybyhos+

hontA.J.

Es

muy C!'lF!)~

1 Son

Son muy earos

~baratos.

e--~

Son muy baratos.

barato.

Es muy barato.

viejo.

Es muy viejo,

5 Soy___

Soy muy viejo.,

6 Son~

Son muy viejos.

VEINTITRES

zmuybon tA+

bonita.

Es muy bonita.

8.23

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

, ,

,.

elpre~yoln2estamai~

"

6st6spre~yozln~stanmai~

6stakasaln~estamai~

's,

.J.

'skasaln~stamai.J.

~eblez

''

6szmweblezln2estanma~

_knti<!'ac!,

'st.

staknti<!'a4In~estamai''

'stiimfrm~yonln2stama1.J.

,
7

__--imforma~yon

, ,

, ,

"

,.

, ,

6sknti<!'ac!ln~estamai

, ,
,

, ,

El recio no est mal.

1 Estos
2

Estos precios no estn mal.

casa

3 Esa

Esta casa no est mal.

Esa casa no est mal.

muebles

Esos muebles no estn mal.

cantidad

Esa cantidad no est mal.

6 Esta

8.24

,.

'sts
,
_kasa,

Esta cantidad no est mal.

informacin _ .

Esta informacin no est mal.

VEINTICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

.".
, .
bwena

------- ---.
,

ityne'muybon1tabsta~

D
1
2

,.

ity~nlrnuybwenabsta
..

itynelrnuybwen~entrd:a~

entrd:a

--------

:3

_ _ _ _ _ _ _arn1gs

i tyne Irnuybwenos.arn1gos

_tI)go

,
i tI)g Irnuybwenos.arn1gos

______________~1mforma~yns

!!

,..

. . .

______rna 1 oz

~..

. .

".

itI)glrnuybwenozrnwbls~

,.

itI)golrnuyrnalozmwbls

Y tiene muy bonita vista.

1 _ _ _ _ _ _buena_.

y tiene muy buena vista.

------3

y tiene muy buena entrada.

entrada.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _amlgos.

4 _ _tengo
5
6
7

VEINTICINCO

i tI)go Irnuybwena s.1rnf orma~y6ns

mw~bls

---------, .

,..

------malos

y tiene muy buenos amigos.

y tengo muy buenos amigos.

informaciones.

y tengo muy buenas informaciones.

muebles.

y tengo muy buenos muebles.

y tengo muy malos muebles.

8.25

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

kwantaslbit~yonestyne~

,
1

kwantas lbita~yoness6n~

s6n~

,
~

kwartos

agw

,
se12yores

..

trabhn

kwantagwy~-

seQyoras

. .

. .

,.

,
,
kwanto(s) seQyores.y~
, .
. ,.
,
kwanto(s) se1jyores Itrabhan

kwanta(s) seQyoras Itrabhan

Cuntas habitaciones tIene?

Cuntas habItaciones son?

son?
cuartos

Cuntos cuartos son?

hay?

Cuntos cuartos hay?

agua

Cunta agua hay?

seores

Cuntos seores hay?

6
7

8.26

"

kwantoskwarto~y

kwantoskwarto~s6n~

seoras

trabajan?

Cuntos seores trabajan?

Cuntas seoras trabajan?

VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

UNIT 8

...,

.,

kyerezldeharm~len~lotelt

,
pwedez

,
_ _ _O~ebarm~----_t

,
3

,.

----------.,

,.

,
_________________apartamentot

,.

o,.

o,

o,

pwedeslalkl1arm~lelapartamento1

-------t

kyeres

'0

o.

,.

....,.

.,

pwedeslalk11arm~lun~partamento1

.,

kyereslalk11arm~lun~partamentot

Quieres dejarme en el hotel?

1 Puedes
2

lo

llevarme

3
4

alquilarme

5
6

7 Quieres
VEINTISIETE

..

"

pwedeslalk11armellakasat

Un

..

, ,

______alk1la rm e

-------, .

.,

pwedezIQ~ebarm~lalakasat

...,
..,

pwe~ez la~ebarm~ Ialotel t

kasat

..

.,

pwe~ezl~eharm~lenelotelt

un

Puedes dejarme en el hotel?

Puedes llevarme al hote l?

casa?

Puedes llevarme a la casa?

Puedes alquilarme la casa?

apartamento?

Puedes alquilarme el apartamento?

Puedes alquilarme un apartamento?

Quieres alquilarme un apartamento?

8.27

UNIT 8
8.23

SPOKEN SPANISH
Variation drilIs

,.,

A mizb~~1nozlbnm~arsel~ekas'
estas~mna~
1 My friends are going to move
lo another apartment this
week.

Mis vecinos van a mudarse de casa

esta semana.

,
,
,
miS.am1goz Ibn.am~arse 1<!~apartamentQ I
estsemna~

Mis amigos van a mudarse de

apartamento esta semana.

2 My neighhors are going to

move to another room this
week.

,
,.,
mizbei1nOz Ibnm<!arsel<!ekwartQI
stasemn~

cuarto esta semana.

mizbei1nozlbnbskrlotraks~

4 My friends are going to rent

another house.

mi&m1gozlbn~lkilrlotraksa~

,
,
miaam1goz Ib~trabaharlenunahn~y~
,

mi~am1gazrbnak6merlen~lrrestorn~

7 My (girI) friends are goi08

to be here tomorrow.

miaam19azlbn~estrk1ImaQyn~

Mis amigos van a alquilar otra

casa.

Mis amigos van a trahajar en una

agencia.

.. . .

6 My (girI) friends are going

to eat in the resta..-ant.

Mis vecinos van a buscar otra

casa.

...

5 My friends are going to work

in an agency.

8.28

3 My neighhors are goi08 to look

for another house.

Mis vecinos van a mudarse de

Mis amigas van a comer en el

restorn.

Mis amigas van a estar aqu

maana.

VEINTIOCHO

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
"
B b1ben/ennapartamentQligwalalm!o
,

1 They live in a room just

iike mine.

b1benlen~ijkwart2Iigwalalm16

2 They live in a building just

like mine.

Viven en un apartamento igual al

mo.

b1benlennA~if1~YQligwalalm1

...

Viven en un cuarto igual al mio.

Viven en un edificio igual al mo.

3 They live in a hoteL

,
b1b en.en~n.o t1

4 He lives in the U.S.

b1beln16aesta~oaun1~6s~

Vive en los Estados Unidos.

5 1 live in Washington.

,
b1b Qeij'!t s biIJton

Vivo en Washington.

6 We live here.

7 We live there.

VEINTINUEVE

Viven en un hotel.

..

"

.
, . .
bib1mOS.ak!
, . .
bib1ffiOS.a

Vivimos aqu.

Vivimos ahi.

8.29

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

. .

dlakaa~etQalptyo~

Da a la calle o al patio?

. ...

1 Does it face the street or

the avenue?

dlakaQ~etQalaben!~a~

,.

2 Does it face the avenue or

the court.

dlaben~~atQalptyo~

,
3 Does it face 20th Street or
the avenue?

. ...

Da a la Calle Veinte o a la
avenida'?

. .., .

dlak Q.)j ~ ~IJkot QalakaO)j ed6s

Da a la Calle Cinco o a la Calle

Dos?

...

,.

5 Does it face the living room

Da a la avenida o al patio?

dlakO)jebeyntetQalaben1d"a
,

4 Does it face Fifth Street or

Second St.?

Da a la calle o a la avenida?

dlasalatQalako~1n

Da a la sala o a la cocina?

or the kitchen?

6 Does it face the bedroom or

. .

..

dldormitoryotQalkwartodebQY~

the bathroom?

7 Does it face the American

Da al dormitorio o al cuarto
de bao?

...,.

,
.,
dalembaha~~lamer~kanat

Da a la Embajada Americana?

Embassy?

8.30

TREINTA

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANlSH

,.,

O noi p'rblasallezbastantelgrand'~

1 No, but the kitchen is

quite large.

,
no

3 No, but the view is rather

nioe.

4 No, but the street is

rather nice.

5 Yes, and the Ernhassy is

quite near.

6 Yes, and the restaurant is

near.

7 Yes, and the apartment is

inexpensive.

TRElNfA Y UNO

prblako~1nlzbastantelgrande~

No, pero la cocina es bastante

grande.

,
no+ prla~ahitaiyones Ismbastantel
,
grands
,

2 No, but the rooros are quite

large.

No, pero la sala es bastante

grande.

,
,
,
,
no prol~b1stilzbastante'bwena~

No, pero las hahitac.iones son

bastante grandes.

N0 9 pero la vista es bastante

buena.

,
,
,
,
no+ prblaka~~lezbastantelbwena+

,
,
,
,
51+ ilimbaha~'5tbastantelierkt

N0 9 pero la calle es bastante

buena.

Si 9 y la Embajada est bastante

cerca.

,
"
51+ lrr5toranlst~erk+

Si, y el restorn est cerca.

,
,
,
511 *lpartamentQlzbarat~

Si, y el apartamento es barato.

8.31

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

, ,

nlamlaltijgQnsofakama~

En la mia tengo un sof cama.

1 In mine I have a bed.

enlamlaltij9Qnakam~

2 In mine I have atable.

enlmlaltijgQnmesa~

En mi cuarto tengo un escritorio.

,.

enlsalaltijgokwatros1Q~as~

5 In the kitchen I have a few

nmikwartoltijgQnkskritory~

4 In the living room I have

four chairs.

En la ma tengo una mesa.

3 In my room I have a desk.

En la mia tengo una cama.

En la sala tengo cuatro sillas.

enlako~lnaltijgQnzmone~s

En la cocina tengo unas monedas.

,
,
en~16tellt~ijgQnz~olares~

En el hotel tengo unos dlares.

COlns.

6 In the hotel 1 have a few

dollars.

7 On the table I have an

ash-tray.

8.32

,
,
enlmesaltij9Qn~eni~er~

En la mesa tengo un cenicero.

TREINTA Y DOS

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

F d~b6s~rlmuykom04Qlelapartm~nt6~

,
1 The room must be very
c omfortab le.

dbesrlmuykom6dQllkwrtb~

,
2 The house must be very
comfortable.

Debe ser muy cmodo el apartamento.

Debe ser muy cmodo el cuarto o

dbsrlmuykomodllks~

Debe ser muy cmoda la casa.

3 The hotel must be very goodo

d~bsrlmuybwenQlltl~

4 The car must be very cheap.

dbsrlmuyharatQllwt~~

5 The kitchen must be very

dhsrlmuY9randllakb~1na~

Debe ser muy bueno el hotel.

.,

Debe ser muy barato el auto.

Debe ser muy grande la cocmao

large.

6 The hote ls must be very

cheap.

.,

dbnsrlmuybaratoz Il~tls

Deben ser muy baratos los

hoteles.

7 The apartments must be very

nice.

TREINTA Y TRES

,
,
dbnsrlmuybon1tz Il~prtmntbs~

Deben ser muy bonitos los

a partame nt os.

8.33

UNIT 8

K24.

SPOKEN SPANISH

Review drill - noun-adjective agreement

,
1 It's abad pene
It's abad book.

s.naplumamla~
,
s.n ll.b r omlO~

It's a good chair.

It's a good desk.

s.nsl~~abwn~
,
s~nAskritoryobw~n~

Es una silla buena.

Es un escritorio bueno.

He has an old apartment.

, ...,.
tyen~nakasabyha~
, .
..,
tyen~napartamentobyho~

It's a good pel!.

s~nplumabwn~

Es una pluma buena.

It's a good Look.

s.n11brobwno~

Es un libro bueno.

5 It's a good table.

s.nmesabwna~

Es una mesa buena.

~nbskritoryom16~

Es un escritorio malo.

He has an old house.

..

,
It's abad desk.

Tiene una casa vieja.

Tiene un apartamento viejo.

,
4

8.34

Es un libro malo.

,
2

Es una pluma mala.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

He has a pretty tableo

tyen~Unamesabonta

Tiene una mesa bonita.

He has an old desk.

tyen~n~Skrltoryoby~ho~

T ie ne un escritorio v ie jo.

He has an expensive house.

..

.,.

.., .

...

tyen~nakasakra

Tiene una casa cara.

He has an expensive apartment.

.,
tyen~napartamentokro~

1 live in an inexpensive house.

b1b~nunakasabarta~

...,..

o.

.,

Tiene un apartamento caro.

Vivo en una casa barata.

1 live in an inexpensive apartment.

blb~npnapartamentobarto~

1 live in a comfortable house.

blb~npnakasak6mo~a~

Vivo en una casa cmoda.

1 live in a comfortable apartment.

blbgen~napartamentok6mo~o~

Vivo en un apartamento cmodo.

TREINTA Y CINCO

...,.
.... . , .

Vivo en un apartamento barato.

8.35

UNIT 8

8.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

CONVERSATION STIMULUS

NARRATIVE 1

Jose and Juan take a taxi and

go see sorne apartments ..

"
,
hose*hwanIt6manntaksI

ibn.aber ln6s.apartament6s~

The taxi costs six pesos, more

O!' less.

J ose has only a ten peso bill

and Juan sorne travelers checks.

el taksJ.lkw~staseysp~szIms.6m~ns~El taxi cuesta seis

The driver doesn't have change.

So he takes the ten, six for the

trip and foUt' fOl a tip.

pesos, ms

o menos.

,
, .. , . .
hose Itynsbl<)umb1')~ eted"~ady~~~

..

,.
ihwanlunoschekezbyah~ros~

a ver unos apartamentos"

,.

Jos y Juan toman un taxi y van

. .

"

El chofer no tiene cambioo

,.

enton~esltomelb1a~eteld~ady~~

diez y Juan unos cheques viajeros.

,.

elchoferlnotyenekmbyo~

J os tiene slo un billete de a

.. .

seyslprelbyah~likwatrodepropna~

Entonces toma el billete de a diez;

seis por el viaje y cuatro de
propina.

D/ALOG 1

.
.
kwantole<t6b6+
,

Jos, pregntele al chofer que cunto

le debe.

8.36

Jos: Cunto le debo?

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
Chofer, contstele que son
seis pesos.

sbnseysp~sS''

,.,

Jos, pregntele si tiene

cambio para diez.

Chofer, contstele que no,

que no tiene.

,
,
nolseQy6r'' not~~gb''

Chofer: No, seor, no tengo.

., .

~osolote~golch~kzbyahers''

..

Juan~

.. .

tomeloz~y~~'' kwatro~epropina''

,
Chofer, contstele que un milln
de gracias.

Jos: Tiene cambio para diez?

Jos, dlgale al chofer que tome

los diez, que cuatro de propina.

,.

tyenekambyolpara~ye~t

, ,

Juan, digale que Ud. tiene

slo cheques viajeros.

Chofer: Son seis pesos.

Onmiroyondegr~~ys''

Yo slo tengo cheques

viajeros.

Jos: Tome los diez, cuatro

de propina.

Chofer: Un milln de gracias.

NARRATWE 2

1 Jose and Juan talk with the

agent, a friend of Jose's.

. ...

h6se*hwanlablaQkonelah~nte''

...

On.aml.goc!ehos~''
The three (of them) go together
to the Del Campo building.

TREINTA Y SIETE

UD

amigo de Jos.

..
lostrezba~huntoslale~if1~yo~lkmpb''
,

Jos y Juan hablan con el agente,

,.

Los tres van juntos al edificio

Del Campo.

8.37

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

..

They go in.

They like the first apartment

they see very mucho

pasanadelnt~

Pasan ade lante

.,.

,.

elprimerapartamentolkebent

El primer apartamento que ven

lzgustamch~

les gusta muc ho.

,
5

But, gosh!, it's very expensive.

perblkaramba~ zmuykro~

Pero I caramba!, es muy caro.

It c osts three hundred a month.

kw~s ttrs (~) yen tos.alms

Cuesta trescientos al mes.

And that without including the

gas and other things.

"". "".
"
".
iesols1n1Dklw1rllgas Iotras

Yeso sin incluir el gas y otras

k6sas~

There's another one on the same

floor, but it doesn't face the
street.

,
.
yotrQln~lm1zmops~ pro
"
.
no<!a
Ialako.~
,
,.

They go see it.

ban.abr l~

cosas.

,
9

Hay otro en el mismo piso, pero

no da a la calle.

Van a verlo.

D/ALOG 2

,
Agente, dgales que pasen adelante.

pasenfc.1'lante~

,
Jos, dgale que le gusta mucho
este apartamento. Pregnte le a
Juan que qu le parece a l.

8.38

Agente: Pasen adelante.

mgustlst~apartmnt~ *ti~

Jos: Me gusta este apartamento.

ketepar~elhwn~

y a ti, qu te parece, Juan?

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

,..

Juan 9 contstele que est bastante

bonito, pero que hay que ver
cunto cuesta.

Agente 9 digale que trescientos"

sin incluir el gas y otras cosas.

stalbastantebonito~

,
,
perQlykeberl

"

kwantokwesta~

Juan~ Est bastante bonito, pero

hay que ver cunto cuesta.

,
,.,
,
tres (~yentbs~ s J.n1I)k1wJ.r Ie1g as
,
*otrask6sas''
,
,
,

Agente: Trescientos, sin incluir

el gas y otras cosas.

..

Juan 9 digale que caramba 9 que muy,

car0 9 que no le conviene. Pregn~
tele si no tiene algo ms barato.

karamb~ muykro~ nomekomby~ne~

.,

.,.

notyen~la1gomazbaratot

. ,. ,
"
.
pronoda I~1akO~''
,

Agente, contstele que en este

mismo piso tiene otr0 9 pero
que no da a la calle.

en~stem1zmolpJ.solteIJg6trb''

Juan~ Caramba, muy caro! No me

conviene. No tiene algo

ms barato?

Agente~ En este mismo piso tengo

otro, pero no da a la
calle.

Juan, pregntele si pueden verlo.

,. ,
podemozber10t

Agente, contstele que cmo no,

que con mucho gusto.

TREINTA Y NUEVE

Juan: Podemos verlo?

,.

komon6~ konmuch09st~

Agente: Cmo no, con mucho

gusto.

8.39

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

NARRA.r/VE 3

This other one costs two hundred

and twenty five.

,.

,.

~st~otrokwesta14oS(~yentoz

Este otro cuesta doscientos

. .

beynt1~I)k.1.

veinticinco.

.,..

2 The bath is to the right.

elbaQYQlestala4er'cha~

lko~1n~lnQezmuygrandelprges

,.,.

The kitchen isn't very large, but it's

conveniente

k6mo~aJ

J ose thinks that the price is

reasonable.

El bao est a la derecha.

,.

ahsetlepare~elkelpre~yol

noestaml~
But he realIy doesn't like
it.

The furniture looks old, and

there isn't much light.

Pero en realidad no le gusta.

lzmwebleslpar~nmuybyhos~

*ypokal~.1.

8.40

,.

perQenrr~alidadtnolegsta~

A Jos le parece que el precio

no est mal

La cocina no es muy grande, pero es

muy cmoda.

Los muebles parecen muy viejos ,

y hay poca luz.

CUARENTA

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

D/ALOG 3

Agente~

digale a Juan que ste

cuesta doscientos veinticincoo

,
, .
este Ikwstad"6s (~yentozl

. .

beynt1~IJko
,

Juan~

pregntele dnde est el

bao.

Agente" contstele que ah a la

derecha.

d ond es t a ~ 1b QY o

Juan: Dnde est el bao?

,
,
allalacerecha

Agente; Ahi a la derecha o

ilko~ln~

Agente, contstele que aqu est,

que no es muy grande, pero es
cmoda.
Juan, pregntele a Jos que qu
cree l.

Juan, pregntele que pOI' qu.

CUARENTA Y UNO

,.
dondest

k6m6d~

Juan: Y la cocina, dnde est?

",..,

akl~st nQezmuygrandelperQes

Agente: Aqu est. No es muy grande,

pero es cmoda.

kekre~stlhbs''

Jos, contstele que el precio no

est mal, pero que en realidad
no le gusta mucho.

veinticincoo

Juan r pregntele que la cocina ~

dnde est.

Agente: Este cuesta doscientos

. . ,
,
.., .

elpre~yolnQestaml p~r~n
rr~alid"ad"lnomegustamcho

Juan: Qu crees t, Jos?

Jos: El precio no est mal, pero

en realidad no me gusta
mucho.

Juan: Por qu?

8.41

UNIT 8

SPOKEN SPANISH

Jos 9 contstele que los muebles

parecen muy viejos, y no hay
mucha luz.

Juan 9 dgale a Jos que s 9 que en

realidad tiene razn.

lozmwebleslpar~enmuybyh6s~

Jos& Los muebles parecen muy

. .

inQaymuchal~

viejoss y no hay mucha

luz.

,
,.,..
si enrr~41idad~yenezrra~6n

Juan: S s en realidad tienes razn,

.'VARRATIVE 1-

,
1

Mr. Richard Brown Hves in

this bUIlding.

,.

~lsQy6rrichrbrawmlb1ben

El Sr. Richard Brown vive en

..

ested'1fiy

este edific io.

...

,
,
~ltrbahlnl~~mbahadamer1kna

He works in the American

Embassy.

He has an apartment on the

first floor.

But he plans to move out this

week.

propyensamu~ars~lestaseman

The apartment is small, but

comfortable and inexpensive.

elapartamentQlspekeQyof

..,
,

,.

..

Tiene un apartamento en el
primer pis o.

prkomo~Q1barto

8.42

tyen~ lnprtamentQ In.lprimerp~ O

El trabaja en la Embajada
Americana.

Pero piensa mudarse esta semana.

.
El apartamento es pequeo pero
cmodo y barato.

CUARENTA Y

nos

SPOKEN SPANISH

Mr. Brown isn't there now.

But the agent has the key.

UNIT 8

".

"

ls~QyorbrawnlnQesta1a6ra~

El Sr. Brown no est ahi ahora.

.
,..
perQ~lahenteltyenela~be~
,

Pero el agente tiene la llave.

DIALOG 4

, ,

.,

Jos 9 pregntele al agente que

en qu piso vive el seor
Richard Browno

eDkep1sob1b~lelseQy6rr1charbrwn~

Agente~

elamrikanolketrabah~enl~embahadat

'0

pregntele si el amer;cano que trabaja en la Embajadao

o,

,.

e,

Agente 9 dgale que caramba, que

tiene razn 9 que ahora recuerda.

karamba~ ty~nrra~on~

o,

Josl: SL Me dijeron que vive aqui 9

pyensalmudarsestasemna~

Agente; El amencano que trabaja

en la Embajada?

si~ medihero~lkeb1b~ak1 p~rok

En qu piso vive el
Sr Richard Brown?

'0

Jos 9 :ontstele que se Que le

dijeron que vive aqu, pero que
piensa mudarse esta semana c

Jos

"

pero que piensa mudarse

esta semana o

aora

Agente, Caramba! Tiene razn,

ahora recuerdoo

Que l esta en el prImer pisoc

elestal~n~lprimerp1so
,

y que tiene un apartamento

pequeo, pero muy cmodo y
barato.

CUARENTA Y TRES

ityen~lnApartamntopekeQyol

,.

..

per6muykomo~21barto~

Jos 9 pregntele si el Sr. Brown

est ah ahora.

El esta en el primer piso.

-".

sta~lseQyorbrawnla1orat

y t ie ne un a partame nt o
pequeo, pero muy cmodo
y baratoo
Jos: Est el Sr. Brown ah
ahora?

8.43

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 8

Agente, contstele que no, pero

que ahi tiene Ud. la llave.

no

".

p6r2ak1teijgolaroy6b6~

Agente: No, pero aqu tengo la

llave.

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White goes to Molina's apartment.

John White and Jose Molina arrive at Molina's apartment.

ENGUSH SPELLING

AID TO LISTENING

SPANISH SPELUNG

pasa~ pasar~

come in (to come in)

pasa (pasar)

your (yours)

Molina
(1)
Come in. Make yourself at home.

tu (tuyo)

..

,.

Molina
Pasa adelante. Ests en tu
casa.

pasadelnte~ estas~ntuksa~

,
syenta+

seat (to seat>

,
sentar~

syentate~

seat yourself (to sit down)

Sit down.

sienta (sentar)

,
sentarse.J.

,
syentate+

Sintate.

If'hite
Thanks.

like, as

sintate (sentarse)

White
Gracias.

,
komo+

como

Will my apartment be like this one?

, ,
,
. . ,
baserlm*apartamentolkomQestet
,

just the same (equal)

UNO

igwal~ t6+

Va a ser mi apartamento como

ste?

igwal+

igualito (igual)

9.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9
Malina

Malina

Igualito.

Just exactly"

,
todt>.t.

aH

todo

,
arreglado.t. arreglar.t.

fixed~ arranged (to fix~

arreglado (an-eglar)

to arrange)
White
This IS a11 very nicely flXed upo
yet~

sti11

I sti11 have to buy a lot of

things.
the soda

White
Esto est todo muy bien arreglado.

todava
comprar

t6db1lneestokomprarlmuchask6sas.t.
,
l-sod.t.

the whiskey
the whis ke y with s oda

lO

,
k6mprar.t.

to buy

Malina

" .

estQlstt6dlmuybyenprregld6~

el-w 1
,J

. .
s k --k on-s 6c! a''
1.

Malina
Todava necesito comprar muchas
cosas.
la soda
el whiskey
el whiskey con soda

Quieres un whiskey con soda?

,
the idea

White
Good idea.

9.2

lR-i.deAJ.

la idea

White
Buena idea.

Das

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

quien

who

,
l-;nchacha~

the girl
the picture
Who's that girl in the picture?

la foto

. ..

,
kyenft~esamuchachaldelaf6tO~

Quin es esa muchacha de la

foto?

,
ke-bon1t-!-

how pretty

,
She s ure is pretty.

la muchacha

qu bonito

kebonita~

Qu bonita!

la-nobya~

the sweetheart, the

fance

Molma
That 's my fiance. You'll have
to meet her.

~zminoby+ tyeneskekono~rla~

(she) does (to do, to make)

a~e+ a~er+

studying (to study)

est~and~

(she) is studying

sta~stu~ynd+

What does she do? ls she

studying?

estudiando (estudiar)
est estudiando

,.,.

trbhand+

hace (hacer)

st4yar+

If' Jute

ke~~ sta~stu4yandot

,
working (to wark)

Es mi novia. Tienes que

conocerla.

White

Molina

TRES

la novia

Qu hace? Est estudiando?

,
trbhar~

trabajando (trabajar)

9.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

..

,
(she) lS working

es ta-trabahnd.a.

est trabajando

l-skrtary~

la secretaria

the se cretary

Molina
No. Est trabajando como
secretariia.

Molina
No~ she's working as a secretary.

la boda

the wedding

,
to have a wedding

tener-b6<t~

tener boda

soon

pr~nt~

pronto

White
Are we going to have a wedd ing
soon?

..

,.

.,

White
Vamos a tener boda pronto?

bamo~atenerhodalprontot

ems~ ber-~

(we) have (to have)

hemos (haber)

decided (to decide)

,
,
de~i41d~ de~idir~

decidido (decidir)

(we)'ve decided

emoz-'!e~l.d<t''

hemos decidido

the date

l-fech~

la fecha

Molina
y es ~ but we haven't set the date
yet.

the man

,.

..,.

s11 prlnQemOzde~1d1dollafchl
t<tb~

Molina
S~ pero no hemos decidido la
fecha todava.

l-ombr''

el hombre

CUATRO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

Wh~te

Boy, chis is a good whiskey!

".,.

ombri kebwenQestal~ste~ski~

White
Hombre! Qu bueno est este
whiskey.

,
drinking (to drink)

bbyend~ bber~

bebiendo (beber)

(you) are drmking

estaz-beby~nd~

ests bebiendo

itu1

What are you drinking?

,
,
.
kestazbebynd~

y t qu ests bebiendo?

,
the

'cu~a

1-1<b -11.bri

lIbre'

Molina
A 'cuba libre'.

el 'cuba libre'

Molina
Un 'cuba libre'.

I)kuba1bre~

te"

to you

te

the
the o, the matter 01

lo

(3)

lo de

,
tu~

tuyo

..

John, what do you say we go see

about your apartment?

,
" .. , . . ,
,
h\'Ja"D+ ketepare~e IS1bar.\os.aber

lde1prtmeototyi

,
,
blbems~ blber~

(we) return (to return)

,
We'll come back latero

CINCO

Juan, qu te parece si vamos a

ver lo del apartamento tuyo?

volvemos (volver)

dspwe~holbms

Despus volvemos.

9,,5

UNIT 9

9.10

SPOKEN SPANISH

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) This expression, 'You are in your home', is paralleled by dozens of similar ones. Thus if you admire a man's car, he's likely to say,
'It's yours'. This is a polite formula, of course.

(2) This express ion is like many expressions referring to food combinations where in English two components are linked by and - whiskey
and soda, bacon and eggs, chicken and rice - but in Spanish they are linked by con - whiskey con soda, huevos con tocino, arroz con pollo.

The construction /lo-del-apartamnto-tyo/ is an example o a very important grammatical process in Spanish. This
will be further explained and drilled in Units 33 and 35, is called 'nominalization.' Stated in simple terms 'nominalization' means
the functioning as nouns by items which normally are not nouns. Thus
,usually a special kind o adjective, in this construction functions
as a noun and is itself modified by the phrase /del-apartamnto-tyo/.
literal translation of
is very difficult to devise in
English, but it implies 'the matter, the business, the idea previously mentioned: Thus the construction /lo-del-apartamnto-tyo/
is translated in a rounoabout way as 'about your apartment.'
(3)

process~ which

/10/

9.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

9.21

Pattern drills

9.21.1

The irregular verb /

A.

abr/ and

/10/

regular /-dO/forms: in the present perfect construction

Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

,.
~6~a IIQekom1d~

,.
,
nQepensadQlenlab1sa~

Yo ya lo he comido.

. .

1 haven't thought about the visa.

(you) have (to have)

has (haber)

,
Have you already eaten it?

9.6

No he pensado en la visa.

. .,.

~alQaskom~dot

Ya lo has comido?

SEIS

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

y ou haven't been here this week.

nQas~stad9akil~stsemna~

(you) have (to have)

No has estado aqu esta semana.

a (haber)

Have you lived on that street?

,
, .,., .
bibJ.<!Qustec! len..esakaQ)~et

Have you waited long?

~spera~omuchot

si~

,
,
,

Ha vivido usted en esa calle?

,
Ha esperado mucho?

,.. ,
prOngemOzdej16J.dolla

S, pero no hemos decidido la fecha

todava.

fechalt6etabia~

,.

We haven't looked for a house.

,.

nQemoz Ibuskac!oks~

(you) (pI.) have (to have)

han (haber)

..

Have you dec ided on the date?

SIETE

10

,
,.
.,
andeiJ.dJ.dO/lafechat
,

They haven't straightened up the

apartment.

No hemos buscado casa.

Han decidido la fecha?

. .

nQan/arregldQlelaprtmnto~

No han arreglado el apartamento.

9.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

EXTRAPOLA TION

/~o/

abr
-r

form

~r,-ir

-ido

-do
sg

1
2 fam
2-3

s
(c)

kom-ido
abl-do

pI

1
2-3

b1b--1do

mos
n

NOTES
a. The perfect construction consists of a conjugated f~m of the verb
b.

/-d O/

plus the /~o/ form of the verbo

forms in perfect constructions are uninlected (do not change their endings); in other constructions, functioning
as mooifiers, the
forros do inlect (change their endings) for number and gender.

c. A variant /

9.8

/abr/

;-d O/

y/

occurs as a distinct form not participating in the present perfect construction.

OCHO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.21.11

Suhstitution drills - person.umber suhstitution

~

~QelprenddomuchQlk~
~

prendidmuchQlk~

emoslprnddomuchQlki~

sted
,

prnd1domuchQlk1~

e('l~os

n~prnd1dmuchQlak1~

karmen.J.~o
~

NUEVE

karmen

Yo he aprendido muc ho aqu.

Carmen

Carmen y yo Ud.

_
_

Ellos

Ha aprendido mucho aqu.

Hemos aprendido mucho aqui.
Ha aprendido mucho aqu.
Han aprendido mucho aqu.

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

ntonyo/nQa~~kontra~oksa+

~o

,.
,.
karmenllntonyo
+
,
nosotroz ----------+
,
stedez
+

.,

.,

,.

,.

n~e~kontra~oks+

,
,
n2 an /eQkontradoks+
,
,

n2emOs/~Qkontradoks+

n2anl~kontradoks+

,.

~o~amb~b~d2IQ~~tambyn+

,
.,
ntonY2 / ~~o
,
sted

~mozbib~dQ/M~~tamby~n+

bib~d2/aa~1tamby~n+

2 Antonio no ha encontrado casa.

Yo

---------

Carmen y Antonio
Nosotros

----

-------

---------

Uds.

No he en contrado casa.
No han encontrado casa.
No hemos encontrado casa.
No han encontrado casa.

3 Ellos han vivido all tambin.

9.10

Antonio y yo

Ud.

Hemos vivido alH tambin.

Ha vivido alH tambin.
DIEZ

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,

karmen
,

.
bib1~QlaDy1tamby~n
,
, .

bib~~QlaDy~tamby~n

.,

~o

ntonYQ1pablQlntrbaha~op6ko

~o

,
karmen

trabha~op6ko+

ste~es

..

,
nosotros

ntrabaha~op6k6+

yo

Carmen

~trabha~op6k

.
,

~mbs'trbaha~op6k

He vivido alli tambin.

Ha vivido all tambin.

4 Antonio y Pablo han trabajado poco.

yo
Carmen

ONCE

_
_

He trabajado poco.
Ha trabajado poco.

Uds.

Nosotros

Han trabajado poco.

Hemos trabajado poco.

9011

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

nosotrosl~moskom1d~emasydo~

lw1 s a

~o

,
.,
antonyQ1pablQ

~k6m1d~emasyd6~

eO~as

ijkom1d~emasy~o

km1d~emasydb~

...

~kbm1d~emasydo~

...

...

5 Nosotros hemos comido demasiado.

Luisa

you---

Antonio y Pablo - - - - - _
Ellas _

9.12

Ha comido demasiado.
He comido demasiado.
Han comido demasiado.
Han comido demasiado.

DOCE

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH
Construction suhstitution

Problem:

prnun~ya ImuybynJ.

Answer:

TRECE

prnn~yadolmuybynJ.

Problem:

PronuncUJ muy bien.

Answer:

Ha pronunciado muy bien.

9.13

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

"
nobuskoksa.J.

trabahamozldemasy~6t

node~dens~

n~ande~~d~dQ~s.J.

kre~t6d~

kr~dot6d6~

alk11Qunab1ta~y6n~

~lkilad~nab1tay6n''

nQebuskadoksa~

... .

..,
, .

..

...

,.
sb1mos' en.elas(~ens6r~

~m(s)b1dQ

komenlasla.J.

km1dQlenlasl.J.

~m~strabahadoldemasya~6~
/

, o...

,.

9.14

,.

,.

'enelas (~) ens6r~

1 No busco casa.

No he buscado casa.

2 Trabajamos demasiaclo.

Hemos trabajado demasiado.

3 No deciden eso.

No han decidido eso.

4 Cree todo.

Ha cre ido todo.

S A lquilo una hab itac in.

He alquilado una habitacin.

6 Subimos en el ascensor.

Hemos subido en el ascensor.

7 Come en la sala.

Ha comido en la sala.
CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.21.12

UNIT 9

Response drill

[laskrtary~J

stedeslnabladot~aDkom!do~

eO}Jos
,

,.

,.,.

Imbbl.dotQantrabahdo~
,.,

ellbahado1asubd~

stedlbladotQatrabahd6

,.,..

"

(en un restorn)
(la secretaria)

QUINCE

,.,.

[n1nrrstbrah~ ]

ms.blad''

,
Sb1.d6''

dond~akoml.dQ I C''J~

n;nrrst6rn~

k6Dkyenlabla~Qusta~

knlskretary~

1 Uds. han hablado o han comido?

Hemos hablado.

2 Ellos han be bido o han trabajado?

Han bebido.

3 El ha bajado o ha subido?

Ha subido.

4 Ud. ha hablado o ha trabajado?

He trabajado.

5 Dnde ha comido ella?

En un restorn.

6 Con quin ha hablado Ud.?

Con la secretaria.

9.15

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
[karo~J

[partament6~J

[i~gls~J

[bwena~J

nalkiladQ~stedeslunakasat

'0' . ,.

a~stadomalallasopat

11

~stadQUstedlnsmfrani1skot

12
13

,.

ntrahhadQustedezlmuchot
, ,
,
hib1dQellmpnamat

(caro)
(apartamento)
(ingls)

no1 nbladQe~~gl~s
, ,
,. ,
no1 a~stadolmuybw~n~

10

n01 emoslalkiladQlnprtmentb~

nAbladQ~oslenespaQyolt

,
sJ.

,
sJ.estd6~

"
,
o
,
si~ ~mostrhhadoldemsyad~
,

S1~ S*ab1b1do~

7 Ha encontrado Ud. todo barato?

No, he enc ontrado todo muy caro.

8 Han alquilado Uds. una casa?

No, hemos alquilado un apartamento.

Han hablado ellos en espaol?

No, han hablado en ingls.

Ha estado mala la sopa?

No, ha estado muy buena.

11

Ha estado Ud. en San Francisco?

S, s he estado.

12

Han trabajado Uds. mucho?

S, hemos trabajado demasiado.

13

Ha vivido l en Panam?

Si, s ha vivido.

(buena) 10

9.16

. , .. , .
. , . ..,.

~~kontrad~stedltodobaratot

,
n~1 ;~k~ntr~d~~d~lmuykr~
, ,.,
,

DIECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.21.13

UNIT 9

TranslatioD drill

They haveD't come yet.

~~o~nQambenidltdabia~

Ellos no haD veDido todava.

We haveD't remembered aDythiDg.

, "
,
nQemoz Irrkrdad Int~

No hemos recordado nada.

Y ou all have left everythiDg

foc tomorrow.

,.

...

stedeslndehdtodolparamaQyna~

Have you beeD iD Chile?

.
, .
,.
~stadQustedlench11et

Has he lived iD Cuba?

bib1dQellijkubat

1 haveD't been in that part of

nQestadQlenesapartl4elpr~

Uds. han de jado todo para

maana.

"

Ha estado Ud. en Chile?

Ha vivido l en Cuba?

.,.,

Peru.

We 've reDted a very pretty

house.

Where has she eateD?

""

,.

~~OZ InQan1ijklw1dQls2nlakw'nta~

, " ,

She hasn't gODe up yet.

("~

11

r ve worked

, "'"
'"
,
etrabahadOlak1Ido~Qybs~
,..

DIECISIETE

Dnde ha comido ella?

10

here two years.

Hemos alquilado UDa casa muy

bODita.

''''

dond~akom1dI~}j-l-

,,,

They haven't iDcluded that iD

the biil.

.,

emo~alk11adQlnakslmuybon1t~

.,

No he estado en esa parte del

Per.

InQasub1d Itdbi-l-

Ellos DO haD includo eso en la

cuenta.
Ella no ha subido todava.

He trabajado aqu dos aos.

9.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

B.

Discussion of pattern

The verb
vowels

le-al

/abr/ lS extremely irregular. In the present tense it has no stem 9 appearing only as a set of endings with erratic theme
and the regular person ~number endings
-mOS,

/-S,

/abr/ shares with /tenr/

/tenr/ means 6have hold

differentiate;

/-dO/
/-1-/

-n/.

the range of meaning covered by the English verb 6 have s, though they are not diffic ult to
/abr/ is the equivalent of 6have' in sentences like 61 have eaten'.
9 possess'9 while

form of the verb can be constructecl by adding /-do/ (theme

(theme
plus
to /-r, -ir/ verbso The
English verbs (peeped, begged, headed). Thus the construction equivalents are these:
The

/-do/

/-dO/ )

/-dO/

/--/

/-dO/ )

plus
to /-r/
form is more or less equivalent to the

verbs, and
form of

-ed

rve finished,
There are a number of irregularly formed

Thus

/-dO/

forms which will be collected and drilled in Unit 440

In the present perfect construction, as indeed in a11 verb constructions, only the first verb is inflected ({orerson, number, tense).
is inflected, but the
form is noto (However. see Unit 10 for other constructions the
forms appear in).

/abr/

/-dO/

/-dO/

The present perfect construction in Spanish is used, although with much less frequency, in much the same way as the corresponding
construction in English.

a/

/-do/

There is a variant of the 2 - 3 sg /

which occurs frequently without an accompanying
formo This variant, /
'there is, there are 9, occurs with no Durnher agreement with the verb, as the douhle translation 'there is, there are' would suggest.

9.18

y/

DIECIOCHO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.21.2
A.

Possessives .. fuIl forms

Presentation oE pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

., .

pbrkenobemosln~m1gom1+

elgustQe7m~o+

Por qu no vemos a un amigo mo?

,
El gusto es mo.

,
om~)

nwestr6+

nuestro

... .

She's a neighbor of oms.

,
,
esunabei1nanwstra+
,

They're friends of ours.

so~am1goznwstros+

. .

6
7

This car, gentlemen. Is it yoms?

bamo~aberlldelaprtmentot~6+

Vamos a ver lo de 1 apartamento tuyo.

est~ezllarropat~a+

Esta es la ropa tuya.

,
, ,.
estozlJ.bros IsQyr1t~ sonsu~ost
,
,
,
est~awto IseQy6res.!- e(s) su~ot

These books, Miss. Are they

yours?

Son amigos nuestros.

,.

This is yom clothing.

Es una vecina nuestra.

Estos libros, seorita, son suyos?

Este auto, seores, es suyo?

,
su~o+

his

,
Mr. Smith wants a large house; his
family is coming tomorrow.

DIECINUEVE

suyo

,..,.

lseQyorsmJ.~lkyer~unakasa9rnde+
El seor Smith quiere una casa grande;
,

.,

lafamJ.lyasu~albyenelmaQyn+

la familia suya viene maana.

9.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

suyo

their(s)

.. .

We don't know the Quinteros, hut

we have a hook of theirs.

10

,
,
,.
,.
nokonoiemos IAl(s) sIJyoresk1nterot
,.
,

prtenemoslun11bros~o~

No conocemos a los seores

Quintero, pero tenemos un
lihro suyo.

EXTRAPOLA TION
Reference:

2 fam

2-3

pI

sg

m1o(s)
-a(S)

nwstro(s)
-a(s)

tyo(s)
-a(s)
Syo(s)
-a(s)
NOTES

a. Possessives are a special kind of adjective, and like other adjectives, they agree in nurnher and gender with the noun they modify.
h. There are forms for singular and plUl'al reference, hoth of which have singular and plural forms independently agreeing with the noun
modified.
c. There are different forms that can he correlated to person; the 2 - 3 forrn

9.20

/sYO/

is cornrnon to singular and plural reference.

VEINTE

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.21.21

Substitution drills - forro substitution

,
1

st~awtQezm1

_____ s~b

,
.
steawto
, . " , le(s)sq''
,
,

------nwstr

~st~awtQeznwstr

. .

,
stozmwebles

Ison~6s
;

______________sys+

~stzmwebles Isons~6s~

------.-:nwstrs+

stzmwebles!so(~nwstrs

"

1 Este auto es mo.

_ _ _ _ suyo.

Este auto es suyo.

_ _ _ _nuestro.

Este auto es nuestroc

2 Estos muebles son mos.

,

suyos,

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ nuestros ..

VEINTIUNO

Estos muebles son suyos.,

Estos muebles son nuestros.

9.21

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

stkas~ezm1~

_____s~~

---_......nw~str~
4

,.
.
stzmonedas Isonmias~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _5 ~ as

--------nwstrs~

s tkas~e(s)s~

stkas~~znwstr~

,.

stzmonedastsonsyas
,.
.

stzmbnedas'so~nwstrs~

3 Esta casa es mia.

_ _ _ _ _ suya.
_ _ _ _ _ nuestra.

Esta casa es suya.

Esta casa es nuestra.

4 Estas monedas s on mas.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _suyas.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ nuestras.

9.22

Estas monedas son suyas.

Estas monedas son nuestras.

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

~st~telezm1+

_____S~+

-------nw~str+

st~6tele(s) s~+

st~6teleznwstrb+

5 Este hotel es mo.

_ _ _ _ _ suyoo
_ _ _ _ _ nuestro.

VEINTITRES

Este hotel es suyo.

Este hote 1 es nuestro.

9023

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

'~t6b~etezm16~

,
____b i~etes_~

,.

'stmone~ezm~

~st6zbi~eteslsonm1os~

Number substitution

,.

~stAzm6ne~as'sonm!as~

~stcheke(~s~6~

.
6st6schekeslsons~~s~
,.

1 Este billete es mo.

----billetes

E8toe

billetes

80B

mios.

2 Esta moneda es ma.

-monedas-.

Estas moaedas

SOB

mlas.

3 Este cheque es suyo.

---s:heques

Estos cheques son suyos.

VEINTICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

sdif~~YQ~znwstr~
,

,,.

stzO~abeslsons~as~
, ..

-0~abe

st~abe(s) s6~~

4 Ese edl.fi:io es nuestro.

_

edificios

Esos edificios son nuestros.

5 Estas llaves son suyas.

----llave

VEINTICINCO

Esta llave es suya.

9.25

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

6st~sfotoslsoinw6strs+

,
___fo t 2;-------+

,
6stafot2leznw6stra+

,.
6sts()enieros fsonmbs+
,
______~eni~er2
+

6 Estas fotos son nuestras.

_ _ foto

Esta foto es Daeslra.

7 Estos cen'ceyos son mos.

_ _ cenicero

9.26

6st.,6ni,er2Iezm~

Este c:eaieero es mio.

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9
Item substitutioD

,
1

skase(s) s~a~
"

/'

__prtmentQ

, st~6teleznwstr~

,
__ hen~y

s~prtmentQess~6

,
.
stheny;eznwstr.l-

---kosas------~
,

st~awtezm~

_ _kas ,

stkasezmi-l-

Esa ca",a es suya,

~partamento

Ese apartamento es suyo.

2 Este hotel es nuestro,

_ _a~encia

~sta a~encia es nuestra.

3 Estos muebles son suyos.

_ _ cosas

Este auto es r.1o

_--casa _ _

VEINTISIETE

Estas cosas son suyas,

Esta casa es ma.

9,27

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

stza~abesrsonm!s~

..

__~peryod1kos

..
.
'st6sp'ryod1koslsonm6s~
,

.
.
~stoz11broslso~nw~str6s
, .
___
,

s1Q~as

'stA(s)S1~as Iso6inw6stras~

stakas~ezma~

. .

st6dif1~y~ezm6~

5 Estas llaves son miase

_--f'peridicos

6 Estos libros son nuestros.

----13illas,
_

Estos peridicos son mios.

Estas sillas son nuestras.

7 Esta casa es mia.

_edificio,

9.28

Este edificio es mio.

VEINTIOCHO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH
9.21.22

,.

Response dflll

,
,
stllbro~ ezm10SU~O~
,.

,
[suy+ ]

.,.

(s) sU~''
,
s6nsu~s~

~Zm1+

dkyen!e~esellbr''
,
,.
,

d~kyenleaesaplum~

,
Zffi1

dekye~~on~stoz11bros

sonsu~os''

'"

, .. . ,

,
[Su~+ ]

st7.mne~s SOnm1a~OSU~as~

,
[su~~J

ezmlQesellbrot

,
,
nd zml.o+

1 Este libro, es mo o suyo?

Es suyo.

2 Estas monedas, son mas o suyas?

Son suyas

.,

(suyo)

,:)

(suya)

4 De qui n es esa pluma?

Es ma.

(mos)

5 De quin son estos libros?

Son suyos.

(suyo)

6 Es mo ese libro?

No, es mo.

VEINTINUEVE

De qui n es ese libro?

Es mo.

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

[m1a~ ]

[m1s]

56n5u~aslestazmone~a5t

~su~Qes~awtot

(s) su~~e5tapluma1
,. ,
,.

".

,.

,.

,.

.
.,.
,

56nsu~oslesoz11hrost

11

5onsu~a5le5azmone~a5t

12

5onm1a5le5tazmone~a5t

,.

(mas)

e(s) su~ a~

,
5~

,
5bnm16s~

. .,.
.

,. ,
,
5onm105le5toz11bro5t

(mla)

no~

10

13

9.30

..

5i~ 5bn5u~65''

7 Es suya esta pluma?

No, es suya.

8 Son suyas estas monedas?

No, son suyas.

9 Es suyo ese auto?

S, es mo.

10 Son suyos esos libros?

S, son mos.

11 Son suyas esas monedas?

Si, son mas.

12 Son mas estas monedas?

Si, son suyas.

13 Son mos estos libros?

S, son suyos.

TREINTA

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.21.23

Translation drill

1 These books are ours.

,
,
,
es t071J.bros I50(0) nw~s tros.l,

,.

Estos libros son nuestros.

2 That old house is ours.

esakasatyeh~le7nwstr~.l-

3 This apartment is ours.

est~apartament9Ie2nwstro

..
, .

4 Whose (of whom) is this book?

ls it yours?
5 Is that pencil his?

Esa casa vieja es nuestra.

.,

Este apartamento es nuestro.

,
,
,
dekyen.es.es te lJ.br e(s) su~ot
,
,.,.
e(s) SU~Q Iese lap~~t

De quin es este libro? Es

suyo?
Es suyo ese lpiz?

.,.

6 Is this pencil mine?

,
e7m1Qlestelapl~t

7 Those books are mine.

,
.
sozllbros Isonmis

8 These books are his.

stzllbros

9 These coins are mine.

sta7m6nertas lsonmas

Es mo este lpiz?

Isons~6st

estaskosas Iso~~nwstrAs

II That pen is yours.

sapbJr.19,le(s)s!jtt

TREINTA Y UNO

Estas monedas son mas.

,.

10 These things are ours.

Estos libros son suyos.

,.

Esos libros son mos.

Estas cosas son nuestras.

Esa pluma es suya.

9.31

UNIT 9
B.

SPOKEN SPANISH
Discussion of pattern

Possessives differ in meaning and association from other adjectives in that they have reference to person and number. No other adjectives
have these features of similarity to pronouns and verb forms. Yet the possessives are definitely adjectives, because each form inflects for number
and gender to agree with the noun modified. One should not: confuse the number of reference, which involves selection of one form or anot:her
(/mo/-/nws trO/)with the number of agreement, which involves the omission or addition o an ending (/mo/ - /mos/). The first
choice is a matter of what one wishes to say; the second is a matter of adjective agreement, and given the noun there is no choice in the number
and gender of the possessive (or anl other adjective). Likewise /lbro-syo/ can mean 'his book' or 'her book' (or 'your book'). The form
/sYO/ does not change to /Suya/when it means 'her,' rather only when it modifies a feminine noun, as /ksa-sya/, which can mean
'his house' or 'her house' (or 'your house'). As in the case of any other adjective, the appropriately agreeing form is obligatory.
The possessives usually appear in their full forms in a position immediately after the noun they modify, or after the verb
variant form and a special construction in other positions are presented in Unit 11.

/sr/.

Both

The forros of /sYO/ can refer to the English equivalents 'your (sg or pl), his, her, its, their'. Unless the context clearly indicates
another reference, however, the most frequent reference is 'your (sg)'. If the contextual reference is not obvious other constructions are usually
used (presented in Unit 13}10 avoid any ambiguity. Thus the chart in A above could be modified as follows:

._sg

pI

mo

nwstro

2 fam

tyo

Reference

( syo)
2 for

syo

( syo)

(syo)

When these forms follow a noun they are similar to, and translated by, an English construction consisting of noun plus 'of' plus the long
forro of the possessive. In the equivalent Spanish construction there is no relator corresponding to 'of'. Thus 'a book of mine' is translated to
/un-lbro~no/ and English speakers have to remember not to translate the English 'of'.

9.32

TREINTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

9022

UNIT 9

Replacement drills

bserlffi*apartmentolkomQestet

A
1

, ..
_ _ _----:k as a

~t

_____s,-=-

bn_ _-_~

1'.'''.

bserlmikasalkoffiQestat
,

to

5
6

"

~---------------

_ _ _ _ _5

~t

ek ret ary a.~

J)

".

..,

.;

tI'

..

bserlssekrtaryalkornQesat

Ya a ser mi apartamento como este?

casa

(,

:2

su

3 Van

escritorio

TREINTA Y TRES

bserls~eskritoryolkornQestet
,
,
"
,
, ..
bserls~eskritoryokomQese1
,
, . . . . , . " ,.
bn1serlszb~:Lnoslkomgese1

ese1

__~_b e~ :Lno s

".

eskritoryo~

bserlskasalkoffiQesta1
"",,,,,
bnserlsskasaslkomQestat

Ya a ser mi casa como sta?

G Ya

Yan a ser sus casas como sta?

G Ya

se?

vec mos

secretaria

a ser su casa como sta?

a ser su escritorio como ste?

Va a ser su escritorio como se?

')

Yan a ser sus vecinos como se?

Ya a ser su secretaria como sa?

9.33

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

,.

".

t6d:abJ.a Ine~es1.tolk6mprar Imuchask6ss

1
2

un

-------------,
ber

----------_ -__yke

____ pw<tQ

~mucho

todab1alns1toberlnk6s.l,
,

todab1~lykberlnk6s.l-

todab1~lyk~~erlnk6sa~
o

todab1~lyk~aerluntrabho
,

" .

t6~ab1lyk~aierlmuchotrabhb

" .

tbdb1alpwdQa~erlmuchotrabh~

Todava necesito comprar muchas cosas.

una

2
3

Todava necesito ver una cosa.

hay que

Todava hay que ver una cosa.

hacer

Todava hay que hacer una cosa.

trabajo.
mucho

Todava necesito comprar una cosa.

ver

9.34

todab1alne~es1toJkmprarlnak6s~

.
trabho
--------------,
___________
.{,

.
,.

puedo

Todava hay que hacer un trabajo.

Todava hay que hacer mucho trabajo.
Todava puedo hacer mucho trabajo.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

, .
,
esttrabhandolk6msekrtary

stet1s

~---------

kn

2
;

,.
,
sttrbhandolk6mQsteds~
,.
sttrbhandolkn~steds
;

_blando

stbl~nd~lkn~st~ds

esty

st6Ybl~nd~lknPst~ds

,.

ste(t+

de,..

,
szbeil.ns+

st6yblandolknstea

est6Ybl~nd~ld~st~a
,

st6yblandoldszb~~nbs+

Est trabajando como secretaria~

1
2

ustedes.
con

Est trabajando como ustedes.

Est trabajando con ustedes.

3 _ _hablando

Est hablando con ustedes.

4 Estoy

Estoy hablando con ustedes.

5
6
7

TREINTA Y CINCO

usted.
..d
sus vecinos.

Estoy hablando con usted.

Estoy hablando de usted
Estoy hablando de sus vecinos.

9..35

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
, ,
bmos.atnerlbodaprontot

D
1

bs

,
kasa

5
6

bn

algo

,
ai er

,
,
,
bs,komprar Ikasaprontot
,
, ,
bs,kmprar Ikasaorat
,
, ,,
bn.kbmprar Ikasaorat
, ,
,
bnAkmprarlalgQaorat
, ,
,

.aorat
,

b~atenerlbodaprontot
,
,
,
b~atenerlkasaprontot

,
k6mprar

bn~ieralg~laorat

Vamos a tener boda pronto?

1 Vas

2
3

Vas a tener boda pronto?

casa_ _?

Vas a tener casa pronto?

comprar

5 Van
6

hacer

Vas a comprar casa pronto?

ahora?

Vas a comprar casa ahora?

Van a comprar casa ahora?

algo_ _ ?

Van a comprar algo ahora?

Van a hacer algo ahora?

TREINTA Y SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

41

, . .

noemoz Idesdldollafechltdba~

'"

"

________na<1"a,~.
,

.1-

____trab had"o

_ _e

5
6

much~

,
_~stdyado----_--_ _i
,
_ _ an,

.
komJ.dO

nemozld~~idJ.donadltebi
,
,
,
nQemosltrabhadonadltdb~

,
" . ,
nQeltrbhaaonaaltdba~

. ,
,
nQeltrbhadomuchltcb
,
,
,
,

,
4

, .

nQel~styadomuchltab~

nanlstdyadomuchlt~b

,
,
,
nQaDlkomld"omuchltdbi

No hemos decidido la fecha todava.

No hemos de ~ idido nada todava,
No hemos trabajado nada !:odava_
No he trahajado nada todaviav
No he trabajado mu~ho todava_
No he estudiado mucho todava,
No han eEtudiado mucho todava,
No han ~omido mucho todava~

TREINTA Y SIETF;

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH
~
~

kebwenQestl~st~1ski~

~sts

3
4

s6n

~alas

soz

kebwenaaestnl~staskss~
,

,
kebwena(s)
s6n
, ,

kemala(~s6nlstskss~
,

11bro~

5
6

kebwen~estl~stksa~
,

ks~

skiy6n~

I~stskss~

,
kemalos
lstlbr
,
,..
~

kema16{s)
s6n I~sozlbrst.
, ,
kemal~esl~ssk~y6n

Qu buena est esta casa!

Qu buenas estn estas casas!
Qu buenas son estas casas!
1Qu

malas son estas casas!

Qu malo es este libro!

Qu malos son esos libros!
Qu mala es esa seccin!

9.38
TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.23

Variation drill

,.

A stas~entuks~

Ests en tu casa.

1 Y ou~re in your bedroom.

Ests en tu dormitorio,

2 Y ou ~re in your room.

Ests en tu cuarto..

3 Y ou~re in your hotel..

Ests en tu hotel.

,.

3. "

4 Y ou're in your apartment.

s tasent~apart2mnt.!-

5 You're in your building.

sta~ent~ed1fi~y6.!-

6 You 're in your restaurant.

eS tas:enturres torn.!-

7 Y ou 're in

s tas;en t'lwt

..

".

l.

TREINTA Y NUEVE

YoW' car.

Ests en tu apartamento..

"

Ests en tu edific io"

Ests en tu restoran

.
Ests en tu auto.

9.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

,.

B tO<t~ Iestbyen.arreg1'etb.l.

Todo est bien arreglado.

,.

1 The patio looks very neat.

elpatYQlestbyenprregl<t~

2 The apartment is unoccupied.

elaprtmentQlest<tes6kupa~6''

3 The desk is unoccupied.

eleskrltorY2Ist<tes6kpa~''

4 The kitchen looks very neat.

lk~1nlstbye~rregl~''

5 The house looks very neat.

lkas~lstbyenarregld''

6 The rooms are unoccupied.

lskwartos lestndsokpa~s''

7 The houses are unoccupied.

,
,
lskasas lstndeskpa<ts''

,.

El apartamento est desocupado.

,
El escritorio est desocupado.

,.

El patio est bIen arreglado.

La cocina est bien arreglada.

La casa est bien arreglada.

Los cuartos estn desocupados.

9.40

Las casas estn desocupadas.

CUARENTA

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

. .

,.

kyere~uD~lskllkonso~at

Quieres un whisky con soda?

..

...

-"

1 Would you like a whisky and

sparkling water?

kyere~UijW1Skllkonpgwamlneralt

2 Would you hke a 'cuba libre'?

kyeres~ijkuballbret

3 Would you like a-ham sandw;ch?

,
,.
kyeres~nSaij~lChldehamonf

Quieres un sandwich de jamn?

4 Would you like a Leer?

.
" ....
,.
kyeres~naerbeia1

Quieres una cerve za?

,.,

,.,

Qui eres un whisky con agua

mineral?

..

Quieres un cuba libre?

..,

5 Would you like a howl of

vegetahle soup?

...

,."

~.

kyereslunasopa Idele~umbrs''

....

.... "

6 Would you like a pork chop?

kyeres~nachuletatde~erdot

7 Would you hke a tomato salad?

kyere~unensaladaldetomate1

CUARENTA Y UNO

....

,.

Quieres UDa s opa de legumbres?

Quieres una chuleta de cerdo?

,.,.

Quieres una ensalada de tomate?

941

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

. ..

,..

,.
,
D kyensslesamuchachaldelaf6to~

,.

1 Who is that young lady in

the consular section?

Quin es esa muchacha de la

foto?

..

....

..

kye~slesamuchachaldelasek~yo~konsulr~ Quin es esa muchacha de la

seccin consular?

,.

,..

..

kyeneslesamuchachaldel~embahda~

3 Who is that young lady

room seven?

kyen~slesamuchachaldelkwartosyt~

,.

ID

..

,..

. .

4 Who is that young lady with

the car?

kyen~s lesamuchachaldelwt~

5 Who is that young lady from

the agency?

kyen~slesaseQyor1taldelah~n~ya~

,.

,.. .,.

7 Who is that gentleman from

the hotel?

Quin es esa muchaoha ,del

..

Quin es esa muchaoha del

auto?

Quin es esa seorita de la

agencia?

..

6 Who is that ge ntleman from

the first floor?

Quin es esa muohacha de la

Embajada?

cuarto siete?

,.

9.42

. . . .

2 Who is that young lady from

the Embassy?

..

,. ,
,
,
kyeQes leseseQyorldelpr1merp!s6~

Quin es ese seor del primer

piso?

Quin es ese seor del hotel?

CUARENTA Y DOS

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.. . .

,
ezminohya tyeneskekono~rla

Es mi novia. Tienes que

conocerla.

,..

1 It's my girl friend. You'll

have to see her.

2 It's my friend. You'll have

to see her.

,
ezminohy tyeneskehrl

Es mi novia. Tienes que verla.

,
,..
ezmlam19 tyeneskebrl

Es mi amiga. Tienes que verla.

3 It's Mrs. Molina. You have

to meet her.

,
,
,
ezlseQyoralrtemb11na tyenes

...
kekono!irl

que conocerla.

..

4 It's Miss Molina. 1 have

,
ezlaseQyr1tamo11na

,.

te~gokehrla

to see her.

,
5 It 's the s e cretary 1 have

ezlsekretary

Es la seorita Molina. Tengo

que verla.

,.. .

teijgok~a~udrl

to help her.

6 It's Louise. We'll have

to wait for her.

Es la seera de Molina. Tienes

,
,...
zlw1s+ tnemoskesperrl+

Es la secretaria. Tengo que

ayudarla.

Es LUIsa. Tenemos que

esperarla.

. .

7 It's Carmen. We'll have

,
,.
eskarmn+ tenemoske(J~ebrla+

Es Carmen. Tenemos que llev.. la.

to take her.

CUARENTA Y TRES

9.43

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

kel~~~ st~st~yandot

Qu hace? Est estudiando?

1 What's she doing? Is she

working?

kel~e~

esttrabahandot

Qu hace? Est trabajando?

2 What are you doing? Are

you speaking?

,
,
kelie estblandot

Qu hace? Est hablando?

3 What are yon doing? Are

you thinking?

,
,
kele estpnsandot

4 What are yon doing? Are

you going down?

Qu hace? Est' pensando?

kelie~ ~stbahandot

Qu hace? Est bajando?

5 What are you doing? Are

you practicing?

6 What are you doing? Are

you waiting?

,
,
kelie stpraktikando1

,
kelie

Qu hace? Est practicando?

est~sperandot

Qu hace? Est esperando?

7 What are you doing? Are

you bnying something?

,
,
kelie estkomprandat

Qu hace? Est comprando?

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

9.24

Review drill - adjective position

1 1 have liule furniture.

tD9~okozmwbles

Tengo pocos muebles.

tDgo~webleskros

Tengo muebles caros.

1 have expens ive furniture.

,
2 1 have too many clothes.

tDgl~masyartarr6pa

Tengo demasiada ropa.

tijg~ropabarta~

Tengo ropa barata.

1 have cheap clothes.

3 1 have many checks.

..

tD9~uchoschkes~

Tengo muchos cheques.

tDg6~hekezbyahr6s~

Tengo cheques viajeros.

.
tD9~ucharr6p
, . . .

Tengo mucha ropa.

,.

1 have travelers checks.

4 1 have a lot of c lothes.

1 have American clothes.

tDg~ropamer~kna~

Tengo ropa americana.

,
5 1 have other furniture.
1 have cheap furniture.

tD9QJotroxmwbls~

Tengo otros muebles.

tijg~;bl~zb~rt6s~

Tengo muebles baratos.

,.

6 1 want a lot of water.

kyerolmuchgwa~

Quiero mucha agua.

kyer2Iagwam~nerl~

Quiero agua mineral.

1 want carbonated water.

CUARENTA Y CINCO

...

9.45

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

7 1 want enough clothes.

1 want expensive clothes.

,.

,.

,.

Quiero bastante ropa.

kyerorropakra~

Quiero ropa cara.

8 I'm in the same section.

I'm in the consular section.

There

1S

the English gentleman.

Estoy en la misma seccin.

~stoyJnlAskiYODkonsulr~

Estoy en la seccin consular.

Here there are Spanish girls.

1 work with the American girl.

9.46

..

Ahi est el mismo seor.

A11~st~lsQy6riijgles~

Ahi est el seor ingls.

,.

. .

ak~lgYPQka(~seQyorits~

Aqui hay pocas seoritas.

ak1IAysQyortas~spaQyolas~

Aqui hay seoritas espaolas.

11 1 work with the same young lady.

. .

a11~st~lm1zmoseQy6r~

10 Here there are few young ladies.

,.

stoylenlam1zmasekiy6n~

9 There is the sarne gentleman.

kyerolbastanterr6pa~

.
.

,...

trabaholkonlm1zmaseQyorta~

Trabajo con la misma seorita.

trabaholkonlsQyor1tamer1kn~

Trabajo con la seorita americana.

...

CUARENTA Y SEIS

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH
9.3

CONVERSATION STIMULUS

NARRAT/VE 1

"

1 Jose has heen in his neighhors'

apartment.

hosel~estadQI~n~laprtmentol

Jos ha estado en el apartamento

de sus vecinos.

2 And it's exactly the same

as his.

3 Juan wants to see it.

*e~i9w11tQalsy6~

y es igualito al suyo.

,
,.
hwaI)kyerebr16

Juan quiere verlo.

".

4 J ose sa ys that he can go

any day.

5 Juan wants to go tomorrow.

6 J ose 's going to talk to his

neighhors, then.

CUARENTA Y SIETE

"

"

Jos dice que l puede ir

cualquier da.

hwa~lkyer~1rlmaQyna

Juan quiere ir maana.

,. ,
,
hosebablarlkonszb1n6sl

Jos va a hablar con sus

nt6nes

7 And he'lllet Juan know.

hosed1~etkelpwed~1rlkwlkyerd1a

ileb1sahwn~

"

vec inos, entonces.

y le avisa a Juan.

9.47

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9
D/ALOG 1

,.

Juan, pregntele a Jos si l ha

estado en el apartamento de
sus vec inos.

~etuzbel.nost

Sl.~

,
es.igwll.tQalm1o''

Jos: Si, es igualito al mo.

,.

kwandokyerezb~r16~

Cundo quieres ver lo?

kwlkyerd1~ mQyanlsitepar~ie~

Jos, dgale que muy bien, que

Ud. habla con ellos y le avisa.

Juan: T has estado en el

ap8l7tamento de tus
vecinos?

Juan, contstele que cualquier

da, que maana, si le parece.

.. .,.
,

Jos, contstele que s, que es

igualito al suyo. Pregntele
que cundo quiere verlo.

t~a~esta~Qlenplprtmentol

,.,

Juan: Cualquier da. Maana,

si te parece.

. . .

muyby~n~ ~Qablolkn.~osI1t~ahs6~

Jos: Muy bien. Yo hablo con

ellos y te aviso.

NARRAr/VE 2

1 Juan isn't plaaning to do

anything this evening.

,. ,

hwanlnopyensaserfnad~f~statrde~

,
..
prkenobaherldondeb1behosel~nt6nes~
,."

2 Why doesn't he go see where

Jose lives, then?

9.48

Juan no piensa hacer nada esta

tarde.

.,

Por qu no va a ver dnde vive

Jos, entonoes?

CUARENTA Y OCHO

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

3 That way he can see what

his apartment lS going to
be like.

,.,

,..

"

4 He thinks it might be an
excellent idea.

AS1pWe4eberlk6m6baserls~apartAment6~

elkre~ Iks.n~ic!e~eks(~)elnte~

As puede ver cmo va a ser

su apartamento.

El cree que es una idea

excelente.

DIALOG 2

Jos, pregntele a Juan que qu

piensa hacer esta noche.

..

kepyen~a~a~erlstanochlhwn~

Jos: Qu piensas hacer. esta

noche, Juan?

Juan, contstele que nada, que

por qu.

,
nat!a~ porke1

,.

Jos, pregntele que por qu

no viene a ver dnde Udo
vive?

Juan: Nada, Por qu?

, . o,

mpArei~ l\in~icte~eks()elnte~

,
Jos, dgale que as puede ver
cmo va a ser el apartamento
sUYOo

CUARENTA Y NUEVE

,.

Jos: Por qu no vienes a ver

donde yo vivo?

,..

Juan, contstele que le parece

una idea excelente.

p6rkenobyene~aberlt!6nd~ob1b~

Juan: Me parece una idea

excelente.

, o,,

aS1pwet!ezberlkomobaserl
,

laprtmentot~~

Jos: As puedes ver cmo va a

ser el apartamento tuyo.

9.49

SPOKE-N SPANISH

UNIT 9

NARRATWE 3

1 J ose has everything very neat

10 his apartment.

. .

ens~prtmnt~~

k6sslk~kQmprr~

J os tiene todo muy hien arreglado

en su apartamento.

pr6tbdb~altyn~unmi~onde

3 He has already talked with

his neighhors.

hbsetyeneto~olmuybyenlarre91ad21

2 But he 's still got a million

things to huy.

,.,.

Pero todavla tiene un milln de

e osas que comprar.

~Ahladolkonszbe~nbs~

Ya ha hablado con sus vecinos.

.
, .
lediheroijlkbn~estreijkasal
, .. .
maQyanaporlatrde

Le dijeron que van a estar en

4 They told hlm that they're

going to he home tomocrow
afternoon.

.
,...
hwnd1elkes*lotr2apartamnt~1

casa maana por la tarde.

5 Juan says that if the other

apartment is like this one,
he 'U take it.

9.50

,.

Juan dice que si el otro aparta-

sk6moestet16tom~
,..

mento es como ste, lo toma.

CINCUENTA

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 9

DIALOG 3

"

Juan, dgale a Jos que qu

bien arreglado tiene todo.

kehyenllrr691a~6Ity~n~st6~6~

Jos, dgale que gracias, pero

que todava tiene un milln
de c osas que comprar.

,.

gra~yas~ p~rotodah1altij92

unmiO~ondek6sslk~komprr+

Juan, pregntele si no ha
hablado con sus vecinos
todava.

Jos, contstele que si, que le

dijeron que van a estar en
casa maana por la tarde.

Juan, dgale que est bien, y

que si el apartamento de
ellos es como ste, Ud. lo
toma.

CINCUENTA Y UNO

Juan: Qu bien arregladotienes

todo!

Jos: Gracias, pero todavia tengo

un milln de cosas que
comprar.

,.. . ,.

n2~bladofkontuzb~i1nosltodah1a1

Juan: No has hablado con tus

vecinos todava?

.
m~diheroijlk~bn~~str
, .
, .. .
~~kasalmQyanaporlatrd~+

,
s11

,
,
estabyn+ selpartmentol
,
,.,
deO~ost esk6m2estet lotomo+

Jos: Si, me dijeron que van a

estar en casa maana por
la tarde.

Juan: Est bien. Si el apartamento de ellos es como

ste, lo tomo.

9.51

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

NARRA.TWE 4

karmenI6z1anobya~ehos'~

2 Juan hasn't had the pleasure

of meeting her yet.

..

"..

,.

1 Carmen is J08e's girl &iend.

hwanln21~n1~2e19ustol~'
kbn6~erlaltbdab!A~

5 But Jose thinks it's gQing.to

be soon.

9.52

conocerla todavia.

ak~aylunafot6Id~a~ kebon1t6s~

4 Jose and Carmen haven't

talked about the wedding
yet.

Juan no ha tenido el gusto de

"

3 Here's a picture of her. She

s ure is pretty 1

Carmen es la novia de Jos.

,.

,.,.

hbse*karmenlnQanabla~ol

d~laboda't6~ab!a

"

Aqui hay una foto de ella. Qu

bonita esl

, ,

p6rbhbsekre~lkebaserlpr6nt6~

J os y Carmen no han hablado de

la boda todavia.

Pero Jos cree que va a ser

pronto.

CINCUENTA Y Das

UNIT 9

SPOKEN SPANISH

DIALOG 4

Jos, pregntele a Juan si l

conoce a Carmen, la novia
suya.

..

t6kono~es~karmentlanobyam1at

no~ t64ab1alnQeten1~~le190st6~

..

Jos, dgale que aqu hay una

foto de ella, y pregntele si
le gusta.

Juan, contstele que si, hombre,

que cmo no, que qu bonita.
y pregnte le que cundo es
la boda.

s116mbre~

,
k6mono1

kebont~

kwandoezlab6<1"a~
,.

CINCUENTA Y TRES

Te

Juan;

S, hombre, cmo no! Qu

bonital Cundo es la boda?

,..

Jos, contstele que todava no han t4Ab1a InQemos.ablaeto let~s~

hablado de eso, pero que Ud. cree
,
"
p~rokreo kabas er prn to~
que va a ser pronto.

Jos: Aqu hay una foto de ella.

gusta?

,.

. .

Juan: No, todava no he tenido el

gusto.

ak*aylunafotold~a~ tgustat

Jos: T conoces a Carmen, la

novia ma?

, . , .,

Juan, contstele que no, que

todava no ha tenido el
gusto.

, . ,.

~.

Jos: Todava no hemos hablado de

eso, pero creo que va a ser
pronto.

9.53

SPOKEN SPANISH

10.1

UNIT 10

BASIC SENTENCES.

Molina explains where he sends his laundry.

After having spoken with the manager of the house and having rented the furnished apartment fOl" John, the two friends return to
Molina"s apartment.

ENGLISH SPELLING

AID TO LISTENING

the end

el fin

so, then, well

en fin

ready

listo

Malina

(l)

Well, you're aH set.

,
emf1h+

t-mu4as~ mudars~

yourself (you) change, move

(to change, move)

When will you move?

"

~a~sta11stolt6~6~

yourself

. .

kwandoltem6das~

Friday

te
te mudas (mudarse)

dan (dar)

,
l-byerns+

myself (1) change. niove

(to change, move)

Malina
En fin. Ya est listo todo.

Cundo te mudas?

(they) give (to give)

UNO

SPANISH SPELLING

el viernes

me-mudo+ mdarse

me mudo (mudarse)

10.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

e1-s ab d" o~

Saturday

White
If they give me the apartment on
Friday, 1'11 move on Saturday. (2)

el sbado

...

,
.,
,
simedanle1apartamentQlelbyernest
, .
mmud:oe 1s b~~
t'>

,.

Malina

1 caQ help you with your suitcases.

..

la maleta

Malina

~otepweaQa~udarlkon1zma1ts+

Yo te puedo ayudar con las maletas.

,
lo-k+

(3)

the that, that which, what

lo que

to bother

molestar

White
1 don 't have very mucho You needn 'i
bother.

. .

no-te-molsts+

not yourself bother

(to bother)

Where do you send your laundry?

me mudo el sbado.

,
la-ma1eta+

the s uitc ase

(you) send (to send)

White
Si me dan el apartamento el viernes,

espok6'loket~go+

,
mands

mblstarse~

.
.
notemo1stes+
,

no te molestes (molestarse)

White
Es poco lo que tengo. No te molestes.

,
mndar~

. .

, .,
dondemandas Iturr6p~

mandas (mandar)

Dnde mandas tu ropa?

,
the suit

10.2

l--trah~

el traje

DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

los

them (m)

the cleaner's shop

1 a-t in t r r l. a

la tintOl'eria

mfrent

enfrente

in front

,.

Molina
1 send my s uits to the cleaner's
across the street. (4)

lstrahezllozmandQlltintrerl.al
,

kest~mfrente
the shirt

Molina
Los trajes los mando a la
tintorera que est enfrente.

la camisa

the laundry

,
l-lbanderJ.

la lavandera

the cOl'ner

la-eskl.n
,.

la esquina

And my shirts to the laundry on

the carner. (5)

,
,..
ilskm1sasJallbanderJ.a~el~eskin

y las camisas a la lavandera de

la esquina.

,
mJ.zm

-self

~o-mzm~
,

1 myself

ls

them (O

mismo
yo mismo
las

, ,
1 take them over myself.

to clean

TRES

(6)

~oml.zmolazO~bo~

Yo mi smo las llevo.

limpiar

10.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

White
Who cleans the apartment fOl' you?

.,

kyente11mpy~llaprtamento~

White
Quin te limpia el apartamento?

(s he ) comes (to come)

byene~ bn1r~

viene (venir)

a11, every

todo~

todo

Thursday

l-hwebs~

el jueves

aU the Thursdays, every

Thursday

todoz-los-hw~bs~

todos los jueves

,.

Molina
( )
A girl who comes every Thursday. 7

,.
..
unamuchachalkbyeneltodozloshwbs~
~.,

Molina
Una muchacha que viene todos
los jueves.

to her

lf you want !'U speak to her. (8)

le

,.

"

Si quieres yo le hablo.

~ol~abl~

sikyerest

White
Swell.

White

muybyn~

Muy bien.

late

tard'~

to go rnyself (lo go oneself,

to leave)

1rme~

l.rs-l.

befare

10.4

irme (irse)

"

Well, it's late. I've got to go.

tarde

bwen~ ya~strdb~ tijgk~1rm~

,
antbs+

Bueno, ya es tarde. Tengo que

irme.

antes

CUATRO

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

the swallow, the drink

,
el-trag''

el trago
Malina
Antes, no quieres otro trago?

Molina
Won't you have another drink
first? (9)

,
,
no1mucha7gr~yas
"

White
No, thanks. Tomorrow is a
work day.

..

maQyanaylketrabahr
grateful (to be grateful)
Thanks a lot for everything.

10.10

White
No, muchas gracias. Maana
hay que trabajar.

agradecido (agradecer)

agr~e~1d agrde~er

m~y~gr~d~~~d~lp6rt~d6

Muy agradecido por todo.

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) The utterance in Spanish says, of course,notthat you are ready but that 'everything' is aH ready already. But 'Ycu're aH set'
is more probably what we would say, since the implication of the English phrase 'Everything is aH ready' is that considerable packing has
been completed to bring the situation into a state of readiness. The Spanish remark is much more casual in its implication.

(2) The item

/mudrse /

mudarse also means 'to change clothes.' The context and relative time sequence are aH that reveal

whether you should consider it as referring to a change of clothes or a change of residence. Thus

/memdQenmdy~6ra/ Me

mudo en

media hora would mean '1' H change clothes in half an hour,' unless, of course, the moving van were waiting out front and the context unequiv-

ocally demanded such an interpretation.

(3)

The process of nominalization that is represented in this construction wiH be dealt with in Units 33 and 35.

(4)

The only reason for the particular intonation that appears in the last part of this sentence

/"

/ke S t a~m frn t /

/ks temfren
t~/ instead
,..

of

is to show contrast between this cleaner's store and the laundry referred to in the next utterance. The two utterances

go together, and the intonation on the first one is not natural unless they do.
(5) Note the equivalence here of English on with Spanish de. It is almost impossible to state any generalized description of the
differences involved here and elsewhere between English and Spanish prepositions.

CINCO

10.5

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10
(6) The form /mismo/ mismo may be added to any subject pronoun
number and gender with the item it follows.
(7)

Ol'

to any noun in this sense of '-seU.' It agrees in respect to

The names of three days of the weele have now appeared. It may be convenient, therefore, to list aIl seven here together:
Monday

el lunes

Friday

el viernes

Tuesday

el martes

Saturday

el sbado

Wednesday

el mirc oles

Sunday

el domingo

Thursday

el jueves

When listed in series, the article is not attached.

/la/

Sorne speakers, particularly in Madrid, might say

(9)

Perhaps a more literal and equally possible translation would be, 'Before you go, won't you have another drinle?

10.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

10.21

Pattern drilIs

10.21.1

Personal /

instead of

/le/.

(8)

a/

A. Presentation of pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

., .

10.6

pbrkenobemos'~nam1gomb~

kyroprsentarl~lalaseQyora

.
molina.l.

Por qu no vemos a un amigo mo?

Quiero presentarle a la seora Molina

SEIS

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

Are we going to meet the family?

....

,.

bamo~akonoierl~lfm11yat

(I) see (to see)

,
1 see the car, hut 1 don't see the
chauffer.

Veo el auto, pero no veo al chofer.

,
algyn~

"

alguien

bes.~lgyent

Ves a alguien?

,
nady+

no one

No, I don't see anyone

, ,.

veo (her)

beQelawtotperbnobeQ~lchofr+

anyone
Do you see anyhody?

.,.

Vamos a conocer a la familia?

no+

nadie

".

nobeQ~ncty~

No, no veo a nadie.

EXTRAPOLA TION

Nonperson noun object

Verb -

Person noun object

Verb -

ohject

lal-

object

NOTES

a. When a noun referring to a person occurs as the direct object of a verh,

it is marked (preceded) by the relater

I al .

b. A noun direct obj~ct is one which can he substituted for the third person
direct clitic pronouns previously presented.

SIETE

10.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10
10.21.11 SubstitutioD drill PersoDal subatitutioD

Problem:

,.

beolaksa~

---krmen~
Answer:

be9.akrmn~

Problem:
Veo la casa.
-_Carmen.

AD8wer:
Veo a Carmen.

10.8

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

,
1

UNIT 10

buskolaksa.J.

_ _ _seQy6rJ

... .

lelapartamntb.J.
_________hwn~
,

,.

nO~ijkontramos

------lwsa.J.

Q~ebQalw!s.J.

Busco a la seora.

No encontramos a Juan.

Llevo el auto.
_ _ _Luisa.

NUEVE

No encontramos el apartamento.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _Juan.

,.

Busco la casa.
_ _ _ _seora.

nO~ijkontramoslahwn~

O~ebgelwtb,J.

.. .

buskQalaseQy6r.J.

Llevo a Luisa.

10.9

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

... .
.
eskwl
------, . . .

,.
bskamoz

______e~~fy

busk~eled~f1~y

,.
bskamos/alasekretrya

buskalaseQy6r~

Buscamo~

...

Buscamos la escuela.

Busca a la seora.
_ _ _ _edificio.

10.10

Il~eskw61a

a la secretar.ia.

_ _ _ _ _e.scuela.
5

Busca el edificio.

DIEZ

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH
10.21.12 Response drill

,
[alaseQyora.J.]
,
lamaryO]
,
[lotel ]

[almo6 ]

,
,
b6skanlafototQalamchacha.J.

Akyemlbuska~ustdes

..

,
,
akyem Ibusk~O~
, ,
kehuskl
,
,.
.,
buskanuste4eslalchofer f

(a la seOl"a)

ONCE

. ... .

b6skalahen~yatQalasekretry

..

,
Alasekretarya
,
almchach''
,
alaseQyora
,
amaryo''
,
e16te1.
,
,
no almoo

1 Busca la agencia o a la secretaria?

A la secretaria.

Buscan la foto o a la lRucltacha?

A la muchacha.

A quin buscan Uds.?

A la seora.

(a Mario)

4 A quin busca ella?

A Mario.

(el hotel)

5 Qu busca l?

El hotel.

(al mozo)

No, al mozo.

Buscan Uds. al chofer?

10.11

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

[karmen~J

... . , .

busk~ustedlahwant

be~stedlalaseQyor1tat

10
11

..

.
.

,
,
,.
be\) s teet 131 a(s) s eQyoras t
,
,.
.,
i'\leban.ustedes lalchofer1
,
,
,.

..

..

busk~ellalo7mo~o5t

.,.

12

,.
,.
benustedes /lakasat

13

benuste6es lelote11

".

(a Carmen)

10.12

,.

..,

nd~ akarmen~

,
,
sii lo"'~ebamos~
,
,
5)',{.. lzbuski

S1~ lbemos~

S1~ lbemo5~

Busca Ud. a Juan?

No, a Carmen.

Ye Ud. a la seorita?

S, la veo.

Ye Ud. a las seoras?

S, las veo.

10

Llevan Uds. al chofer?

S, lo llevamos.

11

Busca l a los mozos?

S, los busca.

12

Yen Uds. la casa?

S, la vemos.

13

Yen Uds. el hotel?

S, lo vemos.

DOCE

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

10.21.13 Translation drill

,.

1 We see the car, but not the

chauffeur.

b~ms.lawt''perOnOilchofr''

2 1 see the house, but not the

lady.

b~61akasa''pernolaseIJy6ra''

Vemos el auto pero no al chofer.

,
Veo la casa pero no a la seora.

3 We see the building, but not

,
,
,.
bemos leled"ifJ.~yo''pernolseQy6r''

Vemos el edificio pero no al seor.

the gentleman.

They see the desk, but not

the secretary.

I'm.looking for the suitcases

and the ladies also.

We're looking for Carmen.

,
,
bnJ!leskri toryo''pr6no~lasekretrya''

bskamos.akrmen.l.

,.

nO~IJkontramos Iahwn.t.

We can't find the house.

nO~IJkontramoz Ilaksa.l.

I'm looking for the apartment.

buskQelapartamnto.l.

,.

Buscamos a Carmen.

7 We can't find John.

Busco l&s maletas ya las seoras

tambin.

..

TRECE

,.
,
,.
busko Ilazmaletast!l(s)sQyorastambyn''

Ven el escritorio pero no a la

secretaria.

No encontramos a Juan.

No encontramos la casa.

... .

Busco el apartamento.

10.13

SPOKEN SPANISH
B.

UNIT 10

Discussion of pattern

Many Spanish verbs can be followed by a noun which is not the subject of the verb, since the usual agreement of person and number between the
subject and verb is not necessary, as in/por--k-no-bmos Ila-ksa+/. Ifthe verb is not/sr/ (as in /mi-n6rnbr~ ls-hos+/
in which case the noun following the verb is identified as the same as the noun preceding), the following noun is usually described as the 'direct object
of the verbo

The direct object is often thought of as in sorne sense 'receiving' the action of the verb; thus in /bmos-Ia--ksa+ the 'house' gets see
There have been many examples of verbs followed by a direct object in previous units, such as /tyne-un-lpl~t kyre-ustd /gwam~nerl t
yo-kyro-un-sJ)YilCh Ide-ham6n+
bmos-a-br el-pery6dl.ko+
etc.
--

I,

al

When a noun functioning as tite direct object of a verb refers to specific person, it is usually marked by tite occurrence of the relater I
preceding the noun. The resulting phrase usually follows the verb, though it may precede: /por-k-no-bmos a-un-om9o-mo~/

The forms Ikyn, lgyen, nd ye/ ,though they do not necessarily refer to specific persons, are also included in this pattern. (Their
participation in the pattern is one reason they can logically be analyzed as nouns, and not pronouns as sorne analysts have maintained. AIso, since
Ikyn-kynes/ has noun-like formation o the plural, and since none of these forms have any case designation in the way that the pronouns do,
their analysis as a special kind of nouns, not occurring with articles, seems appropriate.)

The a/ which marks the person noun object may or may not appear after the verb / tenr
are possible:

The

I al

and minimal contrasts o the following types

Itngom~famly~lenchle+1

'My family is in Chile.'

/tngQamlfamly~lenchle+1

'1 sent my family to Chile.'

/tngod6~am90slak+/

'1 have two friends here.'

/tngQad6~amgoslak1

'There are two friends of mine with me.'

may be missing after other verbs when the reference is not to a specific person:

'1 need a chauffeur.'

10.14

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH
10.21.2

UNIT 10

Direct clitic pronouns

A. Presentation oE pattern

1LLUSTRAT10NS
Will you take me to the hote 1?

..

,
,
meQlebalotelt

~ebem~alotl~

Llveme al hotel.

,...,

,.
3

kyerez laharmen~lotelt

n~Q~ebal~entrot

Q~ebenosal~~ntr~

,.
Will you take us downtown?

Me lleva al hotel?

Quieres dejarme en e 1 hotel?

Nos lleva al centro?

. ..

Llvenos al centro.

Te espero.

..

~stedll~amode5pws~

ahwanllQa~damcst6aos~

komolokyr~

A Juan lo ayudamos todos.

..

Cmo lo quiere?

,
10

A usted lo llamo despus.

16syentomcho~

Lo siento mucho.

,
never
QUINCE

nUI)ka~

nunca

10.15

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

We never can see it.

11

,.
,.
nUI)ka/podemozbrl+

12

,
,
tyenes /kekn~er~a+

Nunca podemos verlo.

,
lstrahezlozmandQil
,
tintorerJ.a

Los trajes los mando a la tintorera.

H-0mJ.zm /lazO~bo+

Yo mismo las llevo.

,.

13

Tienes que conocerla.

, ,

14

EXTRAPOLATION

--sg

pI

me

nos

2 fam

te

2-3

lo
la

los
las

NOTES
a. Clitic pronouns appear only with verbs, usually immediately preceding them, sometimes immediately following them.
b. Like other pronouns, clitics inflect for person, number, and in 2 -3 person forms for gender.
c. A redundant construction /a-hwn, a-ustd, los-trhes{ restating the direct object, may be added to
the sentence to c larify or emphasize the direct c litic pronoun.

10.16

DIECISEIS

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

10.21.21 Substitution drills- Form substitution

,.

Problem:

bemoz laf 6to

Answer:

lAbemos~

.... .
, .
bskamozlo~annlYos
, . .
,

lQalk11an

lozbskamos
,
lstyene
,
lokompraJ

tyene lazO~bes~
,

4 kompr~elwto~

DIECISIETE

1 alk11an~lapartamnt

Problem:

Vemos la foto.

Answer:

La vemos.

1 Alquilan el apartamento.

Lo alquilan.

2 Buscamos los anuncios.

Los buscamos.

3 Tiene las llaves.

Las tiene.

4 Compra el auto.

Lo compra.

10.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

..

,
5

eskrl.bolozn6mbres~

ls.skrl.bo~

bemozl6r~

lbem6s~

,
8

11.mpyanla~abl.tay6nes~

10.18

..

~ebalasd'~

16be6~

,
l~eb~

5 Escribo los nombres.

Los escribo.

6 Vemos la hora.

La vemos.

7 Veo el hotel.

Lo veo.

8 Limpian las kabitac.iones.

Las limpian.

9 Lleva la soda.

La lleva.

DIECIOCHO

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH
Person- number suhstitution
~.

anosotroztnoaa~u~ahwn

..

~eO'yoz

,
am1

,
ahose

,
karmen

am1tm~~ud"ahwn~

ahosetlQa~udahwn''

,.

.
, .

Akarmentla~udahwn''

A nosotros nos ayuda Juan.

A ellos

A ellos los ayuda Juan.

A m

A ro me ayuda Juan.

A Jos

A Jos lo ayuda Juan.

A Carmen

DIECINUEVE

,.
,
ef!'yozt 16s.a~udahwn''

A Carmen la ayuda Juan.

10.19

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

am1tn6m6buskan4ye~

An6sotroz
,

,
a1w1s a~

ie1,

,.

lw1satn61abuskandy~

,.

ieltn616buskandy~

A mi no me busca nadie.
A nosotros

A ellas

A Luisa

10.20

,.
,.
~e(l~ az t n61 azbus kan 4y ~

,.

anosotroz1n6nozbuskan4y'~

~eO~az

~l

A nosotros no nos busca nadie.

A ellas no las busca nadie.
A Luisa no la busca nadie.

A l no lo busca nadie.

VEINTE

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.
3

~e0~at laCL~ebant6ny6~

ahwan

am1 t mli!) eb an t6ny6~

nsotroz1n6zQ~ebant6ny6~

~e(l~ozt lozO~ebant6ny6~

'--------,

------

,.

,.

A ella la lleva Antonio.

A Juan

Ami

A nosotros

-----'

A ellos

VEINTIUNO

~eO~oz

ahwan11~~ebant6nyb~

m1

anosotroz

A Juan lo lleva Antonio.

A mi me lleva Antonio.

__

A nosotros nos lleva Antonio.

A ellos los lleva Antonio.

10.21

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

10.21.22 Translation drill

1 The pen? 1 don't have it.

,.
,.
laplumat nolat'1J9 b''

2 The keys? 1 don't have them.

lzO:Yabest nola st lJg 6 ''

3 The hilIs? You have them.

16zbiO}Jetest

,.

,.

,
4

The coins? You have them.

La pluma? No la tengo.

Las llaves? No las tengo.

,.
Ostedlostyn~.l.

Los billetes? Ud. los tiene.

,.

lazmneetas1 stedlastyne.!.

Las monedas? Ud. las tiene.

5 The information? Here it is.

l~imfrm~yont

,
,.
larechat nolatI)go-l-

La fecha? No la tengo.

,
,.
elpas tel t nolokyr''

El pastel? No lo quiero.

The date? 1 don't have it.

7 The pie? 1 don't want it.

akl.laty~n~.!.

La informacin? Aqui la tiene.

8 The apartment? 1 haven't

rented it.

elaprtmentof nolQe Rlk11<t6''

9 The travelers checks?

1 haven't sent them.

16schkzbyaherost nolos.emandd'6.l.

,.

El apartamento? No lo he
alquilado.

,.,.
Los cheques viajeros? No los
he mandado.

10.22

VEINTIDOS

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

lasopat

,.
10 The soup? 1 haven't tried it.

nol~eprobd6

,.

(f~anuIJka Im~a~d'a~

11

She never helps me.

12

He always takes us there.

lsyemprelnozC~b~

13

The} take me downtown.

e~~oz Ime<J~eban.al~ntr6~

14

Who's looking fOl' her.

kyenlabska+

15

Who's looking fOl' me.

kyenmebska

,.

VEINTITRES

Ella nunca me ayuda.

. .

La sopa? No la he probado.

El siempre nos lleva ah.

Ellos me llevan al centro.

"Quin la busca?

Quin me busca?

10.23

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

B. Discussion of pattern
Clitie prooouos are so designated beeause this term describes their dependenee on verbs. They can appear only with (clinging to)
verbs, and then in a very close relationship: nothing ean ever oeeur between a clitie and the verb it appears with.
There.are three elasses of clitic pronouns in Spanish: direct, indireet, and reflexive. All elitics have eertain features in eommon:
they are weak-stressed (except for limited patteros in sorne dialeet areas), they are included in the intonation phrase with the verb, and they
oeeur in the same sequenee re lation with regard to the verbo
Clitics precede conjugated verbs (those with person-number endings) eX('l'pt for affirmative eommand forms which they must follow:
not Ime(!)yb~alotl~;:but 10)ybe~alotl~/; 'Take me to the hotel'. Clities can also,appear ~ith eertain noneonjugated
verb forms, the infinitives and the
forms (see Unit 13); the elitics follow these forms: /podemosber 101/
'Can we see it?'
The infinitive and
forms, however, frequently occur in verb construetions which inelude eonjugated verb forms. In these constructions the elitic may either precede the conjugated verb or follow the nonconjugated verb and apparently the option implies no distinction in
meaning: either /mekyresbrt or /kyresbr~t
'Do you want to see me?' Note, however, that a clitic cannot appear
between the conjugated and nonconjugated verb forms.

I-)do/

l-ndol

Direct elitic pronouns are substitutable in a frame with (can be replaced by) nouns funetioning as the direct object of a verbo Direct
object nouns are identifiable by the appearance of the relater / a/ before them, if the noun refers to a speeific persono Thus /bmo S
amar a.!- / 'We see Mary' can be restated, once we know the reference, as /]. abmo s.!- /'We see her'. Nonperson nouns functioninB as
a direct object can usually be identified by their position after the verbo Thus Ibmoslaks_~~/
'We see the house' can be restated
as /labmos! /'We see it'.
Occasionally a direct object noun and a direct clitic pronoun may both appear with one verbo With person nouns, this 'redundant
construction' may occasionally be used for contrast or clarity. The sentence / labmo S amar a! /
'We see Mary' may imply 'Mara,
not Carmen'. With nonperson nouns, a redundant construction is less common, but may occur if the noun object precedes the verb in a diHerent
intonation phrase separated usually by a terminal-rising juncture: /lostrhest 10smnd9 alat~ntorerat /
'The suits,
1 send to the eleaners'. The intonation phrase division between /trhes/and /105/ is essential as it is in an English sentence of the
same type. Constructions like * /lostrheslosmndo.!-/or * /losmndolostrhes!/do not occur. The last example
becomes possible by the addition of a terminal juncture after /mndo.!- / but this gives the second phrase the character of an afterthought:
/losmndo.!-lostrhes!/ '1 send them, I mean the suits.' Note, of course, that the personal / a / does not occur with nonperson
direct object nouns.

Direct clitic pronouns are inflected for person and number in aH forms and for genJer a]so in 2-3 forms. ~ote that /10
can mean
'you, him, it',
can mean 'you, her, it', and similar ly the plurals /10 s, la s If any confusion results from this multiple
reference possibility, it can be elarified by a redundant phras e. Along with the inflections for person, number, and gender, a few dialects,
notably in Central Spain (the dialect usually referred to as 'Castilian'), make an additional distinction in the 2-3 forms, a person-nonperson
distinetion:

11 al

10.24

t<

VEINTICUATRO

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

a clitic form /le/ refers to persons (you, hirn -and with sorne speakers- her) and /les/ (you aH, thern), though the forrns described above
aIso appear, and are preferred in sorne constructions. Nonperson objects are always referred to by the clitics /10, la, los, las /.
The difference between Spain and Latin Arnerica on this point is shown in the chart be low:

General Latin Arnerica

-

Castilian Spain

Reference

le-bo

( 10-bo)

10-bo

a-l

la-bo

( le-bo)

la-bo

a-'J)y a

(les-~H~o )

los-bo

a-D)yos

las-bo ( les-bo)

las-bo

a-~yas

!
j

a-ustd

sg
Person

los-bo
pI

a-ustdes

I
1

sg

I
Nonperson

lo-bo

el-lbro

la-bo

la-plma

los-bo

los-lbros

las-bo

las-plmas

pI

- ---

VEINTICINCO

10.25

UNIT 10

UNIT 10

A student might do well to notice the similarity and correlation between direct clitic pronouns and definite ariieles. Both occur
normally under weak stress, both frequently occur in a position that precedes the word that they are grammatically most elosely associated
with (articles before a noun and clitics before a verb), and three of the four forros are identical in form:

Definite
Article

m sg

sg

m pI

pI

neuter

A probable answer to
of the form of the clitic.

Direct
Clitic

lo

el
la
los
las
lo

/tynelap 1ma 1lis / s Ila tngo~,I, where

the form of the artiele is a direct key to the selection

Spelling conventions recognize the close relationship of verb and clitic when the clitic follows the verb by writing both as one word.
Although this same close relationship prevails when the elitic precedes the verh, they are written in the spelling system as two words, that
is, with space hetween the clitic and verb.

10.26

VEINTISEIS

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH
10.21.3

l-doI

forms functioning as modifiers

A. Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

J oseph: 'Pleased to meet you'.

Mary:

'Pleased to meet you'.

And you, Mary, are you married?

....

hse~ eT)kantadoeekonoirl~

....

Jos: 'Encantado de conocerla'.

mar1a~ eT)kntadaekono~r16+

Mara: 'Encantada de conocerlo'.

*ste~~

y usted, es casado?

itulmar1~ ~rskasaQa1

y t, Mara, eres casada?

O~ayunamesa Idesokpa<1~

All hay una mesa desocupada.

soloteT)goldozdesokupdS~

Slo tengo dos desocupados.

kasisyempr~lestmozmuyokupds+

Casi siempre estamos muy

ocupados.

skasado1

.., .

, .,

.
,

...

"

..

EXTRAPOLA TION

-do(s)

-idO(:-l

-a(; I

-a (s)

NOTES
a.

l-dol

forms, when functioning as modifiers, are inflected for number

and gender, like other regular fully inflected adjectives.

VEINTISIETE

10.27

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

10.21.31 Substitution drill Item substitution

,..

,
unawto

---

___un a(s) s

------,
J.Q~ a z

sseQyorleskasd6~

saseQyor~
~

. .

,.
. ..
s(s) seQyores IsOI)kasd6s~

Ah hay una mesa desocupada.

_

_ _ _unas sillas

Ah hay un auto desocupado.

Ah hay unas sillas desocupadas.

Ese seor es casado.

Esa seora
Esos seores

10.28

,
, . ...
aJo Iyn(s) s J.O~ azlaesokupd" s~

_ _ _ un auto

,....

saseQyor~leskasda~

e.s(s) sQyores

J.lynawtoldesokupdO~

. .

..

a1lyunamesaldesokupda~

Esa seora es casada.

_

Esos seores son casados.

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

.,.

l~p~rt~ment2Iestalkl1d6~
,

lakas ~

los,edifl~YOS

, .
laskamas

eldormitory~~

,.

,.

.1-

l~skamas lestanprre91ds~

eld6rmitorYQlestarreqld6~

.,.

.,.

l~sekretary~lestaQkupda~

,.

Iestan.alkl1dOS-!-

lasal~lestarre91d~~

.
. .

lakas~lestalkl1-!-

16skifl~YOS

-!-

lbzmo~os

elchfer

,.

. "..
. , .

16zmo~oslestanpkupQOs~

lchferlestaQkupd6~

3 El apartame nto est alquilado.

La casa

Los edificios

La casa est alquilada.

Los edificios estn alquilados.

4 La sala est arreglada.

Las camas

Las camas estn arregladas.

El dormitorio

El dormitorio est arreglado.

5 La secretaria est ocupada.

Los mozos
El chofer

VEINTINUEVE

Los mozos estn ocupados.

_

El chofer est ocupado.

10.29

UNIT 10

10.21.32

SPOKEN SPANISl\I

Translation drill

. ...

1 1 have a vacant apartment.

,
,
teI)99 jn.p5.rtarnento /tesokupu''

,
2 That young lady is happy here.

ssQyorJ. t /st~I)kantad/ ak''

3 The secretaries are happy here.

4 At the language school they're

very busy.

Tengo un apartamento desocupado.

Esa seorita est encantada aqu.

la(s) skrtaryas lestn~lJkantaQas Iak.1.

,.
,.
,
nl~skwela/deleI)gwaststnMuy

..

Las secretarias estn encantadas

aqu.
En la escuela de lenguas estn
muy ocupados.

okupcis.1.

5 The chauffeur is busy.

lchofer/estaQkup''

6 The house is rented.

lakas~/estalkJ.ld.1.

,.
tambyen/tI)9Qnakasa/desokupda.1.

8 She's not single; she's

married.

O~anQe(s)

9 They're married.

e(l~o(s) S oI)kas tos.1.

10.30

La casa est alquilada.

...

7 1 have a vacant house, too.

El chofer est ocupado.

soltr.1. eskasatta''

. .

Tambin tengo una casa desocupada.

Ella no es soltera. Es casada.

Ellos son casados.

TREINTA

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

10 The rooms are rented.

loskwartos lestn..alkila(los-1-

11 The apartment is quite fixed up.

elpartamentQlestmuyarregld.J.

,.

Los cuartos estn alquilados.

.
El apartamento est muy arreglado.

B. Discussion of pattern
The /-dO/ forros, when they appear in constructions other than those with / abr/,

are functioning as modifiers. In this

function they have full adjective inflections for number and gender. They can appear with nouns (normally following the noun): /n am s a
desokupda-1-/; after certain verbs, most commonly /sr/
ustd1

estmos.okupdos-1-

pariekansdo-1-/;

la-1-jor nomillalized:jkwles.elkasdo-1-

or /estr/ but also such verbs as /pareir/: /skasdQ

in the so-caBed 'absolute' construction:/enkant'dadekonOir

eldesokupdQ lest~n.elintro-1-/. Usage has established sorne /-dO/ forms

as nouns, which now have a single gender form with no gender alternation permitted: /l~entrda-1compare / unkonOidomo-1-

TREINTA Y UNO

lakomda-1- /. For contrast,

unakonOidam!a-1-/.

10.31

UNIT 10

10.22

SPOKEN SPANISH

ReplacemeDt drills

memudQelsbado~

1
2

te

,
__has

, ,
tebaslestesbdo.J.
, ,

tbaslestan6ch

.1-

n6ch~

4
5

,
tebas.els badb~

este

,
temudas.elsbado.J.

el

meboyelhw~hs.J.

Me mudo el sbado.
1 Te
2

Te mudas el sbado.

_vas

Te vas el sbado.
este

4-

Te vas este sbado.

noche.

Me

Te vas esta noche.

Me voy esta noche.

jueves.

10.32

mboyJestehw~bes
,

hwbes

mboyestan6ch~

me

el

Me voy este jueves.

Me voy el jueves.

TREINTA

y~

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

, ., .
dondemandas Iturr6pa

B
1

--------.;k6sas

_ _.....(J~ebas

komo

.
.

,
______estas__
,
5 ____de~~des_--_
,
6 kyen

. .

___ai~

.,

"

kyenpi~lestask6sas~

Dnde mandas tu ropa?

1
2
3
4

TREINTA Y TRES

,.

kyendei1d~lestask6ss

..

komode~l~eS lestask6ss~

,.
,.
komO'~1\lebas Itusk6s s~
,.
,.
,
komd;~ebas lestask6ss~

,
,
.
dondemandasltusk6ss
,
,.
dond'\lebas Itusk6sas~

cosas?
llevas

Dnde mandas tus cosas?

Cmo

Dnde llevas tus cosas?

?
estas

Cmo llevas tus cosas?

?

Cmo llevas estas cosas?

5 ____decides

Cmo decides estas cosas?

Quin

Quin decide estas cosas?

Quin hace estas cosas?

hace

10.33

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

. .

~6m1zmollazQ~b6
1

lan6bya

. .
, . .
lan6byAm~zmallazm&nda~
, .
. .
,

lan6byam1zmallaza~ba~

mnda

2
3 ns6tr~

nstrzffi1zmozllazmandmos

tambyen

.ams~

nosotros
,.

5
6

,
s ted

,
nuI)ka

Itmbyenlazmandms~

,.

nosotrosltmbyenlas~mos

,.

steQltmbyenlas~e

..

,
,
stec! 'nuI)kalas.~

Yo mismo las llevo.

1 La novia
2

La novia misma las lleva.

manda.

3 Nosotros
4

10.34

,..

,.

La novia misma las manda.

Nosotros mismos las mandamos.

tambin ___
hacemos.

Nosotros tambin las mandamos.

Nosotros tambin las hacemos.

6 Ud.

Ud. [amLin las hace.

7 _nunca

Ud. nunca las hace.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

nmchachalkhynltodozloshw~bes~

D
1
2

semnas~

--------------_ _ _ _ _ _...-.prak t!k,

. .

,.

nmchachalkbynelto~azla(~semns

,.

. .

unmchachalkeprkt!kltodazla(~semns~

. .

,
_ombre

n~mbrelkprktkltodazla(~semns

los

los~mbres Ikeprktknltodazla(~semns~

ds

-----------------_ _ _ _ _ _ _lmpyn

_mo~os-_-

-----

,.

. .
.

,.

,.

lspmbreslkeprkt!knltodozloz~s~

,.

lspmbreslkelmpynltodozlozd!s~

,
,.
lzmo~o~l!mpYnltodozlozd!s~

Una muchacha que viene todos los jueves.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ semanas.

Una muchacha que viene todas las semanas.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _practica

Una muchacha que practica todas las semanas.

__Jombre

_
_

Los

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ das.
limpian

TREINTA Y CINCO

_ _ mozos

_
_

Un hombre que practica todas las semanas.

Los hombres que practican todas las semanas.
Los hombres que practican todos los das.
Los hombres que limpian todos los das.
Los mozos que limpian todos los das.

10.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

,.

sikyerezf~ol~b16~

E
1
2

3
4

eskr!b6~

,
_________nosotroz
~
,
_teparee_-----
,
tu,

bls
----------, .
---Pwedes

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _d".~ es~

,...
,.. .

sikyerez1nsotrozleskr1bms~

,.

sitpreetnsotrozleskr1bms~

,. ,.
sitpreettuleskrbs
,.
,
sitpree1tul~bls

,.

sipwedesttul~bls~

,.
,.
sipwedesttuleds

Si quieres, yo le hablo.
1

, _ _ escribo.

Si quieres, yo le escribo.

,nosotros __

Si quieres, nosotros le escribimos.

3 _te parece,

Si te parece, nosotros le escribimos.

, t

Si te parece, t le escribes.

, _ _ hablas.

Si te parece, t le hablas.

6 _puedes,
7

10.36

,.

sikyerezt~oleskrbo

, _ _ dices.

Si puedes, t le hablas.
Si puedes, t le dices.

TREINTA Y SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

,.

,.

antz~nokyereslotrotragot

1
2

kosa1
-----------,
dspwez_t

aeS

,
es as

5
6
7

entonz

syentes

lwego

,.

.,.

antz~nokyereslotrakosat
,
,.,. ,
dspwez~n6kyereslotrakosat

,.,.,.

,.,.,.

dspweZ~n2a~eslotrakosat

dspwez~nQa~eslesaskosast

,.,.,
enton~z~nQa~es lesaskosast
,
,
,. ,.

nton~z~n6syenteslesaskosast

lwe90~nsyenteslesaskosast

,.,.,.

Antes, no quieres otro trago.?

F
1

__ ,

Despus,

Despus, no quieres otra cosa?

_ _ _, _haces

Despus, no haces otra cosa?

_ _ _,

Entonces,

Entonces, no haces esas cosas?

_ _ _, _sientes

Entonces, no sientes esas cosas?

Luego,

Luego, no sientes esas cosas?

TREINTA Y SIETE

cosa?

esafL--?

Antes, no quieres otra cosa?

Despus, no haces esas cosas?

10.37

UNIT 10
10.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

Variation drills

~mf1n'' y.~sta11stot6t~

,.

1 Well, the pie's ready.

emfin~ y.~sta11stQlelpastl~

Well, the clothes're ready.

emfin~ y.~sta11stallarr6p~

Well, the soup's ready.

emfin~ y.~st11stallasp~

Well, the pork-ehops're ready.

emfin~ ~~stn11staz Ilaschults~

Well, the drinks're ready.

Well, the hotel's already old.

emfin~ ~~stbyehQelotl~

Well, the car's already fixed.

mfin~ ~starrgladQlelwt

En fin, ya estn listas las chuletas.

En fin, ya estn listos los tragos.

En fin, ya est lista la sopa.

. . .

En fin, ya est lista la ropa.

. .

En fin, ya est listo el pastel.

. .

En fin, ya est viejo el hotel.

En fin, ya est arreglado el auto.

~oltepw~Qay.udarlknlazmletas~

Yo te puedo ayudar con las maletas.

,
1

I can help you with the salad.

~o Itepwda~etar'knlensla~~

Yo te puedo ayudar con la ensalada.

1 can help you with your dessert.

,
,
,
y.o Itepwd"Qay.et ar Ikn.elpos tr~

Yo te puedo ayudar con el postre.

1 can use 't' with you.

~otepwed"o Itratar~et..J.

,.

10.38

En fin, ya est listo todo.

,.

.,

Yo te puedo tratar de 't'.

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

.,

~otepwedQlalk11arlaks~

Yo te puedo alquilar la casa.

I can rent the house to you.

I can look for the wine for you.

I can take you to the wedding.

~otepwed"o IO~ebaralab6d'

I can give you an idea, more or

less.

~otepwedoidarun~1de~ms~m~n6s~

,.

,.

,.

..

Yo te puedo llevar a la boda.

"

Los trajes, los mando a la

tintorera.

I'U send the ashtrays to the

living-room.

I'U send the desks to the

consular section.

sekiyo~konsulr~

. .

seccin consular.

lbz11broztlozmandQ/l~eskwela

of languages.

Los libros, los mando a la

escuela de lenguas.

,.

I'll send the drinks to the room.

lstragoztlozmandQalkwrt6~

I'U send the cuha'libres' to

lskb11breztlo7mandQal

, .

TREINTA Y NUEVE

Los escritorios, los mando a la

. .

Los ceniceros, los mando a la

sala.

,
,
lsAskritoryoztlozmandQ/l
,

I'U send the books to the school

..

,.
,
los(W eni!ierozt lozmandQalasl~

the apartme nt.

Yo te puedo dar una idea, ms

o menos.

... ..

16straheztlozmand2alat1ntorer1~

Yo te puedo buscar el vino.

.,..

,.

,.

,.

~otepwedolbuskarelbln6~

,.

,.

.. .

apartam~ntb~

Los tragos, los mando al cuarto

Los cuba libres, los mando al

apartamento.

10.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

..

,
6

{'U send the newspapers to

. .

7 {'U send the shirts to the

..

.. .

labander

laundry.

....

..

.,

kyentemand~lelpery6diko

Who buys the shirts ror you?

kyentekomprallaskam1sas~

Who cashes the checks rOl' you?

Who talks to you in Spanish?

Who takes you downtown?

. . .
, .,
. .
kyentekambyalloschkes~
,
,
...
kyent~abl~lenespaQy61~
, . ,.
,

Who's waiting rOl' you there?

Who helps you?

Quin te compra las camisas?

Quin te cambia los cheques?

Quin te habla en espaol?

Quin te lleva al centro?

,.

kyentespera~

Quin te manda el peri6dico?

.,

kyen t ec:~ eb al n t r o~
,

10.40

Quin te limpia el apartamento?

1 Who sends you the newspaper.

Las camisas, las mando a la

lavandera.

O kyente11mpy~lelapartamnt6~

Los peridicos, los mando a la

Embajada.

,
laskm1saztlazmandQala
,.

.,

embahda~

the Embassy.

losp~ryo~1koztlozmandQal~

Quin te espera ah?

kyent~a~6~+

Quin te ayuda?

CUARENTA

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
E
1

Ya es tarde. Tengo que irme.

~a~strde~ t~~gbk~1rme~
It's late. I've got to study.

~a~strde~ t~gbkstdyar~

,.

It's late. I've got to change

,.

te~golkemu~arme~eksa~

I've got to move.

te~gokebolb~r~

I've got to go back.

He's got to go.

We 've got to go up.

tenemoskesub1r~

They've got to go down.

tyene~kebahr~

..

. ..

maQyanaylketrabahr~

Tienen que bajar.

Maana hay que trabajar.

..

"

You have to clean tomorrow.

maQyanaylke11mpyr~

You have to return tomorrow.

mQyanaylkebolbr~

"

You have to decide s oon.

Tenemos que subir.

..

,.

CUARENTA Y UNO

Tengo que volver.

Tiene que ir.

,.

Te ngo que mudarme de casa.

"

Ya es tarde. Tengo que cambiarme

de ropa.

,.

~a~str~e~ te~golkekambyarme

clothes.

Ya es tarde. Tengo que estudiar.

..
...

prontaylkede~1d!r~

Maana hay que limpi aro

Maana hay que volver.

Pronto hay que dec idir.

10.41

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

,..,

,
4

You'U have to bring another

one soon.

You'll have to study on Monday.

You'll have to practice on Friday.

You won't have to work on

Saturday.

prontQlayketraer6tr6~

. .
)luneslaykes tuety r+
, . , . . .
lbyerneslaykeprakt1kr+
, ..
, . ..
.

10.24

lsabaetolnQayketrabahr+

El lunes hay que estudiar.

El viernes hay que practicar.

El sbado no hay que trabajar.

Review drill - Theme class in present tense forms

.,.

,
1

He talks and eats a lote

abl~11komemchb+

He studies and lives here.

stuety11b1b~ak+

He works and lives there.

trabah~11b1b~a+

He works and eats very little.

trabah~lik6mmuyp6ko~

We study and eat here.

, .
estetyamos

We work and eat too much.

,
trabahamos likbmemozetemasyetb+

We talk and write a lote

,
ablamos/1eskrib1mozmch+
,..

Habla y come mucho.

.,.

.,

Estudia y vive aqu.

Trabaja y vive ah.

10.42

Pronto hay que traer otro.

..

lik6memo~ak1+

,.. .
, .

Trabaja y come muy poco.

Estudiamos y comemos aqu.

Trabajamos y comemos demasiado.

Hablamos y escribimos mucho.

CUARENTA Y DOS

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

8 We work aDd live here.

,
9

We go down and come up

very Hule.

10 They go down aDd come

up a loto

..

trbahamoslibib1mOs~k

Traba.jamos y vivimos aqu.

bahamos lisub1mozmuyp6ko

,.

Bajamos y subimos muy poco.

.,.

bahanl1Subenmcho

Bajan y subeD mucho.

. .

11 They work and live iD the

United States.

,.
,.
,
trabahanlib1benln16~estadoaun4os~

10.3

They talk and write very

well.

ablanl1eskr1bnmuybyn
,...

13 They study and cat very

liule.

stu~yanlik6mnmuyp6ko

12

Trabajan y viveD eD los Estados

Unidos.

Hablan y escribeD muy bieD.

Estudian y comeD muy poco.

CONVERSATION STlMULUS

NARRATWE 1

....

1 JuaD likes the apartment.

ahwantl9ustRlelapartam~nt

2 He 's gOiDg to take it.

batomr16

3 He plans to move this wee k.

pyensamudars~lstasemana

..
,

4.

But he hasD't decided what

CUARENTA y TRES

A JuaD le gusta el apartameDto.

Va a tomarlo.

..

/.

PieDsa mudarse esta semana.

day.perOn2adei1d1~O Iked1A

Pero DO ha decidido qu da.

10.43

UNIT lO
5

If the apartment is ready, he'll

move on Saturday.

s*1apartamntQestl~stotse

murt~elsbado~

Saturday is a good day.

SPOKEN SPANISH
Si el apartamento est listo, se
muda e 1 sbado.

els ab al~O" Is.mbrJend ll.l-

El sbado es un buen dia.

. ..

You don't have to work.

,
nQayketrabahr.!.

No hay que trabajar.

D1ALOG 1

..

,
Jos, pregntele a Juan que si le gusta
el apartamento.

Juan. contstele que s, que va a

tomarlo, que est muy bonito.

Jos: Te gusta el apartamento?

,
,
s11byatomar1

Jos, pregntele que cundo piensa

mudarse.

t8gust~elapartamento1

estmuybonto~

Juan: S, voy a tomarlo. Est

muy bonito.

. .

kwandopyensazmudrt~

Jos: Cundo piensas mudarte?

..

Juan, contstele que Ud. cree que

esta semana.

,. ,
kreokestasern6naJ
,.

Jos, pregntele si ha decidido qu da.

"

Juan: Creo que esta semana.

76eidlooikeolaf

Jos Has decidido qu da?

Juan, contstele que si el apartamento

est listo, se muda el sbado.
10.44

s~1~p~rtam~ntgestllstot

,
memucl Qe 1s b c't o~

Juan: Si el apartamento est listo,

me mudo el sbado.
CUARENTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

Jos, dgale que s, que el sbado

es un buen da. Que no ha y que
trabajar.

UNIT 10

si~ elsabadQles~mbwend~

. ..

,
nQayketrabahrJ.

Jos: S, el sbado es un buen

da. No hay que trabajar.

NARRAT/VE 2

It seems that Jos and Juan

are going to be neighbors,
then.

,
"
pare~elkehose*hwamlbnAsr

be~1noslent6n~es~

Jos can help Juan move his

things.

vecinos entonces.

..,

hoselpwd~a~drhwanlapasar

.
susk6ss-l.
,

What John has isn't mucho

noezmuchbI16kety~nhwn~
,..

He can move them himself.

elm17.molpv~edepasrls~

. ,..
,

But Jose's got a caro

It's easier that way.

CUARENTA Y CINCO

No es mucho lo que tiene Juan.

El mismo puede pasarlas.

proh6se'tyen~Wt6

,
6

Jos puede ayudar a Juan a pasar

sus cosas.

Parece que Jos y Juan van a ser

Pero Jos tiene auto.

ezmasfa~illas.J.

Es ms fcil as.

10.45

UNIT 10

SPOKEN SPANISH

D/ALOG 2

Jos, dgale a Juan que parece que

Uds. van a ser vecinos, entonces.

preielkebms..asr!bil.ns!ent6n~est

Jos: Parece que vamos a ser

vecinos, entonces.

Juan: As parece.

Juan, digale que as parece.

..

Jos; digale que Ud. le puede ayudar

a pasar las cosas.

,.
,
,
,.
~otepwed2a~UdarlApa5arlask6ss~

..

Juan, dgale que no se moleste. Que

Ud. mismo las puede pasar. Que no
es mucho lo que tiene.

. . ,.
".. .
nQezmucholloket~g
,

notemolstes~ ~om1zmollaspwedo

pasr~

, ,

Jos, pero Ud. tiene auto, dgale.

Dgale que es ms fcil as.

bwen

Juan: No te molestes. Yo mismo

las puedo pasar. No es
mucho lo que tengo.

pero~ote~gQlawto ezmasfa~illas1

,
Juan, digale que bueno, que muy
agradecido.

Jos: Yo te puedo ayudar a pasar

las cosas.

Jos: Pero yo tengo auto. Es ms

fcil as.

,...

muya~ra(~e~eto

Juan: Bueno, muy agradecido.

NARRAr/VE 3

Another thin~. Where can Juan

take his clothes to be washed?

,.
,.,.,
,
otrak6sA dondepwedehwanlO~ebar

,.

surropalabr

10.46

Otra cosa. Dnde puede Juan

llevar su ropa a lavar?

CUARENTA Y SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 10

There 's a laundry on the cornar

,.

and a cleaner's around the

cornero

ynalabandr1lnl~sklna1

Hay una lavanderia en la esquina

*natlntrer1alabw~1t.~

y una tintorera a la vuelta.

..

,
, ,
,
,.
perQelrnlzmO Inopwed e(J)'Jebar Isurropa

But he can't take his clothes

there himself.

This is not the United States.

~stnoez
Ilos~sta~os~n6S
,..

The girl who cleans his apartment

lmchachalklmpys~prtmentot

.. ,..

will take them, then.

Pero l mismo no puede llevar

su ropa ah.

Esto no es los Estados Unidos.

1~n~blent6nies

La muchacha que limpia su apartamento la lleva, entonces.

DIALOG 3

Juan, dgale a Jos que otra cosa.

Pregntele que dnde puede llevar
la ropa a layar.

..

lrropalabr.1.

Jos, contstele que hay una lavandera en la esquina y una tintorera

a la vuelta.

Juan, pregntele que si l mismo la

lleva.
Jos, contstele que no, hombre, que
nunca. Que aqu no estamos en
los Estados Unidos.

CUARENTA Y SIETE

..

,
,
,
,
otrak6s Ihos~ :iondepwe6cf:'yebar I

ynlbanderl~lenlsklnat*n
,.

tintorrlalabwlt.1.
,
, ,
tumlzmola1yebasf
,
, ,

, ,.
nolombr.1.nuDk.1. kInQestamosI
,
nlaestdo~nl~s.1.

Juan: Otra cosa, Jos. Dnde

puedo llevar la ropa a lavar?

Jos: Hay una lavandera en la

esquina y una tintorera a
la vuelta.
Juan: T mismo la llevas?

Jos: No, hombre, nunca. Aqu

no estamos en los Estados
Unidos.

10.47

lJ~IT

SPOKEN SPANISH

10

,
Juan, pregntele que cmo hace
l, entonces.

kom9~eS'3nt6nis~

Jos, contstele que la muchacha

que limpia su apartamento la
lleva.

10.48

Juan: Cmo haces, entonces?

lamchachalke11mpyamlapartmentb~

lC\lba

Jos: La muchacha que limpia mi

apartamento la lleva.

CUARENTA Y OCHO

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

11.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White interviews a maid.

The woman who cleans Molina's apartment comes to be interviewed by White.

ENGUSH SPELLING

,.

Maid
Good afternoon, sir.

bwenastar~s

White
Good afternoon. What can 1 do fOl' you?

bwn~stards ke~es~A

Sirvienta
Buenas tardes, seor.

IsQy6r

White
Buenas tardes, qu desea?

,
la-k

the one that

Maid
I'm the one that cleans l\'lr. Molina's
apartment.

SPANISH SPELLING

AID TO LISTENING

la que

, "
,
~osoyllAkel~mpy~!elapartmentol
,

Maid
Yo soy la que limpia el apartamento del Sr. Molina.

dlseQy6rml1.n
White
Oh, yeso Can you clean mine, too?

"

, o.,

,..,

a muybyn pwedellmpyar /lm1.otambyent

White
Ah! l'vluy bien. Puede limpiar
el mo tambin?

,
the yours

l--su~

isn't it?, didn't he?,

haven't they?, etc.

not

el suyo

UNO

no

11.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

Maid
y ours is higger, isn't it?

Srvtenta
El suyo es ms grande, no?

el de l

the (one) of him

Ifhue
(1)
No, it's the same size as his.

no~

,.

Whtte
No, es igual al de l.

s.igwall aldl~
,
l-dJ.~

the day

el da

, ,
What day can you come on?

ke~J.s fpw~bnir~

Qu das puede venir?

Matd
(2)
On Mondayso

lzluns~

Strvtenta
Los lunes.

White
No] on Mondays it's not convenient
for me.

nd~ lzl~n~zlnomek~mbyn~

Whtte
No, los lunes no me conVIene.

t he a f ternoon (3)
durmg

por la tarde

Can 't you come on Friday

afternoon?

Matd
1 thmk so.

11.2

,..,

,.

kreokesf..I.

,
. .,
nopwedebenJ.rllozbyernesporlatar~et

No puede venir los viernes

por la tarde?

S"rvtenta
Creo que s.

DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

. .

"

What do 1 have to do?

keteIJgok~a~r+

Qu tengo que hacer?

to sweep

White
Sweep the house and dust
the furmture. (4)

barrer

"
,
brrerllakastl11mpyarloamw'bles+

White
Barrer la casa y limpiar los
muebles.

,
labar~

to wash

Mop up the kitchen and

bathroom.

lavar

labarflak6~1nalelbQy6~

the sheet

,
lA-saban.(.
,

la sbana

the (pillow) case

l~-funda+

la funda

the pillow

l~--almwa<!~+

la almohada

.
.
,..
ikambyarfla(~sabanaslilasfundaz<!~almw~4a+
,

And change the sheets and

pillow cases<

cobrar

,
How much are you going to
charge me?
.
(5)
mlster

y cambiar las sbanas y las

fundas de almohada.

to charge

TRES

Lavar la cocina y el baoQ

.,.

kwantobakobrrm+

e unt o va a cobrarme?

dd'n+

don

lL3

UNIT 11

Maid

SPOKEN SPANISH

(6)

The same as for Mr. Molina.

,.
,.
lm1zmolk~aOijhos~

Sirvienta
Lo mismo que a don Jos.

,
l-fyest~

the party

la fiesta

White
And if 1 have a party Can
you help me out?

"hite
y si tengo una fiesta, puede
ayudarme?

,
the time

l-tyemp6~

with time, in time enough

k6n-tyempo~

el tiempo

Mad

Certanly, if yon let me know

ID time.

con tiempo

,.
klaro~ sim~blsalkontympo~

dirty

Whue
(7)
This place lS quite dirty.

Sirv.e TIta
Claro, si me avisa con tiempo.

SUCIO

est2tstbastantes~y~

to begin

White
Esto est bastante sucio.

empezar

..

Can you begin this week?

Mald

Yeso Then 1'11 see yon Friday.

11.4

,
,
,
.. , .
pwedempe~arlestasemanat
,

,.

si~ nton~estst~elbyerns~

Puede empezar esta semana?

Sirvienta

Si. Entonces hasta el viernes.

CUATRO

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

11.10

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) This sentence o course literally says, 'It's equal to the one of him', contextually 'It's the same as his.' This construction is drilled in
Unit 13, section 13.21.3.
(2)

Note that with days of the week no word equivalent to English 'on' occurs.

(3) This is given as a unit expression because of the occurrence of the item por in the meaning 'during' or 'in', which it regularly has
only with time-words like 'morning', 'afternoon', and so on.

/-x I

(4) Note that this answer is to the question /k t Q9 ok~ a~ r / Qu tengo 1 ue hacer?, which has the
form, the infinitive,
of hacer. Consequently, the answer merely replaces hacer with a series of verbs aIl in the same
form, much as we would do in English
in such a sequence as 'What do 1 have to do?' 'You have to eat, to wash up,' etc. But notice: the 'have to' must be present in the English answer,
though it does not need to be present in the Spanish answer.

l-xl

(5) The item don is used only before the given name, the 'first' name, not the surname. It is translatable by 'mister' except that 'mister'
is used only before surnames (though in the South one may hear servants talk about 'Mister Bill' DI' the like). It is rather formal. Doa is the
feminine equivalent of don.
(6) See (5) aboye for explanation o why Mr. Molina is used to translate don losl.
(7) Bastante occurs more often in this sense of 'rather' or 'quite' than it does in the more literal sense 'enough'.

11.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

11.21

Pattern drills

11.21.1

Possessives - shortened forms

A. Presentation pattern

1LLUSTRAT10NS

,
1

2
CINCO

new

estezm*wt
,
eZf!!!n6byai

Este es mi auto.
Es mi novia.
nuevo

11.5

UNIT 11

Hand me my new books.

pasemelm~7.11broznwbs~
,.

Pseme mis libros nuevos.

stas,en
tuks a~
,
, .

Ests en tu casa.

dondemandas~urr6pa~

Dnde mandas tu ropa?

dondestantusk6sas+

Dnde estn tus cosas?

estelbaserls~eskritory~

Este va a ser su escritorio.

b1nQusted/konsfm11yat

Vino usted con su familia?

su~ su~oi

. ,.. .
elm1zmo IQ)~eba~kamss~
,
..
,

hwan~su~~ds~

10

nwestro~

..

,
"
,
e~~os lnosonlnwestro~amgs~

11

su (suyo)
El mismo lleva sus camisas.
Juan y sus ideas!

our
They're not our friends.

"

his

J ohn and his ideas!

,.

He himself takes his shirts.

5
Where are your things?

.. .
.

SPOKEN SPANISH

nuestro
Ellos no son nuestros amigos.
su (suyo)

their

The Whites have their house

(fixed up) very pretty.

,.,.,
lzhwaytltyenenmuybon1tls

12

ks~

Los White tienen muy bonita su

casa.

EXTRAPOLA TION
Heference

m1(S)

2 fam

tU(S)

2 -3

pI

sg

[nwestro(s~

a(s ]

SU(s)
NOTES

11.6

a. AH possessives except /nw S tr,q/ occur in shortened forms when placed before nouos.
b. Gender distinctions are lost in shortened forms, though agreement in number remains.

SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

11.21.11 Suhstitution drills ~ number suhstitution

...
..
_________
".

eltyenefm1en1~rb~
,

,.

. .

"
2 yoteijgolsup16ma+

ti?

tI?.

. .

"

________~_plmas~

el tyene Im1(s) en1~r6s~

en1~rOS~

yoteij9olsusplmas~

eOOyozh1benle(~nwestrQed1f~y~

__________________

..

ed~fiys

Ro.

CJ

eOOyozb1ben le.(n)nwestro~ect~fiYs+

1 El tiene mi cemcero.
____________ ceniceros.

El tene mis ceniceros.

2 Yo tengo su pluma.
_ _ _ _ plumas.

Yo tengo sus pluIDas.

3 Ellos viven en nuestro edifcio.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _edfcioso

SIETE

Ellos viven en nuestros edIfICios.

11.7

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

. ,..

_________

eroyaskomenle~)nwestrazmsas~

,.

...;m~sa~

. ,..

. .

eroyatyenelm1zmaltas~

__________~mal~t~

eroyaskomenle~nwestrams~

..

,.

eroyatyenelm1mal'tl~

.
t~nemoslsuz11br6s
,.

_______lfbr6~

,.

tenemoslsulbr6~

,..

,.
7 eroyoz Ibanam1fy~st~
__________fystas~

,..

eroyozlbanam1sfystas~

4 Ellas comen en nuestras mesas.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ mesa.

Ellas comen en nuestra mesa.

5 Ella tiene mis maletas.

_ _ _ _ _ maleta.

Ella tiene mi maleta.

6 Tenemos sus libros.

_ _ _ _ _ libro.

Tenemos su libro.

7 Ellos van a mi "esta.

_ _ _ _ _ fIestas.

11.8

Ellos van a mis fiestas.

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

F orm substitution

. ..

estiezlamal'ta~

. ..
,
.
es t~e(s) sumalta+
,
. , ..
,

--+
+

est~ezm1mal~ta~

_ _ _ _ffi1_ _

____su.
,

est~leznwestramal'ta~

____nwes tra_~

estes~lkwrtb~

_ _--m1----~
___su

. .

. .

estezmJ.kwrtb~

-+

este(s) sukwrtb+
,.
,
estezlnwestrokwrtb+

,
_---.;nwestro-+

1 Esta es la maleta.
_ _ _ ml

_ _ _ su

_ _ _ nuestra_.

Esta es mi maleta.
Esta es su maleta.
Esta es nuestra maleta.

2 Este es el cuarto.
_ _-Jml _ _

_ _ _ su_ _
_ _ _ Duestro_o

NUEVE

Este es mi cuarto.
Este es su cuarto.
Este es nuestro cuarto.

11.9

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

. . . .

estoslsonlozbe~nbs

____~mJ.z

_____suz:-

. . .
, . . . .
esto$lsonsuzbe~!nbs~
, . .
,
. .
estoslso~nwestrozbe~!nbs~
,.

estos Isonm1zbe~!n6s~

3 Estos son los veClDOS.

_ _ _ mlS

_ _ _.sus

_ _ _ _ nuestros_

11.10

Estos son mis vecinos.

Estos son sus vecinos.
Estos son nuestros veclOOS.

DIEZ

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

11.12.12 Translation drill

. .

1 ThIS is my agency.

estiezm*ahn~ya~
,

2 This is our building.

est~leznwestrQed~f~y~

3 They are my fnends.

ea~oSISOnm1&amgos~

4 Our house lS vacant.

nwstrkas~rstadesokupda~

5 These are my

esto(s) sonm1strhes~

SUltS.

Nuestra [IDtorena est (enfrente.

o,

,.

Su casa es muy grande.

o

nu~kamandorm1strahe~a

, .

9 My car is on the cornero

10 Someone has my books.

algyenltyenem1z1brbs~

Nunca mando mIS trajes ah.

m~awtol~sta~nl~eskn~
,

Nuestra casa est desocupada.

Estos son mIS trajes.

skas~lzmuygrnd~
,

8 1 never send my suits

there.

nwstratint6rr~~lesta~mfrnt

7 Your house lS very big.

Ellos son mis amigos.

6 Our cleaner~s lS across

(the street).

Este es nuestro edific io.

ONCE

Esta es mi age nc ia.

Mi auto est en la esqulDao

Alguien tiene mis lIbros.

11.11

UNIT 11

11 Nobody lives in our house.

.,

12 Our family is here.

15 Bring me my thirteen
dollars.

11.12

Es que mi espaol no es muy

bueno.

.,..,....

syempr~ablamo~umpokolkonsuaam9s~

Nuestra familia est aqui.

,.

6skm*sp~yolln2ezmuybw'no~

14 We always speak wlth your

(girO frIends a little bit.

Nadie vive en nuestra casa.

.,

nw~strafm~ly~lestak1~

13 It's (just) that my Spanish

isn't very good.

nadyeb~b~ le6inwestraks~

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

Siempre hablamos un poco con

sus amigas.

traY9amelmistreed61ares~

Trlgame mis trece dlares.

DOCE

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

B" D IS C uss ion of pattern

Sorne adjectlves of two or more syllables in Spanish~ including the possessives /mio, tyo, syO/, are subject to shortening
when they occur 10 a posltion before the nouns they mo<hfy. This shortening involves the 10ss of the final syIlable of the adjectve. A complete
discussion o the patterns o shortening including aH adjectives affected~ how much is removed in taking the final syllable off, and what
posltlon~agreementreqUlrements control the shortening~ are presented 10 the appendlx.
The shortening of possesslves is characterzed by the loss of their final syllable whether singular ar plural and in both gender forms.
This shortening 10 chart form IS:

Full

Shartened

mo(s)
1 sg

ma(s)

m1. (s)

tyo(s)
2 fam

tya(s)

tu(s)

syo(s)
2 .. 3

1 pI

TRECE

sya(s)

su (s)

nwstro(s)
nwstra(s)

11.13

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

The fuIl forms always carry a strong stress: the shortened forms may, especially lf they appear 10 a contrastive construction, though
they are normaIly weak stressed. The construction with shortened forms appearing before the noun occurs much more frequently than the construction with fuIl forms appearing after the noun.
The range of possible meamng is the same for /su/ as for /sYO/ ,namely aH 2-3 forms. Hence / su / may be translated
'your (referrmg to one or more than one), hlS, her, its, thelr'. However, in the absence of contextual evidence to the contrary, it wlll refer only
to 2 sg, that is, meaning 'your' (referrmg to one person). Thus the chart presented aboye could be modified as follows:

Reference

sg

ffil(S)

2 fam

tu(s)

pI

nwstro(s)
-a (s)

[su (S) ]

11.14

2 for

Su (s)

[SU (s) ]

[su(s) ]

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH
11.21.2
Ao

UNIT 11

The negative particle with verbs

Presentation of pattern

lLL USTRA TIONS

,
,
lpre~yolno~staml

El prec io no est mal.

nQ~m~zldiid~d~l~fch

No hemos decidido la fecha.

prkenobyeneslestan6ch

,.

'o

,.

antez Inokyereslotrotragot

nomed1galseQyormoln

notemolsts

no stlehos

lsu~QlzmazQrande~

Antes, no quieres otro trago?

,.

..

Por que no vienes esta noche?

No me diga seor Molina.

No te molestes.

,
"

No, est lejos.

,
not

El suyo es ms grande, no?

EXTRAPOLATION

Verb

AH irmat iveNegatlve-

Inl Verb
NOTES

a. Used as a verb modifier g

QmNCE

In61 appears

lmmediately before the verb 9 or the verb along with any preposed chtics"

lL15

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

11.21.21 Substitution drill - Construction substltution

Problem ~

,
teI)9Qmbre~

Answer:

, ,
notel)gS?mbr~

,.

.
noprakt1kamlbastnte~
.

,.

prkt1kamlbastnte~

lsQyor~lablespaQy61
,

lasQyoralnQablRespa~y61~

megust~~so~

nomegust~sb''

. .

,.

Problem:
Tengo hambre.

Answer:
No tengo hambre.

11.16

Practican bastante.

No practICan bastante

La seora habla espaol.

La seora no habla espaol.

Me gusta es o.

No me gusta es o.
DIECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

'0.

lsabadQlst6yokpa~~

hwanlestmuyagra~e~1d~

,.

lsabadolnQestoyokupd

lhwebesltrabhamo~ak!~

,
"'0.
hwanlnQestalmuyagradei!db~
'0
,
0'0
elhwebezJnotrabahamo~aki~

lkahqJstl~ntrada~

lkahaln2estal~entrd

~trbhadoldmsyado~

komenlechg

DIECISIETE

,.

..,

n2etrabahadoldemasydo~
,

nokomenlechg''

4 El sbado estoy ocupadoe

El sbado no estoy ocupado.

S Juan est muy agradecIdo.

Juan no est muy agradecido.

6 El jueves trabajamos aqUl.

El jueves no trabajamos aque

7 La caja est a la entrada.

La caja no est a la entrada.

8 He trabajado demasiado.

No he trabajado demas lado.

9 Comen lechuga.

No comen lechuga e

11017

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

11.21.22 Translation drill

1 1 don't work on the first floor.

..
.,
notrabahQlen~lpr1merp1s6~

2 He hasn't been here before.

elnQa~stadQak1Ints~

.,
,

.,

karamba~ n6rrekw~rdnaaa~

4 Well, she's not comlOg.

emfin~ ~anoby~ne~

..

, ,

,.

,.,..

prposito~ norrekwerdo'sun6mbre~
,

~znQestanlmuyagrade~1~s~

8 She doesn't sweep very well.

nobarrelmuyhy~n~

"

A propsito, no recuerdo su
nombre.

Ellos no estn muy agradecidos.

No barre muy bien.

,..

no11mpyanltodalaksa~

9 They don't clean the whole

house.

B.

N <? van a mudarse de casa.

7 They're not very grateful.

"

Caramba! No recuerdo nada.

En fin, ella no viene.

noban'mdarsedeksa~

6 By the way, 1 don 't remember

your name.

El no ha estado aquLantes.

3 Gosh, 1 don't remember anything.

5 They're not gong to move.

No trabajo en el primer piso.

No limpian toda la casa.

Discussion of pattern

The particle /n6/ is unlOflectable, that is., lt does not change for erson number~ OF any other grammatical categoryo It is most
commonly used as a complete sentence followed by a terminal juncture, / / (often marked with a comma 10 the writing system) answering
a query 10 the negative, 01 followed by
after a statement, which means the speaker is asking for corroboration:

/t/

11.18

DIECIOCHO

UNIT 11

SPOK':N SPANISH

/n6 estlhosl/

/elsYQfesmsgrnde+n6t/
When /n6/ appears III an ntonation phrase with other words 1 it s usually placed directly hefore the verh. oc hefore the verh and
any precedmg cltc pronouns 'lhat accompany t, since the elit]CS hecome part of the verho
In the case of verh phrases:

The occurrence of
meaning of the sentence~

/-1-/

/n/ comes

hetween

/n6-1-

hefore the first verh. not hetween the two as ]t does in

/n6/ and the verh ls 9 0f course, of the utmost importance. because lt can totally change the

estlhos~/

N0 9 ies very far ofL

/n6~st~lhos-1-/
Both

English~

Iti s not very far ofL

/n/'s can occur in a smgle utterance" like this;

N0 9 ies not very far offo

You wIlI note that the first /n6/ translates the Englsh 6no ", but the second one" the one which lmmediately precedes the verb.
translates English "not' Examme es pec ially these utterances i whICh are of very high frequency and great utibtY:i answenng the question
6Do you have It?"
o

No, I don>'to

Yes. Ido.
The pattern of negative usage in Spanish ineludes what in English is called a 'double negative', i. e. the appearance o two negative
words in the same construction. '1 don't ha~e nothing' is critic ized as socially unacceptable in English, but / n 6-t n g o-n d a/ No tengo
nada is a normal, regular pattern in Spanish. The general paUern in Spanish is: sorne negative precedes the verb in a negative sentence. Thus:

/n6-byne-ndye/

/ndye-byne/
or
DIECINUEVE

/nnka-b6y/

/n6-by-nnka/

11.19

UNrr '11
11.22

SPOKEN SPANISI!
Replacement drills

..

,
, . ,.
,
pwede11mpyarlelm1oltambyenf

A
1
2

5
6

.poraf
, .

------------,
_ _ _ _ _ _.....

kwart~

-------

.,

..
..

.,.

.,.

..

..
..

pwedebarrerlestekwart~laorat

..

..

,
,
,
,
pwedebarrerlestekwartoldespwest

,
__________despwes t

.
.

..

,
,
.,
.,.
pwede11mpyarlm1kwartQlaoraf
,
,
.,
pwedebarrerlm1kwartQlaora1
,
,
,
.,

este

..

pwede11mpyarlelkwart~laora1

m1
------~
,
---....,;barrer

'0

_______su

o,

pwedebarrerlsukwartoldespwes1

Puede lImpIar e 1 mo tambin?

ahora?

cuarto_?

t',Puede limpiar el cuarto ahora?

Puede limpiar mi cuarto ahora?

Puede barrer mI cuarto ahora?

Puede barrer este cuarto ahora?

mI

4 - - barre r

este

6
7

11.20

pwede11mpyarJelm1~Jaora1

Puede limpiar el mo ahora?

despus?
su

Puede barrer este cuarto despus?

Puede barrer su cuarto despus?

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

lsu~Qlezmazgrnd~~not

B
1

ez

s~yo

--otro,.--------t

las

. .
, . ,.
,
lam1~lezmazbontanot
, . ,
,

lm1~ lezma(s) s~y+no1

.,

elotr~ Iezma(s) synot

. .

las.otras Isonma(s) s~ys''nof

El suyo es ms grande 9 no?

1 Los

, _?

Los suyos son ms grandes~ no?

2 _ _ _ _ _ bonitas, _?

Las suyas son ms bonitas 9 no?

3 _mas

, _?

Las mas son ms bonitas, no?

, _?

La ma es ms bonita~ no?

VEINTIUNO

, .

l(s) su~as Isonmazhon!taz''no1

,
,.
,
lzm1aslsonmazhontaz''no1

bontaz__1
m1 as

16(s) su~os Isonmazgrndz.l.no1

,

,.

los

es

sucio, _?

El mo es ms sucio 9 no?

6 __ otro

, _?

El otro es ms sucio 9 no?

7 Las

, _?

Las otras son ms sucias g no?

11021

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

. .
.
_____
"

keteIJgok~a~~r~

e
1
2
3
4
5
6

,
_ay
,
kwan t Q

.. .

"

keteIJgokekomprr~

komprr~

..

k~aykekomprr~

kwantQaykekomprr~

,
____tenemos_~

,.

. . ,. . .

__________~kambyr~
,
_ _ _ayke
~

kwantotenemoslkekambyr~

k~-

k~aykekambyr.!-

---~

..

"

kwantQaykekambyr+

el

Qu~ tengo que hacer?

comprar?

Qu tengo que comprar?

2 _ _hay

Qu hay que comprar?

3 Cunto

Cunto hay que comprar?

4 __tenemos

Cunto tenemos que comprar?

cambiar?

Cunto tenemos que camhiar?

11.22

kwantotenemoslkekomprr~

..

6 _ _hay que

Cunto hay que cambiar?

7 Qu

Qu hay que cambiar?

VEINTIOOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

.,.

kwantobakobrrme~

kwando------~

ablrme~

- - - -,-

prke

_____pyensaz
,

adonde------~

,.

porkelba~amudrt~

prkelpyensazmuarte~

".

. .

adondelpyensazmu~rt~~

Cunto va a cobrarme?

1 Cuando
2
3
4

(,

5 Por que
6

7 A dnde

VEINTITRES

kwando Ibas.amudrt~

-----,

,.

kwando Ihas.ablrm~

mudrte~

,p

_____bas

o,

kwandobablrm~

.,.

kwandohakobrrm~

Cuando va a cobrarme?

hablarme?

Cundo va a hablarme?

vas

?
mudarte?
?

C uand o vas a hab larme ?

Cuando vas a mudarte?
(, P or qu vas a mudarte?

plensas _ _?

,Por que piensas mudarte?

-?

A dnde piensas mudarte?

11.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

est2Iestbastantes~y6~

E
1
2

,
mlkasi
,
_trahes

4
5

-~

,
muy

nw6bos~

--------.--;
ss
, .

_kam1sas------~

sOstraheslestnmuynw~bbs~

sskam1saslstnmuynw~bs~

sOskam1saslestnmuys~ys~

Esto est bastante sucio.

1 Mi casa

2 _trajeo..s
3

muy

5 Sus
6 _camisas
7

Mi casa est hastante sucia.

_

11.24

.
mlkasRI~stbastantes~ya~
, .
, .
mlstraheslestmbstantes6~y6s~
, .
,
mistraheslstnmuys6iybs~
, .
,
mistraheslestnmuynw~bbs~
,

Mis trajes estn hastante sucios.

Mis trajes estn muy sucios.

nuevos.

Mis trajes estn muy nuevos..

Sus trajes estn muy ~uevos.

_

sucias.

Sus camisas estn muy nuevas.

Sus camisas estn muy sucias.

VEINTICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

0.'0

pwe~empeiarlestasemanat

F
1

pwedes
,

'o

o,

'0

.,

o,

0'0

pwede~empe~arlestasemanat

byernest

pwedeS2mpearlestebyernes1
'0
o., , , o
pwedestrabaharlestebyernes1

kyeres_-------t

kyerestrabaharlestenyernest

------------d"1ast

kyerestrabaharlestozd1ast

________unoz_t

kyerestrabaharlunozd1ast

---.....ben1r--------t

kyerezben1rlunozd1asf

2
o

trabahar

3
,

,.

, o

,.

o.,

o,

o,

,.

'0

,.

Puede empezar esta semana?

1 Puedes
2

lPuedes empezar esta semana?

viernes?

Puedes empezar este vIernes?

Puedes trabajar este VIernes?

Quieres trabajar este viernes?

trabajar
QUIeres
das?
unos _ _ 3

VEINTICINCO

o,

venIr

Quieres trabajar estos das?

"Quieres trabajar unos dlas?
(, Quieres vemr unos das?

11.25

UNIT 11

11.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

Variation drills

, ,.
,..
kedlas Ipwedebenr~

(, Qu das puede venir?

#',.

1 What days can you elean?

ked1aslpwede11mpy~r~

2 What days can you sweep?

ke~laslpwedebarr~r~

3 What days can you wash?

ked1aslpwedelabr~

"0

".

4 What days can you study?

,.

Qu das puede limpiar?

(,Qu das puede barrer?

Qu das puede lavar?

, . .

(, Qu das puede estudIar?

Qu das quiere pracL ear?

o.

kedlaS Ikyeretrabahr~

"0

7 What days do you want to

return?

kedlas Ikyereprakt1kr~

"',..

6 What days do you want to

work?

kedlaslpwedestudyr~

,'0

5 What days do you wam to

practIce?

11.26

Qu das qUiere trabajar?

kedlaslkyerebolb~r~

Qu das qUiere volver?

VEINTISEIS

UNIT 11

SPANISH SPOKEN

, .

o,

nopwedebenJ.r Ilozbyerneslporlatardet

1 Can>t you come Friday

,.

No puede venlr los viernes por

la tarde?

o,

o,

nopwedebenJ.rl16zbyerneslporlanoche1

evenings?

Can~t

Can~t

you come Monday

mornmgs?

,.

nopwedeben1rllzluneslporlamaQyanat

you go at three

lo.

..

No puede venir los VIerl'leS por

la noche?

No puede venIr los lunes por

la maana?

nopwed~~rlalastrest

No puede ir a las tres?

o~clock?

Can~t

Don~t

you'eat at six

o~clock?

you want to eat in that

restaurant?

' o o,

, . o,

Don~t

you want to speak

Spanish?

VEINTISIETE

'0.

No puede comer a las seis?

01

No quiere comer en ese restorn?

, ,
,
,.
nokyerebolberlmaQyanat
,

nokyerekomerle~serrestorant

..

6 Don't you want to come back

tomorrow?

nopwedekomer Ia1a(s) seyst

. .

No quiere volver maana?

nokyer~ab1arlespaQyolt

No quiere hablar espaol?

11027

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

...

.,

..

tyenelkebarrerlakasRt111mpyarlozmwbles~

..

,.

1 You have to sweep the kitchen

Tiene que barrer la casa y limpiar

los muebles.

..,. .

tyenelkebarrerlakoi1nat+elbQYo~

and the batmoom.

..

,.

2 Y ou have to change the sheets

and the pIllow cases.

11asf6nds~
,

3 Y ou have to clean the

~ntrance

. ,..

tyenelkekambyarla(~sabanast

"

".

to

wat fOl" J ose and

Tengo que estudIar y trabajar.

te~golkesperrahosel*akrmn~

Carmen.

6 We have to see Jose and

Mr. Molma.

t1ntorer1~~

11.28

Tenemos que ver a Jos y al

seo r MolIna.

tyeneijlkArnAndarl16strahe~ala

Tengo que esparar a Jos y a

Carmen.

" .

tenemOS Ikeb~rahosel*a15Qyormolna+

7 They have lO send the SUlls

to the e leaner 9 s.

TIene que limpiar la entrada y

e 1 patio.

t~gokest~yarI1trabahr~

5 1 have

Tiene que cambiar las sbanas y

las fundas.

tyenelke11mpyarlRentra~af*elptyb~

and the patio.

4 1 have to study and to wOlk.

Tiene que baI'l'er la cocina y el

bao.

TIenen que mandar los trajes a la

tintorena.

VEINTIOCHO

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

,
,
.,
D si teIJg2unafysta''pwe4~ayud'armet

..

,
1 lE 1 change the sheets,
can you help me?

.,

..

...

,.

SI barro la casa, puede ayudarme?

silaholako~fna~pwed'~ayu4armet

Si lavo la cocina, puede

ayudarme?

yu help me?
,

4 lE 1 have something to do,

o.

".

.,

site~92algok~a~r~pwe4~ayu4armef

can you help me?

5 lE you want a house,

can

..
,

.., .

sine,es1tRunamuchch~pwe4~ab1Sarme1

7 HIgo downtowD, can yoo

wait fOl me?

...

,.

.,

SI tengo algo que hacer, puede

ayudarme?

, . .,

si4eseRUnaksa~pwe~~ab1sarmet

you let me know?

6 If you need a maid, caD

you let me know?

Si cambio las sbanas, puede

ayudarme?

, . .,

sibarrolaks~pwe4~ayudarmet

3 lf 1 wash the kltcheD il caD

sikambyola(~sbnas~pwe4~ayu4armet

2 lE 1 sweep the house, caD

you help me?

Si tengo una fIesta, puede

ayudarme?

siboyal~6ntr6~pwed'esperarmet

Si desea UDa casa, puede

avisarme?

SI neLesta una muchacha, puede

aVisarme?

Si voy al centro, paede

esperarme?

11.29

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

. .

klar~simeab~sakontymp~
,..

Claro, si me avisa con tiempo.

1 Sure 9 If you let me know

tomorrow.

Claro, si me avisa maana.

klar6~sim~ab1salastr~s+

3 Sure t if you let me know at

klaro~sim~ab1SamaQyna~

2 Sure ~ If you let me know at

three o'clock.

Claro, si me avisa a las tres.

klaro~sim~ab1s~

seven flfteen.
,

4 Sure t if

YOti

walt fcr me.

"

klarsmbuska..!-

6 Sure, if you take me.

klaro~sim~eba~

11.30

Claro 9 si me espera.

5 Sure t if you look for me.

'7 Sure, if you speak tu me in

Spamsh.

Claro, si me avisa a las siete

y quince.

t'

klarb~sim~sper~

t'

Iala(s} syet~1kn!je+

Claro, si me busca.

"

Claro, si me lleva.
o

klar~sim~abl~e~espaQy61

Claro, SI me habla en espaol.

TREINTA

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

enton~est astRelby~rnes''

Entonces, hasta el viernes.

1 We11 1'11 be seeing you

Monday.
j

We11~

1'11 be seelDg you

Saturday.

enton~estastamastrde~

TREINTA Y UNO

Entonces, hasta despus.

7 We11, 1'11 see you latero

Entonces, hasta maana.

..

nton~es1ast~otroc!1~

Entonces, hasta el jueves.

6 We11 e11 see you sorne

other day.
j

Entonces, hasta el sbado.

enton~est astac!espw~s~

Entonces, hasta el lunes.

enton~estastamaQyn~

5 We11, 1'11 see you

afterwards.

nton~estast~elhw~bes~

,
4 We11, 1'11 be seeing you
tomorrow.

&nton~estast~elsbadb~

3 We11, 1'11 be seeing you

Thursday.

&nton~estast~e(Ulns''

Entonces, hasta otro dla.

,
Entonces, hasta ms tarde.

11.31

UNIT 11

11.24

SPOKEN SPANISH

Review drill Unernphatic 'sorne, any' frorn English

1 Give me sorne soup.

,
demes6pa.t.

2 Give me sorne salad.

,.
demensald"a+

3 Give me sorne water.

dem~9wa+

4 Give me sorne wine.

demeb!n6.t.

5 Glve me sorne pie.

demepast~l+

6 GlVe me sorne dessert.

demep6strl!+

7 Give me sorne beer.

demeerb+

8 Do you have any tomatoes?

,
,
tyenetomatesf

Drne sopa.

Drne ensalada.

,
,

Drne agua.

Drne vino.

..

Drne pastel.

Drne postre.

Dme cerveza.

.. .

11.32

Tiene tornates?

TREINTA Y DOS

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

9 Do you have any vegetables?

.,

tyenelegumbrest
'o

Tiene legumbres?

0'0

t?

10 Do you have any pork chops?

tyenechuletazldeerdot

Tiene chuletas de cerdo?

11 Do you have any beer?

,
"O
tyeneierbe~at

Tiene cerveza?

12 Do you have any soup?

,
,
tyenes,opat

13 Do you have any coffee?

tyenekafet

. .

11.3

Tiene sopa?

Tiene caf?

CONVERSATION STIMULUS
NARRATWE 1

,.

1 The girl who cleans Molinajs

apartment 1s excellent.

lamchachalk11mpy~lelaprtam~nt6

,
,
dmoll.nR Is.ks(~ elente~
,

2 And she charges very Hule"

ten pesos a day.

TREINTA Y TRES

"..

ft

ik6bramuyp6k6~ dyepesos~lda~

3 That js a dollar and a quuter p

mc:re or less.

La muchacha que limpia el aparta

mento de Molina es excelente.

eS2Ie~undolarbeynt11~k6Im~6m6nos~

y cobra muy pocO p dez pesos al

da.

Eso es un dlar veinticinco, ms

o menos.

11:33

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

,.

4 Mr o Malina is going to talk

with her.

61s6Qy6rm11nalbablarkon~a~

El Sr.. Molina va a hab lar con e llao

,.

5 Hells going to talk with her to

see if she wants to clean
Mr.. Whitells apartment also..

bblrkOnsOOyatprberlsiky~re
,

11mpyarlelp~rtmento~elseQyor

Va a hablar con ella para ver si

quiere limpiar el apartamento
del Sr. White tambin.

hwytltmbyn+
"

6 Hellll talk with her tomorrow.

mQyanablako~+

Maana habla con ellao

DIALOG 1
"

Juan p pregntele a Jos que qu

tal es la muchacha que le
limpia su apartamento.

o.

contstele que es excelente.

y que cobra muy poco. diez
pesos al dao

es.eks(~ lente-l.

, (/l..

11034

.,

Juan: Qu tal es la muchacha que te

limpia tu apartamento, Jos?

'"

ik6brmuyp6k6+

dye~peso~ldfa+

Jos: Es excelenteo Y cobra muy

poco, diez pesos al dao

kwant2eaesQlend61r6s+

Jos ll dgale que uno veinticinco \1

ms o menos.

apartam~ntlhos~

Juan, pregntel~ que cunto es eso

en dlares.

t?

Jos~

t?

ketallezlamuchachalk6te11mpyaty

Juan: Cu'nto es eso en deSlares?

.. .

unobeynt1~~k6Im~6mn6s+

Jos: Uno veintICinco, ms o

menos.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANlSH

Juan~

pregntele que por qu

no habla con ella.

porkenQablslk6~~a~

Juan: Por qu no hablas con ella?

.,

Jos, pregntele que para qu.

parake~

Jos: Para qu?

Juan~

parher'slkyr~limpyrlm16Itamby~n~

Jos~

muyby~nt maQyanablokonAroyR'ent6n~s

dgale que para ver si

quiere limpiar el suyo
tambino

contstele que muy bieno

Que maana habla con ella,
entonceso

,.

Juan: Para ver si quiere limpiar

el mo tambin.

..

Jos: Muy bien~ maana hablo

con ella, entonces.

NARRATWE 2

1 The girl comes to see Mro

White in the afternoono

TREINTA Y CINCO

. .

enlatrc!e~
,

~AlseQyormo11na~

La muchacha viene a ver al Sro

White en la tarde.

~~Rlezlke11mpYRlelpartmentol

,
3 She goes over there on
Thursdays.

. .

lamuchacha'byn~aberlalseQyorhwaytl

2 She ~ s the one who cleans

Mro Molina's apartment.

Ella es la que limpia el apartamento

del Sro Molina.

bl.loshw~bes+

Va ah los jueveso

11.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

.".

,.

4 She can?!; come here on

Saturdays? only on
Fridays.

~anopwedelb~n!rak1lo(~sba46s~

5 The other days she has to

1~sptroz41asltyenek~1rl~otrasksas~

s6116zbyerns~

o,.

,.,

Ella no puede venir aqu los

sbados p slo los viernes.

go to other hornes.

Los otros das tiene que ir a

otras casas.

DIALOG 2

Srta., dgale 'buenas tardes' al

Sr. White, y que dice don Jos
que aqu necesitan una muchacha.

Juan, pregntele si ella es la

que limpia s u (de 1) apartamento.

11.36

....

delt
o

.l?

Juan: Es Ud. la que limpia el

apartamento de l?

s1'seQy6r~ boya11oshw~bs~

Srta.: Buenas tardes. Dice don

J os que aqu necesitan
una muchacha.

....,.

e~ustedllak11mpy~lelapartamento
,

Juan, pregntele si puede venir

aqu los sbados.

ne~s1ta~namuchcha~

Srta., contstele al seor que s. Que

Ud. va ah los jueves.

bwenastrds~ d!~e46ijh6selk~ak11

".

Srta.: S, seor. Voy ah los

jueves.

pwedebenJ.rakl.llo(s) sabadost

Juan: Puede venir aqu los

sbados?

TREINT A Y SEIS

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

Srta., dgale que no, que

slo los viernes. Que los
otros das tIene que ir a
otras casas.

Juan, contstele que est bien.

,
,
nolseQy6rs61lozbyerns

.
,
, .
lsPtroz~1aslteijgok~1rl~otrasksas~

Srta: No, seor, slo los viernes.

Los otros das tengo que
ir a otras casas.

,
estahyn

Juan: Est bien.

,.

NARRATIVE 3
,

1 The gir 1 wants to see the

apartment.

2 She wants to see what work

there is to be done.

,.,

o,

baQyot

TREINTA Y SIETE

a~rlkamat

Quiere ver qu trabajo hay que

hacer.

Tiene que hacer todo el trabajo

de casa.

eZde~1rtbarrrlsp1S0s1
,

La muchacha quiere ver el

apartamento.

tynk~aierlto~Qeltrabahodeks~

5 But she doesn't have to wash

clothes.

.,..

,
4 That is to say, sweep the floors,
wash the bathroom, make the
hed

kyrberlketrabahQlayk~a~r

3 She ~s got to do aH the housevrork.

lamchachalkyereherelapartamnto

lbrl

Es decir, barrer los pisos, lavar

el hao p hacer la cama

peronotyene'kelbarr6p~

Pero no tiene que lavar ropa.

11.37

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH
,

6 He sends aH his clothes to

the laundry.

o.

o.

,.,

11.38

" .

.,

Juan: Si, c6mo no, pase adelante.

.'

Srta; (. Qu trabajo hay que hacer?

0'0.

barr~rlsp1sost
,

lbrelbaQyof

rlaka ma1
o

Srta: Puedo ver el apartamento,

seor?

to~~eltrabahodeksa~ eZd~1rl

Srta. 9 pregntele si tiene que

lavar ropa.

ketrabahQ~yk~air~

Juan, contstele que todo el trabajo

de casa. Que es decir, barrer los
pisos, lavar el bao, hacer la
cama

silk6mno1 pas~a~elnte~

Srta., pregntele que qu trabajo

hay que hacer.

El manda toda la ropa a la

lavandera.

pwe~oberlelapartamentolseQyort

J uan 9 c ontste le que s i 9 cmo

n0 9 que pase adelante.

lmndtodalarrop~lalalabander1a~

Dl~LOG

Srta. 9 pregntele al seor si

puede ver el apartamento.

G.

Juan: Todo el trabajo de casa. Es

de cir,barre! los pisos ~
lavar el ba0 9 hacer las
camasoooo

te~gokelabarropat

Srta: (.Tengo que lavar ropa?

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 11

SPOKEN SPANISH

Juan~ contstele que no. Que

la ropa hay que mandarla a

la lavandera.

..

"..,

n~ lrropaykemandarl~lala

Juan: No. La ropa hay que

mandarla a la lavanderia.

labander~

NARRAT/VE 4

1 Now~ (speaking of) another

thing.

or~tablando4~otrak6sa~

2 The girl charges ten pesos

for cleaning Mro Molina~s
apartment.

lmuchachalk6bradyepesoslpor

5 She can start tomorrow.

Tomorrow is Fndayo

TREINTA Y NUEVE

11mpyarlelaprtamento4elseQyormoln~

"

La muchacha cobra diez pesos

por limpiar el apartamento del
Sr. Molina.

*oralkyrkobrarlkator~eporst~

y ahora quiere cobrar catorce por

ste.

4 But she)s nght. This one is

larger.

"0

n,

3 And now she wants to charge

fourteen fOl' this one.

Ahora p hablando de otra cosa.

, . ,

prbtyenerra~6n~ estezmaZ9rnd~

'0
o,

,
o
pwedempe~armaQyna~ maQyan~ezby6rn6s~

Pero tiene razn. Este es ms

grande.

Puede empezar maana. Maana

es VIernes.

11.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 11

DIALOG 4

Juan, dlgale que ahora 9 hablando

de otra cosa 9 cunto cobra ellao

aOri~blandod~otrak6s~

Srta: Catorce pesos.

pr~Ad6ijhsellk6brdy~+

Srta~,

digale que si. pero que

este aparramentoe& ms
grande.

s1tper2~st~aprtament2Iezmz

grande~

Srta.~

conistele que si y pre~

gntele que a qu hora?
q

,.,.

,.

pwedempearmaQyanaf

11.40

Juan: Bueno, muy bieno Maana

es viernes lPuede empezar
maana?
o

s1lseQy6r+ ak~or+

Juan, dgale que por la tarde,

a la una o a las dos.

Srta: Si, pelo este apm'tamento

es ms grande o

bwen~muyby~n~ maQyan~ezbyrnes~

Juan: Pero a don Jos le cobra

diez.

"

Juan, dgale que bueno, que

muy bleDo Que maana es
viernes. Que &1 puede
empezar maana.

Juan: Ahora. hablando de otra cosa,

cunto cobra Ud.?

ktorep~SS~

Juan, pero a don Jos le cobra

diez, dgale.

kwanto

k6br~std~

Srta., contstele que catorce

pesos.

,.,.

Srta: S, seora lA qu hora?

porltard~ l~unaI2alazd6s+

Juan: Por la tarde, a la una o a

las dos.

CUARENTA

SPOKEN SPANISH
12.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

UNIT 12
No water in White's apartment.

John comes into Molina's apartment looking upset.

AID TO LISTENING

ENGLISH SPELLING

,
,
pasa pasa-r-l.

(it) happens (to happen)

M:Jlma

What's the matter, John?

SPANISII SPELLING

pasa (pasar)

Mol",w

keteps/hwn

Qu te pasa, Juan?

(1) know (to know)

Wh,te
1 don 't know. There's no
water in my apartrnent.

s (saber)

,
, ,
nos n~ayagw~lenm*Aprtm~nt~~

Molma

Don't tell me! Again?

to bathe
to bathe rnyself (to bathe
onese lf) (1)
to shave
UNO

,
de~l.r-l.

no--dJ.gas

don't tell (to tell)

,-

no digas (dec ir)

,
Molina

nome~1gs otrabe~1

,
baQya-r
,
baQyarme
,
afeyta-r

White
No s. No hay agua en mi
apartamento.

No me dIgas! Otra vez?

,
baQyarse~

baar
baarme (baarse)
afeitar

12.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

af~ytarm~ afytars~~

t'o shave rnyse H (to shave

oneself)

And here 1 am without having bathed

or shaved! (2)

....

iyolkAst6ysimbaQyarm~~s1npfeytrm6t

i Y yo que estoy sin baarme y sin

afeitarme!

,
(1) was

afeitarme (afeitarse)

(to be)

c1eaning myse lf (to clean

oneself) (3)

I!staba~ I!star~

estaba (estar)

limpyand6m~

limpindome (limpiarse)

limpyars+

,
stba-limpyand6mt

(1) was c1eaning (myself)

estaba limpindome

the tooth

el diente

White
1 was brus hing my teeth.

went, was going (to go)

.. .

White
Yo estaba limpindome los dientes.

iba (ir)

was going to give myself

~b~-a-d'rmt

iba a darme

the shower

la-d'ucha~

la ducha

, .,

1 was going to take a shower, too.

the joke
the hoy

12.2

..

~ol~staba11mpyandomelloz4yentest

..

1ba~arm~una4uchaltamby~n~

,
l-ch1k~

Iba a darme una ducha tambin.

la broma
el chico

DOS

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

Molina

Malina

kebr6mAlch1.k6.J.

What a fix, chum!

Qu broma, chico!

The p.ty is at seven!

lafyest~ I~s.al(s) syet~''

scarcely, harely

La fiesta es a las siete.

apenas

(we) have (to have)

t~neml>s''

haH

mec!y''

medio

to, in <rder to

par''

para

tAner''

tenemos (tener)

to dress
to dress ourselves (to dress
oneself)

White
We harely have haH an hour
to get dressed.

bst1rn6s''

b~st1rs6''

penaslt6n6m6zme~y~6ralprabest1.rn6s''

vestir
vestirnos (vestirse)

White
Apenas tenemos media hora
para vestirnos.

,
the moment

Just a mlDute

TRES

(4)

el~oment6''

el momento

On-ml>ment6''

IIn momento

(1) go ho gol

boy'' 1r''

(it) arrived (to arrive)

Q~ ~90''

Q}J egar''

voy (ir)
lleg (llegar)

12.3

SPOKEN SPANlSH

UNIT 12

Malma

JU$t a minuteo I'm going to see

if the water has come ano (5)

,.
,
,
,
unmomnt boyaberlsi~ego~lgw

, h
(6)
Y es, lt aso

Malina

Un momento. Voy a ver si lleg 6

el agua.

S, ya hay.
~

l-pr~s.l-

the haste

darme-pr1sa

to hurry myself (to hurry

oneself)

White
I'm going, then. I've got to
hurry.

,.

Hey, who did you finally dee ide

to take? (7)

White
~~e

voy entonces. Tengo que

darme prisa.

oye (oir)

o~

por fin

,,.,..
pOrf1nt kyembas..a~\lehr+

MoZina
Oye, p01" fin, a quin vas a llevar?

a Hule fat (fat)

g6rd1to'' gor46.l.
,

gordito (gordo)

the chubby girl

l-grd"~ t

la gordita

the eye glasses

lz~afs+

las gafas

White
The chubby gal with the glasses.

12.4

p6r-fin.l-

at last

Malina

teij90ke~armeprlsa

darme prisa (darse prisa)

,
1r+

o~e+

(to listen)

..

meboyent6nis.l,

listen

la prisa

.
darse-prlsa
~

. . .

lgor~1tadelazgfas

White
A la gordita de las gafas.

CUA'fRO

SPOKEN SPANISH
to leave, to go out

salir

on leaving

al salir

to caIl

llamar

Malina
Fine. l'Il call you when 1 leave. (8)

12.10

UNIT 12

bwen~ lsl~rt~m~

Malina
Bueno, al salir te llamo.

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) Reflexive verbs such as this one are not discussed and cirilled in detail until Unit 24, but it is impossible to so arrange the
dialogs that reflexive forms will not appear before then with sorne frequency. It wiIl therefore be necessary to build up each one before
that unit in the rather fuIl forro shown here: first the non-reflexive verb, then the reflexive form which appears in the utterance, and
finaIly the reflexive citation forme

(2) This sentence is unusually difficult to approximate in a translation that reflects adequately both the structure and the meaning.
The actual meaning is best paralleled by a translation like 'And 1 haven't bathed or shaved yet!', but structurally, the cited translation is
somewhat closer and more suhject to variation drill later in this Unit.
(3) To be examined in detail in Unit 25, this use of certain clitics in a fashion that can only be translated as possessive in English
is rather common. Literally, of course, the utterance is roughly this: '1 was c1eaning for myself the teeth'e
(4) The 'just' of 'just a moment' is not stated in the Spanish, nor need it be in the English: 'One moment' would be a satisfactory,
though rather formal, translation.
(5) One of the striking differences between Spanish syntax and English syntax is illustrated in this sentence: the occurrence in
Spanish of the Past I form [m~eg6 ] lleg in a situation where only the English present perfect construction can satisfactorily occur.
(6) Here the occurrence of the present perfect construction in the English of the preceding utterance requires that the confirmation
utterance (whether negative or affirmative-here it happens to be affirmative) continue in the same way. The Spanish does not require continuation in this situation, so that the complete shift, from 'arrived' to 'already there is (sorne)', is not startling.
(7) [porfo] por fin in this utterance means 'Finally after aH that deliheration you were going through' or something similar.
The translation is therefore not as literal as 'Hey, who are you finally going to take?'
(8) Thephraserelator [a] ain [alsalir] alsalirdoesnotimplv iwhen' or 'before' or 'as' initse1f; butthecontext
indicates that IOn leaving' is equivalent to 'When 1 leave" since the more literal IOn leaving' lS much too formal an Euglish equivalente
CINCO

12.5

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

12.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

12.21

Pattern drilIs

12.21.1

Suhject pronouDS

A. Presentation ol pattern

lDLUSTRATIONS

~okyer2unsa~W1chI4ehamdn~

Yo quiero

,
itu1

y t qu ests bebiendo?

komoestaust~d'.I.

He's coming this week.

elbyenestasemn.l.
, .,. ,

She washes very well.

kestazbebyndo~

o.

El viene esta semana.

eQ~alaha Imuyby~n.l.
,

,.

E lla lava muy bien.

We 're Amerit:an.

nosotroslsomOS~mer1kn6s~

We're American (no

'0.
nsotraslsomo~amer1knas~

o.

They're not in the streeto

They{f) want pillow cases.

Nosotros somos americanos.

Nosotras somos americanas.

ked'esean~st~d'es.l.

~Mozlno~stan~nlak~~e~

10

sandwich de jamn.

Como est usted?

.:.;."--

UD

,.

12.6

..,

,.

,.

,.
,

.
. .

eocyaskyeremlfundaz4~almw4a~

Qu desean ustedes?
E llos no estn en la calle.

ElZas quieren fundas de almohada.

SEIS

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

EXTRAPOLA TION
pI

sg
f

ro

I1

y6

ro

nos6tros

nos6tras

--

t
ustd

2 fam
2 for

ustdes

f:!J)yos

fJ)ya

fiJ)yas

NOTES

a o Spanish subject pronouns are usually used only for contrastive emphasis~ when the reference of the pronoun s
otherwise lear from the contexto
ho Spanish / t

is the structural equivalent of English 6thou~1 hut is much more frequently usedo

Co English has distinct gender forms in 3 sg; Spanish has distinct ~ender forms in 3 s~ and pe and also in 1 pi.
do English 3 sg 6it 7 , which

SIETE

15

neither masculine nor feminine, is very rarely translated in Spanishc

12.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

12.21.11 Translation drill

....

.. .

1 She's American, but I'm Spanish.

eCt'\l t es.amerJ.kn'' per~ os oyespaQy61''

2 I'm single, but he's married.

~osoysolt~ro~pr2eleskas4o~

3 They're from here, but we 're

from Chile.

eO~O(S) sond~ak!~pr6nosotros

,.

,.

. ..
,. .

Ella es americana, perl) yo soy

espaol.

Yo soy soltero, pero l es casado.

Ellos son de aqu, pero nosotros

somos de Chile.

somozt!ech11b~

".
IW1Sk1konsMa''

4 She drnks water and I drmk

whisky and soda.

~}J b~b~agw~t i~o

5 He's in the patio, and she's

in the kitchen.

~lst~nblpatyot*~ienlako1n''

6 They're (f) Spanish, and we

are too.

~a(s) son.espaQyolastinosotros

. ..

Ella bebe agua y yo whisky con

soda.

El est en el patio, y ella en la

cocina.

,.

Ellas son espaolas y nosotros

tambin.

tambyn~

,.

.,

bamoznosotrostohan~6s''

8 Am I going, or are you aH?

boy~ot2hanpst~t!~S''

12.8

7 Are we going, or are they?

Vamos nosotros o van ellos?

,.
Voy yo o van Uds.?

OCHO

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

. .,. .

"
J

9 Are they going, or are we?

ban~ostobamoznos6tr6s~

,..

Van ellos o vamos nosotros?

10 Who wants ham 7 you or he?

kyeijkyereham6n~ ste4t2l~

11 Who works in the consular

section, you all or she?

kyentrabahilenlasekyoijkonsulr~

12 Who wants something else,

you or they?

. .

.,

.
ste4est2~A~
, . , ,.
,

.
,
ke4ese~I~1~

14 What do they need?

,
keneeS1 tan.1 ~6s~

Quin trabaja en la seccin

consular? Uds. o ella?

kyendeseilalgoms~ 6ste4t2~6s~

13 What does he want?

Quin quiere jamn? Ud. o l.?

Quin desea algo ms? Ud.

o ellos?

,
,

15 What does she want?

NUEVE

..

Qu desea l?

Qu necesitan ellos?

kekyer~ I~ll~

Qu quiere ella?

12.9

SPOKEN SPANlSH

UNIT 12

B. Discussion of pattern
In unit 4 (4.21.1) the c oncept of person was dlscussed as it applies to the proper selection of verb forms, and person-number categories
were I1lustrated by English pronouns. The same classification - that offirst, second, and thlrd categories, each ocurring in both singular and
plural forms, constitutmg a set of six categones for Spanish verbs-can be used to describe Spamsh pronouns o In addition there are dlstinct
gender forms in the 1 pI and 3 sg and pI categones and two 2nd person forms distmgUlshing formal and familiar.
This means that there are several areas of overIap between pronoun and verb patterns, as the charts below illustrate:
----~---

nos6tros

y6

nostras

bl-o

abl-mos

bl-as

t
ustdes
ustd
~;ya

t;'yos

t''yas

bl-a

bl-an

I
Note that the pattern dlscrepancies of Spalllsh, though they exist, are relatlvely mInor compared to Englisho

we
speak

you
he

she

J. t

they

speak-s

As the chart shows, only the English pronouns which are marked for gender (he, she 9 it) require a verb form that is different from the
name form or infinitive form which aH other English pronouns occur wi(ho The Spanish pronoun and verb patterns coincide except for a dis~
tinetion between 2nd formal and 3rd person formso

12010

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

Smce verbs in Spanish carry person-number distinctions in their structure, pronouns that carry the same information are frequently
considered redundant and unnecessary 9 and a student's tendency to translate aH English pronouns into Spanish pronouns is very conspicuous
to a Spanish speaker. Spanish pronouns are usually used only for emphasis or contrast as in Iynolokyro ~
'1 don't want it',
Iltt kstsbebyndo~
'And what are youdrinking', ly6meby~ pr~lsekda+/'['mgoing, but he's staying', or
when they are needed to distinguish forms, as between
ll and lustdj with a verb form like bla l.

The regional American 'you all' is often used in drills in this book to signal the distinction between
that 'you' alone does not show.

/US tdl and /US tdes/

Very commonly used abbreviations of usted and ustedes are Ud. and Uds.
12.21.2

Pronouns after phrase re lators

A. Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

~~ttraygamelsopadele9mbrs

with me
He's going to work with me.

.. ,...

conmigo

,
.,
batrabaharlkonm1gbt

..,

A m trigame sopa de legumbres.

Va a trabajar conmigo.

3 pasoport1lalaochb~

---

"

Paso por ti a las ocho.

k6nt1go~

with you (fam.)

He's gong to work with you.

..,

contigo

4 batrabaharlkont1g6~

Va a trabajar oomig.o.

la-kartA~

the letter

The letter is for you.

ONCE

.,.

5 lkart~lesparRust~~

la carta

La carta es para usted.

12.11

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

,.

6 n~s.igwall ald~~l~

No, es igual al de l.

Va a trabajar con nosotros.

--------------

El

He 's going without you aH.

Sit down with them.

va sin ustedes.

9 syentese!ko~~~s~

Sintese con ellos.

EXTRAPOLATION

sg

pI

ml.

2 fan 1

2 for

ustd

nos6tros, -as

ustdes
"'-~--~--

l, (J'ya

CCyos, -as

NOTES
a Pronouns after phrase relators differ froro suhject pronouns only in 1 sg and 2 ram sg forros.
bu When the two distinct forros mentioned in (a) occur with the phrase relator
special combinations /konm gol and /kon t go/ appear.

12.12

/kon/, the

DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

12.21.21 Response drill

. ..,

est~esparam1tQpar~ust~~~

pr~6ste!~

eS2ez~eroy~t04~1~

deJ.~

est2ez4eroyasto4enos6tr6s~

densotrs~

.,

. ...

..., .

,
,
lzmwebleslsomparanosotrost

[nsotrs~] 5

k~kyemlbanAO~6s~

k(~nbsotrs~

(eO~A~]

kOI)kyemlbal~

kOn~~

[el~]

parakyenleaestasroy~

(nosotros)
(ella)
(l)

TRECE

.,

1 Esto es para m o para Ud.?

Para Ud.

2 Eso es de ella o de l?

De l.

3 GEsto es de ellas o de nosotros?

De nosotros.

4 Los muebles son para nosotros o para ellos?

Para ellos.

5 Con quin van ellos?

Con nosotros.

6 Con qUIn va l?

Con ella.

7 Para quin es esta silla?

Para l.

12.13

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

[Et\ls~]

,
[ el ~ ]

[e~~~~J

lzmne<.ts~ s6mprnosotrosf

no~ pr~el':~s~

s t e<.tb a f k one':'\~ o s 1

..,

no''
,

.,

10

esteskr1torY2lespar~elt

11

estab1ta~yonlespar~ustedt

...

....,.

12

, .,
estekwartQlesparanosotrost
,
,.

13

e'""~abakonm1got

(e Has)
(l)

...

kn.l~

no~ pr~e~~!

'"
,
si+ prm1.J.
,
,
s1i prn6sotrs~
,
,
51+ knpstd.J.

8 Las monedas, son para nosotros?

No, para ellas.

9 Ud. va con ellos?

No, con l.

(ella) 10 Este escritorio es para l?

12.14

No, para ella.

11 Esta habitacin es para Ud.?

S, para m.

12 Este cuarto es para nos otros?

S, para nosotros.

13 Ella va conmigo?

S, con Ud.

CATORCE

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH
12.21.22 Translation drill

.,.

,
1 She's going with me.

e~~abakonrnJ.96

2 This sandwich is for me.

~stsaD~J.chlespararn~

3 After them 9 J ohn eats.

dspwezdet~oslkornehwn~

4 They live near us o

e/r~JozbJ.ben ~erkadenos6trs~

5 He doesn't work with me.

,.

,.

Despus de ellos, come Juan.

...

Este sandwich es para m.

Ellos viven cerca de nosotros.

.,..

ellnotrabahakonrng6~

El no trabaja conmigo.

. ,..

6 Carmen lives with uso

. ..

Ella va conmigo.

karrnemlbJ.beko(~nos6trs~

Carmen vive con nosotros.

,..

7 J ohn lives with them.

hwarn IbJ.bekon~(r~s''

8 The sheets are for

,
la(s) sabanas Isornparanos6tr6s~

Juan vive con ellos.

.. ,...

USe

9 There

9 S eleven dollars for

you and ten for uso

.,

..

for me and two hundred

for theP10

QUINCE

id6s(~yentos Ipar~O~6s''

..

Hay once dlares para Ud. y diez

para nosotros.

..

,.,
yd6s(~yentozd."olaresIpararnJ.t

,.,

11 There 9 S nine dollars for him

and four for hero

yon~edolareslpar~ustedti4ye1

paranos6trs''
,
,
10 There 9 S two hundred dollars

.,

Las sbanas son para nosotros.

"

Hay dose entos dlares para m

y doscientos para ellos.

,.

ynwebedolareslpar~eltikwatrol

Hay nueve dlares para l Y cuatro

para ella.

12.15

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

B. DIScussion o pattern

/m/

The forms of pronouns that are used after phrase relators are essentially subject pronouns, except that
and / t
replace
(y6/and /t/ In the pattern. The subject and phrase-relator pronouns can be classed as nonclitic, in contrast to the clitic pronouns
that can appear only with verbs. Thus the nonclitic pronouns can be charted as follows:

Phrase re lator

Subject

1 s~

y6

ml

2 fam sg

t
I

2 for sg

ustd

l,

SfT
"

fl'ya

1 pI

nostros, -as

2 pI

ustdes

3 pI

Q)yos, -as

The significance of the relation of the subjecr and phrase relator function in essentially a single set of forms can be seen by comparing
Spamsh and English usage. The Spanish classification of nonclitic and clitic case forms is partIy paralleled by the EngIish pattern of subject
and object case form",. However, as the folloWIng ehart sho\"!s, there is an area of overlap in appearanee after a phrase relator. In the examples,
/l/is nonclitic,
is clitie; 'he' is subject-form, and 'him' is objeet-form.

/10/

Subjeet of verb

12.16

Objeet of phrase relator

Ob je et of verb

61estk

spar~l~

n6p'Ndobr lo

He's here.

It's for him,

1 edn't see hl,m.

DIECISEIS

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

More will be said about the concept of 'nominalization' in the next discussion of pattern and elsewhere. The conct'pt assumes, in substance,
that a form that is not a noun behaves as if it were. An interesting example of 'pronoun nomin~lization' occurs in Unit 6 in the sentenc1'k lepar~e
slnostr2tmosdet~1 ,where a subject pronoun appears after a phrase relator: Itul appears where we might expect It . In this case
tl has been nominalized, it is behaving as a noun, a form which has no case forms: nouns do not change in form when used as subject of a verb or
object of a phrase relator.

12.21.3

Components of phrases

A. Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

. , . ..,
blnoustectlkonsufamllyat
-, . .,
. .
batrabahar Iko (n) nos 6tros~
, , .
. , .
k6nhtlartantotnQaprendezndt
-- --,
,
. .
,

1
2
By talking so much, you don't
learn anything.

3
4

,..

sin.irJklwrlu~ /agwa Inl.gs~

Va a trabajar con nosotros.

Con hablar tanto, no aprendes nada.

Sin incluir luz, agua, ni gas.

,..

What do you do after studying?

k~a~ez IdespweZ6estudyr~

Before translating, repeat.

ante7 16etra611.rlrept~

V ino usted con s u familia?

Qu haces despus de estudiar?

,.

Antes de traducir, repita.

EXTRAPOLA TION
noun
phrase re lator

pronoun
nominalized form

NOTES
a. Phrase relators introduce nominal forms.
b. The infinitive is the nominalized form of verbs that normally occurs after phrase relators.

DIECISIETE

12.17

UNn' 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

12.21.31 TranslatlOn drill

1 He always studies before

gomg out.

2 She always cleans after

eating.

,..

12.18

,.

No tengo tiempo para estudar.

. .

. .

Ella siempre viene s in llamar.

.. .

npwed~aprenderls1nftstudyr~

9 Two hundred a month without

includlng the electriciry.

. .

0~asyemprebyene IS1nO~amr~

8 You can't learn without

studymg.

Repita esto antes de escribrlo.

note~gotyempo'pariestudyr~

7 She always comes without

cal1ing.

. .

Nosotros vamos despus de comer.

rrep1tRest2tantezdeskr1b!r16~

6 1 don't have time for

studyng.

Voy al centro antes de almorzar.

,
,.
,.
nosotrozbamoz Idspwezdekom~r~

"

5 Repeat ths before writmg

it (down).

Ella siempre limpia despus de

comer.

,...

b6yl~entrQlantezd~almorr~

4 We're going after eating.

El siempre estudia antes de salir.

. . ,..

.,

O~syempre11mpyaIdespwezdekom~r''

3 I'm going downtown before

eating lunch.

,...

.,

lsyemprestudy~lantezdesalr~

No puede aprender sin estudIar.

dos(~yentos lalmes1si~iijklw1rlal~''

Doscientos al mes sm incluir

la luz.

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

,.

10 Because of (for) talking so

much, you don't learn.

11 She charges foor dollars for

sweeping the whole house.

going now.

1~akobra

..

. .,.

Por hablar tanto no aprende.

.,. .

Ikwatroctolarestprbarr6r I

tot1alaksa~

, .,

12 1 don 't like the idea of

p6rablartantoln2apr~nd~

Ella cobra cuatro dlares por

barrer toda la casa.

,.

nomegustal~1deald~1ra6ra~

..
, . .,.
, .
kelepare~el~1dealdk6mprarlaksa~

No me gusta la idea de ir ahora.

13 What do you think of the idea

of buying the house2

Qu le parece la idea de comprar

la casa?

B. Discussion of pattern
A phrase is a suhordinate construction consisting of a pbrase relator and its object (plus any modifiers of the ohject). The phrase
normally modifies sorne other item (noun, verb f etc.) in an utterance, thougb it may stand alone as in /atrabahr,~ / 'Let's ~et to work'.
The term 'preposition' is often employed to designate phrase relators. In the structural discussions in this text it has been omitted
in favor of the term 'pbrase relator' to help point up structural and distributional parallels with analo~ous forms such as clause re lators
(see appendix).
The ob ject o a phrase relator is a nominal form: either a noun , a pronoun, or a nominalized forme 'Nominalization' means the selection and appearance of an item from another form-class (an adjective, modifier, verb, etc.) in a function that is normally occupied by a noun.
A nominalized form may be the subject of a sentence /elbyhoestk / 'The old man is here', the object of a verb /b9n
ar:er_~ktnQ 1/ '1 see one American' or the object of a phrase relator jstalwgo.J.j aSee you later'. It may b,e modifiec "y adjec~
tives / eltrobyho.J. /
'The other old man~, which agree in number and gender with the nomincllized form jlos.otrosbyhos! /
'The otlLer old men.' In short, nominalized forms are functionally nouns, even though they do not ha\ e the defining morphological characteristics of nouns(inflection Cor gender onlv).
The form oC the verb which is mosl readily nominalized is the infinitive, and this is the forrn which follows phrase relators. The
equivalent English construction very often shows an '-ing' form of the verb where the Spanisb infinitive occurs, and the tendency to follo\\'

DIECe UEVE

12.19

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

the English pattern is responsihle for many mistakes of English speakers learning Spanish. Thus, /konab lrtntot /
/ s

ln~nk lw r l ~ t /

and

are equivalent to 'By talking so much.oe' and 'without including electrieity ... '

The regular exception to this generalization is the English phrase relator 'to', which takes the infinitive form, just as in Spanish.
The Spanish equivalent to English 'to' is

la,

pra,

de,

ke/, and other phrase relators, varying in different constructions. Note the

foHowing correspondences:

/bn.-trabahr~/

They're going to work.

/tngn6ralprakomr~/

I have an hour to eatc

/sfil1Idenkontrrt/

15 it easy

/ty~neskekono~rla!/

y ou have to meet her.

~o

{iTUl?

In aH cases the Spanish construction is always cphrase relator plus in[initive'. In English, it is 'to plus, in[initive', hut ~any

otller phrase re lator plus - ing-{orm.'

In most cases the Spanish infinitive immediately fo11ows the phrase relatoro Sometimes, however, the nominalized infinitive can he
modified by an adjective such as the definite article, as in
construction it is not:

~On

lalsal~r IteQ)ymo~,!;

though / a / is normally translated 'to', in this

leaving (when I leave), 1'11 ca11 you.'

Many phrase relators are single wordso Often, however, a verb modifier may itself be modified by a phrase in a construction which
appears to inelude a compound phrase relator. In the utterance /elotll estirka~/,the form /irka/is a verh modifier.
In lelotllest~rka Id~ak~,'the phrase /d~akl modifies /~rka/. It is nevertheless convenient sometimes to
conslder /~rkadel as a kind of compound phrase relator which takes the nominalized modifier

12.20

/ak/ as

its ohject.

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

The phrase relators so far introduced into this text inc1ude: / a, sta, de, dsde, en, ke, k6mo, kon, m~nos, pra,
por, sJ.n/. Compounds inc1ude:/ntes-de, despws-de, lhos-de, ~rka-de/.

12.21.4

Statement intonation patterns- normal and contrastive statements

A. Presentation of pattern
ILLUSTRATION
121 1

,
It's near.

sta!irk~

Est cerca.

,
,
,
no stalehs
,
2

21 1 2 3 1 ~

No, est lejos>

ezmuykr~

11 ~

Es muy caro.

Al contrario.
2

tantogst6~

1 1

Tanto gusto.

lgustQezm~~

VEINTIUNO

3 1~

lkontrary6~

31 ~

El gusto es mo.

12.21

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

EXTRAPOLA TION

Statement

Uneolored

Contrastive

/1231~/

NOTES

a. The une olored Spanish pattern resembles an English pattern

that is often associated with expressions of disinterest or
boredomo

b. The eontrastive (or emphatic) paUern resembles an English

uneolored pattern.

12.22

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

12.21. 41 Substitution drilis

Problem:

stoyeI)kolmbya~

Answer:

,.

estoyeI)kolombya.J,

Problem~

1 2

Estoy en Colombia.

Answer:

1 2
3 1''
Estoy en Colombia.

VEINTITRES

12.23

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

trbahoeDkarks~
,..

.
isoyetech11e~
, .

komemozmuch~

sta<.<kupd~

estaQkupadb~

prnunyast6do~

prnunyastOQ~

Qkntramosks~

1 2
1 2

11+

11

2 y soy de Chile.

1 2

1 1

1 2

31

1 2

Comemos muchoo

1 1

3 1~

1 2

Trabajo en Caracas.

3 1

1 2

4 Est ocupado.

1 2

y soy de Chile.

3 Comemos mucho.

1 2

Dkontramoskas~

1 Trabajo en Caracas.

12.24

isoydechl.l~

,
5

kmemozmch~

trabahQeDkaraks~

. .

Est ocupado.

1 2

3 1

5 Pronuncias todo.

Pronuncias rodoo

1
2
1 1 ~
6 Encontramos casa.

Ene ontramos casa.

3 1

VEINTICUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

lkilamoaelkwrt6~

studyamp6ko~
,.

mp~amozmaQyna
,

10

VEINTICINCO

n~s1t~un11br
,

11

prbbamos.elp6str~

..
. ,

lkilamos~lkwartb~

stud'yampok6~

,
mpamozmaQyan

,.

..

n~s1tiun11br

,
probamoselpostr

1
2
1 1
7 AlqUilamos el cuartoo

Alquilamos el cuartoo

1 2
1 1 ~
8 Estudian poc 00

Estudian pOCOo

1
2
1 1
9 Empezamos maanao

Empezamos maanac

3 1

1 2

3 1~

3 1 ~

1 2
1 1
10 NeceSIta un libroc

NeceSIta un libroo

1 2
1 1
11 Probamos e 1 postre o

Probamos e 1 postre o

1
1 2

3 1
3

UNIT 12

SPOKEN

SPA~ISH

12.21.42 Response drill

Problem

l~

,
dd"ondes.us td+
Answer:

Problem 2:

,
dd"ondet
Answer:

,
dchJ.l+

Problem 1:
De dnde es Ud.?

Answer:

21 ~

Soy de Chile,

Problem 2:
De dnde?
Answer:

1 31 ~
De Chile.

VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

[doe~]

kWantoskwartos.y~

kwantost

,
[ir'ly J..~ ]

,.,
dondes ta~j'lbr6~
,

,
staO~!~

donde1

(doce)

1 Cuntos cuartos hay?

Cuntos?

(allO

2 Dnde est el libro?

1 2 1 ~
Hay doce.,

31+
Docec

1 2 11
Est all..

1 31 1

Dnde?

VEINTiSIETE

Allio

12.27

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

[byah~]

p~r~ke&estech'k~~

,
paraket

,
[ambr~]

,
ket
,

[W1sk1kons6d~]

kekyr~

,
kI)kef

..

W1sk1kons6d~

knsOt!~

21 ~

1
(viaje)

3 Para qu es este cheque?

Para el viaje.

31 ~

1
Para qu?

Para el viaje.

2
(hambre)

4 Qu tiene?
Qu?

2
(whisky con soda)

5 Qu quiere?
Con qu?

12.28

Tengo hambre.
3
1 ~
Hambre.

21~

Whisky con soda.

1 3 1 ~Con soda.

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

[~nlatintr~r1a~] 6

.,

dondetrabah~~l~

nltintrrJ.a~

,
donde1

,
[nlskritoryo~] 7

nltintrrJ.~

,.

dondestalaplma~

l\Alskritory~

,
en.elskritoryt

,
dondet

,
[bm~akbmer~]

pradondehn~

bms..kmer~

,
prdondet

21 ~

1
(en la tintorera)

6 Dnde trabaja l?

En la tintorera.

1
Dnde?

31

2 1 ~

En el escritorio.

3 1 ~

1
Dnde?

En el escritorio.

21 ~

1
(vamos a comer) 8 Para dnde van?

Vamos a comer.

1
Para dnde?

VEINTINUEVE

En la tintorera.

1
(en el escritorio) 7 Dnde est la pluma?

31

A comer.

12.29

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

,
[atrhhr~ ]

,
9

adondebn~

kekyre~

6trakml.s~

.;

[nlk6~1n] 11

"

dondet

,
enlk~1n~

1
9 Adnde van?
Adnde?

1
31 ~
A trabajar.

21~

En la cocina.

1
Dnde?

3 1~

Otra camisa.

1
(en la cocina) 11 Dnde ha estado?

21 ~

Otra camisa.

2
Qu?

21 ~

A trabajar.

1
(otra camisa) 10 Qu quiere?

12.30'

"

dond~a~std'~

(a trabajar)

".

otrakam:Ls~

Icet

trhha"rJ.

[6trkm1Sa~] 10

d'ondet

trabhr~

31~

En la cocina.
TREINTA

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

B. Discussion o pattern

Intonation patterns are arrangements of stress / ' . /

,pitch /1,

2, 3 / , and terminal junctures /

1, t, +/.

These

patterns are different in English and Spanish, first of aIl because the number of available counters in the systems of the two languages is
different: Spanish has two stresses, English foUl"; Spanish has three pitches, English four.
In this text intonation patterns have been shown by

/'/

and / . /

placed at varying heights over each syllable to represent pitch.

This is an effective pedagogical device to present these patteros. However, Spanish intonations can most efficientiy be described by marking
aIl real or potential pitch changes, foIlowed by the terminal juncture. It has been determined that normally the points of potential pitch change
in any single phrase are aIl strong stressed syIlables plus the first and last syllables, when these are weak stressed. Thus the intonation

es t~ ~rk+/,

/ten~m~s labisa-t. /can be abstracted as

/1211 +/ for both sentences, even though the formula has to

1
2 1 1.
1 2
1 1
account for a different number of syIlables in each case. The sentences can then be rewritten / es t~ rka/, / tenmo s lab s a t ,
pattern of /

writing the significant numbers aboye each appropriate syIlable and marking only strong stress.

,
When the first syIlable i~ strong - stressed, the first number of the pattern formula does not actuaIly occur: /

/..

/dondes tmo s ~ /
over the last vowel,

/~s t~k~~ /

l'

11

tyen en.6 tr +/,

/tyenen.6tro t / , / dondes tmo s /. When the last syllahle is strong stressed, both nUlTlhers are
1
2 11
. "1/ /. ' k '.,/
since a glide in this position can be significant; / e s tak 1.'" , e s ta 1.'" then are written / e s tk i /J
or

The last

/1/

on the first sentence may seem to be superfluous, but is needed in the analyais to contrast with the last/l/

on the second sentence, which cannot be omitted; / stak1.~ /

and minimally different from final

/1/

can occur, analyzed as

+/

and /1231

have very different meanings. A patttern very much like /1211 /

lIt

or discourteous: /Wh~t's for dnner

estki+ /,

where final

/3/

is significantiy

of the previous sentence.

The two patterns drilled in this section, /1211

written

+/ , are important because they resemble English patterns which

, unlike

the Spanish normal, uncolored connotation, meaos disinterested

21+
/, /Why nt

/, and unless a student realizes that it has no such meaning in Spanish, he will avoid

using it, even though he may be unaware o his aversion to the pattern.

TREINTA Y UNO

12.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

On the other hand, /12 31 ~ /

' which lS conttast!\-e in Sfanish, used only for special emphasis, is very similar to a pattern that means
3
normal or uncolored in English. Thus the pattern of
glng h <Sme" /,
's fram
/, if transferred to Spanish
3k S /
231
/ sdeknsas / is likely to sound over-insistent in Spanish where /12 31 ~ / means emphatico

I#m

IHi

K~ns~s

/b~Y ~ ~ ~

('ne other feature related to intonation that needs to be brought to the attention of students, since it is notably different in the structure
of the two languages, is rhythmo Rhythm is syllable-centered in Spanish, phrase-centered in Englishc This means that the recurring tempo unit
in Spanish is the syHable - each is of approximately the same lcngth; in Engli5h the recurring tempo unit is the phrase, and also each is of
approximately the same lengthe But Spanish phrases and English syllables are of differing lengths, and English phrases usually arrangc sy Hables so that two long (stronger stressed) do not occur together nor more than two short (weaker stressed) occur in uninterrupted sequenceo
Imposing the English pattern of alternate long and short syIlables on Spanish produces a distortion which will immediately come to the attention
of any Spanish speaker, cven though he may not be able to explain exactly what it is that 6 sounds funny' e This feature of rhythm was discussed
with illustratioos in sectIon 1.22.4.
Ooe of the importaot purposes of this and o subsequent intooatioo drI1ls is to bring the patterns that are involved to the awareness of
the learnero In sorne cases the patterns are similar to English patterns; in sorne cases they are very different. lt is most important that the
student master the differences, but io aH cases the manipulatioo of the patterns, with the proper correlation to the meaning significance of
their use, is valuable practice.

12.32

TREINTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH
12.22

UNIT 12

Replacement drlls

. .. .

,
"
nos n~ayagw~lenm*apartam~nt~

--pw~d"~

el

5
6

., .
akeO}Ja_i

otl

"

.....

"

..

nopw~6 n~ayagw~len~lapartamnt6

..
..
..,.
..,.

_kr6

. .. .

,
"
nopwd"6 n~aynady~lenlaks
,
"
nokr6 n~aynady~lenlaksa
,
"
nokr6 nS?aynaoy~ len.akeC\;aks5
,
"
nokr~
nS?aynadYxlenpkelotl

nad"y~

"

nopw~ n~aya9wRlenmkapartamnt

n~ayagw~lenlaks

ksa

No s, no hay agua en mi apartamento.

1-puedo,

el

'_nadie

5 _ creo'
6

TREINTA Y TRES

_
_

No puedo, no hay agua en el apartamento.

casa.

No puedo, no hay agua en la casa.

No puedo, no hay nadie en la casa.

_
aquella

No puedo, no hay agua en mi apartamento.

No cre o, no hay nadIe en la casa.

_
hotel.

No creo, no hay nadie en aque Ha casa.

No creo, no hay nadie en aquel hotel.

12.33

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

. .

...

y~estaballlmpyandomeloz~ynts~

rrp~

,
komprandome

wto~

mwbls~

a~yendom~

tr9s~

,.

~2estabalkomprandom~unozmw~bls~

. ..

~2estab~laiyendom~unozmw~bls+

. ..

~~estabRlaiyendom~unostrgs~

Yo estaba lmpindome los dientes.

ropa.

Yo estaba limpindome la ropa.

Yo estaba comprndome la ropa.

comprndome

auto.

Yo estaba comprndome el auto.

un _ _

Yo estaba comprndome un auto.

5
6
7
12.34

un

. , ...
, ,. .
, ...
~2estabalkomprandomelarr6p~
, ,. .
, ..
~~estabalkomprandomelwt~
, ,. .
, . .
~2estabaJkomprandom~unfiwt
, ,. .
, . ..
,

~~estabaI11mpyandomelarr6pa~

muebles.
hacindome

Yo estaba comprndome unos muebles.

Yo estaba hacindome unos muebles.

tragos.

Yo estaba hacindome unos tragos.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SP ANISH

UNIT 12

..

....

,
,.
, .,
penastenemozlmeoyaoralparabestlrns

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~baQyrns..

una

--------,
syempre

..

5
6

----------.

--------------------

.,.

.,

..

....

penastenemoslunaora/paraba~yrnos
,

,.

,.,

syempretenemoslunaora/parabaQyrns+
,

_____________af eytrnos''
,
momento
..
,
nuI)ka
..
,
ora
..

penastenemoz Imedyaoralparaba~yrns~
,
,. ,.,

,.,

syempretenemoslunaoralparafeytrns+
,
.,
syempretenemoslunmomentolparafeytrnst
, o., ,

..,. .

. ...

nUI)katenemoslunmomentolparafeytrns~

. . ,. .

. ...

.,
aoratenemos lunmomentolparafeytrns+

Apenas tenemos media hora para vestirnos.

---",baarnos.

_~

una

3 Siempre
4

_
_

Apenas tenemos una hora para baJarnos.

Siempre tenemos una hora para baarnoso

afeitarnos.

5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ momento

6 Nunca

7 Ahora

TREINTA Y CINCO

Apenas tenemos media hora para baarnos.

Siempre tenemos una hora para afe itarnos.

Siempre tenemos un momento para afeitarnos.
Nunca tenemos un momento para afeitarnos.
Ahora tenemos un momento para afeitarnos.

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANlSH

.,

D mboylent6n~s te~gokeoarmeprsa

1
2

komrt
,
------------________ayke
i
-----------'trabahr
,
tnemoske

-------

.----b.estirnos+
------------. .
___________________estudyr

_______telJgok~_ _--

.
.
.

.
, .
mboylent6n~s+

..

mhoy/ent6n~s+ tnemoskebestrn6s~

,.

. .

tnemoskestudyr
,

mboy'ent6n~s teijgokestu~yr

Me voy entonces, tengo que darme prisa.

1
2

comer.
,.hay que

Me voy entonces, tengo que comer.

Me voy entonces, hay que comer.

trabajar.

,tenemos que _ _

Me voy entonces, hay que trabajar.

Me voy entonces, tenemos que trabajar.

vestirnos.

Me voy entonces, te nemos que vestirnos.

estudiar.

Me voy entonces, tenemos que estudiar.

12.36

.. .
..
.
.

,
,
mboy/ent6nies+ te~gokekom~r
,
,
mboylent6n~s aykekomr
,
,
mboylent6n~s~ ayketrabahr
,
,.
mboylent6n~s tnemosketrabahr+
,
,.

,tengo que

Me voy entonces, tengo que estudiar.

TREINTA Y SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

"...

O~J l prfln I~kyembas.a~ebr

~amr

,
______nton~es

,
kwando

o~+

trabahr+
----------,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _d'.onde

,
,

.. ..

,.,.
o~e entoniez Idondebas.atrabahr
,
,.,.
chJ.k nton~ez Irtondebas.atrabahr

------------,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _kol)kyem

,.

.. ..
,... .

Chlko enton~eslkoijkyemba~atrabahr

Oye, por fin a quin vas a llevar?

1

llamar?

Oye, por fin a quin vas a llamar?

-'l

2 _ , entonces
3 __ ,

cundo

4 _,
5 _,

TREINTA Y SIETE

.. .
enton~eslkwandoba~~amr+
,.,. . .
,.,.

o~ ntonies Ikwandobas.atrabahr

,...

Chlko

,.

o~~ enton~es lkyembas.~amr

--------

".. .

o~ prflnlakyemba~~amr

Oye, entonces a quin vas a llamar?

Oye, entonces cundo vas a llamar?

trabajar?
dnde

Oye, entonces cundo vas a trabajar?

Oye, entonces dnde vas a trabajar?

6 Chico,

Chico, entonces dnde vas a trabajar?

7 _ _ , _ _ con quin,

Chico, entonces con quin vas a trabajar?

12.37

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

bwen als 11rteC''y m~

,

o~
,
,J.
9)Jgar

o~ al~~art~m

ayct6,J.

o~ l~Jgart~ay6a,J.

F
1

,
nton~es

,
empar

abs

byen

o~ ls11rteO~m,J.

.
ntones1
,

,.

alQ~gart~av6Q

nton~est l~9art~abis

,.

nton~est lmpiart~abs,J.

byen,J.

,.

lmp~art~abls,J.

Bueno, al salir te llamo.

1 Oye,

Oye, al salir te llamo.

2 _

Oye, al llegar te llamo.

, _ _llegar_ _

-,

ayudo.

4 Entonces,

5
6
7 BIen,

12.38

Oye, al llegar te ayudo.

Entonces, al llegar te ayudo

aviso.
,empezar

Entonces, al llegar te aVISO.

Entonces, al empezar te aviso.
Bien, al empezar te aviso.

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

2.23

Vanaton dnlls

A ketepsb Ihv/nl

Qu te pasa, Juan?

1 What's the matter, Jose?

ketepslhos~''

2 What do you think of it,

ketepar~e

..

Ihs+

Qu te pasa, Jos?

Qu te parece, Jos?

Jose?

..

3 What do you thmk of it,

boy?

ketepar~elch1ko+

4 What do you hke, Carmen?

ketegstalkrmn+

Qu te parece, chico?

t Qu te gusta, Carmen?

,
5 What do you want, Carmen?

keky~res Ikrmn~

6 What are you writing,

Carmen?

keskrbslkrmn~

7 What are you studying,

Carmen?

kestdyaslkrmn+

Qu quieres, Carmen?

,
Qu escribes, Carmen?

TREINTA Y NUEVE

Qu estudias, Carmen?

12.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

IY yo que estoy sin baarme y sin

afeitarme!

1 And here 1 am without having

. .

i~olkest6ysinlimpyarmellozdy~ntst

,
2 And here 1 am without having
changed my clothesJ

iyolkest6ysintrabhar~

IY yo que estoy sin comer!

iyolkbst6ysin~lmr~arl

6 And here's John without any

i Y yo que estoy sin trabajar!

i~olkAst6yslQk6mrt

5 And here 1 am without having

had lunch!

i Y yo que estoy sin cambiarme de

ropa!

4 And here 1 am without having

eaten!

. .

iyolkst6ysiQkmbyarmelderr6pat

3 And here 1 am without having

worked!

y yo que estoy sin limpiarme los

dientes}

brushed my teeth!

y yo que estoy sin almorzar!

ihwaQlkestsindolars~

y Juan que est sin d61ares!

dollars!

,
7 And here's John without a car.

12.40

ihwaQlkstsinpwt6t

IY Juan que est sin auto!

CUARENTA

UNIT ]2

SPOKEN SPANISH

ba~rm~Onaduchaltamby~n+

1 1 was going to clean my teeth.

Iba a darme una ducha tambin.

,
blimpyrmllozdyentes+

Iba a limpiarme los dientes.

,
2 1 was going to change my shirt.

1bAkmbyrmellakm1sa+

3 I was going to sit there.

bsentrm~AJ.+

Iba a camhiarme la camisa.

,
Iba a sentarme ah.

,
4 I was going to move.

1bmdrmeldekasa+

Iba a mudarme de casa.

,
5 I was going to hire a taxi.

1bAlk11rlOntaksl~

Iba a alquilar un taxi.

,
6 I was going to wait fOl' Jose.

bResprrfahose+

Iba a esperar a Jos~.

7 I was going lo practice

Spanish.

CUARENTA Y UNO

1bprktikrlespQyoi~

Iba a practicar espaol.

12.41

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

,
11afyesti les.al(s) syete~

y la fiesta es a las siete.

,
1 And the party s at nine o'clock.

ilafyest~l~alaznweb~

2 And the party is tomorrow.

ilafyestRlezmaQyana~

,
3 And the party is later.

y la fiesta es maana.

ilafyest~lezdspwes+

,
4 And the party is before.

y la fiesta es despus.

ilafyest~l~antes~

y la fiesta es antes.

,
5 And the party is in my apartment.

12.42

y la fiesta es en mi apartamento.

ilafyest~leskOij~~Ski~

,
7 And there'll be 'cuba libre' at
the party.

ilafyest~le~nm*aprtment~

,
6 And there'll be whiskey at the
party.

y la fiesta es a las nueve.

y la fiesta es con whisky.

ilfyestRlskijkbl~br~

y la fiesta es con cuba libre.

CUARENTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

.,

unmom~ntl boyaber 'si.0~e~o~l(2Wl

1 Just a minute, l'Il see if the

Un momento, voy a ver si lleg

el agua.

unmom~ntl boyaberlsiroyego~lwtb~

Un JTIoPlento, voy a ver si lleg

el auto.

the car has arrived.

2 Just a minute, 1'11 see if my

..

..

unmom~nt6~ boyaberls~egom1be1no~

Un momento, voy a ver si lle~

mI veCIno.

neighhor has arrived.

,.

3 Just a minute, I'll see if

,.,

,.

unmom~nt6 boyaberlsi~egollaseQybr1ta

Miss Molina has arrived.

4 Just a minute, I'll see if the

unmom~nto

,
,
,
boyaber Isi'~~ego~ltksi

taxi has arrived.

5 Just a minute, 1'11 see if the

lady who e leans the apartment
has arrived.

,.
,.,
,
,
unmomnto~ boyaLcr IsiO~eso IlklJ.mpYR

. .. .

wash-woman has arrived.

Un momento, voy a ver si llez

el taxi.

Un momento, voy a ver si lleg

la que limpia el apartamento.

elapartam~ntol

6 Just a minute, I'll see if the

Un momento, voy a ver si lle~

la seorita ~,~olina.

unmom~ntol

..

,
,
,
boyaber Isi0~ego f

,
lakelabalarr6pal

Un momento, voy a ver si lleg

la que lava la ropa.

7 J ust a minute, I'll see if the

girl who studies Spanish
has arrived.

CUARENTA Y TRES

,.
,
,
,
unmomnto~ boyaber's~egolla

. .

Un momento, voy a ver si lleg

la que estudia espa501.

kestudy~espaQy61~
12.43

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 12

.
F lagbr~1taldelazgfs~
,

La gordita de las gafas.

..

1 The chubby girl at the cashier's

desk.

,.
lag6r~1taldelakha~

...

,.

2 The young lady atthe cleaners'.

La g<rdita de la caja.

..

laseQyr1taldelat1ntorera~

3 The young lady who has the caro

La seorita de la tintorera.

La seorita del auto.

4 The girl at the hotel.

lmchachaldelotl~

5 The lady on the first floor.

,.
.,
lsQyoraldelpr1merp1s~

La muchacha del hotel.

6 The gentleman in toe ad.

El seor del anuncio.

...

7 The man in the elevator.

12.44

La seora del primer piso.

,
lombre~elas(~ens6r~

El hombre del ascensor.

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 1Z

SPOKEN SPANISH
12.24

Review drill -Adjective agreement in remote position

. .

,
1 The house is pretty.

lkas~ezbon1t~

2 The school is good.

"
l~skwel~e7.bw~na~

3 The books are expensive.

"
lz11bro~~o~kr6s~

4 The agency is no good.

lahen~y~e7.mla~

5 The apartrnents are cornfortable.

,
l&aprtmentos ISODk6mdS~

6 The seci.'etary is pretty.

,
lasekretary~ezbonta~

7 The lady is Spanish.

lseQyor~lesespaQy61a+

. .

La casa es bonita.

La escuela es buena.

Los libros son caros.

La agencia es mala.

. .

. .

La seora es espaola.

. ,...

lo~awtos IsOnpmer1knos+

Los autos son amer.icanos.

,.

9 The suitcases are expensive.

La secretaria es bonita.

.. .

8 The cars are American.

Los apartamentos son cmodos.

lzmletaslso~krs+

Las maletas son caras.

. .. .

10 The buildings are pretty.

,
lsAdif1iYOS /sombontbs
,.

11 The shirts are cheap.

12 The furniture is no good.

CUARENTA Y CINCO

Las camisas s on baratas.

. .

lbzmwebles Isonm16s~
,.

13 The ladies are English.

. .

lskm1sas Isombarts+
,

Los edificios son bonitos.

Los muebles son malos.

..

l~)seQyoras Ison~~glss~

Las seoras son in~lesas.

12.45

12.3

CONVERSATION STIMULUS

NARRAT/VE 1

1 Tonight there's a party at the

Harris' (home).

,
,
stnoch~tynafyest~lnl

..

kasadeloshrris

Esta noche hay una fiesta en la

casa de los Harris.

2 Jose and Juan are going (to gol.

hse*hwamlban~r

3 They have to be there at seven.

,.
. ,. ,
tyene~kestara~11~la~)syt

Jos y Juan van a ir.

4 Juan is going to take that

chubby gir l.

..

. .

mch
,

Juan va a llevar a aque lla gordita.

"

nQezmuybonit prQe(l)legusta

,
6 J ose is going to take his
fiance.

.,

hwam IbaO\l.ebar IakeC~agor<1ita

5 She isnYt very pretty, but he

likes her very much.

.,

Tienen que estar all a las siete.

No es muy bonita, pero a l le

gusta mucho.

.,. .

hselbaQ~ebarasun6by

Jos va a llevar a su novia.

7 He's going to come by for

Juan at six-thirty.

12.46

,
. ,.,
,
elbapasarporhwanrala(~seys

1mdya.l.

El va a pasar por Juan a las seis

y media.

CUARENTA Y SEIS

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH
,.

~.

8 Then they'll pick up tlle girls.

. .

lwegotpasamporlaschlkis

Luego pasan por las chicas.

9 Jose doesn't want another

drink, now.

10 He's got to leave.

,
, ,
,
hselnokyer~lotrotrg~l6ra

Jos no quiere otro trago ahora.

,
tynek~l.rs

Tiene que irse.

11 He barely has time to shave

and dress.

,,.
,
,
penastyenetyempolprafeytars~

. .

Apenas tiene tiempo para

afeitarse y vestirse.

l.bes tlrs

DIALOG 1

Jos, dgale a Juan que esta

noche hay una fiesta en la
casa de los Harris, que si
recuerda.

,..,
,
stinoch~layunafyest~lnlks

Jos, contstele que a las

siete, y pregntele si va a
a llevar a alguien.

CUARENTA Y SIETE

dlsharris rrkwerdas1
,

Juan, contstele que s, que

cmo no. Pre~ntele que
a qu hora hay que estar allo

si k6mono

,..,
k~oraykes

Jos: Esta noche hay una fiesta

en la casa de los Harris,
recuerdas?

taraC\J i

,
, ,
l(s) syete bs.0\J.baralgyen1

Juan: S, cmo no o ;,A qu hora

hay que estar aUi?

Jos: A las siete. . Vas a llevar

a alguien?

12.-17

UNIT 12

Juan r dgale que s, que a la

gordita. Que no es muy bou
nita pero que a Ud. le gusta
mucho" Y pregntele que a
quin va a llevar l.

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,
si~ lg6rd1ta~
, .,

,...

'"

aminobya~

, . , .. ,
sikyereslpasoport11

~l(~s~ys~m~ya~ ilwegolp~s~m~s

. .
,

,.,

Juan: S, a la gordita. No es muy

bonita pero a m me gusta
mucho. Y t, la quin vas
a llevar?

Juan: Muy bien. No quieres otro

trago?

nogr~yas~ ~ameby~ penas

,
,
,.
te~gotyempolparfeytarm~1bestirme~

Jos: A mi novia. Si quieres, paso

por ti a las seis y media y
luego pasamos por las chicc

,.

muybyn~ nkyeres~trotragot

,
Jos? contstele que no, gracias,
que Ud. ya se va. Que apenas
tiene tIempo para afe tarse y
vestirse. Que adIS.

i tu~ akyembas.a0~ebr~

porlaschikas~
Juan, dgale que muy bien, y
pregntele si no quiere otro
trago.

prQam1megustamch~

,
Jos, contstele que a su novia.
Dgale que si qUIere, Ud. pasa
por l a las seis y medIa y luego
pasan por las chicas.

,..

nQezmuybon1tal

Jos: No, gracias, ya me voy. Apenas

tengo tiempo para afeitarme y
vestirme. Adis.

actyds~
NARRAT/VE 2

1 Juan sn't ready yet.

hwa~noestalstltdbi~
"

2 He doesn 't look like an

American.

3 It 's already twenty to seven.

12.48

.,

Juan no est listo todava.

,...

nolpre~~amer1kn~

No parece americano.

Ya son las siete menos veinte.

CUARENTA Y OCHO

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
4 And they've got to go pick up
the ~irls.

*ykepsarlprlschlks
,

5 Juan says there 's (plenty oE)

/.

y hay que pasar por las chicas.

hwanldl~ek~aytymp

Juan dice que hay tiempo.

time.

6 Here it's not like in the United

States.

knoeslk6monlastds~nlds
,..
ro

Aqu no es como en los Estados

Unidos.

7 One's got to arrive late to

partiese

yk~~9rtard~llsfystas~

,
8 iBut the party i.s at an American
home', says Jos.

9 It's the same as being in the

United States.

Hay que llegar tarde a las fiestas.

perlfyest~laeijksad~merikanzl
t~hs

ezlm~zm~lk~st~r~nl~s~stados

Pero la fiesta es en casa de

americanos -dice Jos.

Es lo mismo que estar en los

Estados Unidos.

und's~

10 Jose's right. Juan's going to

hurry, then.

,..

",.

hsetyenerra6n+ hwamlbadarse

Jos tiene razn. Juan va a

darse prisa, entonces.

prs~lent6n~s.l,
.,
.,
11 He'll be ready in a minute.

nunmomentotestalst
,..

En un momento est listo.

DIALOG 2

Juan, dgale a Jos que qu tal,

que pase adelante, y dgale que
Ud. no est listo todava.

,
, . .
ketl/hs pasad'elnte
,

nostoyllst6ltdb.l"

CUARENTA Y NUEVE

Juan~ Qu tal Jos? Pasa

adelante. No estoy
listo todava.

12.49

UNn' 12
Jos, dgale a Jos que Qu?
Dgale que no parece ameri
cano., Que ya son las siete
menos veinte., Y que hay que
pasar p<r las chicas.,

Juan, dgale que hay tiempo, hombre,

que hay tiempo. Que aqu no es
como en los Estados Unidos., Que
aqu hay que llegar tarde a las
fiestas.,

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,
,
ke1 nopare~es 'mrikano~
,
,.
l'

!j.sonl(s) syete Imnzbeyntef

,

*ykpsarlpr]sCh~kas+

,
,
aytympQl6mbr+ ytyemp+
,

Juan, dgale que tiene razn, que

Ud. va a darse prisa, entonces.,
y que en un momento est listo.

. .. , . .

.,

kinoes
Ikomoenlo~estaao~und6s+
,..
,..
,

kJ.1 ykO~ egrtar<t~ Ialas fys ts+

,

Jos, dgale que s, pero que l~

fiesta es en casa de america
nos. Que es lo mismo que estar
en los Estados Unidos.

Jos: Qu!? No pareces amerio

cano. Ya son las siete menos
veinte. Y hay que pasar
por las chicas.,

Juan: Hay tiempo, hombre, hay tiempQ.

Aqu no es como en los Esta..,
dos Unidos. Aqu hay que
llegar tarde a las fiestas.

s~rperlfyest~rskDksd~
,
,
.

amrikanosl zlorn1zmol

,
kstrlnlskstd~n~dsl

ty~n~zrr~~6nl b~y~d~rm~pris~1
,

.,

.,

ent6nis~ npnmomentQlestoylisto

Jos: Si, pero la fiesta es en casa

de americanos. Es lo mismo
que estar en los Estados
Unidos.

Juan: Tienes razn. Voy a darme

prisa, entonces., En un momen..
to estoy listo.

NARRATWE 3

,
1 Juan has to bathe, shave, and get
dressed, that's aH.

hwanltynekbQyars~f fytars~
.
,.
~bestrs+ esoest6d6+
" , ,
,
,

Juan tiene que baarse, afeitW'Se,

vestirse, eso es todo.

perlkaramba+ kepasa6ra+

Pero caramba! Qu pasa ahora?

No hay agua.

2 But, goshI What's wrong now?

There isn't any water.,

nQaygw+
,

3 He can't shave or bathe ..

12.50

c.

npwd~afytarseln~baQyrsl

No puede afeitarse ni baarse.

CINCUF.RI'A

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
4 They'll never get to the
partyo

No van a llegar nunca a la

fiesta.

6 He can go pick up the glrls

first.

.,..

,
5 Jose can do one thing,
then.

hselpwed~a~erunak6s~lentn~s~

pW~epsrlprlsch~kslprimr~
,

7 And then he'll come by for

Juan.

8 If Juan lsn't ready then,

Jose won't waIt.

Puede pasar por las chicas

primero.

ilwe9olpasaporhwn~

y luego pasa por Juan.

sihw~nln~~st~l~st~l~nt~n~~st
,

Jos puede hacer una cosa,

entonces.

hselno~spra~

Si Juan no est listo entonces,

J os no esperao

DIALOG 3

,
Jos, pregntele a Juan que qu
tiene que hacer.

ketyenesk~a~r~

Jos: Qu tienes que hacer?

Juan, contstele que tiene que

baarse, afeitarse y vestirse,
que eso es todo. Pero ahora
diga: Ay, caramba I

,
,.
tDgkebaQyarm~tfeytarm~1bestirme~
,
".
,
es~est6~ ay~ karamb~

,
Jos, pregntele que qu le pasa
ahora

CINCUENTA Y UNO

Juan: Tengo que baarme, afei=

tarme y vestirme, eso es
todoooo. Ay, caramba!

.,

ketepasaor~

Jos: Qu te pasa ahora?

12.51

UNIT 12

SPOKEN SPANISH

Juan, contstele que Ud. no

puede baarse ni afeItarse.
Que no hay agua.

nopwdbQyarmeln~afeytrm+

,
Jos, dgale que ino puede ser'
Que Uds. no van a llegar nunca
a la fiesta.

..

,.

Juan: No puedo baarme ni afeitarme. No hay agua.

nopwedesr+ nhamoslffiYgrnuijk'
lfyst

Jos: No puede ser! No vamos a

llegar nunca a la fiesta.

,...

Juan, pregotele que por qu no

hace una cosa.

,
prkenQa~eaunak6sa~

Juan: Por qu no haces una cosa?

,
Jos, pregntele que qu cosa.

kek6s

Jos: Qu cosa?

,.,.,.

,.,.

Juan, dgale que por qu no pasa

por las chicas prImero y luego
pasan por usted.

Jos, dgale que est bien, pero si

l no est listo entonces, que
Ud. no espera, que lo siente
mucho.

12.52

prkenopasas/prlasch1kaslpr1merot

ilw~g~p~S~mp~rmi
,
,
,
,
stabyn~ prsino~staz11stQ'

,.,

entoniest

no~spri losyentomch~

Juan~

Por qu no pasas por las

chicas primero y luego
pasan por m?

Jos: Est bien, pero si no ests

listo entonces, no espero,
lo siento mucho.

CINCUENTA Y DOS

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

13.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

White and Molina go to a party.

After being introduced to Carmen, Jose's fiance, and meeting his own date, John goes with the others to the party which a Latin American
official is giving in honor of the new Iy arrived Americans.

ENGLISH SPELLING

,
-menudo''

often

White
Hey, do they throw these parties here
very often? (l)

o~e~ danlestasfyesta~ak1lmyamenudot

White
Oye, dan estas fiestas aqu
muy a menudo?

de-be~-Q-kwnd~

No, just every now and then. Why?

a menudo

".,..

from time to time

Molina

SPANISH SPELLING

AID TO USTENING

n01

..

,.

sololdebe~~~kwndo''

,
porke1

de vez en cuando

Molina
No, slo de vez en cuando,
por qu?

,
estpendo~

terrific

White
1 think this one's terrific.

estupendo

,
,
estalmepar~~~lstpend''

White
Esta me parece estupenda.

,
to fix

fihar~

fix yourself, notice

(to pay attention)

flhate~

dancing (to dance)

UNO

fijar

fihars.J.
,
,
baylando~ baylar.J.

fjate (fijarse)
bailando (bailar)

13.1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,
brunette

Look how that brunette's dancing!

moreno~

..

moreno

,
,.
f1hatelkomQestabaylndQlsamorna~

,
el-kwid a

the care

Fjate cmo est bailando esa morena!

el cuidado
no vayas (ir)

don't go (to go)

meter

to put in

,
la-pata~

the paw
to put your foot in your mouth

Molina
Careful. Don't go making any cracks!

la pata

,
mter-la-pta

meter la pata

,
, ,. ..,
kwidacb~ noba~as lameterlapta~

Molina
Cuidado, no vayas a meter la pata!

,
1~-1ha

the daughter

look (to look)

(1) believed (to believe)

13.2

. .

l-sQyor-de-la-ks~

the owner o the house

That's the daughter o our host.

la hija
el seor de la casa

zl~1haldlsQy6r~lakas~

,
,
mlr mira-r
,
,
krel krer

Es la hija del seor de la casa.

mira (mirar)
crea (creer)

(they) were, were being (to he) (2)

eran (ser)

quiet

tranquilo

DOS

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

Carmen
Say I 1 thought Amencans were
more reserved. (3)

Carmen
Mira. Yo cre a que los americanos eran ms tranquilos.

,
rnmstr~kl1s~

that way

por ah

the colonel

el coronel

Malina
That man gomg that way is
Colonel Harris.

Malina
Ese que pasa por ah, es el
Coronel Harris.

corne (to cor.le)

ven (venIr)

Come on over and I'll introduce

you~4)

b~n1it16pres~nto~

Ven y te lo presento.

l-kop~

the goblet

IJ'/ute

(5)

Let's take our drinks.

..

.,

la copa

IJ'hite

bamo~aQMebarnozllask6pas~

Vamos a llevarnos las copas.

,
l-tu~~

yours

,
Here's yours.
to confuse
don't yourself confuse
(to confuse oneself)

TRES

,.

la tuya

kJ.tyenezlat~

,
kmfndir
,

. .

Aqu tienes la tuya.

no-te-komfndas~ komfndJ.rse~

confundir
no te confundas
(c onfundirse)

13..1

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

la de ella

hers

,
la-d'-karmen~

Carmen's

Molina
Don't get them mixed; that's hers p
Carmen's.

White
Oh, sorry.

the girl
at once, right away

la de Carmen

notekomfndas.1- zld~~a~
,

lac!karmn~

"

a S 1.1. perdoh

,
n-s g 1<1' .1-

Will you girls excuse us?

,
,
bwen/chks.1- kmperm1S~

We'll be right back.

nsg1dalbolbms

,.

13.10

Mol~na

No te confundas. Es la de ella,
la de Carmen.

White
Ah, s, perdn.

la chica
en seguida

Bueno, chicas. Con permiso.

En seguida volvemos.

Notes on the basie sentences

(1) 'Hey' is not a very good translation o /6ye/ oye, but neither is anything eIse. /6ye/ is an attention~attracterwhose equivalent in English is usually sorne sort o gesture, such as raised eye-brows, an upward lift of the head to call for attention - something to indicate
that a remark o importance, however slight, is to be made.

(2) Note that the verb form here, an irregular Past II form (to be dealt with in Unit 18), is indicated as being Past II rather than Past 1 by
the presence o two translations:simple past, 'were', and what may be called durative pasto 'were being'.
(3) /mira/ mira, like the equivalent given here, 'Say', is essentially an empty exclamation o mild surprise. It may also be used like
oye as an attention-attracter to be sure the audience is paying attention to what one is about to say.

13.4

CUATRO

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

(4)

The occurrence of two clitics in succession will he treated in Unit 20; for the moment, he certan you realize that
lo presento means '1'11 present him to you' and not '1'11 present you to him'.

presntot Ite

I t e lo

(5) The reflexive clitics will he treated in Unit 24. Literally this sentence means 'Let's take the cups for ourselves' - i.e., 'which
helong to uso '

13.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

13.21

Pattern drills

13.21.1

/-ndo/ forms

and the present progressive construction

A. Presentation of pattern

lLL USTRA TIONS

I'm thinking ahout that.

,
,.
estoylpensandgen~S~

I'ro not drinking as much now.

,
,
. ,
,
.
nQestoybebyendoltantQara~

,
itu1

prf1nlestastra~ujynd~

esta~studyando1

Est estudiando?

,
.
,
sttrbahandolk6msekretarya~

Est trabajando como secretaria.

Estoy pensando en eso.

CINCO

ke~stazbebynd6~

You're finaUy translating.

No estoy bebiendo tanto ahora.

y t, qu ests bebiendo?

..

Por fin ests tradu.ciendo.

13.5

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,..

,
stms.sperandS? Iesemomnto~

We're just now arriving.

,
,.
~a~star.lOz

How long have you been living here?

,
.,.,
dzdkwand~ lestamb~byend~aki~

We're waiting far that momento

Estamos esperando ese momento.

Ity egnd6

Ya estamos llegandoo

Desde cundo estn viviendo aqu?

How those brunettes are dancing!

,
, .,
,..
kOffiQestambaylandQ leSazffiOrns~

10

Cmo estn bailando esas morenas!

EXTRAPOLA TION

estr

/-ndo/

,
-ar

form

-r, -r

-ndo

-yndo

sg

est6y

2 fam

ests

2-3

est

estmos

2-3

estn

pI

kom-yndo

abl-ndo
b~b-yndo

NOTES

13.6

The progressive construction consists of a conjugated form of the verb

bo

/-ndo/ forms

/estr/

plus the

/-ndo/

farm 01 the verbo

are invariable,that is. they never innect lor number, gender, etc.

SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

13.21.11 Suhstitution drills - Person-number substitution

,
,
eO~os lstmbskandQ Iapartamnt~

...

hwan
,
,
k arme n.J.!:l o

stectes

stmbskand~lapartamnt~

..
, .

stybskandQlapartamnto~
,
stbskand9lapartamnt~
,
,
stamoz IbskandQlapartamnt~

!:lO

,
,
~ol~st6ytrbhand~l6r~
,

nosotros
,
tu

---------

,
estmostrbhandQl6r~

eststrbh~nd9I6r~

1 EUos estn buscando apartamento.

y 0'---

Jua_D

Carmen y yo'

Uds.

Estoy buscando apartamento.

Est buscando apartamento.
Estamos buscando apartamento.

Estn buscando apartamento.

2 Yo estoy trabajando ahora.

SIETE

Nosotros

Estamos trabajando ahora.

Ests trabajando ahora.

13.7

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

karmen

+
+

sted'

esttrabhand9la6ra+
,

esttrabahand9/a6ra+

,
,
karmenlestprendyendomch6+
,

~o

sted'es

,
tu

nosotros

Ud.
Carmen

estoylprndyendomch+

+
+
+

stan/prendyendomch6+

estas/aprendyendomch+
,
,
estamoslprendyendomcho+

Est trabajando ahora.

Est trabajando ahora.

3 Carmen. est aprendiendo mucho.

yo

Udso

T
Nosotros'---

13.8

Estoy aprendiendo mucho.

Estn aprendiendo mucho.
Ests aprendiendo mucho.

Estamos aprendiendo mucho.

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

.,
el

stakomynd6

~o

estoy~omynd~

eO~as

staIJkomynd~

sted

estakomynd~

,
5

.
.

hwa~~sta~skr~bynd6~

st~nl~skr~bYnd6
,.
. .

eO~os

el~~o

"

estamosleskr1bynd

karmeruhwan

~o

est~nl~skr~bYnd~
"
.
.

stoyleskr1bynd~

4 Juan y Car-men estn comIendo.

EI

yo

Est comiendo.
Estoy comiendo.

Ellas,

--'

Ud.

Estn comiendo.
Est comiendo.

5 Juan est escribiendo.

Ello,Q.,s
El y yo

NUEVE

_
-#

Estn escrIbiendo.
Estamos escribIendo.

Carmen y Juan _ _

Estn escribiendo.

y0

Estoy escribiendo.

13.9

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

e onstruction s ubstitution
,

tomQgwa~

st6yt6mandQgw
,

",

prnunjyazbyn

..

1~mpyan~ldorm1t6ry6

. .

bib1mos.enlas.afwrs~

skr~bQenlasl+

. .

..

stnlimpyandQleldorm1t6ry~
,
.
stamoz IbibyendQe~la~afwrs
,
.
st6yskribyend~enlasl~

"..
.

.. .
bebenlagwam1nerl+

stmbbyend~lagwam1nerl+

komepk+

stkrnyendop6k+

,.

1 Tomo agua.

13.10

stsprnn~yandobyn~

Pronunc~as

,...

Estoy tomando agua.

bien.

Ests pronunciando bien.

3 Limpl.an el dormitorio.

Estn limpiando el dormitorio.

4 Vivimos en las afueras.

Estamos viviendo en las afueras.

5 Escribo en la sala.

Estoy escribiendo en la sala.

6 Beben agua mineral.

Estn bebiendo agua mineral.

7 Come poco.

Est comiendo poco.

DIEZ

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANlSH

13.21.12 Response drill

,.

estnsbyend+
,

estlimpyand+

st~st~hyendQtokomynd~

stykmyend+

kesta~yendQl~
,.
,
kestana~yendQ~s~
,
,
kestayendQust~

[skribyend~J 7

(bebiendo)
(trabajando)
(escrIbiendo)

ONCE

,
stm~st4yand+

st~~labandQtol~mpynd

[trabhandJ

,...

[bbyend+]

stn~ste~esltrbahandotQestu4ynd~
,
stn.OO~zbhand9tosuhynd+
,
.

,.

stbbyend6+
,

S t n t r ah h and +
,
est6yeskribyend+

1 Estn Uds. trabajando o estudiando?

Estamos estudiando.

2 Estn ellos bajando o subiendo?

Estn subIendo.

3 tEst ella lavando o lImpiando?

Est limpiando.

4 Est Ud. bebiendo o comIendo?

Estoy comiendo.

5 Qu est haciendo l?

Est bebiendo.

6 Qu estn haciendo ellos?

Estn trabajando.

7 Qu est haciendo Ud.?

Estoy escribiendo.

13.11

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

.
stnstctzhhyendot
,
.

[trabahand~]

10

n01

stmskmyend~

stn.~as.std"yandot

no+

stntrabahand~

,
.
st~std"lmrandot

,,

si+
,

,
st6ylmr~and~

,..

S1+ estblandgeSpaQy61~

11

staellblndQ~spaQyolt
,
,
,

12

stastul9prndyndmuchot

si~ stoylaprendyendomch6~

13

stharryendQeyat

S1+ stbrryend~

(comiendo)
(trabajando)

13.12

,
[kmyend~]

,..,.

8 EstAn Uds. bebiendo?

No, estamos comiendo.

9 EstAn ellas estudiando?

No, estn trabajando.

10 Est Ud. almorzando?

Si, estoy almorzando.

11 Est' l hablando espaiiol?

S, est hablando espaol.

12 Estais t ap-endiendo mucho?

Si, estoy aprendiendo mucho.

13 Est barriendo ella?

Si, est barriendo.

DOCE

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

13.21.13 Translation drill

. .

1 I'm working at the Embassy.

st6ytrbahandQlenlembah4a~

Estoy trabajando en la Embajada.

2 We're living downtown.

,
stmzbibyendQlen~l~ntr~

Estamos viviendo en el centro.

3 They're writing now.

,
st~skribyendQlr~

Estn escribiendo ahorao

4 I'm lookng at the glasses.

st6ybyendolazgfs~

,
Estoy viendo las gafaso

,.
,
kyen~staayamnd~

Quin est llamando?

6 Where 5 re you living?

,
,.
dondestab1bynd~

7 What are you aIl learnng?

kestan~prendynd~

Dnde est viviendo?

Qu estn aprendiendo?

8 What time are they arriving

(these days)?

9 The girl is making (fixing) the

heds.
10 We're speaking less English.

11 I'm not giving (any) tips

(these days) o

TRECE

,
. ,
k~or~lestan~egnd~

lmch~ch~lstrrgl~ndolaskms~

. ,..

,
stmsblandolmenos~~91s~

A qu hora estn llegando?

La muchacha est arreglando las

camas.
Estamos hablando menos ingls.

No estoy dando propinas.

13.13

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

.,..

12 They're always studying.

syempr~lestan~stu~ynd~

13 He's going up in the elevator.

estsbyendQ len.elas(r) ens6r~

B.

...

Siempre estn estudiando.

Est subiendo en el ascensor.

Discussion of pattern

The progressive c onstruction in Spanish is closely paralleled by a similar construction in English, composed of a form of the verb be plus
the -ing form of a verb: 'I'm going, he's going,' etc.
In Spanish the progressive construction consists of a form of the verb /estr/and the /-ndo/form of a verb, arranged together in a
close construction which only rarely admits the appearance of any form intervening between them. In the comparable English c onstruction, the
relationship of the constituents is not so close; 'He's just now ating' in Spanish would be /y~stkomyndo/, rather then * /esty
komyndo/.
The English -ing form can be made plural, as in Chis comings and goings', but the /-ndo/ form in Spanish is invariable -it never
changes or inflects for number, gender, etc. Analytically the /-ndo/ form is cIassed as a verb element in verb constructions, or as a verb
modifier, a function cIass of words which typical1y do not inflect: /estudyndomcho Is~aprndemcho/.
While /estr/is most frequently the conjugated verh that appears in the construction 'verh plus /-ndo/', others, such as /andr,
/benr, Q)yegr, i r , segr/ ,appear with/-ndo/forms with different but related meanings. Thus:

13.14

/estn-aprendyndo~/

'They're learning'.

/bn-aprendyndo/

'They're beginning to learn'.

/ndan-aprendyndo/

'They're (out) learning'.

/sgen-aprendyndo/

'They're still learning'.

CATORCE

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

Usually the Spanish construction appears in contexts where the same Enghsh construction would be appropriate. One important
exceptiol1 is the use of the progressivp constructlon in Enghsh wlth reference to future time. l1's qUlte normal in English to say 'Be's
commg tonight' ~ but in Spanish
es tb1ny nd2 s tanchel /would never occur (simple present would); the construction
lS hmited to present or cllStomary actions.

*/

13.21.2

Possessive constructions with

/de/

A. Presentation ol patlern

lLLUSTRATIONS

. ..

Ths is our: pat"t

,
. .,
1 est~ezlapartel~enos6trs~

Pardn, is this your book?

Esta es la parte de nosotros.

Perdone, 'es ste el libro de

usted?
Come in; that's your tableo

Ade lante; aqu Ha es la mesa de

..

His car is excellent.

4 lwtdelleaeks(~elnt

small

Their furniture is expeD.sive~

QUINCE

El auto de- l es excelente.

pequeo

,
Her room is very small.

ustedes.

,..

5 lkwrtd~~JzmuypekQy6~

El cuarto de ella es muy pequeo.

Los mueb les de e llos s on caros.

13.15

UNIT 13

Please hand me their

(goblets).

SPOKEN SPANISH

(f)

glasses

,...,.

porfaLdr pasemelaskopaza~as

,
,
elapartmentoldelseqyormolna

. . .

,
9

El apartamento del
Es la hija

EXTRAPOLA TION

del seor

de la casa.

Construetions

Forms
la-ks a-ma (e)

1 a-k s a-s y a

Molina.

Possessives

la--ksa-tya

seor

de ellas.

ezl~lhaldelsQyor~elaksa

la--ksa-nwstra

Por favor, pseme las copas

(a)
la-k s a-de-nos 6tros (b)
(a)
la-ksa-de-ustd
la-ksa-de-ustdes
la-ksa-de-l

1 a-k s a-d e-Q)y a

la-ks a-de-Q)yos
la--ksa-de~)yas

NOTES

a. Possessive eonstruetions equivalent to Imi o/and / ty o/ do not oeeur.

b. The phrase /de-nos6tros/as part of a possessive eonstruction oeeurs more frequently than /nwstro/ in eertain dialeet areas.
e. For /la--ksa-ma/ etc., read also /el-lbro-mio/ ,/las-ksas-mas/, and /los-lbros-mos/.
13.16

DIECISEIS

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH
13.21.21 Substitution drlll -

Construction substitution

Problem:

. .,.

esezlam1gas~

est~e(s) sukw~nt

Answer:

. .,.

es~ezlam1gadl

,
..,..
est2fezlakwentad~ust~

Problem.
Esa es la amiga s uya. (de 1)
Esta es su cuenta.

(de Ud.)

Answer:
Esa es la amiga de l.
Esta es la cuenta de Ud.

DIECISIETE

13.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,
est~ezlarropas~~

2
3

este(s) sumalta~

ese(s} suf amly~

..

.,
.
lprtmentodeO~~ lezgrnd~
"
lnobyad~uste~lezbont~
~

ln~by~s~~~I~zb~nt~

~st~l~zl~rr~p~d~~stds~
~

lpartm~nt~s~~QI~zgrnd~

13.18

[destedes~J

[d~steds~]

,
[d~~J

. .

. .

~st~l~zl~m~l~t~d~~stds~
s l~zl~f~mlY~~O~~

1 Esta es la ropa s uya. (de Uds.)

Esta es la ropa de Uds.

2 El apartamento s uyo es grande. (de ella)

El apartamento de ella es grande.

3 La novia s uya es bonita. (de Ud.)

La novia de Ud. es bonita.

Esta es s u maleta. (de Uds.)

Esta es la maleta de Uds.

Esa es s u familia. (de ella)

Esa es la famila de e 11a.

DIECIOCHO

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

. . , .
estaslso(~nwestrasf6tos~
, . .
,

s~am19~eskasd~
,.

. .

[dnsotrs'']
,
(del~

,
,.

ss.am1go(s)son301trost

[deD\l~ ]

st~ks*fst~l~d~rch~

[deCt\#.s ~ ]

DIECINUEVE

estasfsonlsfotoz6enos6trs.a.

lmgdeleskas4.a.
,.
,
.

ls~m190z~~~alsonsoltrs~

lt k s id e'l~ os les tal ad: e r eh.a.

6 Estas son nuestras fotos. (de nosotros)

Estas son las fotos de nosotros.

7 S u amiga es casada. (de 1)

La amiga de l es casada.

8 Sus amigos son solteros. (de ella)

Los amigos de ella son solteros.

9 Su taxi est a la derecha. (de ellos)

El taxI de ellos est a la derecha.

13.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

13.21.22 Translation <kiU

. . .

1 Their apartment is nice.

,
lprtmento'de~as lezhont~

El apartamento de ellas es bonito.

2 Her famdy is very large.

La familIa de ella es muy grande.

3 His room (number) is fifteen.

El cuarto de l es el quince.

4 AH your friends are Americans.

. . .

Todos los amigos de Uds. son

amerIcanos.

lzml~t~z Id~st~dlsnm~yhwns~

Las maletas de Ud. son muy buenas.

amerlkns
5 Y OU1' suitca~e'" are very good.

6 HIS girl friend is Spanish.

ln6bydelle~espaQy61

7 Wt cail 9 t find her house.

no~~kontramoz IlkasadO~~

".

13.20

.,

La

nOVia

de l es espaola.

No enconLramos la casa de ella.

8 Their bedroom is small.

ldrmitoryod~os lespekQY~

El dormltono de ellos es pequeo.

9 You should see his caro

ykb~rll~wt~dl~

Hay que ver el auto de l.

VEINTE

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

B.

Discussion of pattern

A possessive construction is a phrase which consists of the phrase relator / d e/ plus a noun or a pronoun. This phrase appears
immediately after a noun (or sometimes after the verb / S r
and indicates the possessor or owner of the modified noun.

I )

In units 9 and 11 possessive forms were presented. 111 the present extrapolation the full forms are listed along with the equivalent
possessive constructions which OCCUf. As can be seen in the chart 9 the 2-3 form S y a/ is listed as the equivalent of at least s IX
constructionsc The fact that I sy al can be the equivalent of six different constructions implies that the constructions give the more definite
information. The phrases Ide-ustd, de-ll etc. are used when the context does not supply aIl the informatlOn needed to identify
the reference of the possessive. Since /syo ~ su/ most often means Ide-ustd/, the constructions /de-ustdes, de-l,
de-Q'ya, de-f.'yos, de-O.)yas/are more frequently used to refer to lyours 9 his, hers, theirs 9 than IS Isyo -- SU/ with these
meanings.

The construction Ide-nostrosl

complete excluslOn of Inws trol .

13.2L3
A.

is not used extensively in sorne dialects, but in others 9 as in Chile, it is used to the almost

Nominahzed posseSSlve constructions

PresentatlOn of pattero

ILLlJSTRATIONS
,

lmJ.Qeshwn~

,
,
.
,
,
pwedelJ.mpyarlelnwestrotambyen1

,
,
kJ.tyenezlat~~

lsu~Qezma79rnde~ no1

El mo es Juan.

..

..

Can you elean ours too?

VEINTIUNO

Puede limpiar el nuestro tambin?

Aqu tienes la tuya.

,
El suyo es ms grande,no?

13.21

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,
kat!~

each

. .

Every (man) to his own (taste).

,.
ka4fUno'konlos~~
,.

In ours there sn't much activity.

cada

enldnsotroz

Cada uno con lo s uro.

".
.
InS?aymuchomob~mynt~ En la de nosotros no hay mucho
movimiento.

-y ours is bigger, isn't it?

El de usted es ms grande, no?

In yours there's almost no activity.

nd~ ~i9walaldl~

En las de ustedes casi no hay

movmientoo

Nos es igual al de l.

,
10

zld'eO>J~ ld"karmn~

No, it's just like theirs (m).

11

no~ ti9walald~sl

They're thens, the girls'.

12

snlzdeO~s lzdlsch~ks~

13.22

,
,.
nlzd~stedes'ksinQaymob~mynt~

Es la de ella, la de. Carmen.

No, es igual al de ellos.

,
Son lGs de e IlGs J lGs de lGs e Aieas.

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

EXTRAPOLA TlON

Nomma
' 1"lze d (a)

Possessive forms and constructions

la-ksa-nwstra

la-mia (c)

(b)

1a-k s a-m a (e)

la-ksa-de-nos6tros

la-nwstra

(b)

la~e-nostros

--(b)

la-ksa-tya
la-ksa-sya

la-sya

la-ksa-de-ustd
la-ksa-de-ustdes

(b)

la-tya

la-de-ustd
la~e--ustdes

1
I

1a-d e-1

la-ksa-de-l
la-ksa~e-(':)y a

'I

1a-d e--fJ}y a

1:

1a-d e-Q)y o s

11

la-ksa~e-}os

la-de-(I)yas

1a-k s a-d e-)y a s

lo-syo
NOTES
a. Nominalization of tbese constructions is accomplished by omitting the noun.
b. Combinations which do not occur are marked by a dash.
c. For

VEINTITRES

/la-ksa-ma/ ~ /la-ma/ , etc., read

also

/el-mo/ , /las-mias/ , /los-mos/ etc~

13.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13
13.21.31 Substltutlon drill - Constructon substitutlon

Problem:

,
,
,.
lzO~bzmJ.azIno~stan.aki
Answer:

,
,.
lzmJ.az'no~stanak

,
,
lkasasu~~lestairk

.,.

,
elprtmentosu~oltyn~ozhQYs

lsu~~estairk

(
,.
,
lsu~oltynedozbQy6s

Problem:

Las llaves mas no estn aqu.

Answer:
Las mas no estn aqu.

13.24

La casa s uya est cerca.

La suya est cerca.

El apartamento suyo tiene dos baos.

El suyo tiene dos baos.

VEINTICUATRO

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
,.
,..
l(s) s J.O~ a~su~ asfs tanal1~kyrda~
"

.
lsfasu~QJesk6md

l~ht~~~lezm~yb~nta~

,.
l7mweblestu~oslsonmuybonits~

VEINTICINCO

,.

lam1alnQezbon1ta~

l~s~~~~st~~l~~ikYrda~
,

elsu~Qesk6md
"
,.

ltu~lezmuybon1ta~
, .
,.

lstu~oslsnmuybonts~

La novia ma no es bonita.

La ma no es bonita.

Las s Ulas s uyas estn a la izquierda.

Las s uyas estn a la izquierda.

El sof suyo es cmodo.

El suyo es cmodo.

La hija tuya es muy bonita.

La tuya es muy bonita.

Los muebles tuyos son muy bonitos.

Los tuyos son muy bonitos.

13.25

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

13.21.32 Translation dril!

1 There 's my car; and there 's
yours, too.

2 My family isn' t large. What

about yours?

Ah est el auto mo y el de Uds.

tambin.

,
.,.
,
,
lfm~lyam1alnQezgrnd+ ild~sted1

,
3 This lS our tableo (WhlCh is)
theirs?

,.

est~eznwestramsa+ il~eO~os1

4 This ~s John's check. (Which

lS) hers?

5 My daughter is single. What

Esta es nuestra mesa. Y la de

ellos?

,
,
.
,
est~lalcheke~ehwn~ ~ldeOOyat

,..

Friday. What about yours?

,
..,.
,.
lfam~lyadekarmenIO~eg~elbyrns+

Este es el cheque de Juan. Y el

de ella?

,
l~iham~~e(s) sol tr+ ile:teQ}Josf

about theirs?

6 Carmen's family arrives on

La familia ma no es grande. y la
de Ud.?

ild~stedest

, ..
ls.aml.gozffi10z 'Q~e9an.els bd'6+

La hija ma es soltera. Y la de
ellos?

La familia de Carmen llega el

viernes. Y la de Uds.?

,.,.

7 My frends are arriving on

Saturday. What about yours?

Los amigos mios llegan el sbado.

Y los de Ud. ?

ilzd"~stedt
8 John's apartment doesn't have
(any) gas. Does hers?

lprtm~ntd~hw~nlnty~n~9s+
,

El apartamento de Juan no tiene

gas. Y el de ella?

llde0yat
9 My girl frend is staying at the
American Hotel. Where's
yours stayng?

13.26

ln~by~m~~lst~~n~1~telaffier1kn+

La novia ma est en el Hotel

Americano. (, Y la tuya?

iltu~at
VEINTISEIS

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

B. Discussion of pattern
Possessive forms (fuH forms only) as weH as possessive constructions can occur nominalized. These nominalized constructions
serve to make a second reference to a noun which has just been mentioned or is readily understood from the contexto
The nommalization ean be viewed as the simple omission of the noun from the constI uetion. Thus / e 1-1 bro-mo/
becomes /el-;no/~ where /mio/ 9 now nominalized 9 is the head of the phrase. Note that the English equivalent ~mine~ never
occurs preceded by ~the9. In the possessive construction /e 1-1 fbro--de-ustd/ 9 the nominalized version is /e1-de-ustd/,
where / e 1/
lS the nominalized form s modified by lhe phrase / de-u s td/.
One nomrnahzed posseSSlve s /1o-syo/s may but usually does not occur as a possessive form; tbat 18 9 t usually appears only
nominalized< ThJ5 LS not surpdsmg 9 Slnee ,he neuter /1o-syo/ cannot modify a noun~ there belng no neuter nouns n Spanish. Thus

/tdos Ibn.atrar /1osyoi /

probably refers lo a group of thlllgS thought of as a eomposite whole s translatlng~They9re aH

going to bnng the ir own stuff. 9

13.21.4

Question intonaton patterns - Informaton questons

A. Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

,
1

kes.s~

,
kes.es~

231 ~
Qu es eso?

,
,.
dondesta1akh~

,
,
dondesta1akah~

VEINTISIETE

1 1 ~

Qu es eso?

1 1~

Dnde est la caja?

31

Dnde est la caja?

13.27

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,
,
komQesta~lkmby

1 2

1 ~

A cmo est el cambio?

akomQesta~lkamby6~

1 2

1~

A cmo est el cambio?

EXTRAPOLATION

Information question

InfOlmation question

empbatic

uncolored

/1211/

/1231/

NOTES
a. The iBtoaatioD patterns of iafonnatioD questiODS perallel tbose of statements.

13.28

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

13.21.41 Substitution drill- patternlsubstitution

Problem:

adondebms

Answer:

d'ondebams''

Problem:

1 2
1 l''
A dnde vamos?

Answer:

1 2
3 l''
A dnde vamos?

VEINTINUEVE

13.29

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

paraketrabahms~
,

paraketrabaham6s+

ded"ondeLynen~

dectondebyenen~

,
3

dedonders~

ded"ondres~

prkestd"yan+

p6rkestudyan~

,
ikwandoloarr91n~

ikwandolQarreglan

,~

)+

}
1
2
1 GPara qUf tr1:iba]amos?

). +

3 1

1 2
1
2 De dnrle vienen?

De dnde vienen?

} 2
1}
3 (,Dt: dnde eres

Dt. dnde e.res?

2
l ) .l.
4 GPor qu estudiao?

Por qu estudian?

1 2
:1. ) ~
5 Y cundo lo arreg~an?

y cundo 10 ar.reglan?

1 2

13~30

Para qUf trab,:tJamos?

3 1

3 )

3) ~

3 1~

TREINTA

'SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,
6

idondelozmnds~
,

id"ondelozmands~

ikomolokyrs~

ikomolokyers

, . .
ikwandolQalkiln

ikwando19alk~ln

,
9

ikwandolobms~

ikwandolohems+

,.
ictondek6men~

ikwantodehms~

ikwantodebems''

1 2
1 1
6 Y dnde los mandas?

y dnde los mandas?

1 2
1 1
7 Y cmo lo quieres?

1 2
3 1
y cmo lo quieres?

1 2
11
8 Y cundo lo alquilan?

Y cundo lo alquilan?

1 2
1 1
9 Y cundo lo vemos?

1 2
3 1
Y cundo lo vemos?

1 2
1 1 ~
10 Y dnde comen?
1

1 1

1 2

1 2

31

3 1

Y dnde comen?

11 Y cunto dehemos?

TREINTA Y UNO

idondekomen

,
11

10

3 1

Y cunto debemos?
13031

UNIT 13

B.

SPOKEN SPANISH

Discussion of pattern

Information questions are those which cannot he answered hy a simple yes or no, hut rather must he answered hy a statement. Information
questions normally hegin with a question wa.-d, equivalent to 'who, what, when, why, where,' etc. in English.
The intonation patterns appropriate for information questions are the same ones used for statements:!1211 ~
normal, and /1231 /
adds special emphasis, or in sorne cases adds the idea of politeness. When a contrast is additionally implied hy the occurrence of /ent6n~es''
after an information question, the /1231 / pattern is almost compulsory:

lis

3 1

/paraktrabahmos lent6n~es~/
1 2

3 1

/ded6ndres lent6n~es/

What are we working for, then?

Where 're you from, then?

Since these questions very often hegin with the stressed syllahle of the question word, the first nurnher of the intonation pattern formula is
ofteD lost.

13.32

TREINTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

1322

UNIT 13

Replacement drills

o.,

o,

dan lestasfyestas.ak~Iwmenudof

.,

4
5

ai en

. ,

,.

o,.

o,

o,

~~~nl~s~tr~h~hQ~~ld~h~~~IJkw~nd~t

~~~nr~s;tr~b~hQ~~lsy~mpr~t

Dan estas fiestas aqu a menudo?

1
~

de vez en cuando?

ah
tragos

Dan estas fiestas aqu de vez en cuando?

Dan estas fiestas ah de vez en cuando?

Dan estos tragos ah de vez en cuando?

4 _ _esos

5 Hacen

Hacen esos tragos ah de vez en cuando?

Hacen ese trabajo ahi de vez en cuando?

6
7

TREINTA Y TRES

aienJesostra90~alldebe~eIJkwandot

syempret

, . .

f
,

trabahS(

danJesostra90~a1'debe~eIJkwandot

_esos
,

.~,

danlestostrago~a1Idebe~eIJkwandot

tragos

.
.

,
, .. , . , ,
.
danlesiasfyesta~ak1Idebe~eIJkwandot
, ,
,
.,. , "
danlestasfyesta~a1Idebe~eIJkwandot

debeieIJkwandof

al

trabajo
siempre?

Dan esos tragos ah de vez en cuando?

Hacen ese trabajo ah siempre?

13.33

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
..
,
estalmepar~stpenda

esta7

~
v

bwens+

---------

este

-----------'

ak e 1.

ks(~ elents~

estelmpar~emal{
,

aket\]a lmepar~emal~

,
7

estemepar~bwen6~
,

mal~

~i

,
..
,
eSLazlmpar~nstpends~
,
..
,
estaz Imepar~mbwens~

11'
a"k'e\'~1az

l"""

f \
mGpare~eY).e -:;'\7)

o .,U =!') +'

L0S+I

ak~llmepr~ks(~)l~n+:e~

Esta me parece estupenda.

1 Estas
2

Estas me parecen estupendas,

buenas.

3 Este

Este me parece bueno.

malo.

5 Aquila
6

7 Aqul

Estas me parecen buenas.

Este me parece malo,

Aquella me parece mala,

ex.celente;::,

Aquella~ me parecen excelentes,

Aqu 1 me pa! ece excelente.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SpOK~N

UNIT )3

SPANlSH

chiks~

--------------akea\l as_ _
_~

flhatelkomQestambaylandQlake0~aschks~

____________~bebyendQ

f~h~t~lk~mQ~st~mb~by~ndQI~k~Q~~schks~

_______________ seQy6r~

flhatelkomgestabebyendQlakelseQyr~

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ablandQ

f~b~t~lk~mQ~st~bl~ndQI~k~ls~Qy6r~

______~koDkyen

flhatelkoDkyen~staLlandQlakelseQy6r~

______________seQy6rs~

O"

,.

O'

~"

,.,

, .

o""

O".

"

"O,

O"

."

flhatelkoDkye~esta~ablandQlakeO~~~eQy6rs~

Fjate cmo est bailando esa morena$

Fjate cmo estn baIlando esas chicas.
Fljate cmo estn bailando aquellas chicas.
Fjate cmo estn bebIendo aquellas chicas.
Fjate cmo est bebiendo aquel seor.
Fjate cmo est hablando aque 1 seor.
Fjate con quin est hablando aquel seor.
Fjate con quin estn hablando aquellos
seores ..

TREINTA Y CINCO

13.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

ezl~~haldelseQyordelaks~

__ lhaz

__ amlgo

_otro

r.::

s6mos

.J

,
"

seQyorez

,
seQyora

..
...

s6nls~haz

alb~~g~/dlseQy;r~d~1~k5~

~otramlgoldelsQyoraa-elaksa~

~
~

,
/a-elaseQyoraaelaksll.J.

.,.
, . . .
, . .,.
, . . .
s6mos.otros arnJ.goz IdelsQyoraaelaks a~
,
. . , .
,.
..
,

s6m6s~tros lamJ.goz /dl(~seQyorezdelaksa~

s6y~tr9.~m~g~lael(~sQy;r~zu~1~ksa~

Es la hija del seor de la casa.

1 _ _ hijas
2

Son las hijas del seor de la casa.

seora

Son las hijas de la seora de la casa.

3 ._ _ amigo.

Es el amigo de la seora de la casa

4 _otro

Es otro amigo de la se ora de la casa.

5 Smos

Somos otros amigos de la seora de la casa.

7 Soy

13.36

s6nl~~lhaz Idels&Qyordelaks~~

s6y

seores

Somos otros amigos de los seores de la casa.

Soy otro amigo de los seores de la casa.

TREINTA Y SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH
;'

UNIT 13
o ,

0,/

esekepasa Ip6ra1 ts.elk6r6nelhrris~

,

__________~seQyora

'0.

C1'

esakepasalp6raltzlasQyorama~

---------------:--_-.-

ma~

o,

ji

esekepasalp6ralt~&lam190m1~
,

.,

,.

akeO~os Ikepasan Iperal tsnls.mJ.gozmes~

,

. , . ,

,.

akeQ}jos Ikepasan IpraJ. ts6n.ns,amJ.c.;ozms~

k~~~s Ik~p~s~n Ip6r~t sn~ns.amlgo:)s~bs~

________________s~6s~

Ese que pasa por ah es e 1 Corone 1 Harris.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _seora

2 ------3 --4 Aqullos

_
ma.

amgo_

5 ---------unoo-s

TREINrA Y SIETE

..

,
,,
,.
keQ~alkepasalpr1ts~nmlgas~a~

___________a.mJ.ga

....

Esa que pasa por ah es la seora Harris.

Esa que pasa por ah es la seora ma.
Ese que pasa por ah es el amigo mo.
Aqullos que pasan por ah son los amigos
mos.
Aqu 11 os que pasan por ah son unos amgos
mos.

6 -------------suyos.

Aqullos que pasan por ah son unos amigos

suyos.

7 - - - - - - - - - - a m g a_ _

Aqulla que pasa por ah es una amiga suya.

13.37

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

"
akltyenezlat~~

F
1

______t~O

__~sta.

------.-;ms+

,..

ak1tyene~elt6~+

ak1~sta~lt~o+

"

k~estanlazm1as
'"
"

"

a~~stanlazmas

5
6

nw~strs

=----~--=~

l'

t'

a1.estaelnwstr~
~
""

Aqu tienes la tuya.

fuyO.

2 _ _eS!d

4 Ah

Aqu est el tuyo.

mas.

Aqu estn las mas.

Ah estn las mas.

-:otras_.

Aqu tIenes el tuyo.

13.38

a1~staniotrazmas~
,
,.
"
a1~stanlotroznwstrs

otra z~~

_ - =_ _

Ah estn otras mlas.

nuestros.
el

Ah estn otros nue.stros.

Ah est el nuestro.

TREINFA Y OCHO

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANlSH

13,23

Variai Ion dnlls

No~

slo de vez en cuando.

Por qu?

"..

1 No, just on Sundays. Why?

n~ 5010107" omI)gs~

2 No, just on Fridays. Why?

n.1.

3 Nos just on Saturdays. Why?

no-~

4 No, just in the morning. Why?

no1

5 No, just at night. Why?

no

6 No, just in the afternoon. Why?

001 sol~enlatr~e

7 No, just in the room. Why?

no

,
,

TREINTA Y NUEVE

".

,
porke-

,
prke.t.

~01olo7t'y4rns~

No~

slo los domingos. Por qu?

No~

slo los viernes. Por qu?

,..

501010(5) sbaaS~ -,ol:(el.

,

. . .

sol~enlamaQyna

. .

sol~en1an6ch~

,
sol~e~elkw~rtt

,
prke

No, slo los sbados. Por qu?

No, slo en la maana. Por qu?

prket

No, slo en la noche. Por qu?

porkt

No, slo en la tarde. Por qu?

,
prk~

No, slo en el cuarto. Por qu?

13.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

,
, ,
,.
B kwidad noba~as'mterlapt~

CUIdado, no vayas

fl

loeter la pata'

1 Careful, don't go eat that!

,
, ,
,
kwidad~ noba~aslkmersO~

Cuidado, no vayas a comer eso!

2 Careful, don't go see that!

,
, ,.
,
kwidad6~ noba~as'berso~

Cuidado, no vayas a ver eso!

3 Careful, don't go drink that!

,
, ,
,
kwidado~ noba~asfabbers

Cuidado, no vayas a beber eso!

4 Careful, don,t go do that!

,
, ,.
,
kwidad noba~asla~ers~

Cuidado, no vayas a hacer esor

5 Careful, don 't go say that!

kwidad noba~asladei1rs

6 Careful, don't go buy that!

kwidad~ noba~as'akmprar~s6~

Cuidado, no vayas a comprar eso!

7 Careful, don't go try that!

,
".
,
kwi6ad6~ noba~aslprbar~s

iCudado, no vayas a probar esol

13.40

, ,

"

,
,CUIdado, no vayas a decir eso!

CUARENTA

SPOKEN SPANISH
I

UNIT 13
, . ,

ffiJ.ra.l. yokreJ.a Ikls.rnrikanos lrnrnstraIJkJ.ls~

Mira, yo crea que los americanos eran

ms tranquilos.

.,.

1 Say, 1 thought (the) apartments

were more expensive.

2 Say, 1 thought (the) hotels were

more expensive.

,
,
,
rnJ.r~ yokreJ.alklb~prtAmentosl
,
rnmskaros

Mira, yo crea que los apartamentos eran

ms caros.

,
,
.,.
,
rnJ.r yokreJ.alkelbspteleslrn
,

Mira, yo crea que los hoteles eran ms

caros.

rnskars~

3 Say, 1 thought (the) restaurants

were less expensive.

4 Say, 1 thought (the) houses were

cheaper.

5 Say, 1 thought the rooms were

bigger.

,
,. ,
,
rn~r ~okreJ.alkelzrrestoranesl
,
rnrnzbarat6s

,
,.,
,
m~r ~okreJ.alkelskasasl~rn

,
rnzbratas

,
, .,.
,.
rnJ.ra ~okre~alkeloskwartosl~ran
,
rnzgrandes~

,
6 Say, 1 thought the embassy was
prettier.

7 Say, 1 thought the downtown was

nicer.

CUARENTA Y UNO

.,.

Mira, yo crea que los restoranes eran

ms baratos.

Mira, yo crea que las casas eran ms

baratas.

Mira, yo crea que los cuartos eran ms

grandes.

rn~r ~okreJ.alklernbAhadlrA

,
mzbnJ. t

,
, .,.
,
mJ.r ~okreJ.alkel~entr9Ir
,
mzbnJ. t

Mira, yo crea que la embajada era ms

bonita.

Mira, yo crea que el centro era ms

bonito.

13.41

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

,.

.,

. .

D bamosl~ebarnozlask6ps~

Vamos a llevarnos las copas.

. .

1 Let's take our chair.

,.
.,
bamos IaG)~ebarnozlasO)~.J.

2 Let 's take our pen.

,.
., .
bamos IaO~ebarnoz laplm

3 Let's take our newspaper.

,.
bamas laQ~ebarnos~lpery6Qik~

4 Let's take our car.

bamos IlCWebarnos.elwt+

5 Let's take our shirts.

,.
bamas llCWebarnozlaskamsas,J,

6 Let's take our suits.

. .,
bamas IaO~ebarnaz los trhes~

7 Let's take our furniture.

,.
.,
bamos I aa~ebarnazlozmwbles~

,.

.",

ti'

.",

Vamos a llevarnos la pluma.

Vamos a llevarnos el peridico.

Vamos a llevarnos el auto.

. . .

Vamos a llevarnos las camisas.

. .

",.

13.42

Vamos a llevarnos la silla.

Vamos a llevarnos los trajes.

. .

Vamos a llevarnos los muebles.

CUARENTA Y DOS

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

..

,
,
notekomfndas+ zladeO~a~
,
laaekarrnen~

1 Don't get them mixed. That's

No te confundas. Es la de ella, la de
Carmen.

notekomfndas~ z laQeO~\j.~

hers, Bertha's.

. .

No te confundas. Es la de ella, la de
Berta.

2 Don't get them mixed. That's

his, Jose's.

notekomfnds~

3 Don't get them mixed.

notekor:1fndas~ ezlaehwah~

,
le:tebert

ezlde1J lactehse'''

. .

No te confundas. Es la de l, la de
Jos.

No te confundas. Es la de Juan.

That's John's.

,
4 Don't get them mixed. That's
(m) hers.

. .

notekoiClfndas~

.
notekomf6nds-l.
,

5 Don't get them mixed. That's

,
es.ldeG.M-!-

No te confundas. Es el de ella.

,
es.elde0Ms~

No te confundas. Es el de ellas.

(m) the irs ({).

.
notekornfnds-l.
,

6 Don't get them mixed. That's

(ro) theirs (m),

7 Don't get them roixed. They're (ro)

,
es.elde0'ys-l.

No te confundas. Es el de ellos.

notekornfndas'' snlzcieQ~5''

No te confundas. Son los de ellos.

theirs.

CUARENTA Y TRES

13.43

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

bwenolchkas~ kmperm1S0+

Bueno p chicas. Con permiso. En

seguida vohemos.

, . .
nsg1dabolbm6s+

,
1 Wdl you guls excuse us ?
We~ll be back tomOITOw.

bwenolchkas~ kmprm1S~
, .. ..

Bueno r chIcas. Con permIso.

Maana volvemos.

maQyanabolbms+
,

,
2 WJlll you gTrls eXCUl:tt:' Ul:t?
We~ll be back Mondar.

bwenlchkas+ kmprm1S+

Bueno; chl~as. Con permiSO.

El lunes volvemos.

..

elune"7bolbmos+
,

3 W\ yon gll"ls ex-cuse us?

We >ll be back sorne m.her
day.

bwen6lchks~ krnperm1s6~
,

bwenlmchchs+ k6mprm1S+
,

dspwezbolbmos+
,
5 Well gentlemen, we' II be
back tomght.

BUt:no< eh t;a.,. Con perml:9o.

Otro dla volve-mos.

t11abolbrnos
,

4 WIU you boys excuse us?

We 'U be back latero

otro

Buenos muchachos. Con permiso.

Despus volvemos.

..

bwenlsQyres+ stanochebolbms+
, . .
bwenlsQy6rs+ sttaraebolbms+

Bueno, seores. Esta noche

volvemos.

6 Wellladies, we'll be back

this afternoOD.

,
7 Well Charles, we'll be back
in the morning.

13.44

Bueno, se<ras. Esta tarde

volvemos.

. .

bwenlkrls+ nlmQyanabolbmst

Bueno, Carlos. Maana volvemos.

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH
1324

UNIT 13
placeme nt o negative particle

"

1 rm not married.

nosoykasc!~

2 Pro nm: single.

nosoysoltr~

3 Pro not Spanish.

nosoyespaQy61~

4 Pro nor American.

nosoyamer1kn~

"

6 Pm not ready.

8 rro nor sorofortble.

rm not busyc

No soy ameri.:ano.

No soy ingMs,

,
No estoy l;sto.

no~stoYl'6r""6i

No e~toy Rocdo.

,
,
no~stoyk6m6d~

No estoy l.modo.

,
9

No soy f;spaol.

no~stoylst''

No soy soltero.

nosoYJ.I)glsi
,

No soy casadov

no~stoyokupd"o''

No estoy ocupado.

10 Pro not helpingo

,
no~stoya~uetnd~

11 rro not studymg,

,
no~stoyestu~yndo~

] 2 Pro nor learmng

,
,.
no~stoyaprendynd6~

13 Pro not wntlng.

no~stoyeskrltynd~

No

eSTOY

ayudando

No estoy estudiando.

CUARENTA Y CINCO

,.

No esloy aprendiendo.

No estoy e~crlb~endo.

13.45

UNIT 13

13.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

CONVERSATION STlMULUS

NARRAT/VE 1

.,..

1 This is not Juan's glass.

estalngezlakopadehwn~

2 If it isn't Juan's, it must be

Jose 's.

sinQezladehwantdebeserladehos~

3 Yes, it's his.

S 1

4. Juan is drinking 'cuba libre.' -

hwanlstbbyendolkuba11br~

5 He isn't dancing.

no~stabaylndo

6 He's waiting for his Httle

chubby girl.

st~sprandQlasugOrd1t~

..

,.,

S, es la de l.

,.

Juan est bebiendo cuba libre.

,.

..

No est bailando.

...

ea~esta~nlako~1n~dand1
,
. .,
,

Est esperando a su gordita.

..

alaseQyoradelakasl~erunostr90s

13.46

Si no es la de Juan, debe ser la de

Jos.

...

ez lel

7 She 's in the kitchen helping the

hostess fix sorne drinks.

Esta no es la copa de Juan.

Ella est en la cocina, ayudando a

la seora de la casa a hacer unos
tragos.

CUARENTA Y SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 13

DIALOG 1

.."

J os ~ pregnte le a Juan
si sta es su copa o la de

s~statukop~folam~

Jos~

tEs ~sta tu copa o la

ma?

l.

Juan~

,contstele que dehe ser

la de l. Que Ud. est he~
hiendo cuba lihre.

'"

Juan: Dehe ser la'tuya. Yo

estoy hehiendo cuba
lihre.

kubalbre~

'"

'"
J OSt ~ pregnte le a Juan que
por qu no est haLlando.

Jos; Porqu no ests

hailando?

Juan~

L ontstele que Ud. est

esperando a su gordita.

Juan 1 ~ontstele qUe c~t en

la COCiDa ayudando a la
seora de la casa a hacer
unos tragos.

CUARENTA Y SIETE

stysprandQam1qOr~1t~

J OSt, pregnte le que dndt:;

e5t ella.

Juan: Estoy es'perando a mi

gordita.

dond es t aD}j a~

st~nlk~~n~~rt~nd~lalasQyr

,
.,..
dlkas~la~erunostrgs~

Jos: Dnde est ella?

Juan: Est en la cocina ayudando

a la seora de la casa a
hacer unos tragos.

13.47

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

NARRAr/VE 2

,.
1 There' s a br.unette dancing
in front of Juan and J ose.

2 She's Colonel Harris' secretary.

ynamrena/baylandQlrnfrnt
tthwan.lhos+
,
.
,
ezlasekrtaryalrtlkrnelhrris~

,
3 Juan likes her. He thinks sht:;'s

lepare~estupnda+

hwanlegsta+

Jos no la (on()cf.- muy b:en.

Vr'j

.?

JOSE:' &

A Juan le gusta. Le parece

estupenda.

4 Jose dOEsn't know h(;'r

welL

ShE ~s

Es la secretaria del Coronel

Harris.

terrific.

5 But

Hay una morena bailando enfrente

de Juan y Jos.

a friend of Carmt':\. ~
fIUn(:~(.

.,t1\

Per9e',I,~~

..

'.

,.

les,am1.gad"e

k armen~
I

lanobyadehos''
,

Pero e Ha P-S arnlga de Carrnr:n,

la novia de Jos <

6 Her name is Cee iLa.

s!1ombres (~) e~ ly+

Su nombre e~ Cecilia,

7 Juan wants to meet her.

,
hwaDkyerekono~rla~

Juan quiere conocerla.

8 But he can't now.

prQaoralnopwd~

~...

9 He 's waiting Cor bis Hule

cbubby girl.

13.48

Pero ahora no puede.

...

st~sprandQlasugordt~

Est esperando a su gordita.

CUARENTA

Y OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

10 ShhhCarefulao. Here
she comes.

UNIT 13

,
,
shhl kwi~ad~ ak1byn~

i Shhh ! cuidadoaqu viene.

DIALOG 2
,.,

Juan, pregntele a Jos que

quin es esa mocena que est
bailando enfrente de Uds.

..

...

mfrentedenos6tr6s~

,
Jos, contstele que es la
secretaria del Coronel
Harris. Pregntele que
por qu, que si le gusta.

prke~

tegustat

Jos: Es la secretaria del

Coronel Harris. Por qu~
te gusta?

, .
mepare~~lstpend~ tlakono~est

Jos 9 dgale que no muy bien.

Pero que Carmen es amiga
de ella. Pregntele a Carmen
si no es as.

Juan: Quin es esa morena que

est bailando enfrente
de nos otros?

zlskretaryaldlk6r6nelhrris~
,
,.

Juan, contstele que le parece

estupenda. Pregntele si l
la conoce.

,.,

,.

kyen~~esamorenalkestabayland21
,

..,.

, ,
,
nomuybym~prkarmenle~am1gada~~
,
,
.

nQs,s1lkarment

Juan: Me parece estupenda. T

la conoces?

Jos: No muy bien. Pero Carmen

es amiga de ella. No
es as, Carmen?

,
Carmen, pregntele a Jos que
qUin.

CUARENTA Y NUEVE

kyent

Carmen: QUln?

UNIT 18

SPOKEN SPANISH
IJ

Jos, dgale que Cecilia, la

morena que est bailando
enfrente de Uds"

Carmen, contstele que claro,

que ella y Ud. son muy
buenas amigaso Pregntele
a Juan que si quiere con()ca
cerla.

amigas~ kyerekono~erlalhwant

,..

Carmen: Claro, ella y yo somos

muy buenas amigas"
Quiere conocerla, Juan?

s~i perQaoranopw~~
tfl

Jos&: Cecilia, la morena que est

bailando enfrente de nOe
sotros.

kl~r ~~~~~~Jsmzm~ybw~na~

st6y

esperandQam~gordita~

Jos, dgale a Juan que Ud. lo

emfrentedenos6tros~

Juan, contstele que s, pero

que ahora no puede. Dgale
que est esperando a su
gordita"

..

~~11ya~ lamrenalkestbay1and21

Juan: S, pero ahora no puedo.

Estoy esperando a mi
gordita.

lsyentornch''

Jos: Lo siento mucho.

siente mucho.

Juan, dgale que Ud., tambin.

Ahora dgale que shh que
cuidado....que aqu viene ..

Carmen, dgale a Jos que no

vaya a meter la pata.

13.50

~otambynf

shlkwiaa42.l.

Juan: Yo tarnbien" Shh......

cuidadou.aqu viene ..

Carmen: No vay~ a meter la

pata, Jos ..

CINCUENTA

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

NARR4TIVE 3

, .

1 The lude fat gaPs name

IS

Luz.

2 Luz wants to know what Juan~

J ose ~ and Carmen are talklllg
about.

3 They're talking aboutoo. 1 he party ~

says Juan. He thlllk]s H,'S very

4 And 1t'S really ten'1fi\,.

CINCUENTA Y UNO

Luz qUIere saber de qu estn

hablando Juan r Jos y Carmen.

hwanlhoselkrmen+
,..

hwn~ lpare~elkstmuytont~

Esrn hablando de la fiesta,

dice Juan. Le parece que e
muy bomla.

,
,
*nrr~lidadtst~stpenda+

y en

ID

real~dad

est estupenda.

. .

hwaijlkyrbylrestalkonli+

,
6 They'll be back right away.

El nombre de la gordita es Luz.

"0'.

o,

lUikyeresaberldekestan~blandol

,
5 Juan wants to dance this one
wth Luz.

elnombreldlagrd1t~lezl~~

Juan quiere bailar sta con Luz.

nsgldabwlbn+

En seguida vuelven.

13.51

UNIT 13

SPOKEN SPANISH

DIALOG 3

.,

".,.

Luz, dgales 'hola' a ellos. Pregnteles si Ud. puede saber de qu

estn hablando.

ola+ pweoo5aberldekestanp blandot

Juan, contstele que estn hablando

de la fiesta. Dgale que est
bonita, que si no le parece.

5tmb~iblandodel lAfye5t~~
,
,

stbn1ta
,

Luz, contstele que s, que en

realidad est estupenda.

Juan, pregntele si quiere bailar sta.

..

ntpAre~et

,.
"
kyerezbaylarestat

Luz: Encantada.

13.52

Luz: S, en realidad est estupenda.

Juan: Quieres bailar sta?

Luz, dgale que encantada.

Juan, dgales a Jos y a Carmen que

con permiso. Que en seguida
vuelven.

Juan: Estamos hablando de .la

fiesta. Est bonita, no te
parece?

511 nrr~alidaQle5t~5tpendA~

Luz: Hola. Puedo saber de qu

estn hablando?

kOmperm1S0+

..

n5eg1aabolb~mbs+

Juan: Con permiso. En seguida

volvemos.

CINCUENTA Y DOS

U]\TIT ) 4

SPOKEN SP AN,SH

14.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

Colonel Harris talks about his family's arrival.

Colonel Harris is speaking to Molina and White after the introductions.

AID TO LISTENING

ENGLISH SPELLING

SPANISH SPELLING

kntento''

satisled, e ontented

contento

Wlute

Wh"te

Are yon enjoymg

Colonel? (1)

lt

here,

Hartis
Yes, very much so.

(,Est .:ontento aqu, cOlond ?

,
S1+

Ha.,,s
S, muy contento.

muylkntnt.l.
,

dma"s.l.

besldes

BeSIdes, my family arr~yes

tomorrow.

adems

"

dmast mQyanat~9amifm11y''

Adem&, maana llega mi

famll~a.

,
(they) come (to come)

byenn.l. ben1r.l.

Vienen (venir)

the boat

l-bark.l.

el barco

m-barko''

by boat

Wh"te
Are they coming by boat?

UNO

..

,
,
byenenembarkot

en barco

White
Vienen en barco?

14J

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

,
(they're) go(ing) to come

ban.ahenr~

van a venir

l-byoh~

el avin

pr-byoh~

por aVin

the plane

by plane

Harris

n01

No, they're coming by plane.

,
,
bn~bn1rlpratyon~

Harris

No, van a venr por avin.

la-swegr-!.

the mother-in-law

la suegra

to make dizzy

marear

,
s-mre~~ mrears~

herself (she) gets seasick (to get seasick)

,.

My mother-in-Iaw gets seasick

In

a ship.

se marea (marearse)

miswegra Ismre~er.brko~

MI suegra se marea en barco.

Whae

Whae
Oh, your ITlother - in -law's cOImng t:oo?

Ah, viene su suegra tambin?

the wife

la esposa

the chIld

el lllo

Harns

Harris

Yes, she's commg with my wlfe and

the children. (2)

S, viene con mi esposa y con

los nios.

ikanlzn1QYos
the son

14.2

el hijo

DOS

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH
White
How many children do you have?

.,

White
Cuntos hijos tiene?

kwanto~hosltyne~

,
el-barn~

the male

el varn
la nia

the (small) girl

Harris

Three, two boys and a girl.

Malina
(3)
Do you have a house yet?

,.,.

..

tres~ dozbaronesl*unan1Qy~

,.,.

Malina
Ya tiene casa?

~atyenekasat

Bellavista

Bellavista

behind

detrs

in back o, behind, beyond

detrs de

the park

el parque

Harris

Yes, in Be llavista, on the other side

of the park.

really (real)

Harris

S, en Bellavista detrs del parque.

rr~almnte~ rr~l~

(it) is worth (to be w<rth)

the sorrow, grief

,.,

1~ mbeo~abls ta ld"etraZd"elprk~

TRES

Harris

Tres. Dos varones y una nia.

realmente (real)
vale (valer)

,.

la pena

(it) is worthwhile

bale-la-pna~

vale la pena

the section (of a town)

l-barryo~

el barrio

14.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

Malina
lt's really worthwhile to live in
that section.

,..,.

r~almente'balelapenatblblrlenksebrry+

,
It's very quieto

Malina
Realmente vale la pena vivir en
ese barrio.

ezmuytraI)kl~

Es muy tranquilo.

,
above

sobr+

sobre

above aH, especially

sobre todo

Harris

Harris

y sobre todo, bueno para los nios.

And it's an especially good place

foc kids.

,
the sister

Molina
A married sister of mine lives there.

l-rmana.J.

n~rmnmalks~~lbb~~M+

la hermana

Malina
Una hermana ma casada vive all.

,
the airport

l-?,erpwert+

el aeropuerto

(you're) go(ing) to go

b-~-J.r.t.

va a

What time are you going to the

airport?

Harris

At one.

14.4

,.
".
,
,
k~orarba1rustecll~erpwerto+

Ir

A qu hora va a ir usted al
aeropuerto?

Harris

A la una.

CUATRO

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
the order

l-orden+
,

la orden

at your servce

~s-ortenl!s''

a sus rdenes

Molma
Let me know if 1 can help you.

,.

stoyls~ordeneslpr~darl''

Molina
Estoy a sus rdenes para
ayudarle.

l-karr''

the car
the dlsposition

,
1 -d i S po S i~ yoh''

at your dis posal

~-dispsi~ydn''

,
~ikarrQlestasud~spos1~y6n

look (to look)

l1arris
Thanks, [:lolina Look, the girls
are waltmg for you alL

CINCO

a su disposicin

Mi carro est a su disposicin.

mire (mirar)

l1arris
Gracias, Molina, l\'lire, las muchachas los estn esperando.

,
l~stn~sprand

b ms-~-ab laX'

(we're) go(ing) to talk

Molma
So long. We 'll talk later. (4)

la disposicin

.. ..

My car lS at your disposal.

el carro

stlweg'' bamos.ablardespws

vamos a hablar

Molma
Hasta luegoo Vamos a hablar
despus.

14.5

UNIT 14

14.10

SPOKEN SPANISH

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) The translation o /kan tn te/ contento in this sentence lS far from literal, but there is no very satlsfaetory literal translation
possible. It does not mean ~eontented' or 'satisfied' or even ~happy' in the sense that Enghsh speakers would mean in a sentence like Are
you happy?", whieh implies something like 'Well, you were having problems; have things straightened out now?' The sentenee just means, Are
thmgs going smoothly, i5 life treating you right?'
f

(2) Note that English does not normally repeat the preposition before a double objeet; Spanish does: eL 'with my wife and the ehildren'
and con mi esposa y con los nios.

/y /

(3) Thp, word

ya has been seen in Spanish utteranees that have reeeived a variety of translations into English: 'already,'
'still', 'yet', 'right away', etc. A list of those equivalents that it is most likely to have may be useful:

'already' as n Ya est aqu. (He's already here'.

'yet' as in Ya est aqu? 'Is he here yet?'
'right away' as in Ya voy_ 'I'm eoming right away'.
'now' as in Ya estamos llegando. 'We're arriving now'.
'any longer' as in Ya noo 'Not any longer'.
(4)

It shonld be noted that /bmos.ablr/ vamos a hablar eould mean 'Let's talk' instead of tWe'll talk.' That is, the form
vamos a -r is also used in the hortatory sense. It will be examined more closely and drilled in Unit 28.

/bmos. a---r/

14.6

SEIS

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

14.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

14.21

Pattern drills

14.21.1

Present tense forms of the irregular verbs /

ir, dr, br/

A. Presentation o pattern

lLLUSTRATIONS

,
mboylentn~s.l-

. .

,
Are you going to the party?

b aS.a1afye s t at

Vas a la fIesta?

,
3

Me voy, entonces.

komoleb

"Cmo le va?

. .

Let's go that way.

bamospora~

,
Are they going downtown?

ban.al~entrot

G Van

al celltro?

,..

uno~epropna

lrtoytrs

kwantoledslent6n~s~

Cunto le

. .
dalaka0\fet Qalptyo

GDa a la calle. o al patio?

,
How much are you giving him, then?

Vamos por ah L

Le doy tres, uno de propina.

..

das>

entonces?

SIETE

14.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

We'll give you (an) hola' and a hall.

10

,
.
l~amoslor~~m~y~

Who do you see?

11

eslknobeomuybyn

Es que no veo muy bien.

12

"
,
S1bezldondebib~

As ves donde vivo.

13

akyembe~st4
,
,.

14

15

A quin ve usted?

..,.

p6rkenohemos l~unam1gomo~

Por qu no vemos a un amigo mo?

ben/esamorenat

Ven a esa morena?

Do you aH see that brunette?

S me dan el apartamento.

, ,. ,

,
It's just that 1 don't see too well.

Le damos hora y media.

,
..
simdanJelapartamnt~

,..,.

EXTRAPOLA TION

sg

2 fam
2-3

ir

dAr

br

b-6y
b-s
b-

d-6y
d-s
d-

b-o
b-s
b-

b-mos
b-n

d-mos
d-n

b-mos
b-n

pI
1

2-3

NOTES
a. These verbs are irregular in their 1 sg forms.
b.

ir! has

a stem

/b-/

appearing in the present tense.

c. The monosyllabic forros ar~ stressed on their endingso

14.8

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

14.21.11 Substltution drills - number substitution

,.

NUEVE

,
doyprop1n~

damospropin.J.

,.
beolo~anniY~s.J.

bamoaalat1ntorer1~

doyd'emasyd'-l-

boyalat1ntorer1a~
,.
damoz<temasylf~

benelpery6~ik~

belpery6~ik''

boyenwt+

bamos.en.wt~

. .

....

,.

..

,.

bemozlos~nn~yos~

. .. ..
..

,
,

. .

1 Damos propina.

Doy propina.

2 Veo los anuncIOs.

Vemos los anuncios.

3 Vamos a la tintorera.

Voy a la tintorera.

4 Doy demasIado.

Damos demasiado.

5 Ven el peridico.

Ve el peridico.

6 Voy en auto.

Vamos en auto.

14.9

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

damperms.t.

dapermis.t.

bemozlast~s.t.

beolast~s''

balab6<.'t~

ban.alab6da

10

danchks

dachks

11

bamprnt

. .

14.10

. .

. .

baprnt

7 Dan permiso.

Da permiso.

S Vemos las tazas.

Veo las tazas.

9 Va a la boda.

Van a la boda.

10 Dan cheques.

Da cheques.

11 Van pronto.

Va pronto.

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14
Person - number substitution

"
,.
~odoyllarropabyha~

dalarropabyh~

hwanJ.~ 0

'"

ste~ez

'"

damozlarropabyh~
,
danlarropabyh~

,.

,
tu

'"

.
.

,.

,.

dazlarropabyha~

"..

,.

,.

'"

mr~a.

hwanrnobeloaann~ys~

ste~ez

nobenlos~nn~ys'"

nobeolosAnn~ys~

,
~o

, ,

, ,.

..

1 Yo doy la ropa viejao

Mara

Juan y yo

Uds.

Da la ropa vieja.
Damos la ropa vieja.

____

Dan la ropa vieja.

Das la ropa vieja.

2 Juan no ve los anuncios.

Uds.

yo

ONCE

No ven los anuncios.

No veo los anuncios.

14.11

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

mr1~1karmen

eQ}Joz

,.,

''

baestanche~
,.

''

boyestan6ch~

hwan~karmem~

ban.estan6ch~

sted

ba~stan6ch''

eO~a

,
~o

.
.

,.

14.12

"
,
nobenlospnn~ys~

nsotroz Ibamo~estan6ch~
,

Mara y Carmen

No ven los anuncios.

Ellos

No ven los anuncios.

Nosotlos vamos esta noche.

Ella

Va esta noche.

Yo

Voy esta noche.

Juan y Carmen

Van esta noche.

Ud,

Va esta noche.

DOCE

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

,..

,.

e[yozldnmuchaspropinas+

,
sted'

+
+

mr1~1hwan--

~o

---+

eQ~a.

. .
dnmuchaspropins
, .
.
d6ymuchaspropinas+
,
. .
,

".

,
dmuchaspropns~

dmuchaspropinas+

4 Ellos dan muchas propinas.

Ud.

Mara y Juan

y0

Ella

TRECE

Da muchas propinas.
_

Dan muchas propinas.

Doy muchas propinas.

Da muchas propinas.

14.13

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

~olbmuybyn.l-

ntonyo

.1-

bmuybyn.l-

.1-

bzmuybyn.l-

tu

sted*antonyo

.1-

nsotroz

.1-

bnmuyby~n.l-

bmzmuybyn.l-

5 Yo veo muy hien.

Antonio

14.14

Ve muy hien.

Ves muy hien.

Ud. y Antonio_o

Ven muy hien.

Nosotros

Vemos muy hien.

CATORCE .

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

14.21 12 Response dnll

1
2

,
[ls.nun~ys

,
,.
,
ba~stedal~entrotQasuks~
,.
,.
benustedezllo~anun~yostolasf6ts+
"
. . ,. ,

..,

ban~O~os
, ,
.

beelllosperyod1kostolozlbrs

kebelJstd

,.
beolos.anniYs~

kwandobanustds

bamoz~

kyembenO~s

laoratQestanch+

. ,..

.,.

[lstkrtary]

bmzlasfots

, ,

,
b6yl~entr

,
blzll.brs~

. .

.. .

benalasekretry

,
[lskv~'atr6 ]

balaskwtr.l-

1 Va Ud. al centro o a su casa?

Voy al centro.

2 Ven Uds" los anuncios o las fotos?

Vemos las fotos.

3 Van e lIos ahora o esta noche?

Van ahora.

4 Ve l los peridIcos o los libros?

Velos libros.

5 tQu ve Ud.?

Veo los anllncios.

6 Cundo van Uds.?

Vamos ya.

(la secretaria)

7 (.A quin ven ellos?

Ven a la secretaria.

(a las cuatro)

8 A qu hora va l?

Va a las cuatro,

(los anuncios)
(ya)

QUINCE

14.15

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

Lal)s4och6~ ]

[ l (S) S ~"ys ~ ] 1 O
,

,
,
no.t- bm6s.l(s) se"ys~
,
,

b~n.~s t;t1~s I~ l~s (~) ~I)kt

,

no~ b6ylas.och~

,.

ben.eO}joz Ilasfotost

n~ bnl~anun~ys~

12

,.
,.
,.,.
danustedez Ilostrahezbyehost

13

da~sted'laskamlsazbyehasf

14

dael/muchasprOplnast

15

d~n~O~~zll~rropabyehaf

[16s.anun~ys~] 11

"
"

"

i~ lzciams~

.,.

,
,
si.l- dmuchas~

(a las ocho)

9 Va Ud. a las nueve?

(a las seis)

10 Van Uds, a las ClOCO?

No. vamos a las seis.

11 Ven ellos las fotos?

No, ven los anuncios.

12 Dan Uds. los trajes viejos?

S, los damos.

13 Da Ud. las camisas viejas?

S, las doy.

14 Da l mllC has propinas?

S, da muchas.

15 Dan ellos la ropa vieja?

S, la dan.

(los anuncios)

14.16

"
ba~s ted Ialaznwebet

No, voy a las ocho.

DIECI5EI5

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

14.21.13 Translation driH

,
1 I'm not going now..

!:Ionoboya6ra~

Yo no voy ahora.

.,.

,
2 She's going to the wedding.

~abalab6d~

Ella va a la hoda.

Ellos nunca dan nada.

3 They never give anything.

.. .

4 Let's go right away.

bamos.ensegit!~

Vamos en seguida.

5 Why aren't you (aH) going?

Por qu no van Uds.?

6 I always look at the ads.

Siempre veo los anuncios.

7 From.time to time I go to
that restaurant.

De vez en cuando voy a ese

restorn.

,
8 How many ladies are going?

kwanta(s) seQyorazbn

9 I'm giving aH my old clothes.

Cuntas seoras van?

Yo doy toda mi ropa vieja.

~

"

10 He doesn't give many tips.

ellnodalmuchaspropins

El no da muchas propinas.

11 We give too many tips,

, .
,..
damozldmsya~aspropnas

Damos demasiadas propinas.

DIECISIETE

14.17

SPOKEN S1.1 A '\ISIJ

UNIT 14

DlScussion of pattero

The verb /
not like an

i~ 'rregular m having a spee lal stem

In the present tense
verbo but rather like a regular
verb except ror the added final

r/

/-r/

r/

The verb / d
Elnd est6y/

/s6y~

The verb

/br/

/-r/

is Irregular only in havIng a final

has its regular stem

/b-/

/b-/

/-y/

on the 1 sg form,

Thi~ htf:;m

/-y/

dy/

in aH forms except 1 sg where the stem

AH of these verbs have monosyllabic conjugated forms except in 1 pI

.b

in

Lm hu

;rre~u!ar in I hat ~t

shares this irregularity with

/be-j

/bmos/, /dmos/,

on j'lgLd

'::'

/by/ "

occurs in

and

/by / .

/bo/

/bmos/,

and il' 1 srr./;~eo/,

As monosyllahles thelf lexlcal stress appears on their endings rather than on a preceding syllable.

14.21.2

The periphrastIc ruture construction

A. Presentation or pattern

ILL USTRA T10NS

, .,
. .,
boyaberls1e~ego~lgwa~

Voy a hablar despus.

I'm going to talk later,

11.18

Voy a ver s Ilc~ el

agua.

.,

...,

ba&ab1b1rlenelotelt

Vas a vz.vu en el hotel?

,
,.
.
akyembas.a0~ ebr~

A quin vas a llevar?

,
,.
kWantobakobrrm~

Cunto va a cob,alme?

DIECIOCHO

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

Va a trabajar cqn nosotros.,

, ... ,
,. ,
bamo~atenerlbo~aprontot

Vamos a tener boda pronto?

Vamos a ver el peridico.

..

9
10

. .

"

banakambyarSe/deks

Van a cambiarse de casa

nd b~n~b~n~rlp~r~by6n

No, van a venir por avin.

EXTRAPOLA TION

I-Vrl

a
,

-r

-2r

-r

sg

by

2 fam

bs

2 - 3

bmos

2-3

bn

a
pI

abl-r

kom-r

bl.b-r

NOTES
a,

:~>,e periphrastic future constructior. consists of ~ conju~ated form of the verb

infinitive forro oC the verbo

Before an infinitve beginning with the vowel

occur in actual pronunciation,

DIECINUEVE

I r I

plus the phrase relator

I al ' or after the form Ib/, the phrase relator I al

I al

plus the

regularly fails to

14.19

UNIT 14
14.2121

SPOKEN SPANISH
~uhsl.itution drills

- Person~number substitution

, ,
~oboyatractu~ir''

sted
,

batradu~r~

hwan.l.~O

bamos.atractui ir

eQ~oz

banatrad'u~r~

karmem.

. .

batrad'u~ir~

n6s~tr;z Ihm6s~tr~b~h~r~i
,

''

eO~oz

,
~o

bntrbhara
b6ytr~bharai

1 Yo voy a traducir.
Ud.

Va a traducir.

Juan y yo _ _ .

Vamos a trad uc ir.

Ellos'-

Van a traducir.

Carmen

_
_

Va a traducir.

2 Nosotros vamos a trabajar ah.

14.20

Ellos

y0

Van a trabajar ah.

Voy a trabajar ah.

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

..

lw1sa*antonyo

,.
,.
eO~albkmer~espws~

bn.atrbahara1~

bs.atrabahara1.l.

tU.

.
.

b6ykmerdespws~

lw~sa*antonyo

bnakamerdespws+

lW1s1~o

bmsAkbmerdespws+

bnAkmerdespws+

~o

..

,
,

.,

stedez

Luisa y Antonio

Van a trahajar ah.

Vas a trahajar aho

3 Ella va a comer despus.

VEINTIUNO

yo--

Luisa y Antonio

Van a comer despus.

Luisa y yo

--'

Vamos a comer des pus.

Uds. - - - -

Van a comer despus.

Voy a comer despus.

14,21

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

Construction substitution

. .

komobastnt~

b6ykomerbastnt~

trnamoz"[)n~

bms~tmarbin

".

suben len.elas(~)ens6r

. ..

bnsblr len.elas(~)ens6r-l.

.
baylai
, .

blboemfrnt
,..

b6ybiblremfrnt~

mandanlostrhs

bnmndarlostrhs
, . .

stdyamosenelkwrt

14.22

bbylarai

bms~stdyarlenelkwrt6

1 Como I>Ets.Iailte.

Voy a comer bastante.

2 Tomamos vino.

Vamos a tomar vino.

3 Suben en el ascensor.

Van a subir en el ascensor.

4 Baila ah.

Va a bailar ah.

5 Vivo enfrente.

Voy a vivir enfrente.

6 Mandan los trajes.

Van a mandar los trajes.

7 Estudiamos en el cuarto.

Vamos a estudiar en el cuarto.

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

14.21.22 Response drill

ba~stedlatrabahartQa~studyr+

ba~~ste6eS l~eskrlblrtQasalr+

ba~~lalabart~abarrr+

,.

~.

, ,

[eskriblr+
]
,..
,
[a~s tbyaor+ ]
,
[bebeor+ ]
,
[ntrah+]

. ..,

.,

.,

keban Ia:jerClMS+

kebaierustd+

kebanlaierustdes+

kebas lakomprart+

"

"

b6y trabhaor.1,
bmsftas llor~

o.,

"
,

,
bneskriblr+
,
o
b6ysttldya r+
,
bmos"abeber+
,

boyakompraruntrhe~

1 (, Va Ud. a trabajar o a estudiar?

Voy a trabaJar.

2 Van Uds. a escribir o a salir?

Vamos a salir.

3 Va ella a lavar o a barrer?

Va a berrer.

(a escrib ir)

4 Qu van a hacer ellos?

Van a escribir.

(a estudiar)

5 Qu va a hacer Ud.?

Voy a estudiar.

VEINTITRES

~acer

(a beber)

6 Qu van a

(un traje)

7 Qu vas a comprar tu?

Uds.?

Vamos a beber.
Voy a comprar un traje.

14023

UNIT

SPOKEN SPANISH

)4

, , ..

,
[lscheks~]

[aestdyr~J
lO

[slir~J 10

bs11relt

,.
,.
bn~skrib1rustedest

,
.
bms~k~mbyarlloschks
,

no
,

no

,
b~stetya'r

Lms~s11r~

11

"
. , .
bkmere0~a 'postret
, .
.,

S1~

er''va Ibkmerp6stre~

12

bnk6merustedeslpastelt

s11

bamos~komerpastl~

13

b~~b~r~st~~I~l~wt;t

(los cheques)
(a estudIar)
(a salIr)

14.24

kebanakambyarust~s~

,
9

,.

,
,

,.

,....,

,
S1'~ LoyaQ~ebrl.t.

8 Qu van a cambiar Uds.?

Vamos a camh lar los cheques.

9 Va a salir l?

No, va a estudIar.

10 Van a escribir Uds.?

No, vamos a salir.

11 Va a comer ella postre?

S, ella va a comer postre.

12 Van a comer Uds. pastel?

S, vamos a comer pasteL

13 Va a llevar Ud. el auto?

S, voy a llevarlo.

VEINTICUATRO

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH
14.21.23 Translation drill

,
1 "e're going to repeat that.

b'm6srrept1rs6~

2 I'm going to shave

boyafeytrm~

..

keba~erustt!+

4 Where are you going to work?

dondebatrabahr+

voy a afe.itarme.

3 What're you going to do?

Vamos a repetir eso.

Qu va a hacer Ud.?

,
Dnde va a trabajar?

,
5 I'm going to take a bath.

v oy a baarme.

b6ybQyarm

6 He's not going to stick his

foot (in his mouth) again.

,
".,
., ,
elfnobameterflapatwotrab~~
,

El no va a meter la pata otra

vez.

7 They're going to practice

(s ome) more.

banlprktikarms

8 They're going to look for

a house.

banlAbskarks.J.

Van a buscar casa.

,.
.,.
bamos'a~erumbyh~

Vamos a hacer un viaje.

9 We're going to take (make)

a tripe

VEINTICINCO

Van a practicar IlUs.

14.25

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

B. Presentation of pattern
The penphrastic future construction has three component forms, (1) a conjugated form of the verb / r/ ~ (2) the phrase relator /
(3) an infmitive. These elements are usually not separated by any other forms, though sometimes a pronoun subject will appear after
the form of
r
and

al .

As the name periphrastic indicates, this construction is a roundabout way of expressing future tIme. Spanish has a future tense which will
be presented in Unit 53, but the periphrastic future construction seems to occur more frequently than the future tense in most dialects. It is a
rather close equivalent of the 'to be going to.... ' construction in English.
This double English construction, combining both present progresslve and periphrastic future consJi"uctioDB,has no exact parallel in Spanish,
though its function is performed by the Spanish periphrastic future.
The periphrastic construction frequently brings into immediate sequence two and sometimes three / a/ phonemes. The normal phonetic
pallern of reduction to a single / a / in normal conversation may appear to be an omission of the relator /a/. Thus /b-a-kom~r/
becomes /bkomr/ and /b-a-ablr/becomes /bblr/ The relator becomes quickly evident again when /bn/ is suhstituted
for /b/~ /bn.akom~r / '
n.ab lr/, ShowIDg that the reduction is purely phonologicaL

/b

The periphrastic future construction ID i15 1 pI form can express future time (or intention) as in /bmo s-a-e S tudy r 's ta-n che~
'We 're going to study tonight', or it can express what might be called a hortatory c onstruction, where the speaker exhorts others to accompany him
in an action. Thus /bmos-a-komr~/appearing in its affirmative form can mean 'We're going to eat' or 'Let's eat'.

14.21.3

Question lntonation patterns -

Ves-no questions

A. Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

,
y ou Hice tbe room.

1 1~

1 2

lgust~elkwrto~

lgust~elkwarto1

Le gusta el cuarto.

1 2

2 2

Le gust el cuarto?

VEINTISEIS

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

estalhsJ,
, ,

1 2 1 1
Est lejos.

1 2 22t

~stalehost

Is it far?

Est lejos?

,
ls it very expensive?

'7muykr.J.

1 1 ~

Es Oluy caro.

,.

zmuykarot

22 t

Es muy caro?

EXTRAPOLATION

..---------------.
Statement

Ves-no question

/1211~/

I /1222t/

NOTES
a. One frequent Spanish yes-no question pattero is /1222 t /
similar lo a common English paUern, but not ending as high
as the English pattero does.

VEINTISIETE

14.27

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

14.21.31 Substitution drill- pattern substitution

Problem:

trbahanmch''
Answer~

trbahanmuchot
,
1

lkl1an~lkwrt

lgustelpr~y

14.28

12
1 1''
Trabajan muc ho.

Answer:

1 2
2 2t
Trabajan mucho?

lgust~elpre~yot

/1211+/
Problem:

..

lkl1an.elkwartot
,
. , .

/1222 t /

1 2
1 1
1 Alquilan el cuarto.

1 2
2 2
Alquilan el cuarto?

1 2
1 1
2 Le gusta el prec io,

1 2
2 2t
Le gusta el precio?

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

..
,
.
stamwebl~~
, . .
,

3
4

sbl.mos,a6ra~

,
.,
sb~mos.aorat
,
, ..

stamwebladot
,

.,

kmpramos~lwto~

kmpramos,elawtot

dselg~

dsealgot

tmamos~ntksi~

tmamos.untaksl.t

lmramoshntsJ

lmr~amoshuntost

. .

1 2

11

3 Subimos ahora.

1 1~

1 2

4 Est amueblado.

1 2 1 1~

,.

1 2

22

1 2

2 21

Est amueblado?

2 21

Compramos el auto?
Desea algo?

7 Tomamos un taxi.

Subimos ahora?

1 1~

1 2

1 2 2 2t

6 Desea algo.

1 1 ~

8 Almorzamos juntos.

VEINTINUEVE

..

lIt

5 Compramos el auto.

,,

1 2

221

Tomamos un taxi?

2 21

Almorzamos juntos?

14.29

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

,
lpare~ekr~

lpare~ekarot

10

bskamos~tr~
,

bskamos~trot

11

kmpramo(s) S bnas.t.

kmpramo(s) sabanas t

1
2
1 1 ~
9 Le pal'ece caroo

Bo

22

Le parece caro?

1 1 ~
1 2
10 Buscamos otro.

Buscamos otro?

1
2
1
1 ~
11 Compramos sbanaso

Compramos sbanas?

1
1

2 2t

2
2

2t

Presentation of pattern

The rnost cornmon llltonation partern that OCClItS with yes-no questions, particularly when the questioner does not anticipate whether
the answer will be 'yes or 'no. lS /1222 t /
f

ThlS pattern will give English speakers relatively liule difflculty smce lt lS very similar to an English pattern with the same meaningo
The English pattern. however. ends somewhat higher, and this extra height might be lllterpreted as insistence or annoyance in Spanish.

2
Thus

14.30

22

/n-tyne- trot /

2
Don't you have another?' is normal and

23

/n-tyne-6trot /

could mean 'Don>t you have just one morer

TREINTA

SPOKEN SPANISH
14.22

UNIT 14

Heplacement drills

.,

..,

stkontentQaklfkoronelt

A
1

________________seQyorest

_______aora

____6k~artos

______________seQyorltast

____dskpadas

-- t

stQkntentos laoralseQyorest
,

. .

,.

..

...

,.

stnhkpadaslaoralseQyorltas t

stndskp~d~s 1~~r~ls~Qy~r~t~st

t
,
hose t

.".

.,

.,.

stdskupadQlaoralhoset
,

stdsokpad~laoralkarment

----------"karmen t

;.Estci contento aqu, Coronel?

1 t.

seores?

2 ,

ahora, _ _?

Estn contentos ahora, seores?

Estn ocupados ahora, seores?

3 ___ocupados
4 t,
5

TREINTA Y UNO

.. , ..

stnhkpados laoralseQyorest

------------, .

,
.,
,.
est~kntentoslakllseQyorest
, . . , . . ,.

Estn contentos aqu, seores?

seoritas?
desocupadas

Estn ocupadas ahora, seoritas?

Estn desoc upadas ahora, seoritas?

6 t,----

Jos?

Est desocupado ahora, Jos?

7 .

Carmen?

Est desocupada ahora, Carmen?

14.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

admast maQyanalmy9mifm~ly+

2
3

--------------rn1.90 s +

~mast maQyanaIO~9nmisaml.gs~

sus
-----------__________bynn

demast maQyanalroyganssarnl.g6s+
,
, .
,
admast maQyanalbynnsusm1gs+

+
+

-----lhwebez

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _k~6s_-l-

------------_.....mrena+
,

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _sQYor-l-

Ade~s,

dmast lhwebezlbynensusml.gs~
,
,.,
,
demast elhwebezlbyenenlk~s~rn19s~

.
.

,
,
demast lhwebez'byn~k~rnren~
,
,
,
admast elhwebezlbyn~klsQyor''
,

maana llega mi familia.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ amigos.

Adems, maana llegan mis amigos.

sus _ _

Adems, maana llegan sus amigos.

_ _ _ _vienen

, el jueves

Adems, maana vienen sus amigos.

Adems, el jueves vienen sus amigos.

_ _ _ _ _ _aque llos_o

Adems, el jueves vienen aquellos amigos.

Adems, el jueves viene aquella morena.

14.32

_ _ _ _ _ _ morena.
seor.

Adems, el jueves viene aquel seor.

TREINTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

,
,
kwantos~hostyn~

,
,

kwantaznJ.Qyas.Y~
,
,

kwantotyempQy~

nJ.Qyas_~

1
2

y'"

tyemp2_~

kyrs~

6
,

kwantagwakyres~

bt>s~

kwantagwabbs~

kwantostragozbbes~

tragoz_'"

kwantotyempokyrs~

",

agwa

Cuntos hijos tiene?

1

.nlOas
_ _.?

Cuntas nias tiene?

hay?

Cuntas nias hay?

tiempo_?

Cunto tiempo hay?

4
5

quieres?
agua

6
7

TREINTA Y TRES

.,
,
kwantazn1Qyastyne~

?
bebes?

tragos

Cuanto tiempo quieres?

Cunta agua quieres?
Cunta agua bebes?
Cuntos tragos bebes?

14.33

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
D

. ,.

nrmanam~afksadalblb~aO~!
,
__rmanaz
!

..

,.,
nas.rmanazffi~asIkasadaz Iblben.aQ>J.J.
,.,.

..

,.,
nas.rmana(s) su~as Iks actaz Iblben.a~
. ,
,
.
n.lhosu~o /ksad"o Iblb~aO).ji.1,.,.
,.,.
~hosu~o/slterolblb~a~.1,.,.

--lho

.1-

, .
sltero

4
5

.1trabaha --~

.t.

ffiJ.O

sU~as

__amJ.goz

n;h~s~~~ Is61 t~r~ Itrab~h~0~~

, .,.
, .
, .
n.~homlo 1561tero ItrbahaC}j i

..

, . ,.
,
n6s.amlgozffilos Is61 teros /trbahanaQhli.J.

Una hermana ma casada vive all.

hermanas

suyas

___

Unas hermanas mas casadas viven all.

Unas hermanas suyas casadas viven all.

Un hijo suyo casado vive alh.

3 _ _ hijo

soltero

Un hjo suyo soltero vive all.

trabaja_.

6
7

mo
amigos

Un hijb suyo soltero trabaja alH.

Un hijo mo soltero trabaja all.

Unos amigos mos solteros trabajan all.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

,,

k~oralba~ruste~falReropwrt~

E
1
2

~
~

!:lO

prke

ben~r

nosotros

,
kI)kyem

fysta~

,
eOMos

...

. ..

A qu hora va a ir usted al aeropuerto?

1

fiesta?

nosotros _ _?

3 Con quin

4-

yo

5 Por qu
6

TREINTA Y CINCO

..

, . " . .,
ak~oralha1ruste~lalafy~sta~
,.
, .. ,
.,
.
k~orafbamosa~rnosotroslalafy~sta~
,
, .. ,
.,
kOI)kyernlbarnosa1rnosotroslalafyst~
,
,., ,
ko~kyemlboya1r~oIRlafysta~
, ,. , ,
prkelboya~~ol~lafysta~
,
".., ,
porkelboyaben1~ofRlafy~st~
, ,.
"
porkelbanaben1reOMoslalafyst~

venir
ellos

A qu hora va a ir usted a la fiesta?

A qu hora vamos a ir nosotros a la fiesta?

Con quin vamos a ir nosotros a la fiesta?

C on quin voy a ir yo a la fiesta?

Por qu voy a ir yo a la fiesta?

Por qu voy a venir yo a la fiesta?

Porqu van a venir e Hos a la fiesta?

14.35

UNlT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

stlweg~ bamos~blaraespws~

1
2

muybyn

-------------. . ,

..

bamos~blaraespws~

muybyn
,

a6r~

..

muybyn~ bamos~blara6r~

. .

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _estud"yar_~

_________boy

adyds

_ _- __teI)gok~----_ _~

acyos+

teI)gokestudyara6ra~

_____ayke

adyds+

aykestuayara6ra~

muybyn~ bamos~estudyarara~
,
,
,
muytyr.~ boy~estudyarara~
,
aoyos+ Loyestudyarara~

,..

--

." -

/ '

. .

,.

Hasta luego, vamos a hablar despus.

1 Muy bien,
2 -

_ _ _ _ estudiar _ _
,_voy

5 Adis,
6

Muy bIen, vamos a hablar despus.

_ _ - - - - - - _.. ahora.

- , tengo que

7 _ _, hay que

14.36

_
_

Muy bien, vamos a hablar ahora.

Muy bien, vamos a estudiar ahora.
Muy bien, voy a estudiar ahora.
Adis, voy a estudiar ahora.

Adis, tengo que estudiar ahora.

Adis, hay que estudiar ahora.

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

14.23

Varation drills

..

byenen~mbarkot

Vienen en barco?

.,

1 Are they coming by car?

byenen.en.awtot

2 Are they coming by plane?

byenen.en.abyont

3 Are they coming in the

evening?

4 Are they coming in the

mocning?

5 Are they coming in the

afternoon?

. ..

Vienen en auto?

,
Vienen en avin?

, .. . ,
byenen.enlanoche t

...

,
,.
byenenenlamaQyanat

, .. . ,
byenen.enlatard"et

byenen.enSe9~dat

7 Are they eoming some

other day?

byenen.otrod'~at

TREINTA YSIETE

Vienen en la maana?

Vienen en la tarde?

.,.

,.
6 Are they coming right
away?

Vienen en la noche?

Vienen en seguida?

,
Vienen otro da?

14.37

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

,
,
,
B no~ bnben1rlp6rhyoh~

No, van a venir por avin.

,
1 No, they're coming by boat. -

no1 bnaben1rlprbark~

No, van a venir por barco.

No, van a venir por auto.

2 No, they're coming by .car.

3 No, they're coming in

evening.

"~e

,
,
,
no~ bnhen1rlprlanoch~

,
4 No, they're coming in the
morning.

no+ bnAben1rlprlamaQyana~

No, van a venir por la maana.

5 No, they're commg in the

afternoon.

No, van a venir por la tarde.

6 Yes, they're coming foc you.

S van a venir por usted.

9

,
7 Yes, they're coming for meo

14.38

No, van a venir por la noche.

,.

51+ bnbn1rlporm~

S, van a venir por m.

TREINTA Y OCHO

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

Tres. Dos varones y una nia.

..

1 Four. Three boys and a girl.

,
, . ,.
kwatr~ trezbaronesl~unanQy~

Cuatro. Tres varones y una nia.

2 Five. One hoy and {our girls.

,
,.
~1~ko~ umbaronlikwatroniQyas~

Cinco. Un varn y cuatro nias.

3 Three. The wife, the mother-in-law

,
",..
tres~ lsposallswegral*elniQY~

~.,

and the c hild.

4 Six. The wife and five children.

,
'. ,
seys~ 1spoS~'2~lijkQfh6s~

5 Two. Mr. and Mrs. Molina.

7 Three. Mr. Molina, Joseph and

rnyself.

TREINTA Y NUEVE

Seis. La esposa y cinco hijos.

Dos. El seor y la seora de

MolIna.

,
6 Tvo. John and Joseph.

Tres. La esposa, la suegra y el

nio.

. .

dos~ hWan.1hos~

Dos. Juan y Jos.

,
,.,
tres~ elseQy6rm612naJhse*~6~

Tres. El seor Molina, Jos y yo.

14.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

"
O bllpena Ibibirn.sbrry~

1 That 's a good building to live in.

Vale la pena vivir en ese barrio.

,
bllapena Ibib~r lnsedify~

Vale la pena vivir en ese edificio.

,
2 This is a good section to live in.

bllapen Ibihr ln.stbrry~

Vale la pena vivir en este barrio.

,
3 This is a good restaurant to come
to for dinner.

bllpen /kmr ln.strrstrn+

Vale la pena comer en este

restorn.

4 It's worth while to study in this

school.

5 It's worth while to work in that

schooL

bllpen~ Iestd'yr rnst~skwla+ Vale la pena estudiar en esta

escuela.

bllp~n Itrbhr Ins eskwlaJ

, ,

6 It's not worth the trouble to speak

any more.

Vale la pena trabajar en esa

escuela.

. .

nobalelapn~ Iblrms~

No vale la pena hablar ms.

7 It's not worth the trouble going

there.

14.40

, , .
nobalelapn~ I ir~+

No vale la pena ir all.

CUARENTA

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

.,....

Mi carro est a su disposici6n.

E mikarr~'estasu41spos1~y6n~

. ,..

..

1 You're welcome to my house.

mikas~lestasud~spos~~y6n~

2 You're welcome to my apartment.

,
.,....
m*prtmentQlestasud~spos1~y6n~

Mi casa est a su disposic In.

Mi apartamento est a su disposicin.

.,....

3 You're welc ome to my room.

mikwart2Iestasu~1spos1~y6n~

4 You're welcome to my planee

,
m*byon'estasud1spos1~y6n~

5 You're welc ome to use my s hower.

miduch~lestasud~spos~~y6n~

Mi cuarto est a su disposicin.

. ,..

Mi avin est a su disposicin.

.,....

MI ducha est a su disposic in.

6 You're welcome to use our

kItchen.

7 You're welcome to use our

living-room.

CUARENTA Y UNO

,
,..
nwstrk~~n~lestasud1spos1iy6n~

Nuestra cocina est a su disposicin.

Nuestra sala est a su disposicin.

14.41

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 14

,..

,.

lzmchachaz Ils.estan.espernd6~

Las muchachas los estn esperando.

l(~seQyr1tazllsstanesperndo~ Las seoritas los estn esperando.

2 The ladies are waiting far you.

1 (s) seQyoraz Ils.estan.espernd~

3 The boys are waiting fOl' you.

lzmchachozllo~estan~spernd~

,..

4 The gentlemen are waiting Eor

USe

5" They're wating for uso

,..

Los seores nos estn esperando.

,.
,..
~ozlns~stan~spernd~

Ellos nos estn esperando.

,
,
mr1~1hoselmstanesperndo~
,

7 The American girls are waiting

fOl'

Los muchachos los estn esperando.

l~}seQyorez 'nsAstanesperndb~

. .

6 Mary and J oseph are waitng

for meo

Las seoras los estn esperando.

,..

,.

14.42

,..

1 The young lades are waiting

for you.

Mara y Jos me estn esperando.

,..

l~amrikanazlmstan.espernd~

Las americanas me estn esperando.

me.

CUARENTA Y

Dm

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

14.24

Revltw dnll - Theme cIass n

l-dol

forms oC vtrbs

He hablado y comido mucho.

1 I've talked and eaten a loto

2 I've gone up and down a lot"

hahadoJi5b~dOmcho~
,..

3 rve studied and translated

,
,.
,
stdyadQlitradi~dolmuyp6ko~

very liule,

He estudiado y traducido muy

poco.

,.,

,
4 rve danced and gone out
very liule

He bajado y subido mucho.

bayladQlisal~dolmuyp6ko~

He bailado y salido muy poco.

5 I've studied and learned a Hule.

,
,.
5tdyadOI*aprnd~dQlump6ko~

6 I've washed and swept everything.

labaaQlibarr~dot6db~

7 I've eaten and drunk too much

~lmbr~aQQlihb~dodemasydo~

He estudiado y aprendido un poco"

.
,

He lavado y barrido todo_

He almorzado y bebido demasiado,

8 I've taken and brought back the

,.
~~ebadQlitra~dQelwto~

He llevado y trado el auto.

,
,.
~rre91adQlibarr1oQelkwrto~

He arreglado y barrido el cuarto,

,
, .
kmpradQ:itr10ot~

He comprado y trado todo.

CSf.

9 I've arranged and swept the room.

10 I've bought and brought everythmg

,
11 rve worked and lived there

CUARENTA Y TRES

,.

trbahaGQlibib1dQa~

He trabajado y vivido ah

14.43

UNIT 14

14.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

CONVERSATION STIMULUS

NARRArlVE 1

1 Jose introduces Colonel Harris

to his fiance.

,.
.,
,
,
.
hselepresent~lelkr6nelharrlsf

Jos le presenta el Coronel Harria

a su novia.

asun6by~
2 The C olone 1 arrived Monday
from the States.

,
.,
,.
lkr6nel~e90t~J)lunez lt1ls
, .

El Coronel lleg el lunes de los

Estados Unidos.

stadosJJnd:s~

3 He 's going to be here a long

time.

,
,
ellb~strkllmuchotymp~

4 He's going to work with the

El va a estar aqu mucho tiempo.

. .

,
btrabharlkonl~embahd~

Va a trabajar con la Embajada.

Embassy.

DIALOG 1

Jos, dgale al Coronel que qUIere

presentarle a SU novia, la seorita
Del Valle. A Carmen dgale'
Carmen, el Coronel Harris:

,
,
krnl~ kyr6prsentarl~lam1
,
,
nobya IlsQy6rl. tadelbQ~~
,
,

. .

Jos; Coronel, quiero presentarle

a mi novia, la seorita
Del Valleo Carmen, el
Coronel Harris.

karmen~ lkrnelhrris~

Coronel, dgale a la seorita que

tanto gusto.

,
tanto9stlseQyrit~

Coronel: Tanto gusto, seorita.

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
Carmen, dgale al Coronel que
encantada.

Carmen~

eI)kntad+
,

Jos, dgale a Carmen que el

Coronel lleg el lunes de los
Estados Unidos.

Coronel contstele que Ud. cree

que sL Que va a trabajar con
la Embajada"
j

elkr6nelICC~1eg6~)lunez /dls

, . .
stad'osunds+

Jos; El Coronel lleg el lunes

de los Estados Unidos.

, ,
,
,.
,
,
als~t ba~starak~lmuchotyempot
~

Carmen diga 6 ah 9 s?~ y pregntele al Coronel si va a estar aqu

mucho tiempo"

Encantada.

,. .
,
kreokes1+ b6yatrbharlkn

Carmen: Ah, s? Va a estar

aqu mue ho tiempo?

Coronel: Creo que si. Voy a

trabajar con la Embajada.

,
l~mbhad'~

NARRAT/VE 2

1 The ColonePs iamily is arriving

tomocrow.

2 The airpoft, isn't it quite a

distance?

3 es haH an hour !rom here by

car, more or less.

CUARENTA Y CINCO

La famita del Coronel llega

maana.

,
''''"
l~rpwert+ no~stafmuylehost
,
,.
.,
est'~medy~orad'~ak~l~nwtol

msmns+
4 But he doesn 9 t know how he 9 S
gong to (do) manage.

,
"
lfm~lyal~lkrnell~e9a

,
".
,.,
prQellnosabelkomoba~r~

El aeropuertol) no est muy lejos?

Est a media hora de aqu en auto,

ms o menos.

Pero l no sabe cmo va a hacer.

14.45

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH
~

,.

5 He's got so many things to do.

tynltantaskosask~a~r+

6 J ose says his car is at the

hs~d~i~lkeSk~rrQlstl

Colonel's disposaL

Tiene tantas cosas que hacer.

J os dice que s u carro est a

la disposicin del coronel.

,
..
. .
~ispsi~yonldelkoronl+

7 'Thanks a million', says the

Un milln de gracias -dice el

Coronel.

ColoneL

8 Jose isn't going to be at the

Embassy tomorrow. Tomorrow
is Saturday.

mQyn

mQyan~e(s) sbd+

,
9 But the Colonel can call him at
home

Jos no va a estar en la Embajada

maana. Maana es sbado.

prQlkrnellpw d"e0\lmarlQ

Pero el Coronel puede llamarlo a

la casa.

. .

alaks+

10 The C olone 1 says that if he needs

,
,.
,
lkrneld1~elksi16n~s1tal

_ him, he'll call him.

El Corone 1 dice que si lo necesita,

lo llamao

loQ~m+

DIALOG 2

,
Clll'men} pre~ntele al Coronel si
vino con su familIa,

...,

b1nQUste~lk0nSufcml1yat

,
Coronel, contstele que no Que su
familia lle~a maana Pregnte le
a Jos, a proposito, SI el aeropuerto
esta muy lej05

,.

no mifmllya

Carmen; Vino usted con su familla?

1t"~e9amaQyn

prpositlhs~

, .

,.

stamuylehosl

No Mi familia llega maana A pro~

posito, Jose. testamuy lejos el
aeropuerto?

el~eropwertot

14A6

CUARENTA Y SEIS

UNrr 14

SPOKEN SPANISH

Jos'> contestele que no, que

a media hora de aqu en auto,
ms o menos.

Coronel, dgale que Ud. no sabe

COi 10 va a hacer. Que tiene
tantas cosas que hacer maana,

,.

,.,

n01 medY20rad~ak~l~nwtl
msl>mns

ns~lk~m~h~Y~~r+ t6~glt~nt~s
k~s~sk~~~rlmQYn+
,

Jos, dgale que su carro est a

la disposicin de l.

,.

nmi~ondegr~ys

. .,. .

CUARENTA Y SIETE

Cc:onel: Un millin de gracias.

Usted va a estar en
la Llnbajada maana?

,.

no1
,

maQyane(~shd+

pr

pwe4elroymrm~mikas+

Coronel, dgale que muy bien, que

si lo necesita lo llama. Y que
muchas gracias.

Jos: Mi carro est a su disposicin.

stedba

,.
~starlenl~embahadalmaQyanat
,

Jos, dgale que no, que maana

es shad09 Pero puede llamarlo
a su casa, dlgale.

Coronel: No s cmo voy a hacer.

Tengo tantas cosas
que hacer mdana.

mikarrQlsts~ispsi~yoh+

,
Coronel, dgale que un milln de
gracias. Pregntele si l va a
estar er.. la Embajada maana.

Jos. No, a media hora de aqui

en auto, ms o menos.

,.

muybyn siln~s1tolloOOym+
,
.
muchazgr~Ys+

Jos: ~o, maana es sbado. Pero

puede llamarme a mi casa.

Cc:onel: Muy bien. Si lo necesito,

lo llamo.. Muchas
gracas.

14.47

UNIT 14

SPOKEN SPANISH
NARRAr/VE 3

,.

".

1 His wife, three e hildren and

hls mother-in-Iaw are
coming.

bynnsuseQyorattres1hosl

2 His whole family.

todasufamly+

Toda su familia.

3 He's going to have to rent a

,
, . .
btnerlkelkilarunaksa

Va a tener que alquilar una casa.

"

house.

4 But he doesn 't know if it's

VJenen su seora, tres hijos y su

suegra.

..
1suswgrA

",.

"..

prQellnosabelsibalelapn+

Pero l no sabe si vale la pena.

worth the trouble.

5 They say that houses here

cost a loL

, . .,
,
d1~eDlkelAskasa~ak1Ikwestan

mch

6 But Carmen lives in the

Bellavista section,

,
,.. ,
prkarmemlb1ben~lbarryo

heC.).j ah 1s ta~
o,

7 And the houses there are very

nice and inexpensive

14,48

Pero Carmen vive en el barrio

Bellavista.

,.

ilskasas,aCDJl.lsonmuyhonl.tas

. .

y las casas all son muy honitas

y baratf\s

1harts

8 The Colonel is going to talk to

hls wife (about it) to see what
she sayso

Dicen que las casas aqu cuestan

mucho"

, ,

El Coronel va a hablar con su

esposa para ver qu dice ellao

parbr Iked1~O~a
CUARENTA Y OCHO

U;\fIT lL

SPOKEN SPANISH

DIALOG 3

Carmen, pregntele al Coronel

si viene toda su familia"

, . . . ,
byenetodasufam11yat

Carmen, dgale que entonces va

a tener que alquilar una casa.

s11 misQyor~11tresjh6s~
tmbyembyenem1swgr

CoroneL S, mi seora y tres

hijos. Tambin viene
mi suegra.

,
.
nton~eztbtnrfk~alkilr

Carmen~ Entonces va a tener que

Carmen, dgale que en el barrio

BellavIsta, donde Ud, vive,
hay casas muy baratas y bonitas

CUARENTA Y NUEVE

alquilar una casan

.,..

nOSelSlbalelapn+
d1ie~k~ak1/
,

,.

Coronel: No s si vale la pena.

Dicen que aqu las
casas cuestan mucho .

laskasaskwestanmuch6+
,.
,
n~lbrry6ba~b1sta/d6ndyo

b~bQtyksz /m~yb~r~t~s~b~nts+
,.

Coronel, digale que Ud_ va a hablar

con su esposa para ver qu ~ce
ella,

,..

'"

Coronel, dgale que Udu no sabe

si vale la pena, Que dicen que
aqu las casas cuestan muchoo

Viene toda su familia?

,.,

,
Coronel, contstele que s, que
su seora y tres hijos o Que
tambin viene su suegrao

Carmen~

Carmen En e 1 barrio Be llavista,

donde yo VIVO, hay
casas muy baratas y
bonitas

boyablar/knm*sposa/parbr/ke

CoroneL Voy a hablar con mi

esposa para ver qu
dice ella

14..49

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

15.1

BASIC SENTENCES.

Mrs. Harris goes through customs.

Mr. and Mrs. Harris and Molina are going to the customs office while the mother-in-law and children stay behiDd and wait for them.

AID TO LISTENlNG

ENGLI&.H SPELLING

SPANlSH SPELLING

rigorous, strict

rrigr~s~

riguroso

the customs office

l~-dwana~

la aduana

Sra. Harris

Mrs. Harris

Son muy rigurosos en la aduana aqu?

Are they very strict at the customs office here?

,
sgur~

sure

Molina
No, I'm sure that they won't bother you.

seguro

n~1 est6ysg~r~ldek~~st~dln~1~b~n~
molestr~

ust~d

no la

el-ekipahe~

the baRgage

Molina
No. Estoy seguro de que a
van a molestar.

el equipaje

Sra. Harris
Aqu, seor. Ya est aqu mi equipaje.

Mrs. Harris

Right here. My baggage is bere now.

,
kwa'l~

which

Clerk
Which is it?

cul

Empleado
Cul es?

kwals.!.
,

{Veen

UNO

bert1"e~

verde

15.1

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

the trunk

el bal

Mrs. Harns

( )
It's these green suitcases and this small trunk. 1

Sra. Harris

Son estas maletas verdes y este bal

pequeo.

pekQY~
have (to have)

tenga (tener)

the kindness, goodness

la bondad

be so kind as to, please

. . .

teQga-la-bondd-de~

Clerk

tenga la bondad de

Empleado

Please open the trunk first.

Tenga la bondad de abrir el bal primero.

This thing - what is it?

Esto, qu es?

the gift

el regalo

to declare

declarar

Mrs. Harns

It's sorne gifts. Everything's declared.

,.,..

s6~nzrrgals~ todQestadeklard~

Sra. Harris

Son unos regalos. Todo est declarado.

,
the list

Clerk

Oh, yeso Here it is on the listo

the overnight case, handbag

15.2

la-l1.st~

,
" .
alsi k1.~sta~nlalista

la lista

Empleado

Ah, s. AqU est en la lista.

el maletn

nos

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

(for) me

me

to examine, inspect

revisar

Sra. Hnrris
t.:ste maletn, no me lo va a revisar?

Mrs. Harris
(2)
This handbag, aren't you going to check it?

,
necessary

neiesary~

necesario

Clerk

Empleado

No ma'am, it's not necessary.

No seora, no es necesario.

,
to you (it) lacks (to lack)

le-falta~ fltar~

Molina

le falta (faltar)

Molina

Are you missing anything, Mrs. Harris?

No le falta nada, seora?

,
complete

kmpleto~

completo

Sra. Harris
No. Todo est completo.

Mrs. Harris
No, everything's here.

(Later, in the lobby)

to take care of, assist

the immigration

Molina
(3)
Did they take good care of you in Immigration?

TRES

atender

,
1~-inmi9r~yoh~

la inmi~acin

Molina
La han atendido bien en Inmigracin?

15.3

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
to complain myseH (to complain
oneself)

kharm~ khars~~

quejarme (quejarse)

Sra. Harris

Mrs. Harris

Yo no me puedo quejar.

1 can't complain.

,
kind, nice, courteous

amable

amable~

Conmigo han sido muy amables.

They've been very nice to me.

,
for us

ns~

that (he) may carry (to carry)

k-(l:~ebe~ 'l~ba'r~

nos

Harris

que lleve (llevar)

Harris

1'11 go look fOl' a taxi and someone to carry

Voy a buscar un taxi y a alguien que

nos lleve las maletas.

the suitcases fOl' uso

,
(I) said (to say)

d lh~

,
d~ ir~

dije (decir)
annche

last night

,
the car

l--koch-!-

caber

to fit

Molina
As 1 said last night, there's room in my car
fOl' all of us and the luggage.

el coche

".

. ..

Molina
Como le dije anoche, en mi coche
cabemos todos y el equipaje.

kabmstodoS I*eleklphe~
,
9ran~ Jrand~~
,

great Oarge)
the help

15.4

,
l~-ayueta~

gran (grande)
la ayuda

CUATRO

IJNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
nds~

to us
to lend, to provide

Harris
You're being a great help to uso Thanks a lot,
Molina.

15.10

nos

,
prestar-l.

prestar

no~est~9r~st~ndQlnaqr~n~~da-l.
m~Ch~7.gr~yaz Imolna~

Harris
Nos est prestando una gran ayuda.
Muchas grac ias, Molina.

Notes on the basic sentences

(1) It is perhaps worth calling to your attention the fact that in this Spanish utterance the nurnber of the verb (plural) rigorously agrees with the nurnber of the subject
(plural) even though the subject is positioned after the verbo In English the 'logical' subject is plural, but the grarnrnatical subject is it, which is singular and requires the
singular verb forrn is. The sarne situation occurs below, 'It's sorne gifts'.

(2) The occurrence of both direct and indirect clitics in the sarne phrase will be exarnined closely in Unit 20. In the rneanwhile aH that need be pointed out is that
the indirect clitic is the first of the two. Note, however, that no equivalent to the indirect /me / appears in the English translation.
(3) Notice that the Spanish present perfect construction /
This is a not infrequent translation pattero.

15.2

DRILLS AND GRAMMAR

15.21

Pattero drills

15.21.1

Indirect clitic pronouns - one object

A.

n-a tend id o/

is translated by the English past tense 'did they take good care of' in this sentence.

Presentation of pattero

lLLUSTRAT10NS

S1~ mgust~

S,

mkomby~n~m~s llprim~r~

Me conviene ms el primero.

ketepsa~

CINCO

me gusta.

Qu te pasa?

15.5

UNIT 15

What do yon need (1ack)?

SPOKEN SPANISH

keteflt

Qu te falta?

ls~st~~lkw~rtot

Le gusta el cuarto?

k~m~l~b

Cmo le va?

We like the room.

n6zq~st~~lkwrt6

Nos gusta el cuarto.

It looks smaH to uso

nspar~i~p~kQY

Nos parece pequeo.

What do you aH think?

kelespari

,.

Does it Iook aH right to you?

10

.
Qu les parece?

, . ,
lspreiebyent

Les parece bien?

EXTRAPOLA TlON
--

sg
1

me

2 fam

te

2-3

le

pI

nos

les
NOTES

a. Indirect clitic pronouns inflect for person and

number, but not far gender.

15.6

SEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

15.21.11 Suhstitution drill - Number substitutioD

,
mgustalaksa~

n6zgustalaks'a~

nsfaltanlaskamsas

mfaltanlaskamisas

lz9ust~ele~~fiiYO

lfalt~und61ar
,

lgust~eled~fiYO
,
lsfalt~und61ar~
,

nzgustanla71egmbrs
,
,

mgustanla7.1egmbrs

leskmbyenemas~16tr

lkmbyenema~e16tr

mbamuybyn~

n6zbamuybyn~

. . .

, ,

Me gusta la casa.
2 Nos faltan las camisas.

3 Les

~usta

el edificio.

4 Le falta un dlar.

5 Nos gustan las

SIETE

le~umbres.

. .

. . .

Nos gusta la casa.

Me faltan las camisas.
Le gusta el edificio.
Les falta un dlar.
Me gustan las legumbres.

6 Les conviene ms el otro.

Le conviene ms el otro.

7 Me va muy bien.

Nos va muy bien.

15.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

15.21.12 RespoDse drill

,.

,.
legstala~rbe~atQelkuhalbre

meqst~la~~r0e~~

lzsst~elpartament9tolaksa

n79st~elprtment6
,

lfltalasop~tol~ensal~a

lfltalasopa

lzbbyent oml

l7bLye'n

[grande]

k~t~p~r~~~1~1~~r~pwrt6

mpare~e(rnd

[pkeQy6]
,
[barat6s]
,

nspr~~~p~kQY

k~l~sp~r~~~I~l~~~f~Y
k~l~sp~r~~~n Il~strhs

kw~nt~(s) s ~m~n~z Il~fl tan

mfaltand~e~

,
,

[do~e.t.]

. . .

lespare~embarts~

-------------------------------------------------------------Me gusta la cerveza.

2 Les gusta el apartamento o la casa?

Nos gusta el apartamento.

3 Le falta la sopa o la ensalada?

Le falta la sopa.

4 Les va bien o mal?

Les va bien.

5 Qu te parece el aereopuerto?

Me parece grande.

(pequeo)

6 Qu les parece el edificio?

Nos parece pequeo.

(baratos)

7 Qu les parecen los trajes?

Les parecen baratos.

(doce)

8 Cuntas semanas le faltan?

Me faltan doce.

(grande)

15.8

1 Le gusta la cerveza o el cuba libre?

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

,
[muybyn~]

nozbmuybyn~

komolezb~

,
[elabyoh~] 10

[lakasa~] 11

nO"~
,

legstalakasa-!,

tepr;i~m~l~ll~l~b~nd~r~~t

no'-!- mpar!iebwen-!-

13

le9~st~ll~skw~1~o~1~D9w~st

sJ.~ megstamuch6~

14

lespr~i~by~nl~l~~)sy~t~t

S1-!-

n6spareiebyn~

15

lbabyen.akJ.t

sJ.~

ltmuybyn-!-

[bwen-!-] 12

(muy bien)
(el avin)
(la casa)
(buena)

NUEVE

.,

legustelapartamentot

no-!- lezgstlabyo"n-!-

,. ,

9 Cmo les va?

Nos va muy bien.

10 Les gust~~el barco?

No, les gusta e 1 avin.

11 Le gusta el apartamento?

No, le gusta la casa.

12 Te parece mala la lavandera?

No, me parece buena.

13 Le gusta la escuela de lenguas?

S, me gusta mucho.

14 Les parece bien a las siete?

S, nos parece bien.

15 Le va bien aqu?

S, le va muy bien.

15.9

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

15.21.13 Translation drill

1 The suils seem inexpensive to uso

16strahe7 Insp~r~mb~ratbs

Los trajes nos parecen baratos.

2 He likes this suburb very mucho

l9stm~chQlesttrrya

Le gusta mucho este barrio.

3 1 don't like that name.

No me gusta ese nombre.

4, Does she need (lack) anything.

lfaltalgot

5 Don't you like the house?

no le(,us t. lakas at

6 On the contrary, 1 like it very mucho

alkantraryt mssttmucha+

Le falta algo?

,
No le gusta la casa?

Adems, nos parece barata.

7 Besides, it seems inexpensive to uso

,.

,.
8 We're thirteen dollars short.

n6sfaltan Itre~e~61~rs+

9 How's it going with you all?

komole ~L+

Cmo les \a?

Qu les parece la lavandera de la

esquina?

10 What do they think of the laundry on the

comer?

lo( us t

9-9 12" 1

15.10

,
fl~ YOm'Jet ot
,
~'YjUyi<..3:-6~

12 It doesn't sUlt me, lt'S too expensive.

13 Doeb the other one suit you?

Nos faltan trece dlares.

11 Does she bke the new building?

Al contrario, me gusta mucho.

Le gusta el edificio nuevo?

No me conviene, es muy caro.

1&k61~1)y 8nelotrot

Le conviene el otro?

DIEZ

SPOKEN SPANISH

B.

UNIT 15

Discussion of pattern

As stated in Unit 10, clitics are pronoun forms which occur with verbs. Clitics are of three kinds, direct (presented in Unit 10), indirect (presented here), and reflexive
(to be presented in Unit 24).
The selection of the clitic depends on the verb it accompanies. Sorne verbs may appear only with direct clitics, sorne only with indirect, sorne only with reflexive,
and sorne with various combinations. There is sorne overlap; sorne verbs may appear with direct or indirect ( /lo-aydo/vs/le-aydo/, /lo-espro/ vs
/le-espro/ ,/lo-(l)ymo/vs/le-(J)ymo/), and sorne verbs have a different semantic content when used withdirect or indirect clitics (/pselo/'Pass it'
vs /k -le-p sa t f'What's the matter with him').
The presentation in this section has been of constructions where a single clitic, an indirect, appears with a verbo The clitic will often be translated by 'to -'; for
example, /m/= 'to me', though sometimes the English sentence must be rearranged for this to be uue: /legst~elkwrtot/:'Does the room please you?' 01' 'Is
the room pleasing to you?' or more freely, 'Do you like the room?'

15.21.2

Indirect c litic pronouns - two objects (indirect clitic pronoun object and direct noun object)

A. Presentation of pattern

ILLUSTRATIONS

Me dijeron que seran dos.

Will you lend me

Y01r

Me prestas tu lpiz?

pencil?

Quin te limpia el apartamento?

Who sends you the newspapers?

Quin te manda los peridicos?

Le doy tres, uno de propina.

,.
What ha's Mario brought you?

ONCE

kel~atraloomry

Qu le ha trado Mario?

15.11

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

Alguien que

IWS

lleve las maletas.

They told us it would be two.

Nos dijeron que serian dos.

Who cleans your apartment for you?

Quin les limpia el apartamento?

10

Alguien que les lleve las maletas.

Someone to carry the suitcases fOl' them.

EXTRAPOLA TION
sg
1

me

2 fam

te

2-3

le

pi

nos

les

NOTES
ti.

15.12

This is a repetition of the forms presented in the preceding

drill point, appearing here in a different construction.

DOCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

15.21.21 Substitution drill- Item translation substitution

Problem:

,...

hwanlmmandalospery6diks
(her)

Answer:

Problem:
Juan

me

manda los peridicos.

(her)

Answer:
Juan le manda los peridicos.

TRECE

15.13

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

,.

elnostra~larr6p~

(him)

"
~'letra~larr6pa~

(me)

elmetra~larr6pa~

(her)

,
,
if'letrdelarr6pa~
,1

(them)

~\lestra~larrpa+

(you)

,
"
e~'letra~larr6p+

"

1 El nos trae la ropa.

(him)

El le trae la ropa.

(me)

F:I me trae la ropa.

(her)

El le trae la ropa.

(them)
(you)

15.14

F.l les trae la ropa.

El le trae la ropa.

CATORCE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

~'i~~l~s.~skr~t Il;zn6mbrs~

(us)

------------~

~\~~n;s,skr~bIl;7n6mbrs~

(him)

------------~

~\Jaleskr~b~Il;7nmbrs~

(me)

------------~

~r\~ ~m~s kr~t Il~zn6mbrs~

(you)

------------~

(them)

------------~

~A~~1~skr~t~ll;zn6mbrs~
.,..
~

El'\J ales.es krlLe Ilozn6mbrs+

2 Ella les escribe los nombres.

(us)

Ella le escribe los nombres.

(me)

Ella me escribe los nombres.

(you)

Ella le escribe los nombres.

(them)

QUINCE

Ella nos escribe los nombres.

(him)

Ella les escribe los nombres.

15.15

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
.,
EfI~oz Iledamperms

(them)

---------

~~~L Il~7d~rnp;rms..

(me)

---------

(her)

---------

~\;~z Im;ct~mp;rms
,.
.,
.
eC\Joz Ilect amperms

--------

~~~z ln~zet~mp~rms6

(yon pi)

---------

3 Ellos le dan permiso.

15.16

(tbem)

Ellos les dan permiso.

(me)

Ellos me dan permiso.

(her)

Ellos le dan permiso.

(us)

Ellos nos dan permiso.

(roo pi)

Ellos les dan permiso.

DIECISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

------------~

l~nrrbis~d~ll~zm~ltas~

-----------~

n~nrrbis~d~ll~zm~lts~

-----------~

lE1nrrbis~d~ll~zlt1~ltas~

(them)

___________ t

l~nrrebis~a~ll~zm~lts~

(you)

___________t

(her)

(him)

,11.

l~nrrbisaao Ilazmaltas~

4 Me han revisado las maletas.

DIECISIETE

(her)

Le han revisado las maletas.

(us)

Nos han revisado las maletas.

(him)

Le han revisado las maletas.

(them)

Les han revisado las maletas.

(you)

Le han revisado las maletas.

15.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

(me)

-----------

(bim)

----------
,

.. .

-----------
-----------

lW1sallelabalaskamsas

----------

lW1salle71abalaskamsas

,.
(you)

,
(tbem)

lW1sa/nzlabalaskamsas

,...

,...

5 Luisa les lava las camisas.

(me)

Luisa me lava las camisas.

(Mm)

Luisa le lava las camisas.

(us)

15.18

Luisa nos lava las camisas.

(you)

Luisa le lava las camisas.

(them)

Luisa les lava las camisas.

DIECIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

15.21.22 Translation drills Paired sentences

1 When do you send them the newspapers?

Cundo les manda Ud. los peridicos?

When do you send the newspapers to

them?

2 What have you sent them?

Qu les ha mandado Ud. a ellos?

What have you sent to them?

3 She never sends us anything.

Ella nunca nos manda nada.

She never sends anything to us.

4 What has Jobn brought you aH?

Qu les ha traido Juan a Uds.?

What has Jobo brought to you aIl?

5 My sister always brings me a

Mi herma siempre me trae uaa camisa

nueva.

Dew shirt.
My sister always brings a new shirt
to me.

,
6 My mother-in-law always gives me wine.

..,

miswegrafsyempreme~abfn~

Mi sue8"a siempre me da vino.

My mother-in-law always gives wine

to me.

DIECINUEVE

15.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

7 I've given him my peno

Yo le he dado mi pluma a l.

I've ~iven my pen to him.

8 The Molinas haven't rented him the

apartment.

Los Molina no le han alquilado el

apartamento.

The Molinas haven't rented the apartment

to him.

9 1 write her very liule.

Yo le escribo muy poco a ella.

1 write very liule to her.

10 My girl friend writes me a loto

Mi novia me escribe mucho.

My girl friend writes a lot to me.

11 When are you going to write him.

Cundo le va a escribir Ud?

When are you going to write to him.

15.20

VEINTE

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

SeDteDce translations

1 Wben does be give us tbeir names?

Cundo DOS da los Dombres de ellos?

2 Are you going to belp ber wOI'k?

Ud. le va a ayudar a trabajar?

3 Is sbe going to rent you (aIl) tbe boose?

Les va a alquilar la casa?

4 1 dont owe bim anytbing.

Yo no le debo Dada.

,
5 How mucb do you owe me?

kwantomedeb~ustd

,.

6 The Harrises always speak to os in

Englisb.

CuDto me debe Ud.?

,...

lbsharr1slsyemprelnb~ablanen~Qgl~s~

Los Harris siempre DOS hablaD en ingl~s.

7 The Garcas havent rented the

apartment to him.

,.
, ,. .,
lozgar1alnol~anplk11ad~lelapartamntb~

Los Garcia no le han alquilado el

apartamento.

8 Theyre going to write to me.

Ellos me van a escribir.

9 Why dont you write to them.

Por

VEINTIUNO

qu~

no les escribe Ud.?

15.21

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

10 The girl cleans the furniture fOl' them.

La muchacha les limpia los muebles.

11 The chauffer always carries the suitcases

for uso

El chofer siempre nos lleva las maletas.

12 My wife doesn't wash my (the) shirts

for me.

Mi esposa no me lava las camisas.

13 Nobody sweeps the apartment fOl' them.

14 Mr. Miranda has

from us.

bou~ht

the furniture

. .

... .

nactyelle7tarrelapartamnt6

Nadie les barre el apartamento.

El Sr. Miranda nos ha comprado los

muebles.

15 I have bought the sofa bed from them.

Yo les he comprado el sofcama.

16 A man has bought the house from them.

Un seor les ha comprado la casa a ellos.

B.

Discussion of paltero

In the earlier drill sections on indirect clitics, one indirect clitic appeared as the single pronoun object of the verbo In the present drill section, two objects appear.
They could both be clitics, but since complicating changes occur among the clitics when two appear together, a drill on such combined sequences is reserved for a later unit
(Unit 20). In this section one pronoun object (expressed by an indirect clitic) and one noun object appear, controlled by the same verbo
Notice that the indirect relationship of Spanish is expressed in English with object pronouns in two positions: alone after a verb: 'He writes us a letter every day';
or with the relater 'to': 'He sent the book to os'. Notice also that the indirect clitic construction in Spanish translates several English relators other than 'to'; they seem to

15.22

VEINTID OS

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

/L1etrelos

mean quite different things in English, though they are classified as similar by their common participation in the Spanish indirect clitic construction:

11bros~/ 'He brings the books to me'; /me0'yba Ilamalta!He carries the suitcase for me'; /[(lekmpr~ elkl'ro+ /

'He's buyinp; the car from me'.

To, for, and from can aIl be translated by the Spanish indirect clitic.

15.21.3

Question intonation patterns - Yes questions

A. Presentation of pattero

ILLUSTRATIONS

2
2 2t
Tiene un lpiz?

,
,.
tyen~unlapl~t

2
3 1
Tiene un lpiz?

ty~n~~nlapi~ I
,

~.

1 2
2 2 t
Podemos verlo?

pdemo7.Lerlot

11

1 2
3
Podemos verlo?

port~m~7ber16 I
,

1
2 22 t
Es muy caro?

e7muykarot

1
2 3 1
Es muy caro?

e7muykar61
EXTRAPOLA TION
Yes-no question

/1222t/

Yes question

/1231

1/

a. The /1231 / pattero signals, in appropriate contexts, a yes-no question in which a 'yes' answer is more or less expected. Note that it differs from the
emfhatic or contrasting statement pattero of units 12 and 13 ( /1231.1- /) only in the extent and abruptness of the final fade-out. This difference is transcribed by
/ ,/ vs /~/

VEINTITRES

15.23

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

15.21.31 Substitutioo drilI pattero aubatitutioo

Problem:
lpare~etaratot

Answer:

. .

lpreiebarat
,

es talabwel tat

st~l~bwel ta I

l9ustal~l~eat

staoesokupaetot

l9ustal~1.<t;al
,
staaesokup~a61

n~ es 1 talmwad" as t

ne~es~talmwac!s

,
,

15.24

. . .

Problem:

1
2
2 2t
Le parece barato?

Answer:

1
2
31 I
Le parece barato?

. .
. . .
, .

1 2
2 2t
1 Est a la vuelta?

1 2
3 1
Est a la vuelta?

1 2
22t
2 Le gusta la idea?

j. Le

1 2
2 2t
3 Est desocupado?

1 2
3 11
Est desocupado?

1 2
2 2t
4 Necesita almohadas?

1 2
3 1
Necesita almohadas?

1 2
311
gusta la idea?

VEINTICUATaO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

,. ,
t6ctao1ahuntost

syempretrabahandot

,.

.,.
sta~nlakasat
, .
,

sta~nlakasl

enl~mbhada~er1kanal

enltn1d anwebet

enlbnd~nwebl

1
2 2 2 t
5 Todava juntos?

1 2 3 1
Todava juntos?

VEINTICINCO

Sy~mpr~tr;b~hand61

enl~mbhadamer1kanat

,
todab1ahuntos ,I

2
2 2
6 Siempre trabajando?

2
3 1
Siempre trabajando?

1 2
2 2t
7 Est en la casa?

1 2
3 1
Est en la casa?

1
2
2 2t
8 En la Embajada Americana?

1
2
3 1
En la Embajada Americana?

1
2
2 2 t
9 En la Avenida Nueve?

1
2
3 1
En la Avenida Nueve?

15.25

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

"

ityen~ambret

11

ibebeblnot

"

"

Jo.

l(.yen~am

"

"

b re
. I

ibeLebln

10 Y tiene hambre?

1 2
3
1
y tiene hambre?

1 2
22 t
11 Y bebe vino?

1 2
31
Y bebe vino?

1 2

n.

"

10

Discussion of pattero

l.

A yes-no question, particularly in an informal situation, to which a 'yes' answer is more or less expected, is frequently uttered with the intonation pattern /1231
231
Thestatementof 112311/onaquestionanticipatin~a'yes' answercanhaveadditionalmeaning. Forinstance Ityn~unlpl~ I/mayreallymean, 'Can
1 borrow a pencil' if uttered in an appropriate context, such as with the hand of the speaker extended toward the person addressed.
As a generalization, however, it is not inappropriate to say that 'yes' is the anticipated reply to such a question.

15.26

VEINTISEIS

SPOKEN SPANISH

15.22

UNIT 15

Replacement drills

s~nm~yrr~g~r~s;s I~nl~dw~n~t

..

..

,.

esa __ t

sonmuyrrlqurosos /enesadwanat

kasat

snm~yrr~9~rs;sl~n~s~kasat
,

,.,

..

,.

amaLles

sonmuyamableslenEsakasat

traI)kllos

s~nm~ytr~I)k~l;sI~n;s~k~s~t

s~nm~ys~~y;s l~n;s~k~s~t

___ suiYoS

otelest

akel

VEINTISIETE

"

s~nm~ys~~y;s I~n;s;s;t~l~st

s~nm~ys~~y;s I~~k~l;t~lt

Son muy rigurosos en la aduana?

esa _ _ ?

casa?

Son muy rigurosos en esa aduana?

Son muy rigurosos en esa casa?

3 _ _ _ amables

Son muy amables en esa casa?

4 _ _ _ tranquilos

Son muy tranquilos en esa casa?

5 _ _ _ sucios

Son muy sucios en esa casa?

hoteles?

aquel_ _ ?

Son muy sucios en esos hoteles?

Son muy sucios en aquel hotel?

15.27

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

~~~st~k~lm*ek1phe

bals

1
aC~1

su

~~~st~~~~ Im~7.b~les

~~~st~r~~ Is~b~l

k6sas~

t6<tat 1a

"

esas _ _
maletins~

~~~st~nd:~~ Is~sk6sas.t.
tOd"ab~~ I~st~n.~)j~ Is~sk6sas
t6d"ab~~ I~st~n.~~~ I~s~sk6sas.t.
t6dab~~I~st~n;C~~I~s~zm;1~tnes

Ya est aqu mi equipaje.

1
2
3

bales.
all

6
7

Ya estn aqu mis bales.

Ya estn all mis bales.

su _ _
cosas.

5 Todava

15.28

~~~st~n~k~lm~zh~les

Ya est all su bal.

Ya estn all sus cOsas.
Todava estn all sus cosas.

esas_ _
maletines.

Todava estn all esas cosas.

Todava estn all esos maletines.

VEINTIOCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

s~nl~n~zmaletazLr~s~

e
1

es
baul

este

mesas

~s l~mb~~lbrd"~

~s l~mb~~lp~kQYO~

~s l~st~b~~lp~kQy6~

s~nl~st~zm~s~sp~kQyas~

_otraz

s~nl~tr~7.m~S~sp~kQyas~

ay.

~yl~tr~zm~s~sp~kQyas~

Son unas maletas verdes.

1 Es

Es una maleta verde.

bal

3
este

_otras

7 Hay

Es un bal pequeo.
Es este bal pequeo.

mesas _ _ _

Es un bal verde.
pequeo.

VEINTINUEVE

lunamaletabrd~

es

oekQy6

Son estas mesas pequeas.

Son otras mesas pequeas.
Hay otras mesas pequeas.

15.29

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
akl~stalalistc3
,

maletines

loz

3
4

_ay

ak~~st~l~st~lst

esta_

k6ss

.___ otras ___

6mbres

k~~st~n I~st;zmaletnes

. ..

,
,
kl~stanlozmaletnes

ak~~ylunozm~l~tins
k~~yl~n~sksas

k~~yl;tr~sk6sas
k~~y I~tr~s6rnbres

----------------------------------_._------------

--_.-----_._-. _-------._---

Aqu est la lista.

esta_.

maletines.

los _ _ _

_ _ hay

6
7

15.30

Aqu est esta lista.

Aqu estn estos maletines.
Aqu estn los maletines.
Aqu hay unos maletines.

cosas.
_ _otras

Aqu hay unas cosas.

Aqu hay otras cosas.

hombres.

Aqu hay otros hombres.

TREINTA

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

,
tOQestakompltb+

desokupet+

1
2

l7mesas

lst+

3
4

elsQyor

kontnts+

lzm~s~s I~st~nd~s~k~pds+

"
,
lmes~estalsta+
,

elseQyorestalstb+

"

l(~seQyores lestaDkontnts+

nsotros
,

ns~tr;s I~st~m;sk;ntntbs+

_~stoy:

~o~stoykontnt+

"

Todo est completo.

desocupado.

2 Las mesas

Todo est desocupado.

Las mesas estn desocupadas.

lista.

4 El seor

TREINTA Y UNO

"
"
todQesta6esokupdb~

La mesa est lista.

El seor est listo.

contentos.

Los seores estn contentos.

6 Nosotros

Nosotros estamos contentos.

7 _ _ estoy

Yo estoy contento.

15.31

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

b~y~b~sk~r~ntksi~

F
1

_ _ traer

bamos

4-

_ _ komprar _ _ ~

. .

bamoslakomprarunozl~br6s~

esoz __ ~

b~m~s I~k~mpr~rl~s~zlbrs+
,.

ksas~

tn~m~slk~

..

."

,.

bamos lakomprarlesask6sAs~

ten~m~slk~k~mpr~rl~s~sksas+

Voy a buscar un taxi.

1 _ _ traer

Voy a traer un taxi.

libros.

3 Vamos

Voy a traer unos libros.

Vamos a traer unos libros.

4 _ _ comprar _ _

Vamos a comprar unos libros.

Vamos a comprar esos libros.

6
7 Tenemos que

15.32

. .,..

bamoslatraerunozlibrs~

boyatraerunozlibr6s~

ltr6s~

boyatraeruntksi~

esos_.
cosas.

Vamos a comprar esas cosas.

Tenemos que comprar esas cosas.

TREINTA Y na;

SPOKEN SPANISH

15.23

UNIT 15

Variation drills

Estoy seguro de que a usted

molestar.

1 I'm sure they're nol going to send you.

2 ['m sure they're nol going to wait

00

lo van a

Estoy seguro de que a usted no lo van a

mandar.

rOl'

Estoy seguro de que a l no lo van a

esperar.

lim.

3 I'm sure they're nol going to take her.

Estoy seguro de que a ella no la van a

llevar.

4 He's S1B'e they're going to need me.

Est seguro de que a mi me van a

necesitar.

5 Re's sure they're going to need them.

Est seguro de que a ellos los van a

necesitar.

6 We're .S1B'e they're going to send Joho

and Jose.

estm(~s9~r~z Idk~hw~nl*~h;s~ll;Zb~n
amandr

7 We're sure they're going to send Mary

and Carmen.

TREINTA Y TRES

stm(~sg~r~zldek~mr~~I*~k~rm~nll~z

. .

,
ban.amandr~

Estamos seguros de que a Juan y a Jos

los van a mandar.

Estamos seguros de que a Maria y a

Carmen las van a mandar.

15.33

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

"

. ..

,..

Tenga la bondad de abrir el bal primero.

B te~galabondadl~~br1relballprimr
1 Please open the green suitcase.

Tenga la bondad de abrir la maleta verde.

2 Please dress right away.

Tenga la bondad de vestirse en seguida.

3 Please wait a momento

Tenga la bondad de esperar un momento.

. .

...,

,
,
te~galabondadldsperaralabwltat

4 Please wait around the cornero

5 Please speak English.

Tenga la bondad de hablar ingls.

6 Please come alone.

Tenga la bondad de venir solo.

7 Please come (pI.) together.

Tengan la bondad de venir juntos.

s6nnozrregalos

,.
todQesta~eklardO

Son unos refljalos. Todo est declarado.

,.
,
tod~estakompr~o

1 They're sorne books. Everything's

bought.

s6niJno7.11brs

2 They're sorne shirts. Everything's

washed.

snimskm1Ss tOdQestalabet

15.34

Tenga la bondad de esperar a la vuelta.

Son unos libros. Todo est comprado.

Son unas camisas. Todo est lavado.

TREINTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

UNIT 15

3 It's whisky. It's in the declaration.

Es whiskey. Est declarado.

4 The shirt is washed.

La camisa est lavada.

5 The car is fixed.

El auto est arreglado.

6 The rooms are rented.

Los cuartos estn alquilados.

7 The shirts are washed.

Las camisas estn lavadas.

La han atendido bien en inmigracin?

o
1 Have they taken good care of you (f)
in the hotel?

La han atendido bien en el hotel?

2 Have they included you (m) in the list?

Lo han includo en la lista?

3 Have they seen much of Washington?

Han conocido mucho en Washington?

4 Have you (pI) eaten in that restaurant?

Han comido en ese restorn?

5 Have you (pI) learned much Spanish?

TREINTA Y CINCO

,.
,
. ,
nftprnd160lmuchQespaQyolt

Han aprendido mucho espaol?

15.35

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

6 Have you (sg) waited a long time?

,.
,
,
~spraoolmuchotyempot

7 Have you (sg) spoken with them?

blado

,.

.,
Ikon.eO~ost

kbnm19Qtansoomuyambls

Conmigo han sido muy amables.

1 They've been very nice to you (fam).

Contigo han sido muy amables.

"

2 They've been very nice to you (form).

konpstedtansidomuyambles+

Con usted han sido muy amables.

3 They've been very nice to him.

,
, .
kon~ltnsdmuyambles

Con l han sido muy amables.

4 He's been very nice to her.

Con ella ha sido muy amable.

5 He hasn't spoken with uso

Con nosotros no ha hablado.

6 He hasn't worked with uso

,.
,
k~nsotroztnQatrabahd

7 He hasn't been out with

ko~n6sotroztnoasaldo
,..

,.

15.36

Ha hablado con ellos?

"

Ha esperado mucho tiempo?

USe

Con nosotros no ha trabajado.

,.
Con nosotros no ha salido.

TREINTA Y SEIS

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

Nos est prestando una gran ayuda.

1 He's waiting for us in the rear of the

building.

Nos est esperando detrs del edificio.

2 He's waiting for os in the park.

Nos est esperando en el parque.

3 The lady is speaking to you (fam).

Te est hablando la seora.

4 He's fixing the car for you (fam).

Te est arreglando el auto.

5 He's sending me two hundred dollars a

month.

,.,
..
,.
, ...
mestamandandoldOs(~yentozdolareslalms~

6 He's giving me twenty dollara a week.

Me est dando veinte dlares a la semana.

,
7 It's bothering me a loto

TREINTA Y SIETE

Me est mandando doscientos d61ares al

mes.

..

mstamolestandomch6~

Me est molestando mucho.

15.37

UNIT 15

15.24

SPOKEN SPANISH

Review drill - Possessive cODstructioDS

1 Juan's sister is here.

La hermaDa de Juan est aqu.

2 Antonio's wife is here.

La esposa de Antonio est aqu.

3 Carmen's mother-in-Iaw is here.

La suegra de Carmen est aqu.

4 Antonio's son is here.

El hijo de Antonio est aqu.

5 Carmen's cup is here.

La taza de Carmen est aqu.

,.
6 Antonio's girl is here.

15.38

,.

lan~QyaIQ~ntonyo I~stak~

La nia de Antonio est aqu.

7 Antonio's boy is here.

El nio de Antonio est aqu.

8 Carmen's friend is here.

La amiga de Carmen est aqu.

9 Carmen's things are here.

Las cosas de Carmen estn aqu.

10 J08e's furniture is here.

Los muebles de Jos estn aqu.

11 Juan's desk is here.

El escritorio de Juan est aqu.

TREINTA Y OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

15.3

UNIT 15

CONVERSATION STIMULUS

NARRAT/VE 1

1 The immigration people have taken good

care of Colonel Harris' family.

16(~sQy;r~zld1inmi~r~~y~nt~nAtnd1do
m~ybYn lalafamlyaldelk6r6nlhrris~

Los seores de la inmigracin han atendido

muy bien a la familia del coronel Harris.

2 They've been very nice to them.

Han sido muy amables con ellos.

3 Mrs. Harris' name is Jean.

El nombre de la seora Harris es Jean.

4 Jean has to go to customs now.

Jean tiene que ir a la aduana ahora.

5 The colonel thinks that they are very

strict there.

El coronel cree que son muy rigurosos ah.

".

6 But he isn't sure.

per6n2estase9r6~

7 Jean has the list of all the things she's

bringing.

Pero no est seguro.

Jean tiene la lista de todas las cosas que

trae.

,..

8 The colonel can't go in.

elk6rnellnopweaepasr~

El coronel no puede pasar.

9 He'll wait for them here.

ak11 os,e s p r

Aqu los espera.

TREINTA Y NUEVE

15.39

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

D/ALOG 1

Coronel, pregntele a lean si la han

atendido bien en inmigracin.

lean, contstele que s, que los seores

ah han sido muy amables con ustedes.

Cmonel: Te llan atendido bien en

inmigrac in, lean?

s~ lo(s)sQy~r~s 1~~tnsetom~y~miJles I

lean: S, los seores ah han sido muy

amables con nosotros.

k(n) nos 6tros

Coronel, dgale que ahora tiene que ir a
la aduana.

Coronel: Ahora tienes que ir a la aduana.

lean, dgale que s, y pregntele si son

muy rigurosos ah.

lean: S. Son muy rigurosos ah?

,.

,
n6~stoyse~r6

kreokes

lean, contstele que s, que aqu est.

Que todo est declarado. Pregntele
si no viene con Uds.

si k1~st tooQ/estadeklard

ty~n~zl~1~st~la~t~6~sl~sk~s~slk~tr~~st
"

Coronel, contstele que no, que Ud. no

puede pasar. Que aqu los espera.

15.40

Coronel, contstele qu~ Ud. cree que s,

que no est seguro. Pregntele si tiene
la lista de todas las cosas que trae.

Coronel: Creo que s, no estoy seguro.

Tienes la lista de todas las
cosas que traes?

,.,..

noby~n~sk;~)n;s~tr;st
,
, . .
, . .
noi ~onopwedopasr kllo~espr~

lean: S, aqu est. Todo est declarado.

No vienes con nosotros?

Cmon~l: No, yo no puedo pasar. Aqu

los espero.

CUARENTA

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

NARRATWE 2

,
1 They're ready adw.

,
Ya estn listos.

~a~stanlsts

2 Jean loob very hppy.

Jean parece muy contenta.

,
3 And why sLouldn't she? They didn't
charge her anything.

iprken6l nleDkbbraoonacal

y por qu no? No le han cobrado nada.

Ella no sabe por qu.

4 She doesn't know why.

5 They didll't tell be!'.

noleet~hrn

6 And she isn't going lo ask tbem.

ie0\ja Inobapreguntrlesl

,.

No le dijeroll.

,
y ella no va a preguntarles.

7 The colonel (just) can't believe itf

El coronel no puede creerlo!

8 He thought tbey were very strict bel'e.

El cl'eia que eran muy riglH'08OS aqu.

CUARENTA Y UNO

15.41

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

DIALOC 2

Jean, dgale a su esposo que ya est'n

listos ustedes.

~~I~stmzl~sts~

Jean: Ya estamos listos.

Coronel, dgale que ella parece muy

contenta. Que por qu.

Coronel: Pareces muy contenta. Por

qu?

Jean, contstele que no le han cobrado

nada.

Jean: No me han cobrado nada.

Coronel, dgale que no puede creerlo.

Que por qu.

Coronel: No puedo creerlo, por qu?

Jean, contstele que Ud. no sabe pOI' qu.

Que no le dijeron, y que Ud. no va a
preguntarles.

Jean: No s por qu. No me dijeron y

yo no voy a preguntarles.

. ..

apre~untrles~

Coronel, dgale que estupendo. Y que

Ud. crea que eran rigurosos aqu.

Coronel: Estupendol Y yo crea que eran

rigurosos aqu.

NARRATlVE 3

15.42

1 A friend of the colonel's is going to

take them in his caro

Un amigo del coronel va a llevarlos en

8U carro.

2 But with so much baggage there won't

be room for all.

Pero con tanto equipaje no van a caber

todos.

CUARENTA Y DOS

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

,
3 They'll make two trips, then.

~ndozbyhs lnt6n~s+

4 But good gosh! lust a moment!

pr6k~ramb~+

~en dos viajes, entonces.

unmomntb+

Pero caramba!, un momento!

5 Something's wrong.

Algo pasa.

6 lean's missing the suitcase with

the gifts.

A lean le falta la maleta con los regalos.

7 She may have left it in the cusloms

(office).

Puede haberla dejado en la aduana.

8 She's going lo go look for it there.

Va a ir a buscarla ah.

DIALOG 3

Coronel, dgale a su esposa que listos,

entonces, y que un amigo suyo va a
llevarlos a Uds. en su carro.

lean, dgale que con tanto equipaje no

van a caber todos.

CUARENTA Y TRES

l~stbs lnt6n~s+ nm~s;m~;1

b~~b~rn;s I~ns~krrb+

Coronel: Listos, entonces. Un amigo

mo va a llevarnos en su
carro.

Jean: Con tanto equipaje no vamos a

caber todos.

15.43

UNIT 15

SPOKEN SPANISH

Coronel, dgale que hacen doe viaje.,

entonces.

Coronel: Hacemoe dos viajes, entonces.

Jean, dgale que ay, caramba! que

momento.

UD

,
Coronel, pregdntele que qu le pasa.

15M

aylkramba~ unmomnt6~

Jeo: Ay, caramba! Un momento.

ketepsa~

Coronel: Qu te pasa?

.lean, contstele que le falta la maleta

con loe regaloe.

Jean: Me falta la maleta con loe resalO8

C.one}, dgale que debe haberla dejado

en la aduana.

Coronel: Debes haherla dejado en l.

aduana.

Jean, dgale que puede ser. Que Ud. v.

a ir a buscarla ah.

JeaD: Puede ser. V oy a ir hacerla ahi.

CUARENTA Y CUATRO

SPOKEN SPANISH

AI.l

APPENDIX I

Vocabulary
Units 1-15
The fol1owing vocabulary list ineludes al1 words presented in Units 1-15. The entries are in a respel1ing which makes it possible to
find any item for which the pronunciation is known without being acquainted with the irregularities of the Spanish spelling system.
The first indentations under the main entry are constructions in which the entry item (or a variant form of the entry item) appears, which
are felt to be idiomatic from the point o view of English translation.
The second indentations under the maio entry consist of inflected forms which are irregular or which have not been treated yet in the
dril1s or discussion.

/roy/

Main entries are alphabetized according to the English alphabet with the fol1owing modifications:
fol1ows /1 Y/, /QY /
fol1ows /ny/, and/~/ fol1ows/ S / The respelling used in the vocabulary is the same as that used in the extrapolations and discussions, technical1y referred to as a 'phonemic transcription.' This differs from the respel1ing in the 'aid to listening' column of the
basic sentences only in omitting certain details of ;>ronunciation which can also be determined by the position of the 'phoneme' in a
sequence of sounds (for example, the phoneme /d/ is [d ] initially in an utterance, or after
or /1/ ; it is [d ] elsewhere;
both are listed /
in the vocabulary.)

/n/

d/

Nouns are identified for gender class membership by their appearance with the appropriate form of the definite article. A few nouns
which ordinarily do not appear with artieles (as sorne names of persons and places, names of the months, and sorne indefinites) are
identified by empty parentheses instead of by artieles.
Adjectives are identified by one of two ways. Those which have two gender endings are listed in their masculine form, with the feminine
ending fol1owing: /byh O ,
Those which have a common gender (both masculine and feminine agreement by a single form) are
shown with a zero fol1owing: /grnde, ~ /.

-a/.

/-Vr/

Verbs can be identified by the

(i.e.j-r ,-r ,-ir/) ending and the English translation 'to
.' Forms of irregular
verbs and unfamiliar forms are given (as described aboye) at the second indentation after the main entry. Second person verb forms are
formal unless marked (fam) for familiar. Command forms appear without an indicated subject. Verb forms which are so irregular as to
alphabetize differently from the main entry of the infinitive are cross-referenced.
Clitic pronouns are marked by a fol1owing dash, which indicates their dependence on accompanying verbs in an utterance: /
Other pronouns are not marked, but can be identified by their English translations.

UNO

le s-/ .

AI.l

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

lal
The second column gives the traditional Spanish orthography of the main entries, in parentheses.
The third column gives the English translations of all the entry items.
The fourth (right hand) column gives the unit and section of the first appearance of each entry. Thus 10.1 indicates the item first appears
in the hasic dialogs of Unit 10; 10.2, in an illustration drill of the drills and grammar section in Unit 10.
In Unit 16 and after, new vocahulary also appears in the reading selections, so 16.4 would indicate that the first appearance was in the
readings section, and a second reference of 21.1 would indicate a suhsequent entry in the hasic dialogs. Two 'first' entries are necessary
hecause an 'active' knowledge is presumed for aH items presented in hasic sentences and drills, and only a 'passive' knowledge or recognition is presumed for items presented in readings. So, items presented in the readings are not used in drills until or unless they appear
later in has ic dialogs.
The following ahreviations are used:

(O

feminine

(fam)

familiar

(n)

neuter

(pI)

plural

~sg)

singular

lal
a

(a)

a-k6mo-est-( el-kmbyo)
al
a-la-bwlta
a l-i< on trryo
al-( ms)
AI.2

to

1.1

at

2.1

what's the rate (o exchange)

3.1

to the

1.1

around the e orner

S.l

on the contrary

8.1

per (month)

7.1

DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

ladel
a-mendo
a-prop6sJ.to
a-su-dJ.sposJ.iyn
a-sus-6rdenes

la

( see
abenda

el

4.1

at your disposal

14.1

at your service

14.1

(ah)

oh

4.1

(avenida)

avenue

3.1

(haber)

there to be

1.1

to have

6.1

(you) have

9.2

(you) have (pi)

9.2

n
s
y

(you) have (fam)

9.2

there is, there are

1.1

(1) have

6.1

mos
y-ke

(we) have

9.1

it's necessary to

3.1

n6-y-de-i<~

don't give it a thought

1.1

(avisar)

to notify

5.1

(habitacin)

room

8.1

(hablar)

to speak, to talk

4.1

(abrir)

to open

8.2

(avin)

plane

14.1

by plane

14.1

abJ.sr
abJ.tay6n
ablr
abrir
aby6n
p o:r--aby6n
adelnte
pa s :r--ade ln te

TRES

by the way

13.1

ab~r)

ab~r

la

often

(adelante)

straight ahead, forward; come

(on) in

2.1

to come in

9.1
Al.3

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

ladel
la
el

las

adems
adm1n1stratf.bo, -a
adwna
ady6s
aeropwrto
,...
afeytr
afeytrse
afwras
agrade~r
agrade~ id o,

-a

besides

(administrat ivo)

administrative

4.1

(aduana)

customs office

15.1

(adis)

goodbye

(aeropuerto)

airport

14.1

(afeitar)

to shave

12.1

to shave oneself

12.1

gwa ( f)
ahniya
ahnte
af.
por-a!
akl
ak0ya ( f)
akC)yos, -as
akf.
ak-tyne

lgo
lgo-ms
( ) lgyen
alk11r
AI.4

1.1

7.1

(afueras)

outskirts

(agradecer)

to be grateful

10.1

(agrade cido)

grateful

10.1

thanks a lot for everything

10.1

my-agrade~f.do-por-t6do

el
la
el

14.1

(adems)

(agua)

water

3.1

(agencia)

agency

7.1

(agente)

agent

7.1

(ah)

there

2.1

that way
(aqul)

(aqu)

(algo)

13.1

that (over there)

7.2

that (over there)

7.2

those

7.2

here

3.1

here you are

3.1

here is (are)

7.1

anything, something

3.1

anything else

3.1

(alguien)

anyone

10.2

(alquilar)

to rent

7.1

CUATR

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/as(~/

la

el

el

el

el

el

CINCO

almor~r

(almorzar)

to lunch

almwda
aC)y!
amble, ~
mbre ( f)
ten:r-mbre
amerlkno, -a
amgo
amwebldo, -a
amweblr
n (see abr)
an6che
ntes

(almohada)

pillow

(allO

there (in that place)

6.1

(amable)

kind, nice, courteous

15.1

(hambre)

hunger

5.1

to be hungry

5.1

(americano)

American

2.1

(amigo)

friend

7.1

(amueblado)

furnished

7.1

(amueblar)

to furnish

7.1

(anoche)

last night

15.1

(antes)

before

10.1

ann~yo

(anuncio)

advertisement

7.1

a6ra
a6ra-msmo
por-a6ra
apartamnto
apnas
aprendr
arregldo, -a
arreglr
s ( see abr)
as!
as() ens6r

(ahora)

now

3.1

right now

3.1

right now

7.1

(apartamento)

apartment

6.1

(apenas)

scarcely, barely

(aprender)

to learn

4.1

(arreglado)

fixed, arranged

9.1

(arreglar)

to fix, to arrange

9.1

(asO

so

8.1

(ascensor)

elevator

3.1

5.1
11.1

12.1

AI.5

VOCABULARY

/ast/

el

la

SPOKEN SPANISH
until

1.1

so long

1.1

see you tomorrow

1.1

(hacer)

to do, to make

9.1

(atender)

to take care of, to assist

(auto)

car

7.1

(ayer)

yesterday

4.1

(ayuda)

help

(ayudar)

to help

6.1

(bajar)

to go down

2.1

(valer)

to he worth

14.1

to he worthwhile

14.1

to hathe

12.1

to hathe oneself

12.1

sta
sta-lwgo
sta-maQyna

(hasta)

a~r

atendr
wto
,
ay (see
ayr
ayda
ayudr

15.1

ab~r)

15.1

/ b /

el
el
el

AI.6

b (see r)
bahr
balr
balr-la-pna
bmos (see r)
bn ( see r)
baQyr
baQyrse
bnyo
barto, -a
brko
em-brko
bar6n
barrr

(haar)

(hao)

hathroom

2.1

(harato)

cheap, inexpensive

5.1

(harco)

hoat

14.1

hy hoat

14.1

(varn)

male

14.1

(harrer)

to sweep

11.1

SEIS

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/ber/
el

el

( )

brryo
bs (see ir)
bastnte, -i?5
bal
byas (see ir)

(barrio)

sectioD (of tOWD)

(bastante)

enough, quite (a bit)

(bal)

trunk

15.1

baylr
b (see br)
bemos (see br)
bebr
beQ)yabis ta
bn (see benir, br)
benir
bn
bno
byne
bynen
bynes
bo (see br)
br
b
bemos
bn
bo
bs

(bailar)

to dance

13.1

(beber)

to drink

9.1

(Be llavista)

Bellavista

(venir)

to come

brde, ~
SIETE

(ver)

(verde)

14.1

5.1

14.1

5.1

come (fam)

13.1

(you) carne

5.1

(she) comes

10.1

(they) come

14.1

(you) come (fam)

8.1

to see

6.1

(you) see

14.2

let's see

6.1

(you) see (pl)

14.2

(I) see

10.2

(you) see (fam)

14.2

green

15.1

AI.7

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/bes/
(see b'r)
best1r
best1rse

(vestir)

b~~

(vez)

b~s

la

12.1

to dress oneseH

12.1
2.1

time

de-b~~-en-kw'ndo

from time to time

6tra-b~~

again

2.1

(vecino)

neighhor

8.1

(veinte)

twenty

2.1

bJ.br

(vivir)

to live

6.1

el

bJ.o.)y~te

(billete)

hill

3.1

el
la
la

bino (see benir)

bno
bista
b6da

(vino)

wine

6.1

(vista)

view

8.1

(boda)

wedding

9.1

(volver)

to return

9.1

(bondad)

kindness, goodness

15.1

to he so kiBd as to, please

15.1

el

be~1no
b~ynte,

bolb~r

la

la

la

AI.8

to dress

bondd
tenr-la-bondd-de
bonto, -a
by (see r)
br6ma
k-br6ma
buskr
bwlta
a-la-bwlta
bw~no, -a

13.1

8..1

(bonito)

pretty

(broma)

joke

12.1

what a fic

12.1

(buscar)

to look for

6.1

(vuelta)

turn

5.1

around the
(bueno)

good

COl'Der

5.1
1.1

OCHO

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/chul/

el

el

bwn
bwnos-dlas
bwnas--n6ches
bwnas-trdes
byhe
byahro, -a
byho, -a
byn
est-byn
byne (see benir)
bynen (see ben1r)
bynes (see ben1r)
byrnes

OK

4.1

good

5.1

good morning

1.1

good evening

1.1

good afternoon

1.1

(viaje)

trip

4.1

(viajero)

traveler

3.1

(vie jo)

old

7.1

(bien)

well, fine

1.1

that's O.K., OK

1.1

(viernes)

Friday

10.1

(che~)

cReck

1.1

(chi<:a)

girl

13.1

(ckicg)

boy

12.1

(chofer)

chauffelif

4.1

(chuleta)

chop

6.1

/ch/

el
la
el

el
la

NUEVE

chke
ch1ka
chko
chofr
chulta

AI.9

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/dan/

/dl
d(n) ( see dr)
dr
d
dn
ds
d
d6y
d r-a-( 1a-k O)ye )
drse-prsa
drse-una-dcha
ds ( see dr)
de

la

AI.lO

(dar)

(de)

to give

2.1

(it) gives

8.1

(they) give

10.1

(you) give (fam)

14.2

give

2.1

(1) give

4.1

to Cace on (the street)

8.1

to hurry (oneself)

12.1

to take a shower

12.1

oC, from

1.1

de-b~-en-kwndo

from time to time

del
de-nda

oC the, from the

8.2

you're welcome

1.1

lo~e

the matter oC, about

9.1

to owe, must, ought

4.1

must be, probably is (are)

8.1

(dejar)

to leave, to let

8.1

(declarar)

to declare

15.1

(demasiado)

too much

7.1

too many

7.1

(derecha)

right

2.1

(desde)

since

4.1

since when (how long)

4.1

d (see dr)
debr
dbe(n)-sr
dehr
deklarr
demasydo, -a
demasydos, -as
dercha
dsde
dsde-kwndo

(deber)

13.1

DIEZ

VOCABULARY
/dl.s/

SPOKEN SPANISH

deser
des okupdo, -a
desokupr
despws

(desear)

to wish

6.1

(desocupado)

empty, unoccupied

6.1

(desocupar)

to vacate, to empty

6.1

(despus)

later

3.1

de~l.d1r

(decidir)

to decide

9.1

de~r

(decir)

to say, to tell

2.1

say

4.1

dga
dgas
dhe
dl.hron

15.1

(you) say

2.1

de~1rse

to say itself, to be said

2.1

kerr-de~r

to mean

2.1

behind

14.1

in back o, behind, beyond

14.1

detrs
detrs-de
da
bVJnos-das
diga (see de~r)
dgas ( see der)
dhe (see de~r)

(detrs)

day

1.1

good morning

1.1

(dispensar)

to excuse

1.1

(dis pos ic in)

disposition

14.1

at your disposal

14.1

(da)

de~r)

dlSPOSl.~y6n

a-su-dlsposl.y6n

ONCE

(1) said

4.1

dl.hron (see
dl.spensgr

la

12.1

(they) told

d~e

el

tell (fam)

AI.II

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/dJ./

d!~e

el
el

el

d6lar
domingo
d6n
d6nde
dormJ.t6ryo
d6s, ~
d6~e,

la
el

(see der)

d6y ( see dr)

dcha
drse-una-dcha
dynte
lJ.rnpyrse-los-dyntes
dy, ~

(dlar)

dollar

3.1

(domingo)

Sunday

10.1

(don)

mister

11.1

(dnde)

where

2.1

(dormitorio)

bedroom

8.1

(dos)

two

2.1

(doce)

twelve

2.1

(ducha)

shower

12.1

to take a shower

12.1

tooth

12.1

to brush one's teeth

12.1

(diente)

(diez)

ten

2.1

edJ.fi~yo

(edificio)

building

7.1

ekJ.phe
eks()elnte, ~
el
la
los, las
al

(equipaje)

baggage

15.1

(excelente)

excellent

4.1

(el)

the

1.1

the (f)

1.1

the (pI)

2.1

to the

1.1

lel

el
el

AI.12

(see abr)

DOCE

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/erm/
l

la

el

la
la

la

TRECE

he

4.2

she

4.2

they

4.2

(embajada)

embassy

2.1

(enfrente)

in front (across the street)

10.1

(empezar)

to begin

11.1

(empleado)

clerk

15.1

(en)

in

2.1

on

3.1

at

4.1

(l)

(JJ)ya
C])yos, (M)yas)
embahda
emfrnte
mos (see abr)
emper
empledo
en

em-brko

by boat

14.1

en-rr~al~dd

actually

8.1

en- s eg1da
enkantdo, -a
enkantdo-de-konoirla
enkantr
enkontrr
ensalda
ent6nies
entrda
ran (see sr)
res (see sr)
ermna

at once, right away

13.1

enchanted

1.1

de lighted to meet you

1.1

(encantar)

to enchant

1.1

(enc ontrar)

to find

6.1

(ensalada)

salad

6.1

(entonces)

then

3.1

(entrada)

entrance

3.1

(hermana)

sister

(encantado)

14.1

AI.13

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

lesl
(see sr)
se, -a
eskina

(ese)

that

(esquina)

corner

eskr~b1r

(escribir)

to write

8.2

eskr~t6ryo

(escritorio)

desk

5.1

eskw~la

(escuela)

school

4.1

so (n)
espaQy6l
esperr
esp6sa
est (see estr)
estdo
estdos-undos
estn (see estr)
estr
est
estn
ests
est6y
est-byn
ests-en-tu-ksa
ests (see estr)
ste, -a
sta--n6che
sto (n)
est6y (see estr)

(e'so)

that

2.1

(espaol)

(the) Spanish (language)

2.1

(esperar)

to hope, expect, wait for

8.1

(esposa)

wife

14.1

(estado)

state

4.1

(Estados Unida;)

United States

4.1

(estar)

to be

1.1

(you) are

1.1

(they) are

2.1

(you) are (fam)

4.2

(1) am

1.1

that's O.K., O.K.

1.1

make yourself at horne

9.1

this

3.1

tonight

8.1

this

2.1

~s

la
el
la
el
la
el
los

AI.14

(este)

(esto)

7.1
10.1

CATORCE

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/gas/
estudyr

(estudiar)

to study

(estupendo)

terrific

fab6r
por-fab6r
faltr
famlya

(favor)

favor

2.1

please

2.1

(faltar)

to lack

15.1

(familia)

family

5.1

f~11, ~

(fcil)

easy

6.1

f~cha

(fecha)

date

9.1

flhr
flhrse
fn
em-fn
por-f1n
f6to
fnda
fysta

(fijar)

to fix

13.1

to pay attention

13.1

end

10.1

so, then, well

10.1

at last

12.1

(foto)

picture

9.1

(funda)

the (pillow) case

11.1

(fiesta)

party

11.1

(gafas)

eye glasses

12.1

(gas)

gas

estup~ndo,

-a

9.1
13.1

/f/
el

la
la

el

la
la
la

(fin)

/9/
las
el
QUINCE

gfas
gs

7.1
AI.15

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/gor/
g6rdo, -a
gordito, -a
grnde, ~
grn

(gordo)

(grande)

12.1

a Hule fat

12.1

big, great

7.1

great, large

gr~yas

15.1

thanks

1.1

thanks a lot

1.1

{gustar}

to please

3.1

(gusto)

pleasure

1.1

rncho-gsto-(de-kono~rlo)

glad to meet you

1.1

tnto-gsto-de-kono~rlo

I'm very glad to know (meet)

you

4.1

(jamn)

ham

6.1

(Jos)

Joseph, Joe

4.1

(juntos)

together

5.1

(Juan)

John

4.1

(jueves)

Thursday

(y)

and

1.1

iba ( see ir)

lda

(idea)

idea

9.1

(gracias)

rnchas-gr~yas

el

fat

gustr
gsto

/h/
el
( )

( )
el

harn6n
hos
hntos, -as
hwn
hwbes

10.1

/1/

la
AI.16

DIECISEIS

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/l.k/

la
el
la
el

la

J.gwl, ~
l.gwl-a
l.gwlmnte
J.gwalfto, -a
ha
ho

(igual)

DIECISIETE

1.1

the same as

8.1

equally; same here

1.1

just the same

9.1

(hija)

daughter

13.1

(hijo)

son

14.1

J.mforma~y6n

(informacin)

information

3.1

J.ng ls
J.nklwfr

(ingls)

(the) English Oanguage)

2.1

(incluir)

lo include

7.1

J.nmJ.gra~y6n

(inmigracin)

immigration

ir

(ir)

to go

1.1

(it) goes

1.1

lel's go, (we) go

5.1

(they) go

8.1

(you) go (fam)

6.1

b
bmos
bn
bs
byas
b6y
iba

la

equal

irse
k6mo-le-b
1kyrda

(bquierda)

15.1

go (fam)

13.1

(1) go

12.1

(1) went, was goiDg

12.1

to leave

10.1

how are Yo8 gettillB aloug

1.1

left

2.1

AI.17

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/k/

/kab/

la
el
la
la

el
la
el
la

( )
el
la
la

AI.18

kabr
kda, ~
kha
kahro
kQ)ye
kma
kambyr
kambyrse
kambyrse-( de-rr6pa}
kmbyo
kamisa
kmpo
kant1dd
karmba
krmen
kro, -a
krro
krta
ksa
el-seQy6r-de-la-ksa
ests-en-tu-ksa
kasdo, -a
kasr
ks1

(caber)

to fit

15.1

(cada)

each

13.2

(caja)

box, cashier's desk

3.1

(cajero)

cashicr

3.1

(calle)

street

8.1

(cama)

bed

8.1

(cambiar)

to change, exchange

3.1

to change (oneseIf)

8.1

to change (clothes)

8.1

(cambio)

change, exchange

3.1

(camisa)

shirt

(campo)

fie Id, country

7.1

(cantidad)

amount, quantity

7.1

(caramba)

gosh

8.1

(Carmen)

Carmen

(caro)

expensive

(carro)

car

14.1

(carta)

Ietter

12.2

(casa)

house

8.1

10.1

13.1
8.1

the owner of the house

13.1

make yourse lf at home

9.1

(casado)

married

5.1

(casar)

to marry

5.1

(casi)

aImost

4.1
DIECIOCHO

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/kJ..n/
kat6r~e,

-9J

ke

(catorce)

fourteen

2.1

(que)

that

3.1

who

7.1

it's necessary to

3.1

y-ke
lo-ke
tenr-ke
k, -1Z5

the that, that which, what

(qu)

to have to

8.1

what

1.1

how

9.1

k-br6ma

what a fix

k~le-par~e

what do you say

6.1

k-6r a-s
k-tl

what time is it

5.1

how goes it

1.1

how

4.1

12.1

k-te-psa

what's the matter

n6-y-de-k~

don't give it a thought

1.1

why

7.1

por-k
kehr
kehrse
kerr
kyre
kyren
kyres
kyro
kn~e,

12.1

15.1

(quejarse)

to complain

(querer)

to want

1.1

(it) wants

2.1

(you) want (pI)

6.1

(you) want (fam)

6.1

(1) want

1.1

to mean

2.1

fifteen

2.1

kerr-de~r

DIECINUEVE

10.1

(quince)

AI.19

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/kla/

el
( )

klro, -a
klro
kobrr
k6che
ko16n
kombenir

clear

7.1

of course

7.1

(cobrar)

to charge

11.1

(coche)

car

15.1

(Coln)

Columbus

3.1

(convenir)

to suit

7.1

(it) suits

7.1
6.1

(claro)

komby~ne
kom~r

(comer)

to eat

komfundr
komfundrse
komo
k6mo
a-kmo-est-el-kmbyo
kmo-le-b
kmo-n
k6modo, -a
kompl~to, -a
komprr
k6n
kom-permso
konmgo
kontgo
kon-tympo

(confundir)

to confuse

13.1

to be confused

13.1

kono~r

(conocer)

enkantdo-de-konoirla
AI.20

(como)

like, as

9.1

(cmo)

how

1.1

what 's the rate of exchange

3.1

how are you getting along

1.1

certainly

1.1

(cmodo)

c omfortab le

8.1

(completo)

complete

(comprar)

to buy

9.1

(con)

with

1.1

excuse me

1.1

15.1

with me

12.2

with you (fam)

12.2

in time

11.1

to meet, get acquainted,

to know

1.1

de lighted to meet you

1.1
VEINTE

VOCARULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/kwa/

el
la
el
la

la

el

el
el
VEINTIUNO

mcho-gsto-de-konoirla
tnto-gsto-de-konoirlo
konsulr, ~
kontnto, -a
kontrryo
al-kontrryo
k6pa
koronl
ksa
kostr
kwsta
kOilna
krer
krer-ke-s!
kba-l1bre
kwl, -95
kwalkyra, ~
kwalkyr
kwndo
de-bi-en-kwndo
dsde-kwndo
kwnto, -a
kwntos, -as
kwrto
kwrto

glad to meet you

1.1

I'm very glad to know you

4.1

(consular)

consular

4.1

(contento)

satisfied, contented

(contrario)

contrary

8.1

on the c ontrary

8.1

14.1

(copa)

goblet

13.1

(coronel)

colonel

13.1

(cosa)

thing

4.1

(costar)

to cost

3.1

(it) costs

3.1

(cocina)

kitchen

8.1

(creer)

to believe

6.1

to think so

6.1

(cuba libre)

cuba libre

9.1

(cul)

which (one)

(cualquiera)

whatever

5.1

whatever

5.1

(cuando)

when

4.1

(cundo)

when

4.1

from time to time

15.1

13.1

since when (how long)

4.1

how much

2.1

how many

3.1

(cuarto)

room

3.1

(cuarto)

quarter

5.1

(cunto)

AI.21

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/kwa/
(cuatro)

four

2.1

la

kwtro, ~
kwnta
kwsta (see kostr)

(cuenta)

check, bill

6.1

el

kw~ddo

(cuidado)

care

13.1

(be) careful

13.1

ky~n

9.1

(quin)

who

la(-) (see el, 10-)

labandera
labr

(lavandera)

laundry

10.1

(lavar)

to wash

11.1

lp~

(lpiz)

pencil

2.1

le-

(le)

(to) you

1.1

(to) him

4.1

(to) her

10.1

(lechuga)

lettuce

6.1

(legumbre)

vegetable

6.1

(le jos)

far

3.1

(lengua)

language, tongue

4.1

(libro)

book

2.1

kyre (see kerr)

kyren (see kerr)
kyres (see kerr)
kyro (see kerr)

/1/

la
el

la
la
la
el
AI.22

lechga
legmbre
lhos
lngwa
libro

VEINTIDOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

Imall

la

el
la

l1mpyr
llmpyrse
l1mpyrse-los-dyntes
lsta
lsto, -a
lo (n)
lo-de
lo-ke
10-, la-

105-,la5los, las (see el)

lnes

to clean

10.1

to clean oneself

12.1

to hrush one 's teeth

12.1

(lista)

list

15.1

(listo)

ready

10.1

(lo)

the

9.1

the matter of, ah out

9.1

(limpiar)

the that, that which, what

(lo, la)

10.1

you

1.1

it

1.1

him (her)

4.1

them

10.1

(lunes)

Monday

10.1

l~

(luz)

light

7.1

lwgo
asta-1wgo

(luego)

then, later

1.1

so long

1.1

(llave)

key

7.1

(llamar)

to call

(llevar)

to take, carry

(llegar)

to arrive

12.1

(maleta)

suitcase

10.1

(maletn)

overnight case, handhag

15.1

IQ)yl
la

C)ybe
Qlyamr
C'yebr
el...yegar
'

12.1
2.1

Iml
la
el
VEINTITRES

malta
maletn

AI.23

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/mal/

la

el

mlo, -a
ml
mandr

(malo)

(mandar)

to send

man~na

(manzana)

apple

6.1

maQyna
asta-maQyna
marer
marerse
mrtes
ms
lgo-ms
me-

(maana)

tomorrow

1.1

see you tomorrow

1.1

m~dyo,

el

-a

(marear)

8.1
10.1

to get seasick

14.1

(martes)

Tuesday

10.1

(ms)

more

3.1

anything e !se

3.1

me

1.1

(to) me

2.1

myself

8.1

(me)

(medio)

half

12.1

m~nos

(menos)

less

3.1

men
mendo

(men)

menu

6.1

often

13.1

month

7.1

per month

7.1

m~s

(menudo)

(mes)

m~sa

(mesa)

tahle

2.1

mes~ro

(mesero)

waiter

6.1

met~r

(meter)

to put in

13.1

to put your fool in your mouth

13.1

metr-la-pta
AI.24

had

14.1

al-m~s

la
el

8.1

to make dizzy

a~endo

el

had

VEINTICUATRO

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/much/

el

ml, ~
mi
konmigo
mlQ)yn
mlnerl, ~
mo, -a
ml, ~
ffilrr
mismo, -a

(mi)

my

4.1

(m)

me

6.1

with me

12.2

(milln)

million

8.1

(mineral)

mineral

3.1

(mo)

mine (my)

4.1

my

4.1

to look

(mismo)

same

3.1

-self

10.1

a6ra~ismo

el

el
la
el

la

VEINTICINCO

13.1

(mirar )

right now

3.1
4.1

moblmynto
molestr
molestrse
momnto
un-momnto
monda

(movimiento)

movement, activity

(molestar)

to bother

10.1

to bother

10.1

moment

12.1

just a minute

12.1

(moneda)

con, change

3.1

m6~o

(mozo)

porter

3.1

waiter

6.1

morno, -a
muchcha
mcho, -a
mchos, -as

(momento)

13.1

(moreno)

brunette

(muchacha)

girl

9.1

(mucho)

much, a lot, lots

1.1

many

1.1

mchas-gr~yas

thanks a lot

1.1

mcho-gsto-(de-kono~rlo)

glad to meet you

1.1

AI.25

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

Imuchl
muchsl.mo, -a
mudr
mudrse
mudrse-de-ksa
my
el

(mudar)

5.1

to move

8.1

to change, to move

10.1

to move (one 's residence)

8.1

(muy)

very

1.1

(mueble)

(piece o) furniture

7.1

unfurnished

7.1

(mircoles)

Wednesday

10.1

nda
de-nda
ndye
neiesryo, -a

(nada)

nothing

1.1

you're welcome

1.1

mw~ble
sJ.n-mw~bles

el

very much

myrkoles

Inl

( )

la
el

la
la
AI.26

(nadie)

no one

10.2

(necesario)

necessary

15.1

ne~esJ.tr

(neces itar)

to need

3.1

nJ.
nQya
nJ.QYo
n6

(ni)

nar, (or)

7.1

(nia)

(small) girl

14.1

(nio)

child

14.1

(no)

no, not

(no?)

isn't it, didn't he, etc.

kmo-n
n6-y-d e-k
n6bya
n6che

1.1
11.1

certainly

1.1

don 't give it a thought

1.1

(novia)

sweetheart, fiance

9.1

(noche)

night, evening

1.1

VEINTISEIS

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/oni/

el

bwnas-n6ches
sta-n6che
n6mbre
nos-

good evening

1.1

tonight

8.1

(nombre)

name

4.1

(nos)

us

2.1

ourselves

6.1

to us

nos6tros
nos6tras
nnka
nwbe, ~
nwbo, -a
nwstro, --a

(nosotros)

we, us

15.1
4.1

we, us (f)

12.2

(nunca)

never

10.2

(nueve)

nine

2.1

(nuevo)

new

11.1

(nuestro)

our(s)

9.2

(o)

or

2.1

(ocho)

eight

2.1

Ofl~yl

(oficial)

officer

4.1

or

(or)

to listen

12.1

listen (faro)

12.1

/0/
O
6cho,
el

el

6ye
okupdo, -a
okupr
la
6mbre
6n~e,

VEINTISIETE

(ocupado)

busy

4.1

(ocupar)

to occupy

4.1

(hola)

heno, hi

1.1

(hombre)

man

9.1

(once)

eleven

2.1

AI.27

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

loral
la
la
el

6ra

(hcra)

k-6ra-s
6rden
a-sus-6rdenes
otl
6tro, -a
6tra-b
6ye (see or)

(orden)

hour

5.1

what time is it

5.1

order

14.1

at your service

14.1

(hotel)

hotel

2.1

(otro)

another

2.1

again

2.1

for

6.1

Ipl
pra

(para)

to, in order to

parer

el
la

el
la
AI.28

12.1

to seem

5.1

k-letJar~e

what do you say

6.1

letJar~e-byn

OK with you

5.1

prke
prte
pasr

k-te-p s a
pasr-adelnte
pastl
pta

(parecer)

(parque)

park

14.1

(parte)

part

5.1

(pasar)

to pass, to hand

2.1

to come by

8.1

to come in

9.1

to happen

12.1

what's the matter

12.1

to come in

9.1

(pastel)

pie

6.1

(pata)

paw

13.1

VEINTIOCHO

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

jporj
el
la

metr-la-pta
ptyo
pekQYo, -a
pna

to put your foot in yo1ll' mouth

yard, court, patio

(pequeo)

small

13.2

(pena)

s OITOW, grief

14.1

to he worthwhile

14.1

to think, plan

6.1

(1) think

6.1

(perdn)

pardon; excuse me

2.1

(permiso)

permission

1.1

excuse me

1.1

(pero)

hut

4.1

(peridico)

newspaper

7.1

(peso)

peso

3.1

(piso)

floor

3.1

(pluma)

pen

2.1

(poder)

to he able

3.1

(you) can

3.1

(1) can

6.1

(poco)

Hule

4.1

(por)

for, in exchange for

2.1

(pensar)

pynso
el
el

el
el
el
la

perd6n
permiso
kom-permso
pro
pery6dJ.ko
pso
piso
plma
podr
pw~de

pwdo
p6ko, -a
por

VEINTINUEVE

8.1

(patio)

bal~r-la-p~na

pensr

13.1

during

11.1

hy plane

14.1

por-aby6n
por-ai
por-a6ra

that way

13.1

right now

7.1

por-fab6r

please

2.1
AI.29

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/por/

el

el

la

la
el

AI.3D

por-fn
por-k
por-la-trde
p6stre
prakt1.kr
presentr
prestr

(postre)

dessert

6.1

(practicar)

to practice

4.1

(presentar)

to present

1.1

(prestar)

to lend, to provide

pr~yo

(precio)

price

8.1

prlmro, -a

(primero)

first

3.1

first

3.1

haste

12.1

to hurry oneself

12.1

(probar)

to try, to taste

6.1

(pronto)

soon

9.1

(pronunc iar)

to pronounce

4.1

(propina)

tip

4.1

(propsito)

purpose

4.1

by the way

4.1

at 1ast
why
during the afternoon

prlm~r

prlSa
drse-prisa
probr
pr6nto
pronun!jyr
propna
prop6s1to
a-prop6s1to
pwde ( see podr)
pwden (see podr)
pwdo (see podr)
pynso (see pensr)

(prisa)

12.1
7.1
11.1

15.1

TREINTA

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/san/

/r/
la

rra~6n

(razn)

tenr-rra~6n

la

el

el
la

rral, ~
"
rrelmnte

(real)

rr~alldd

(realidad)

"

en-rrealJ.dd
"
rrebJ.sr
rreglo
rrekordr
rrekwrdo
rrepetr
rrepfta
rrestorn
rrJ.gur6so, -a
rr6pa

reason

6.1

to be right

6.1

real

14.1

really

14.1

reality

8.1

actually

8.1

(revisar)

to examine, inspect

15.1

(regalo)

gift

15.1

(recordar)

to remember

8.1

(1) remember

8.1

to repeat

2.1

repeat, say i t again

2.1

(restorn)

restaurant

5.1

(riguroso)

rigorous, strict

(ropa)

clothes, clothing

(sbado)

Saturday

10.1

(sbana)

sheet

11.1

(saber)

to know

12.1

(1) know

12.1

(repetir)

15.1
8.1

/s/
el
la

sbado
sbana
sabr
s~

la
el

sla
salr
snwJ.ch

TREINTA Y UNO

(sala)

living room

(salir)

to leave, to go out

(sandwich)

sandwich

8.1
12.1
6.1

AI.31

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/se/
se(see sabr)
segda
en-segda
segro, -a
sekretrya
seky6n
semna
sentr
synta
synt
sentrse
sentr
synto
sentrlo-mcho
seQy6r
el-seQy6r-de-la-ksa
seQy6ra
seQyorita
s6r
ran
res
s
s6mos

(se)

-se lf (3rd person, sg and pI)

2.1

s~

la
la
la

el
la
la

AI.32

at once, right away

13.1

(seguro)

sure

lS.l

(secretaria)

secretary

9.1

(seccin)

section

4.1

(semana)

week

8.1

(sentar)

to seat

2.1

seat (fam)

9.1

seat

2.1

to sit down

2.1

to regret, to feel

1.1

(1) feel

1.1

to be very sorry

1.1

sir, mister

1.1

(sentir)

(seor)

the owner o the house

13.1

(seora)

madam, Mrs.

1.1

(seorita)

miSS

1.1

(ser)

to be

2.1

(they) were

13.1

(you) are (fam)

S.2

(it) is

2.1

(we) are

S.2

TREINTA Y DOS

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

/sub/

la

la

la
el
el

la

s6n
s6y
dbe(n)-sr
sys, ~
Sl.
s
krer-ke-s
,..
siQ)ya
sn
sl.n-mwbles
sl.rbynta
s6bre
s6bre-t6do
s6da
sof
sof-kma
5610
soltro, -a
s6mos (see sr)
s6n ( see sr)
s6pa
s6y ( see sr)
s, ~

(they) are

4.1

(1) am

5.1

must be, probably is (are)

8.1

(se is)

six

2.1

(si)

if

6.1

(s)

yes

2.1

to think so

6.1

(silla)

chair

2.1

(sin)

without

7.1

unfurnished

7.1

(sirvienta)

maid

H.l

(sobre)

above

14.1

above aH, especially

14.1

(soda)

soda

9.1

(sof)

sofa

8.1

(sof cama)

sofa-bed

8.1

(slo)

only

7.1

(soltero)

unmarried (bache la..}

5.1

(sopa)

soup

6.1

(su)

your (sg and pI)

5.1

his, their

subir
TREINTA Y TRES

(subir)

to go up

11.2
2.1

AI.33

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY
/SU~/

SiYo, -a
syo, -a

dirty

(suyo)

your(s) (sg and pI)

5.1

his, the ir(s )

9.2

your (sg and pI)

5.1

s, ~

la

11.1

(sucio)

his, their

11.2

(suegra)

mother-in-law

14.1

(siempre)

always

4.1

(siete)

seven

2.1

~enl~ro

(cenicero)

ashtray

2.1

intro
ierbia

(centro)

center (o town), downtown

2.1

(cerveza)

beer

6.1

~rdo

(cerdo)

pork, pig

6.1

i rka

(cerca)

near

3.1

near to

3.1

(cinco)

five

2.1

(ciento)

hundred

7.1

hundreds

7.1

swgra
sympre
synta ( see sentr)
synte (see sentr)
synto ( see sentr)
syte, ~
/~/

el
el
la
el

~rka-de

~fnko, ~
~ynto,

~yntos,

AI.34

-as

TREINTA Y CUATRO

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

Itenl

/tl
el

la

tksl.
tl, ~
k-tl
tambyn
tnto, -a
tnto-gsto-de-konoirlo
trde
trde
bwnas-trdes
por-la-trde
te

tenr
tnga
tngo
tyne
tynes
ak1-tyne
tenr-mbre
tenr-i<e
ten r-la-bond d-de
TREINTA Y CINCO

(taxi)

taxi

3.1

(tal)

such

1.1

how goes it

1.1

how

4.1

(tambin)

also, too

5.1

(tanto)

so much

4.1

I'm very glad to know (meet) you

4.1
10.1

(tarde)

late

(tarde)

afternoon

1.1

good afternoon

1.1

during the afternoon

(te)

(tener)

11.1

you, (to) you (fam)

6.1

to you

9.1

yourself

9.1

to have

2.1

have

15.1

(1) have

2.1

(you) have

2.1

(you) have (fam)

6.1

here you are

3.1

here is (are)

7.1

to be hungry

5.1

to have to

8.1

to be so kind as to, please

15.1

AI.35

SPOKEN SPANISH

VOCABULARY

/ten/
to be right

6.1

you (fam)

8.1

with you

12.2

(tintorera)

cleaner's shop

10.1

(todava)

yet, still

9.1

(todo)

aH

9.1

tenr-rra~6n

la

el

tnga (see tenr)

t~ngo (see tenr)
t
kont1go
tlntorera
todaba
t6do, -a
s6bre-t6do
tomr
tomte
trabahr
tradu~1r

(ti)

AI.36

tr~~e, ~

14.1
3.1

(tomate)

tomato

6.1

(trabajar)

to work

4.1

(traducir)

to translate

2.1

translate

2.1

to bring

6.1

bring

6.1

(traer)

trgo
trhe
trank1lo, -a
tratr
tratrse-de
tryga (see trar)
trs, ~

above aH. especialIy

to take

tryga
el
el

10.1

(tomar)

trad~ka

trar

every

(trago)

swallow, drink

10.1

(traje)

suit

10.1

(tranquilo)

quiet

13.1

(tratar)

to treat

6.1

to address as

6.1

(tres)

three

2.1

(trece)

thirteen

2.1

TREINTA Y SEIS

VOCABULARY

SPOKEN SPANISH

jyoj

el

tu, ~
t
tyo, -a
tu, ~
tympo
kon--tympo
tyne (see ten~r)
tynes (see ten~r)

(tu)

your (fam)

9.1

(t)

you (fam)

4.2

(tuyo)

your(s) (fam)

9.1

your (fam)

9.1

time

11.1

in time

11.1

(unido)

united

4.1

(unir)

to unite

4.1

(uno)

one

2.1

a, an

2.3

a, an

2.1

sorne, a few

3.1

(usted)

you

1.1

(whiskey)

whiskey

9.1

(ya)

already

S.l

(tiempo)

/u/
undo, -a
unr
no, -a
un
nos, -as
ustd

/w/
el

wskJ.

jyj
y

yo
TREINTA Y SIETE

(yo)

yet

14.1

now

lS.l

4.2
AI.37

SPOKEN SPANISH

AI.2

INDEX

Index

3.21.1
10.21.3

ADJECTIVES

Agreement of adjeetives

3.21.1B
8.24
12.24

Possessives
full forms
shortened forros

9.21.2
13.21.3
11.21.1

ARTICLES (see adjeetive)

CASE (see pronoun)

Gender forms of adjectives

3.21.1
10.21.3

CLAUSES (see relat<rs)

CLITICS (see pronouns)

Number

4.21.1

Position

9.24
11.21.1B

Artieles, definite
/el, la/

with titles
in ohligatory contractions

3.21.1
4.10(4)
4.21.1
6.21.2B
6.24
8.21.2

COMMAND FORMS (see verh forros)

CONSONANTS (see pronunciation)
CONTRACTIONS, ohligatory (see adjeetivesdefinite artieles)
DEFINITE ARTICLES (see adjeetives)
DEMONSTRATIVES (see adjectives)
DIRECT CLITICS (see pronouns)
EXTRAPOLATION

2.31.11(1)

FAMILIAR (see verhs, pronouns)

Artieles, indefinite
/un, na/

Demonstratives
/sto, so/
/ste, se, akl/
/akl(l)yo/

UNO

3.21.1
4.21.1
6.21.2B
7.21.2B
2.31.1
7.21.2
7.21.2B

FEMININE GENDER (see nouns, adjeetives,

pronouns)
FORMAL (see verhs, pronouns)
GENDEJR (see nouns, adjeetives, pronouns)
HORTATORY (see verh construetions)
INDEFINITE ARTICLES (see adjeetives)

Al.39

SPOKEN SPANISH

INDEX

INDIRECT CLITICS (see pronouns)

Number

4.21.1

INFINITIVES (see verb forms)

In phrases with personal lal

10.21.L\

INTONATION (see pronunciation)

In possessive constructions

13.21.2

IRREGULAR (see verb forms)

JUNCTURE

2.29
10.21.2B
12.21.4B

NUMBER (see adjectives, nouns,

pronouns, verbs)
OBJECTS (see clitic pronouns, phrase
relator pronouns)

LATERAL (see pronunciation)

PALATALS (see pronunciation)

MASCULINE GENDER (see nouns,

adjectives, pronouns)

PARTICLE

NASALS (see pronunciation)

P AST I (see verb forms)

NEGATIVE (see particles)

PAST 11 (see verb forms)

NEUTER GENDER (see adjectivesdemonstratives, possessives)

NOMINALIZATION

PERFECT (see verb constructions)

7.21.2B
10.21.3B
12.21.2B
12.21.3B

Nominalized possessive constructions 13.21.3

PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE (see verb

e onstruction)
PERSON (see pronouns, verbs)
PERSONAL lal (see relators)
PHRASES (see also relators)
Components of phrases

NOUNS

11.21.2
13.24

3.21.1
4.21.1

Agreement of adjectives with nouns

3.21.1B
8.24

Gender class of nouns

3.21.1

12.21.3

Possessive construction
with Idel

13.21.2

Redundant construction

10.21.1A

PITCH (see pronunciation)

AI.40

CUARENTA

SPOKEN

SPANISH

INDEX

PLURAL NUMBER (see nouns, pronouDS,

adjeetives, verhs)

Clities, reflexive

2.10(2)
10.21.2B
12.10(1)
15.21.1B

Ohjeets of phrase relators

12.21.2
13.21.2B
12.21.3B

POSITION (see adjeetives)

POSSESSIVES (see adjeetives, phrases)
PREPOSITIONS (see relat<rs)
PRESENT (see verh forms)
PROGRESSIVE (see verh eonstructioos)

PRONUNCIATION

PRONOUNS

4.21.2B

Person

4.21.2B

Person, familiar - formal

6.1.0(3)

Gender

10.21.2
12.21.1

Numher

4.21.2B

Case

4.21.2B
12.21.2B
Suhjeet pronouns

4.21.2B
12.21.1

Clitie pronouns

10.21.2B

Clities, direet

10.21.2

Aspiration

2.26

Consonants -voieed stops

2.22

Ibl
Idl
Ig/

2.22.2
2.22.1
2.22.3

Consonants -voieeless stops

Ipl
Itl
1k.1

2.26
2.26.1
2.26.2
2.26.3

Consonants - voieeless spirants

Isl
/hl

2.27
2.27.1
2.27.2

Intonation

1.23
12.21.4B

Clities, indireet
Intonation patterns

CUARENTA Y UNO

s ingle objeet

15.21.1

two objeets

15.21.2

Information questions
Normal and eontrastive
statements
Yes-no questions

13.21.4
12.21.4
14.21.3

AI.41

SPOKEN SPANISH

INDEX

Yes questions
Lateral

11/

Nasals

Inl
Iqy/
Palatals
I(l)yI

Iyl
Pitch
Rhythm
Stress s ystem
Leve ls of stress
Strong stress

15.21.3
2.25
2.28
2.28.1
2.28.2
2.28
2.28.3
2.28.4
1.23
12.21.4B

2.21

Weak stressed

1.21

REDUNDANT CONSTRUCTIONS (see phrases)

REFLEXIVE CLITICS (see pronouns)
REGULAR (see verb forms)
RELATORS
Clause relators

12.21.3B .

Phrase relators

12.21.3
13.21.2
10.10(5)

1.22.4
12.21.4B
1.22
1.21.2
1.21.2
6.21.1B
7.21.1B
11.21.1B

Compound phrase relators

12.21.3B

Objects of phrase relators

12.21.3
14.21.2

P ers onal / al

10.21.1

RHYTHM (see pronunciation)

Weak stress

1.21.2

SINGULAR NUMBER (see nouns, pronouns,

adje ctives, verbs)

Weak stressed vowels

1.21

STRESS (see pronunciation)

1.22

TENSE FORMS (see verb forms)

SyIlables

THEME VOWEL (see verbs)

Tempo unit (see Pronunciation rhythm)

AI.42

Pronunciation errors from English

influence

4.21.2B

VERBS

Vibrants Ir I and Irr I

2.23

Vowels

2.24

Ending
Number

6.21.1B
4.21.2

CUARENTA Y DOS

SPOKEN SPANISH

INDEX

Person
familiar'" formal

4.21.28
4.21.28

Tense

6.21.18

Theme vowel

6.21.1B

theme cIass
Stem

/sr/ vs /estr/

10.21.3B

Nonconjugated
/-ndo/ forms
functioning as
modifiers

8.21.1B
14.24
/-do/

6.21.1B

VERB FORMS

6.21.2B

Command forms

4.10(7)
10.21.2B

Future tense forms

Past 1 tense forms
Past II tense forms

14.21.'2B
4.10(1,6)
13.10(2)

Present tense forms

/-r/
/-r/

/-r/
Conjugated - irregular

6.21.1
7.21.1
8.21.1

nominalized after relators

/ estr/ vs /&y /

/r/
/sr/
CUARENTA Y TRES

12.21.3B

VERB CONSTRUCTIONS
Absolute

10.21.3B

Hortatory

14.21.2B

Periphrastic futlD'e

14.21.2

Present perfect

9.21.1
12.10(5)

Present progressive

13.21.1
11.21.2A
12.21.3B
13.21.1B
5.21.1B

VERB MODIFIERS

6.21.1B

9.21.1
14.21.1
14.21.1
4.21.2
13.21.1
6.21.2
14.21.1
5.21.1

10.21.3

6.21.1B
14.21.2

Present tense forms

/abr/
/br/
/dr/
/estr/

9.21.1

13.21.1
10.21.3B

forms

Infinitives

Conjugated - regular

5.21.1B
7.24

VOICED - VOJCELESS CONSONANTS

(see pronur.ciation)
VOWELS

(.~ ee

pronunc iation)

WEAK STRESSED VOWELS (see pronunc iation)

AI.43
Il' U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFlCE: 1961 0- 596435